Home

"user manual"

image

Contents

1. Press the S key 0004 INS lt S GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 191 9 Block Move BMOVE BMOVI and BMOVW Functions 38 and 43 The constant block move function BMOVI or BMOVW is a conditionally executed function which fills seven consecutive words with a block of seven constants The BMOVE function has two forms BMOVI Function 38 and BMOVW Function 43 The two functions differ only in the default display format applied to their parameters signed integer for BMOVI and hexadecimal for BMOVW The group of constants are copied to locations in memory that are specified by parameter P8 Q which is the memory address location for the first word of the seven consecutive memory locations that the constants are being copied into Each of these memory locations is 16 bits long Parameters P1 through P7 are constants representing a 16 bit word If a discrete memory type is used for parameter P8 the beginning address must be on an 8 point boundary To prevent multiple moves from taking place it is advisable to have the power flow to the enable input be controlled by a contact of a one shot element OUT or OUT Power flow through this function occurs only when the functions enable input is receiving power flow Logic for controlling power flow enable Ia ok constant I P1 P8 First word of memory location constants are copied into constant L P2 constant L P3 c
2. 000005 Figure 5 1 Series 90 30 Model 311 or Model 313 Programmable Logic Controller Figure 5 2 Series 90 30 Model 331 Model 340 Model 341 or Model 351 Programmable Logic Controller 0 0 0 6 nee Figure 5 3 Series 90 20 Programmable Logic Controller 6 cece eee Figure 9 1 Standard ISA PID Algorithm PIDISA 0 0 0 0 cece eee Figure 9 2 Independent Term Algorithm PIDIND 606 c cece cece eee GFK 0402G Table of Contents Contents EEEN 1 8 xiii Contents Table 1 1 Register References nises errotara td esha ee an ee ba eRE AE Ole ES AE RE Ree A kE 1 3 Table 1 2 Discret References e renr eini ienien sed ebro Gea ah ekpa a e God anh beaa ea e stereos woke 1 4 Table 1 3 Range and Size of User References for the Series 90 30 PLC Models11 3137 331 340 B40PUS giana tae cues ie heen nye Wee ee UX Santee 1 5 Table 1 4 Range and Size of User References for the Series 90 30 PLC Moder 39 LEPU cnc sss he pai BETERE ue Sukie EE E E EE EE R Oe 1 6 Table 1 5 Range and Size of User References for the Series 90 20 PLC 000000 1 6 Table 1 6 Range and Size of User References for the Series 90 Micro PLC 00 1 7 Table 2 1 Edit and Display Control Keys 0 0 0 0 06k ene rene 2 4 Table 2 2 Ladder Logic Keys ccc eee ee ee ee ek eed bee ees 2 5 Table 2 3 Numeric Keys errioa tan no a hao th 8 eas Mi Ae ea SE iat alee eh ea ale 2 6 Table 2
3. Ba AQ Press the y key 0006 INS lt S 9 154 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Bit Rotate Right ROR Function 33 GFK 0402G The bit rotate right function ROR is a conditionally executed function which rotates all bits in a word array right a given number of bit positions LSB When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable EN input the function is executed by the CPU During the execution all of the bits in a word or a group of consecutive 16 bit words connected together to form a continuous string of bits are shifted right a specified number of memory bit locations The bits which are shifted out of the right end lowest bit location of the group of bits are shifted into the vacant locations at the left end highest bit location of the group of bits The location of the word or group of words is specified by parameter P1 which is the memory address location for the first word of the group of consecutive words containing the group of bits to be rotated The number of 16 bit words in the consecutive group of words forming the continuous string of bits is specified by parameter P3 LEN The limits of LEN depend on the memory type being used and the starting address of the first word of the group of words containing the bits to be shifted and the starting address of the final
4. leeke a43081 F O PWR CPU GE Fanuc ox A12345678 A12345678 Arzaase7a _ A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 p A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 SERIES90 30 RuN B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 O BAT STANDARD POWERSUPPLY PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER INPUT 2 100 240 VAC 50 60 HZ 90VA 125VD6 50W 24 VDC OUTPUT 0 8A MAX i beie lt mm44 gt 0 The Model 351 CPU faceplate is different than the CPU faceplates shown in the above illustrations See GFK 0356 the Series 90 30 Programmable Controller Installation Manual for more information Figure 5 2 Series 90 30 Model 331 Model 340 Model 341 or Model 351 Programmable Logic Controller 5 2 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable ControllersUser s Manual February1996 GFK 0402G The Series 90 20 PLC hardware configuration consists of an I O and Power Supply Base Module baseplate and a plug on CPU module The baseplate contains the discrete input and output circuits the power supply and terminal strips for user field wiring I O consists of a fixed configuration of 16 inputs and 12
5. 0 0000 c cece ee 9 115 x Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Contents Section 4 Bit Operation Functions 00 cece e eee wees 9 121 Bitwise and AND Function 23 2 0 eee eee ee ene 9 122 Bitwise or OR Function 25 1 0 2 eee ee eee ene 9 126 Bitwise Exclusive or XOR Function 27 1 2 00 eee eee eee 9 130 Bitwise NOT NOT Function 29 1 0 0 0 eee eee ee ene 9 134 Bit Shift Left SHL Function 30 0 6 cece eee eee eee 9 137 Bit Shift Right SHR Function 31 0 9 143 Bit Rotate Left ROL Function 32 0 ce eee eee ene 9 149 Bit Rotate Right ROR Function 33 0 0 000 c eee eee 9 155 Bit Set BITSET Function 22 0 0 cece erreen rere 9 161 Bit Clear BITCLR Function 24 1 0 0 0 s rerio iee denan cee EN 9 165 Bit Test BITTST Function 26 2 cece ccc eens 9 169 Bit Position BITPOS Function 28 0 0 eee eee ee eee 9 172 Masked Compare Word MSKCMPW Function 143 Masked Compare Dword MSKCMPD Function 144 9 176 Section 5 Data Move Functions 0 cece eee eens 9 183 Multiple Word Move MOVEN MOVIN and MOVWN Functions I7 aNd A2 ver osu ea ea e We slet E wack HOS Ved A ENEA 9 184 Move Bits MOVBN Function 40 2 ee eee eee eee 9 188 Block Move BMOVE BMOVI and BMOVW Functions 38 and 43 9 192 Block Clear BLKCL Fu
6. KeySequence Anormally open contact acts as Operation a relay that passes power flow if the associated reference is ON 1 Anormally closed contact acts as arelay that passes power flow if the associated reference is OFF 0 Set a marker at a point within an incomplete rung Af ter a subsequent OUT BLK instruction is executed addi tional logic will begin at the marked position Add a normally open contact in series with the previous con tact Add anormallyclosed contact in series with the pre viouscontact AND together the current logic block with the last block saved using the LD BLK func tion Add a normally open contact OR contact continue in parallel with the previous parallelsequence contact OR Normallyclosed Add a normally closed contact NOT contact continue in parallel with the previous parallelsequence contact OR BLK OR two blocks of OR together the current logic parallellogic block with the last block saved using the LD BLK function GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 3 9 Table 9 1 Statement List Language Basic Elements Continued Graphic OUT OUTM OUT NOT OUTM NOT SET SETM RST RSTM RM Description Retentive coil with normally open con tacts Non retentivecoil with normally closedcontacts Retentive coil with normallyclosed contacts Non retentiv
7. 0002 MOVAW lt S JL ICL Press the ay key 0003 INS lt S Press the key sequence 0003 INS lt s our Ba 1 OUT Q1_ OUTM AQ Press the A key 0004 INS lt S 9 302 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Chapter Error Messages 10 This chapter does not apply to the CPU 351 This chapter summarizes the non system error messages and or displays which may occur during the operation of the Hand Held Programmer Non system errors are those errors that the system detects in user provided data They may be caused by an illegal sequence of otherwise valid individual instructions Typical examples of these errors include JUMP MCR or CEND nesting errors The use of more then 256 total JUMP and MCR functions The placement of an ENDSW function within a JUMP or MCR range Incorrect instruction sequences The dual use of Q or M references This prompts a warning only Corrupted memory unknown instructions These errors are scanned for when the program check function is initiated This function is automatically performed whenever the operating state of the PLC is changed from stopped to running To manually check a logic program for non system errors enter the following key sequence in the order shown a When initiated the program check function always begins at the start
8. February 1996 GFK 0402G The following two screens will only be seen if the Series 90 Micro PLC model is a DC IN DC OUT unit Screens 16 31 46 61 PWM Output This option can only be enabled if the CTRx option and the PULSE OUTx option for the same channel are disabled RO 04 HSC lt S PWMOUTX DISABLE These screens select pulse width modulation PWM as the counter output Screens 17 32 47 Pulse Output This option can only be enabled if the CTRx option and the PWM OUTx option for the same channel are disabled RO 04 HSC lt S PLSOUTx DISABLE These screens select a pulse signal as the counter output Note The PULSE OUT option will only be available on counter channels 1 3 GFK 0402G Chapter 4 Series 90 Micro PLC Configuration 4 19 Type B Counter Specific Screens The following screens are specific to B1 3 A4 counters and are displayed when B1 3 A4 is selected as the counter type in Screen 1 In this type of configuration counter 1 is the A Quad B and counter 4 is the A type counter Screens 3 18 Counter Enable RO 04 HSC lt S CTRx DISABLE This series of two screens enables or disables a specified counter This means that each counter enabled will use certain portions of PLC reference memory and PLC input and output resources Only one set of the two screens is shown here All of the other counters are configured in the same manner except that the counter number is different Note t
9. Initial display RO 02 EMPTY lt S Q132 I _ Press the key sequence RO 02 QI Q132 I _ You can now enter the desired reference address Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February1996 GFK 0402G Section 2 Intelligent I O Modules Two additional screen formats may be encountered when attempting to configure an intelligent I O module Table 5 4 Configuration of an Intelligent I O Module Installed aes Pi unused Module Type or Message unused kan Parameter Label amp Parameter Value Table 5 5 Configuration of an Intelligent I O Module Not Installed ae unused Boardid Moduleid unused ce X E E _ _ _EE eS Parameter Label The parameter label field contains a module supplied text string used as a prompt to the user for a particular parameter Parameter Value The parameter value field contains a value input by the user The display format may be binary signed decimal or hexadecimal Each parameter value has an acceptable range If an illegal value is entered which does not fit in this range the configuration request will be refused and a DATERR message will be displayed The configuration of an intelligent I O module requires that the module be currently plugged into the backplane of the PLC Reading a Configuration Intelligent I O modules are capable of providing the PLC with a configuration file which describes the parameters
10. Theactual number of physical discrete inputs and outputs depends on the baseplate and modules installed Unused references can be used as internal references in your program For reference table viewing only can not be referenced in a user logic program GFK 0402G Chapter 1 Introduction to the Hand Held Programmer 1 5 1 6 Table 1 4 Range and Size of User References for the Series 90 30 PLC Model 351 CPU Reference Type Userprogram memory Discreteinputs Discreteoutputs Discreteglobals Internal coils Temporary coils System status references System registerreferences Analoginputs Analogoutputs System registers Y Model 351 CPU Reference Range Notapplicable 10001 12048 Q0001 Q2048 G0001 G1280 MO001 M4096 T0001 T0256 S0001 S0032 SA001 SA032 SB001 SB032 SCO001 SC032 RO001 R9999 AI001 AI2048 AQ001 AQ0512 SRO01 SRO16 40K words 2048 bits 2048 bits 1280bits 4096 bits 256 bits 32bits 32bits 32bits 32bits 9999 words 2048 words 512 words 16words For reference table viewing only can not be referenced in a user logic program Table 1 5 Range and Size of User References for the Series 90 20 PLC Discreteinputs Discreteoutputs Discreteglobals Analogoutputs System registers Reference Type Reference Range Userprogram logic Discrete inputs internal Discrete outputs internal with LED indicators Dis
11. 0004 INS 0004 INS GFK 0402G Press the key 0005 INS lt S Press the key sequence Bie Press the ay key 0005 SHL lt S POI _ Press the key sequence 0005 INS lt S FUNC 30 SHL unc 0005 SHL lt S Press the key 0005 SHL lt S P02 Press the key sequence 0005 SHL lt S P02 1_ Press the key 0005 SHL lt S P03 Press the key sequence 0005 SHL lt S P03 2_ GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 141 Press the key 0005 SHL lt S P0O4 _ Press the key sequence A Press the key 0005 SHL lt S f P04 R10_ Press the key sequence 0006 INS lt S o a il OUT Q 1 OUTM AQ i Press the EYT key 9 142 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Bit Shift Right SHR Function 31 The bit shift right function SHR is a conditionally executed function which shifts all bits in a word array right a given number of bit positions When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable EN input the function is executed by the CPU During the execution of a shift right function all of the bits in a word or a group of consecutive 16 bit words connected together to form a continuous string of bits are shifted to the right a specified number of memory bit locations
12. 16 channel current input 16 channel voltage input 8 channelvoltage current input current voltageinput outputcombo Appendix A glossary of terms A 1 B special contact references B 1 C list of functions C 1 D function parameters D 1 Arithmetic Functions addition func 60 description of division func 66 double precision addition func 61 double precision division func 67 double ba modulo division func 69 double precision multiplication func 65 9 72 cs i subtraction func 63 9 67 modulo division func 68 9 82 multiplication func 64 square root double precision integer func 71 8 871 square root integer func 70 9 87 subtraction func 62 9 67 Array move functions 9 290 Automatic I O configuration 5 7 B Basicinstructions and reference types A 11 1 Baud rate parameter Index Bit clear BITCLR function 24 9 165 Bit Operation Functions bit clear BITCLR func 24 9 165 bit position BITPOS func 28 9 172 bit rotate left ROL func 32 bit rotate right ROR func 33 bit set BITSET func 22 bit shift left SHL func 30 9 137 bit shift right SHR func 31 9 143 bit test BITTST func 26 9 169 bitwise AND func 23 bitwise exclusive or XOR func 27 bitwise NOT func 29 Nee bitwise OR eerie ae description of 9 121 Bit position BITPOS function 28 Bit rotate left ROL function 32 Bit rotate right ROR funct
13. 37 P01 P02 PO3 10001 Q0001 Q0001 MOVIN ROOO 2 RO030 Q0001 9 185 9 186 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes Initial display Press the key sequence F NOT o Press the key Press the key sequence wa ary ft ye OUT OUTM AZ Ba 1 AQ Press the T key Press the key sequence B Q a Ls Press the S key Press the key sequence AL FUNC HHP Display 0001 INS lt S 0001 INS lt S LD NOT I 1_ 0002 INS lt S 0004 INS lt S 0004 INS lt S FUNC 37_ MOVIN Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Press the ai key 0004 MOVIN lt S POI _ Press the key sequence 0004 MOVIN lt S POLIR 1_ Press the ai key 0004 MOVIN lt S P02_ Press the key sequence 0004 MOVIN lt S P02 R 2_ Press the S key 0004 MOVIN lt S P03_ Press the key sequence 0004 MOVIN lt S a 3 o P03 R 30_ ENT T 0005 INS lt S Press the key sequence i Press the ENTI key 0006 INS lt S J ey GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 187 tg AQ OUT OUTM 9 Move Bits MOVBN Function 40 The Move Bits function
14. February 1996 GFK 0402G Bay AQ Greater Than Comparison GT Function 57 Double Precision Greater Than Comparison DPGT Function 77 GFK 0402G Two greater than test functions are available The greater than test GT is a conditionally executed function which tests for one signed word value greater than another The double precision greater than test DPGT is a conditionally executed function which tests for one signed double word value greater than another When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable input the function is executed by the CPU and a new signed comparison for GT or double precision signed comparison for DPGT will take place During the execution of a greater than comparison the signed value in P1 input 1 is compared to see if it is greater than the signed value in P2 input 2 The GT and DPGT functions operate on INT signed integer and DINT double precision signed integer data respectively The INT GT function is Function 57 and the DINT GT function is Function 77 GT Function Description The two values specified by parameters P1 and P2 must be the same data type 16 bit two s complement signed integers and must be within the range 32768 to 32767 This function will pass power flow when there is power flow to the enable input and the value sp
15. In this example when input 10001 is closed passes power flow to the enable input the function is executed Bit memory is used for the SR and DS inputs M0011 to MO0017 of the array M0009 to M0024 is read and then written to the destination Q0026 to Q0032 of the array Q0022 to Q0037 Ladder Diagram Representation Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 FUNC 103 MOVABI P01 MO0009 P02 3 PO3 5 P04 7 P05 16 P06 Q0022 0003 OUT Q0001 9 292 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G After pressing the INS Key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display Initial display 0001 INS lt S Press the key sequence 0001 INS lt S Bae Al gt LD I1 0002 INS lt S Press the S key Press the key sequence 0002 INS lt S j 0 FUNC 130_MOVABI 1 Func 0002 MOVABI lt S Press the key PO1 J Z Press the key sequence 7 0002 MOVABI lt S 0002 MOVABI lt S Press the y key P02 GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 293 0002 MOVABI lt S Press the 3 key P02 3 Press the J key le s MOVABI lt S 0002 MOVABI lt S Press the key P03 5 0002 MOVABI lt S Press the key P04 J 0002 MOVABI lt S Press the key P04 vi Press the key ude oe MO
16. MUL Function Description The three values specified by parameters P1 P2 and P3 must be the same data type 16 bit two s complement signed integers and must be within the range 32768 to 32767 If the signed multiplication results in overflow a value outside of the range 32768 to 32767 the results of the multiplication will be set to the largest possible value 32768 or 32767 The sign is set to show the direction of the overflow This function will pass power flow when there is power flow to the enable input and the results of the multiplication are within the range 32768 to 32767 no overflow If discrete memory types are used for parameters P1 P2 and P3 the beginning address must be on a byte boundary DPMUL Function Description The three values specified by parameters P1 P2 and P3 must be the same data type 32 bit two s complement signed integers and must be with in the range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 When using the Hand Held Programmer to program a constant into parameters P1 or P2 the constant must be in the range of a single precision number 32768 to 32767 The memory locations for P1 P2 and P3 are each 32 Bits long The storage area for each Register Al and AQ is 16 Bits long therefore two consecutive registers AI words or AQ words must be used for each double precision signed number which is to be stored The address of the lower of the two registers AI words or AQ words is used as the
17. OUT R0002 80 Pi P2 10001 MO0001 MO0001 BCD R0001 R0002 Q0001 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display Initial display 0001 INS lt S Press the key sequence Ay Al i Press the key 0002 INS lt S 0001 INS o Press the key sequence OUT Cy SHED Press the key 0003 INS lt S Press the key sequence Press the T key 0004 INS lt S GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 227 Press the key sequence Le Le Press the ay key 0004 BCD lt S POI _ Press the key sequence 0004 INS lt S FUNC 80_ BCD FUNC 0004 BCD lt S Press the ai key 0004 BCD lt S P02 0004 BCD lt S P02 R 2_ Press the A key 0005 INS lt S Press the key sequence Press the S key 0006 INS lt S Press the key sequence a BQ AQ OUT OUTM 9 228 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 BCD to Integer Conversion INT Function 81 The BCD to integer conversion function INT is a conditionally executed function which converts a 4 digit BCD value to an integer value This function is typ
18. Press the key sequence JEJ Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language FUNC HHP Display 0001 INS lt S 0001 INS 0004 INS lt S 0004 INS lt S FUNC 69_ DPMOD 9 85 9 86 Press the ai key Press the key sequence LL JL Press the key Press the key sequence 2 IES ENT Press the 9g key Press the key sequence JL SL Press the ay key Press the key sequence OUT BQ OUTM AQ Press the T key BE 0004 DPMOD lt S P0O1 _ 0004 DPMOD lt S PO1 R 199_ 0004 DPMOD lt S P02_ 0004 DPMOD lt S P02 R 201 0004 DPMOD lt S P03_ 0004 DPMOD lt S P03 R 203_ 0005 INS lt S 0006 INS lt S Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Square Root INT SQRT Function 70 Square Root DINT DPSQRT Function 71 The Square Root SQRT function is a conditionally executed function which is used to find the square root of an integer value When the function receives power flow to the enable input the value of output Q P2 is set to the integer portion of the square root of the input IN P1 value whose square root is to be calculated The output Q must be the same data type as IN The IN parameter must be a co
19. Statement List Representation 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 LD OUT LD FUNC OUT 32 P1 P2 P4 10001 M0001 M0001 ROL R0030 0002 0003 R0002 Q0001 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes Initial display Press the key sequence o A Al j Press the A key Press the key sequence OUT OUTM Ja u T Press the key Press the key sequence o Ez HHP Display 0001 INS lt S Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G Press the key Press the key sequence LJL Press the ay key FUNC Press the key sequence Beis Press the key Press the key sequence Press the key Press the key sequence Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 0004 INS 0004 INS lt S lt S FUNC 32_ ROL 0004 INS PO1l _ 0005 INS P01 R 30_ 0004 ROL P02 0005 ROL P02 2_ 0004 ROL P03 0004 ROL P03 3 lt S lt S lt S lt S lt S lt S 9 153 Press the key 0004 ROL lt S P0O4 _ Press the key sequence 0005 ROL lt S l P0O4 R2 Press the key 0005 INS lt S Press the key sequence 0005 OUT OUTM INS lt S a OUT Q 1
20. The memory locations for P1 and P2 are each 32 Bits long The storage area for each Register AI and AQ is 16 Bits long therefore two consecutive registers AI words or AQ words must be used for each double precision signed number which is to be stored The address of the lower of the two registers AI words or AQ words is used as the reference to store and retrieve the double precision number The Hand Held Programmer can only display a maximum of 16 bits one Register AI or AQ word at a time therefore a double precision number outside of the range 32768 to 32767 cannot be programmed into the CPU or monitored using the Hand Held Programmer The hexadecimal or binary number for each register AI or AQ word can be programmed in or monitored provided that they are placed together outside of the CPU to form the 32 Bit double precision signed number This function will pass power flow when there is power flow to the enable input and the value specified by parameter P1 is equal to the value specified by parameter P2 GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 91 1 Input 1 P2 Input 2 Logic for controlling enable power flow DINT Value to be compared P1 I1 Q Power flow output to a coil or another function if Pl P2 Other value to be compared P2 12 Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus T
21. a 0004 INS lt S FUNC Press the S key 0004 DPMUL lt S PO1 _ 5 FUNC 65_ DPMUL GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 75 Press the key sequence 0004 DPMUL lt S R i o a P01 R 199_ Press the ay key 0004 DPMUL lt S PO2_ Press the key sequence 0004 DPMUL lt S a olf o i P02 R 201_ Press the A key 0004 DPMUL lt S P03_ Press the key sequence 0004 DPMUL lt S 7 DE 3 P03 R 203_ Press the A key 0005 INS lt S Press the key sequence 1 Press the S key 0006 INS lt S Bo AQ OUT OUTM Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Division DIV Function 66 Double Precision Division DPDIV Function 67 Two division functions are available The signed division function DIV is a conditionally executed function which divides one signed word value by another and gives only the quotient as the result The double precision signed division function DPDIV is a conditionally executed function which divides one signed double word value by another and gives only the quotient as a result When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable input the function is e
22. ez Search for Instruction OUT with Reference Q1 Press the SRCH key 0003 SRCH lt S Press the key sequence 0003 SRCH lt S OUT Q1i_ Bags AQ OUT OUTM 6 14 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G Press the key Search for Instruction Parameter 10 0004 SRCH lt S Press the SRCH key Press the key sequence 0004 SRCH lt S 10_ Press the key 0003 TMR lt S P1 10 Search for Instruction Step 99 Searching for a step that is beyond the end of the program Press the SRCH key 0003 SRCH lt S Press the key sequence 0003 SRCH lt S GGG g Pieserthe oe 0005 lt S lt END OF PROGRAM gt Note that in the above sequence the pressing of the SRCH key is optional You could have entered only the key sequence 9 9 ENT and achieved the same result Also when searching for a timer the TMR key toggles between TMR and ONDTR Chapter 6 Program Edit 6 15 Wildcard Coil Search Aspecial wildcard coil search operation may also be performed The coil search operation will locate the next coil instruction optionally with a reference address modifier regardless of the coil type OUT OUTM OUT NOT OUTM NOT SET SETM RST RSTM OUT OUT The wildcard search is initiated by pressing the SRCH key twice bef
23. 0002 BITPOS lt S P03 _ 0002 BITPOS lt S P03 0233_ 0003 INS lt S Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G B Press the key sequence Press the key 0004 INS lt S GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 175 2 Masked Compare Word MSKCMPW Function 143 Masked Compare Dword MSKCMPD Function 144 The Masked Compare function is used to compare the contents of two bit strings with the ability to mask selected bits The length of the bit strings to be compared is specified by the LEN parameter where the value of LEN specifies the number of 16 bit words for MSKCMPW and 32 bit words for MSKCMPD When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable input the function begins comparing the bits in the first string I1 with the corresponding bits in the second string 12 Comparison continues until a miscompare is found or until the end of the string is reached The BIT input is used to store the bit number where the next comparison should start with a 0 indicating the first bit in the string The BN output is used to store the bit number where the last comparison occurred a 1 indicates the first bit in the string Using the same reference for BIT and BN causes the compare to start at the next bit position after a miscompare or at the beginning if all bits compared successfully upon the ne
24. 10001 is closed the discrete inputs 119 120 121 and 124 must also be on this makes the binary data in inputs 17 through 32 equal to the binary data stored in register 250 s OTP ePoPop ooo E e eE E E e Z 0 OFF no power flow 1 ON power flow Ladder Diagram Representation I0001 I I EoQ INT R0250 P1 I1 QI l l I0017 P2 12 Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 FUNC 52 EQ P1 R0250 P2 10017 0003 OUT Q0001 After pressing Key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display 0001 INS lt S Initial display Press the key sequence 0001 INS o H Pas LD Al GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 93 9 94 Press the ai key Press the key sequence JL Press the key FUNC Press the key sequence LJ 2 JJ Press the S key Press the key sequence A 1 mi Press the key Press the key sequence OUT BQ OUTM AQ Press the S key 7 BE 0002 INS lt S 0002 INS lt S FUNC 52_ EQ 0002 EQ lt S P01 0002 EQ lt S P01 R 250_ 0002 EQ lt S P02 _ 0002 EQ P02 I 17_ 0003 INS lt S 0004 INS lt S Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February
25. 3 Finally press the ENT key This will store the user program Note that this may take about a minute When the program has been stored the following screen will be displayed WRITE OK lt S At this point the program can be put into RUN mode 4 To return to the program edit mode press the ENT key The above procedure should be used any time that a Micro PLC program is modified in any way create edit insert and so forth 4 6 Hand Held Programmerfor Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Section 2 High Speed Counter Configuration If you have just configured the Series 90 Micro PLC parameters using the Hand Held Programmer see Section 1 all you need to do to select the High Speed Counter is use the Down Arrow key to sequence to the slot assigned to the High Speed Counter Press the READ key then the ENT key Note The Series 90 Micro PLC functions are assigned to rack and slot locations corresponding to those in the Series 90 30 PLCs The Series 90 Micro PLC system is always in rack 0 and the its HSC functions are in slot 4 When the Series 90 Micro PLC first powers up it has default values for all of the HSC parameters To meet the requirements of most applications the High Speed Counters will have to be configured before they can be used Parameter Definitions Tables 4 2 through 4 4 list all the configuration parameters in the Series 90 Micro PLC High
26. 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual GFK 0487 Series 90 PCM Development Software PCOP User s Manual GFK 0499 CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual GFK 0582 Series 90 PLC Serial Communications Driver User s Manual GFK 0631 Series 90 30 IO Link Interface User s Manual GFK 0641 CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual GFK 0664 Series 90 30 PLC Axis Positioning Module Programmer s Manual GFK 0685 Series 90 Programmable Controllers Flow Computer User s Manual GFK 0695 Series 90 30 Enhanced Genius Communications Module User s Manual GFK 0726 Series 90 30 PLC State Logic ProcessorUser s Guide GFK 0732 Series 90 30 PLC ECLiPS User s Manual GFK 0750 OnTOP for Series 90 30 Online Troubleshooting and Operator ProgramUser s Manual GFK 0781 Series 90 30 Axis Positioning Module Follower Mode User s Manual GFK 0823 Series 90 301 O Link Master Module User s Manual GFK 0828 Series 90 30 Diagnostic System User s Manual GFK 0840 Series 90 30 Axis Positioning Module Standard Mode User s Manual GFK 0898 Series 90 30PLCI OModuleSpecifications GFK 1028 Series 90 301 O Processor Module User s Manual GFK 1034 Series 90 30 Genius Bus Controller User s Manual GFK 1037 Series 90 30 FIP Remote I O Scanner User s Manual GFK 1056 Series 90 30 State Logic Control System User
27. ES Ese aed ee ee ee ee PRE E De He ee e Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function o Valid reference for WORD data only not valid for DWORD SA SB SC only S cannot be used Max const value of 4095 for WORD and 2047 for DWORD Programming example for MSKCMPW Function In the following example when 10001 is TRUE the MSKCMPW function block is executed MO0001 through M0016 is compared with M0017 through M0032 MO0033 through M0048 contains the mask value The value in R0001 determines at which bit position the comparison starts within the two input strings The contents of these references before the function block is executed are as follows 11 M0001 0 1 1fofi 4 ofoflol 1 1 o lililolo I2 Moo17 0 tli fofif4 ofifol1 1 olilifali M Q M0033 0 ololololo ojolololo olililili BIT BN R0001 9 MC Q0001 FALSE The contents of these references after the function block is executed are as follows 11 Mo001 0 tli fofif4 ofolol1 1 oli li lolo I2 Moo17 0 1 1fofi 4 ofifol1 1 olililili M Q M0033 0 o olo ol o o l lo olo of ififr BIT BN R0001 9 MC Q0001 TRUE 9 178 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Ladder Diagram Representati
28. Function 54 LE Function 55 GE Function 56 LT Function 57 GT Function 72 DPEQ Function 73 DPNE Function 74 DPLE Function 75 DPGE Function 76 DPLT Function 77 DPGT Chapter 6 Program Edit Table 6 2 On Line Substitution Groups Function Group Function 61 DPADD Function 63 DPSUB Function 65 DPMUL Function 67 DPDIV Function 69 DPMOD Function 22 BITSET Function 24 BITCLR Function 86 PIDISA Function 87 PIDIND Function 60 ADD Function 62 SUB Function 64 MUL Function 66 DIV Function 68 MOD Function 101 SREQB Function 105 SRNEB Function 109 SRLTB Function 113 SRLEB Function 117 SRGTB Function 121 SRGEB Function 102 GREQW Function 106 SRNEW Function 110 GRLTW Function 114 GRLEW Function 118 SRGTW Function 122 SRGEI Function 103 SREQI Function 107 SRNEI Function 111 SRLTI Function 115 SRLEI Function 119 SRGTI Function 123 SRGEI Function 104 GREQDI Function 108 SRNEDI Function 112 SRLTDI Function 116 SRLEDI Function 120 SRGTDI Function 124 SRGEDI 6 19 o Program Syntax Errors Program syntax errors are those errors which the system detects in user provided data They may be caused by an illegal sequence of otherwise valid individual instructions Any Statement List program which passes the program check can be translated into relay ladder diagram form Typical examples of these errors include JU
29. GFK 0402G 9 Section 4 Bit Operation Functions Bit Operation functions perform comparison and movement operations on bit strings which are one or more words in length Bit Operation functions require word or double word data The default data type is word Data types cannot be mixed within the function Although data must be specified in 16 bit word or 32 bit double word increments these functions operate on data as a continuous string of bits with bit 1 of the first word being the Least Significant Bit LSB The last bit of the last word is the Most Significant BIT MSB For example if you specified three words of data beginning at reference R100 it would be operated on as 48 contiguous bits so e opao yelp os ye s a a ap a eun sion 2 31 a0 2 as 27 2s as 20 29 2 aa 0 a9 we 7 aioe oof os as o fo a foo o gt 36 7 os oe fo Overlapping input and output reference address ranges in multi word functions may produce unexpected results during program execution The following bit operations are described in this section Abbreviation Fanion Dempo O O AND LogicalAND If a bit in bit string I1 and the corresponding bit in bit string I2 are both 1 place a 1 in the corresponding location in output string Q OR LogicalOR If a bit in bit string I1 and or the corresponding bit in bit string I2 are both 1 place a 1 in the corresponding location in output string Q XOR Logical If a bit in bit str
30. If discrete memory types are used for parameters P1 and P2 the beginning address must be on a byte boundary DPNE Function Description The two values specified by parameters P1 and P2 must be the same data type 32 bit two s complement signed integers and must be within the range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 When using the Hand Held Programmer HHP to program a constant into parameters P1 or P2 the constant must be in the range of a single precision number 32768 to 32767 The memory locations for P1 and P2 are each 32 Bits long The storage area for each Register AI and AQ is 16 Bits long therefore two consecutive registers AI words or AQ words must be used for each double precision signed number which is to be stored The address of the lower of the two registers AI words or AQ words is used as the reference to store and retrieve the double precision number The Hand Held Programmer can only display a maximum of 16 bits one Register AI or AQ word at a time therefore a double precision number outside of the range 32768 to 32767 cannot be programmed into the CPU or monitored using the Hand Held Programmer The hexadecimal or binary number for each register AI or AQ word can be programmed into the CPU or monitored provided that they are placed together outside of the CPU to form the 32 Bit double precision signed number This function will pass power flow when there is power flow to the enable input and the valu
31. LEN Q P03 Destination of move in bits Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element 2 Type of function Function 40 MOVBN 3 Parameter P1 IN beginning of the bit string to be moved This can be a constant value or the memory address location for the first word of the bit string containing the bit or bits to be moved 4 Parameter P2 LEN a constant specifying the number of bits in the bit string that will be moved from one location to another each time a move takes place The limit for LEN is 16 if the IN parameter is a constant otherwise the limit is 256 5 Parameter P3 Q the memory address location where the bit or bit string will be moved to 9 188 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G The following table specifies which memory types are valid for each of the MOVBN function parameters Allowable Memory Types for MOVBN Function 40 PN The limit for LEN is 16 if the IN parameter is a constant otherwise the limit is 256 Programming Example for MOVBN Function In this example a bit string of 9 bits 10012 to 10020 specified by parameter P1 starting with 10012 and P2 constant value of 9 will be moved to the bit string Q0125 to Q0133 specified by parameter P3 Q0125 The power flow output will be
32. Masked Compare Dword Compare contents of two bit strings 32 bit words with 176 ability to mask selected bits Data Move Functions The default display format of the following Data Move functions is signed integer They are functionally equivalent to the Data Move functions listed below MOVIN Multiple array integer move Copy an array of multiple words from one location to 184 another BMOVI Constant block move Fill seven consecutive words with a block of seven 192 constants MOVBN Multiple bit move Move one or more bits from one reference to another 188 SHFRB Shift register bit Implement a shift register with bit resolution 208 The default display format of the following Data Move functions is hexadecimal They are functionally equivalent to the Data Move functions listed above MOVWN Multiple array word move Copy an array of multiple words from one location to 184 another BMOVW Constant block move Fill seven consecutive words with a block of seven 192 constants BLKCL Block clear Fills a word or group of consecutive words with zeros 198 SHFRW Nstage word shift register Perform a word shift through an array of words 201 SEQB Nstage bit sequencer Perform a bit sequence shift through an array of bits 212 COMMREQ Communicationsrequest Communicate a particular request to a module in the 220 system ConversionFunctions 80 Integer to BCD conversion Convert an integer value to a 4 digit BCD value INT BCD to integer conversion Convert a 4 di
33. Micro plc hsc configuration count limits counter direction counter mode counter timebase counter type location of preset points output failure mode 4 11 output preset positions preload value strobe sdge off preset value on preset value one shot counting PLC B 1 preload value programmable coprocessor module 5 22 pulse output PWM output 4 19 remote I O replacing a 5 saved strobe edge 4 17 time base value Configuration features continuous count ing reading a 5 17 B 18 rac Configuration Mode p2 go to operation I O configuration 5 1 Configuration screens analog modules 16 channel current input 16 channel voltage input 8 channel current voltage input current voltagecombinationinput output discrete module 5 10 Genius communications module I Olinkinterface module Micro plc common all counter types type A counter type B counter programmable coprocessor module 201 Configuration automatic b 7 Configuration programportability Configured constant sweep mode param eter 3 7 configured constant sweep setting param eter Connection to Series 90 Micro ple 2 1 Connection to Series 90 20 Connection to Series 90 30 Contact references special B 1 Control Functions description of 9 254 DO I O enhanced model 331 340 341 351 9 240 DO T O snapshot func 85 END MCR func 8
34. The location of the word or group of words is specified by parameter P1 which is the memory address location for the first word of the group of consecutive words containing the group of bits to be shifted The number of 16 bit words in the consecutive group of words forming the continuous string of bits is specified by parameter P3 LEN The limits of LEN depend on the memory type being used and the starting address of the first word of the group of words containing the bits to be shifted and the starting address of the final memory location where the shifted bits are to be stored If the length plus the memory address exceed the total number of words for that memory type DATA ERR will be displayed on the screen of the Hand Held Programmer The number of bit locations that each bit is shifted each time this function is executed is specified by parameter P2 N The number of locations specified by N must be more then zero and less then the total number of bits in the group of consecutive words specified in the LEN parameter When the shift occurs the number of bits specified by N will be shifted out of the right end lowest bit location of the first word of the group of bits The last bit shifted out of the group will determine the condition of B2 see the note below which determines power flow through this function A zero shifted out will result in no power flow and a one shifted out will give power flow If the number of bits to be shifte
35. and J arrow cursor keys or the key to display the selected slot Initial Display To add the IC693ALG442 module to the configuration press the READ VERIFY ENT key sequence The following screen will be displayed RO 03 AIO 1 00 lt S AQ2 AQ _ For more information on assigning I O references see page 5 10 Assigning Reference Addresses to I O Modules Selecting AQ Reference This screen allows you to select the starting address for the AQ reference by specifying the starting reference in the AQ field You can select the next available address the default or enter a specific address Pressing the ENT key will allow the PLC to select the starting addresses To enter a specific address for example AQ35 press the starting reference number keys and the ENT key For example to specify a starting address of AQ35 press the key sequence 3 5 ENT RO 03 AIO 1 00 lt S AQ2 AQ035 AQ036 Note that the length of the status field 2 is displayed as the first digit following the first AQ on the second line of the display Note This field cannot be changed with the Hand Held programmer However it can be changed using the Logicmaster 90 30 software configurator function The Hand Held Programmer will always reflect the currently active length of the status field GFK 0402G Chapter 5 I O Configuration 5 43 You can press the CLR key at any time to abort the configuration you have just selected and return the slot to EM
36. 3 2 EEPROM 2 1 EPROM When the EEPROM or EPROM is installed the application program stored in the device is automatically loaded into RAM memory whenever the CPU is powered up However this only happens if EEPROM is selected as the Program Source parameter during configuration with the Hand Held Programmer or Logicmaster 90 configuration software GFK 0402G Chapter 2 Operation 2 11 If EEPROM is selected and a PROM is not in the socket or a blank PROM is in the socket on a power up cycle a blank program will be placed into the RAM memory therefore the program in RAM will be lost EEPROM and EPROM memory chips are available from GE Fanuc Catalog numbers for these devices are listed in the following table Table 2 7 EEPROM and EPROM Memory Catalog Numbers GE Fanuc PROM Third Party Source Catalog Number Description Part Number Vendor Part Number 1C693ACC305 Qty 4 28C256 EEPROM 350ns 44 A725999 000 XICOR X28C256Por XICOR X28C256 25 1C693ACC306 Qty 4 32Kx8 UV EPROM 150ns 44A723379 000 NEC PD27C256AD 15 Atmel AT27C256 15DC1 Toshiba TC57256AD 15 Hitachi HIN27C2564G 15 AMD AM27C256 150DC Intel TD27C256A 1 Installing a Blank EEPROM EPROM Use the following procedure for installing a blank EEPROM or EPROM in a Series 90 30 or Series 90 20 PLC Caution You must be careful when installing a blank EEPROM or EPROM in the PROM socket of the CPU in a Series 90 30 or Series 90 20 or the program in RAM memory wil
37. 9 107 Less than function 9 90 Less than or equal function 9 90 Less than or equal to comparison LE function 54 9 111 Locate slot in rack Logic element entering 9 11 M Manual configuration Masked compare MSKCMPI function 144 9 176 MSKCMPW function 143 9 176 Memory card se 5 pe load RAM 2 14 store RAM Index 5 Index Index 6 verify RAM P 16 Memory card plc configuration Memory types for basic elements 9 6 Memory clearing 2 7 Messages error 7 5 Micro plc abbreviations for all Type A counter configuration common parameter definitions 4 7 compatibility with Series 90 30 configuration hsc configuration 4 7 count direction 4 11 count limits 4 counter mode counter timebase counter type location of preset points output failure mode 4 11 output preset positions preload value strobe edge parameters list of storing user program Mode change canceling 2 11 Mode exit data 7 12 Mode data Mode program 6 2 Modem turnaround time parameter Modes operating Module genius communications 5 18 Modulo division MOD function 68 82 Move bits MOVBN function 40 9 188 Move functions array 9 289 Multiple word move MOVEN MOVIN and MOVWN function 37 and 42 9 184 N Non discrete tables 7 4 Not 2o comparison NE function 53 9 95 Not equal function 9 90 O OEM key 8 9 O
38. After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display Initial display 0021 INS lt S Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 0021 INS lt S FUNC 07_ LABEL Press the ay key 0021 LABEL lt S POI _ Press the key sequence FUN 7 A 0021 LABEL lt S P01 12_ Press the A key 0022 INS lt S Press the key sequence 1 gt GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 245 2 Nested Master Control Relay MCR Function 4 The nested MCR function is an unconditionally executed function used to control execution of portions of logic When power flows to the MCR function through the enable input all coils except Latch and Reset Latch coils which are not affected between the Master Control Relay MCR and the next End MCR function with a matching label number will be turned off The nested MCR has one parameter which is a number assigned to LABEL between 0 and 255 This number and the matching LABEL number of an END MCR function identify the scope of the nested MCR function The following rules apply to programming the MCR function MCRs and END MCRs must be properly nested That is the scope of an MCR must be either completely within the scope of another MCR or completely out of the scope of another MCR e You can program multiple MCRs for the same END MCR not applicable to CPU351 e The maximum MCR
39. DPMUL 65 Double precision signed multiplication word value by another 72 DIV 66 Signeddivision Divide one signed word or double word 77 DPDIV 67 Double precision signed division value by another 77 MOD 68 Signed modulo division Modulo divide one signed word or double 82 DPMOD 69 Double precision signed modulo division word value by another 82 SQRT 70 Signed square root Find square root of one signed word 86 DPSQRT 71 Double precision signed square root or double word value 86 RelationalFunctions EQ 52 Equaltest Test for one signed word or double word DPEQ 72 Double precision equal test value equal to another NE 53 Notequal test Test for one signed word or double word DPNE 73 Double precision not equal test value not equal to another GT 57 Greater than test Test for one signed word or double word DPGT 77 Double precision greater than test value greater than another GE 55 Greater than or equal test Test for one signed word or double word DPGE 75 Double precision greater than or equal test value greater than or equal to another LT 56 Less than test Test for one signed word or double word DPLT 76 Double precision less than test value less than another LE 54 Less than or equal test Test for one signed word or double word DPLE 74 Double precision less than or equal test value less than or equal to another RANGI 140 Integer range Test for a signed integer double precision 115 RANGDI 141
40. LABEL func 7 9 250 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G nested jump JUMP func 3 nested master control relay MCR func 3 9 246 no operation NOOP func 1 pia 9 254 PID IND func 87 9 254 PID ISA func 86 subroutine CALLSUB func 90 9 266 system service request SVCRQ func 89 6 25 terminate program execution ENDSW func 0 9 241 Conversion Functions BCD To integer conversion INT func 81 9 229 integer to BCD conversion BCD func 80 9 225 CPU 351 operating note CPU ID parameters D Data bits parameter Data Mode entering 7 1 exit keypad summary plc control and status 8 1 screen display Data Move Functions 9 183 block clear BLKCL func 44 block move hex BMOVW func 43 block move integer BMOVI func 38 communications request COMMREQ func 88 move bits MOVBN func 40 9 188 move word hex MOVWN func 42 move word integer MOVIN func 37 18 shift register bit SHFRB func 46 9 208 Koj A 072 shift register word SHFR func 45 6 201 0 o N stage bi 21 Data retentiveness Data table clearing 7 9 equencer SEQB func 47 O N N Index Data value canceling change 7 8 Default I O parameter Default system configuration 90 30 Delete a configuration Deleting a locked subroutine Deleting subroutines 9 9 Discrete module configuring Discrete reference tables Discrete references descriptio
41. MOVBN is a conditionally executed function which is used to move one or more bits from one reference to another reference When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable EN input the function is executed by the CPU and a new move bits function will take place The MOVBN function is used to move a bit string from one reference to another reference The IN parameter specifies the beginning of the bit string and the LEN parameter specifies the length of the bit string in bits The Q parameter specifies the destination of the move Any discrete or word reference can be specified for IN and Q within the parameter restrictions as stated below Since IN and Q are not restricted to a word or byte boundary and LEN is in bits it is possible to define a bit string that does not occupy an entire byte or word The unused bits in the byte or word are not affected when the function is executed If word memory is specified for IN or Q it is assumed that the first bit position to move from or to is the least significant bit of the word specified by IN or Q If IN is a constant the least significant LEN bit of a bit pattern that corresponds to the value of the constant is moved into Q The power flow output is a 1 whenever the function is executed Logic for enable enable OEIT Power flow output to a coil input or another function Beginning of bit string P01 IN Length of bit string P02
42. Memory address location where to be converted is stored BCD number will be stored Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This logic must start with an LD element 2 Function type Function 80 3 Parameter P1 IN the memory location where the decimal number to be converted is stored 4 Parameter P2 Q the memory location where the BCD results of the conversion are stored GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 225 9 226 The following table specifies which memory types are valid for each of the BCD function parameters Allowable Memory Types for BCD Function 80 ee a aE eS ee XE a a Fa TP a Programming Example for INT to BCD Function In this example the decimal equivalent of the 16 bits stored in memory address location ROOO1 specified by P1 is converted to its BCD equivalent bits which are stored in memory address location R0002 as specified by P2 Assume that the following binary representation of the decimal number 4826 is stored in register R0001 ofofofafofo s o r fa fofr ifofi fo Then the following bits will be in register R0002 after execution of this function oli fofo ifofo o o o ifofoli fio 4826Hexadecimar Ladder Diagram Representation SIQ001 shyt M0001 ES R0001 Statement List Representation 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 LD OUT LD FUNC
43. PV is the control loop process variable MAN When energized the PID function is in manual mode UP When energized if in manual mode the CV output is adjusted up DN When energized if in manual mode the CV output is adjusted down LOC P03 This is the address of the memory location of the PID control block information OK The ok output is energized when the function is performed without error CV P04 CV is the control variable output Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This logic must start with an LD element 2 Function type Function 86 PIDISA or Function 87 PIDIND 3 Parameter P1 SP the control loop set point This is a signed word value which can be a constant number or the address of a memory location containing the value 4 Parameter P2 PV the control loop process variable This is a signed word value which is stored in a specified memory location 5 Parameter P3 LOC address location of PID control block information The starting register number for 40 consecutive registers containing the data table for one PID function 6 Parameter P4 CV an output which is the location of the control variable result This is the memory address for the location of the reference which will contain the control variable result The following table specifies which memory types are valid for each of the PIDISA and PIDIND function paramet
44. Parameter P4 Q the memory address location where the first word of the group of words containing the results of the bits that have been shifted is to be stored The following table specifies which memory types are valid for each of the SHL function parameters Allowable Memory Types for SHL Function 30 Fe A A PU ee BS a Dee Vas ae De De Ue E pee RODE a elie tes el elle ene al weer ee ene OO Sih ee ede ee A lS Pe 4 Only SA SB and SC are used S cannot be used 9 138 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G 9 Programming Example for SHL Function In the following example a contact from a one shot OUT is used as the controlling element for power flow to the enable function When input I0001 closes passes power flow M0001 will pass power flow to the enable input of the SHL function for one sweep of the CPU scan The 32 bits of two consecutive 16 Bit words starting at Register 1 and ending with Register 2 note that the length P3 is 2 The two 16 bit words will shift left one bit space N P2 1 The result will be placed into the two consecutive 16 bit words starting at R10 The first bit of Register 10 will have the same state as 10002 the logic controlling the power flow to B1 input For example if B1 is passing powerflow giving an on condition for a state of 1 and Registers 1 and 2 have the bit pattern as
45. The three values specified by parameters P1 P2 and P3 must be the same data type 16 bit two s complement signed integers and must be within the range 32768 to 32767 If an attempt to divide by zero is made the remainder will be set to either 32768 or 32767 depending on the sign of the number being divided and no power flow will pass through this function This function will pass power flow when there is power flow to the enable input and no attempt has been made to divide by zero If discrete memory types are used for parameters P1 P2 and P3 the beginning address must be on a byte boundary DPMOD Function Description The three values specified by parameters P1 P2 and P3 must be the same data type 32 bit two s complement signed integers and must be within the range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 When using the Hand Held Programmer to program a constant into parameters P1 or P2 the constant must be in the range of a single precision number 32768 to 32767 The memory locations for P1 P2 and P3 are each 32 Bits long The storage area for each Register Al and AQ is 16 Bits long therefore two consecutive registers AI words or AQ words must be used for each double precision signed number which is to be stored The address of the lower of the two registers AI words or AQ words is used as the reference to store and retrieve the double precision number The Hand Held Programmer can only display a maximum of 16 bits
46. _ 16BIT WORD gt 16 BIT WORD R0060 HIGHEST OUTPUT Q STORAGE MEMORY LOCATION ADDRESSED LOCATION BY P4 GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 203 Assume that decimal numbers in the registers are as follows After After Shift Reset ao a wom s a aom a a won o a m j o j e WORD IN P1 4 WORDS P2 R0001 o T R0011 R0012 R0013 WORD OUT P4 R0014 gt RO0GO Ladder Diagram Representation SIQ001 l 144 M0001 i sTO002 I I P04 RO060 P03 SBOOOL POL SRO01T P02 9 204 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 OUT MO0001 0003 LD MO0001 0004 LD T0002 0005 FUNC 45 SHFRW P1 R0001 P2 R0011 P3 4 P4 R0060 0006 OUT Q0001 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display Initial display 0001 INS lt S Press the key sequence Press the J key 0002 INS lt S 0001 INS Press the key sequence C OUT S M OUTM 7 a Press the ai key 0003 lt S GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 205 9 206 Press the key sequence C B 1 T Press the ay key Press the key se
47. entering the function number 4 When entering a constant parameter the sign of the number or may be entered or toggled either before or after the actual value is entered 5 When entering a constant parameter the base of the number decimal or hexadecimal may be changed either before or after entering the value by pressing the HEX DECkey If the base of the number is changed after entering the value that value will automatically be converted to the new base when the HEX DEC key is pressed 6 When a numeric field portion of an operand fills up additionally entered digits are shifted through the field from right to left with the leftmost most significant digit being lost Entering an Operand for a Basic Element Most instructions require that an operand be provided For basic elements this operand would be a reference address for a discrete memory I Q M T G S SA SB or SC Table 8 2 in chapter 8 Statement List Programming Language lists the valid memory types for the basic elements The portion of the discrete memory type is not entered or shown in the display when using the HHP Entering an Operand for a Function For functions and function blocks the operand may consist of one or more parameters Each parameter may be a machine reference address or a constant signed decimal or hexadecimal In this case the instruction type must be entered first and each operand parameter must then be completed or
48. gt S I16 10017 10032 To display the channel ranges press gt The display will show Channel 1 or the currently selected channel and the first available range RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S CHAN 1 0 10 V You can toggle through the range for each channel by pressing the key Each range will be displayed as shown Each of the ranges are shown below The range that will be selected is the one currently displayed Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February1996 GFK 0402G RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S CHAN 1 10 10 RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S CHAN 1 4 20 MA RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S CHAN 1 0 20 MA When the desired range for the module is displayed on the screen it can be accepted by pressing the ENT key To return to the previous screen press the lt key To view the next channel s range display press the key RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S CHAN 2 0 10 V Edit this channel s range the same as you did for the first channel The range of all active channels can be changed in the same manner Return to the initial display screen by pressing the ENT key or by pressing the lt key until the initial screen is displayed Saved Configurations Configurations that contain an 8 Channel Analog Current Wltage Output module can be saved to an EEPROM or MEM card and read from that device into the CPU at a later time MEM cards and EEPROMs containing these configurations c
49. including both those I O modules already installed as well as those to be installed at a later time Additional information on configuration mode can be found in chapter 3 PLC Configuration and chapter 4 I O Configuration 1 2 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Several functions may be performed independent of the current mode of operation These functions include mode selection and starting or stopping the PLC Please refer to chapter 7 PLC Control and Status References The data used in an application program is stored as either register or discrete references When entering a statement list program you must assign references to data in the PLC system A reference specifies both a memory type and a precise location within that memory type For example 10001 specifies address 1 in discrete input memory and R0256 specifies address 256 in register memory The I symbol is used by the PLC to distinguish machine references from nicknames the symbol is not entered or displayed on the HHP The valid register and discrete references that are used with the Series 90 30 and Series 90 20 programmable logic controllers are described in the following two tables Table 1 1 Register References Type Description R The prefix R is used to assign system register references which will store program data such as the results of calculations AI The pre
50. integer 0 32 767 The constant 1 indicates that no preset time parameter is specified For this case the preset time will be accessed from the timer data structure Operating Registers Timer Location P03 The timer location gives the address of a three word data structure which is used by the timer function block Programming Example for ONDTR Function In the following example power flow will be passed through the Timer to turn on Q0002 after a specified time delay from the time input number 1 closes or internal contact 2 is turned on The time delay will be the number of tenths of a second specified by the decimal number stored in Register 90 A not contact of coil Q0001 is programmed to the reset input thus when coil Q0001 is off current flow will occur through the reset logic The current value will not increment and is set to zero The Time Base or Accuracy P1 is a tenth of a second 0 1 The Preset P2 is a number stored in register 90 The Location Register P3 is Register 4 Ladder Diagram Representation I0001 ESA SM0002 LJ stl Q0001 l R0090 PV R0004 9 44 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 OR MO0002 0003 LD NOT Q0001 0004 FUNC 13 ONDTR P1 10 P2 R0090 P3 R0004 0005 OUT Q0002 After pressing Key Progra
51. keypad summary 8 4 modifying passwords password enable and disable configura tion passwords subroutine protection levels Protection levels of 8 1 Protection OEM i Protection program R Rack parameters Rack size selecting 5 3 Rack manual configuration Rack remoteI O Range count limits 4 12 Range function double precision 9 90 double f recision signed integer 9 115 integer 9 Aa Read configuration 5 17 Read function 2 9 Reading a configuration 5 1 5 18 Reading a saved configuration 6 7 Reconfiguration Reference table function Reference table changing format discrete 7 5 register 7 6 Reference Tables 7 1 change display format changing data clear data_table non discrete 7 6 register registers special system special registers B 1 GFK 0402G Reference tables B 1 Reference discrete overriding 7 9 Reference top selecting 7 7 References special contact B 1 Register reference tables Register references analog inputs analog outputs 1 3 description of 1 3 system registers Register source parameter B 6 Registers special system 7 11 Relation Functions 9 90 Relational Functions description of 9 90 double precision equal func 72 9 91 double precision greater than compari son func 77 0 99 double precision greater than or equal Comparison func 75 9 103 double precision less than comparison
52. parameter P1 and ending at location G0048 32 locations from G0017 to G0048 Ladder Diagram Representation BLOCK CLR l l l P01 IN1 LEN CONST 001 P02 0002 Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 FUNC 44 BLKCL P1 G0017 P2 0002 0003 OUT Q0001 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display 0001 INS lt S Initial display Press the key sequence 0001 INS JBU 5 GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 199 Press the S key 0002 INS lt S Press the key sequence 0002 INS lt S FUNC 44 BLKCL FUNC 4 4 Press the S key 0002 BLKCL lt S POI _ Press the key sequence 0002 BLKCL lt S sai i oll POL G17 S Press the T key 0002 BLKCL lt S P02 _ Press the key sequence 0004 BLKCL lt S P02 2_ Press the ay key 0003 INS lt S Press the key sequence 0003 INS zS OUT BQ 1 OUT Q 1_ OUTM AQ 9 200 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Shift Register SHFR SHFRW Function 45 GFK 0402G The N stage word shift register function GHFRW is a conditionally executed function which performs a word shift through an array of 16 bit words The shift register is a group of sequentially numbered memory storage locations
53. s Manual GFK 1065 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual GFK 1084 Series 90 30TCP IPEthernet Communications User s Manual GFK 1186 TCP IPEthernet Communications for the Series 90 30 PLC Station Manager Manual GFK 1179 Series 90 PLC Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards We Welcome Your Comments and Suggestions At GE Fanuc automation we strive to produce quality technical documentation After you have used this manual please take a few moments to complete and return the Reader s Comment Card located on the next page Henry A Konat Senior Technical Writer GFK 0402G Preface v Contents Chapter 1 Introduction to the Hand Held Programmer 1 1 Keypad seriais ennie Ried ohana oh hood eb REE 1 1 LED Screen oid es debi e ne Maeno Sides mole REN Laie ee eee 1 2 PLC Communications 6 eee 1 2 Memory Card Interface 6 occ eens 1 2 Operating Modes ero iia cre vn dad Ve Eis dee aa aa 1 2 References oinen na atte lene RAE he ene es 1 3 Transitions and Overrides 0 6 66 1 4 Retentiveness of Data 0 ccc eens 1 5 Using the Hand Held Programmer 0 0 c cece eee eens 1 7 Chapter 2 Operation ssassn cores baad hn aad ayeta E Orin diene wae eats 2 1 Powering up the Hand Held Programmer 000005 2 2 Disconnecting the Hand Held Programmer 00000 2 2 Key Pad sierpe reit e alerts AEE s oa dargains ieee dasa ete ee 2 2 Selecting
54. these modules occupied will now be shown as EMPTY on the HHP The PCM is reconfigured to the default configuration If the change is confirmed and the value of the parameters has been changed from ENABLE to DISABLE no changes occur to the existing configuration However as new I O modules are detected at power up in slots that were previously EMPTY they will not be configured automatically by the PLC Since the previous method of enabling and disabling the default I O configuration is still possible along with this configuration parameter it is possible for the value of this parameter to change indirectly For example if the value of this parameter is DISABLE and the key sequence 9 DEL is pressed while in configuration mode the value of this parameter would then become ENABLE Conversely if you were to disable the default I O configuration by manually changing the reference offset of an I O module the value of this parameter would become DISABLE Thus changing this parameter s value from DISABLE to ENABLE would have the same effect as using the previous key sequence When configuration is read from MEM card or EEPROM or STOREd from Logicmaster 90 30 and this configuration has DEFAULT CONFIG enabled the I O will be auto configured but the CPU parameters will be set to the value that they have in the configuration being read into the PLC When configuration is verified with a MEM card or EEPROM and the configuration on the d
55. timer is reset CV 0 G ENABLE goes low timer begins accumulating time H CV reaches PV Q goes low and timer stops accumulating time Logic for Enable Input enable 10FDTR Power flow output to a coil or another function Preset Value P2 PV Address location P3 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus Must start with an LD element 2 Type of function Function 14 3 Parameter P1 Timer Accuracy or base value for timing increments 1 one hundredth of a second 01 second 10 one tenth of a second 0 1 second 4 Parameter P2 Preset Time a constant number or the register that will contain the preset value 5 Parameter P3 Timer Location the first register of the three sequential registers containing the operating values Parameters for OFDTR Function 14 The following table specifies the valid memory types for each of the OFDTR function block s parameters Allowable Memory Types for OFDTR Function 14 Parameter I WQ M T G S R A A Constant I Q Timer Accuracy P01 e Preset Time P02 e e ot Timer Location P03 Only constants of 1 10 and 100 are a
56. 0002 BITSET lt S P03 _ Press the key sequence 0002 BITSET lt S P03 4 0002 INS lt S FUNC 22_ BITSET fand GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 163 Press the key 0003 INS lt S Press the key sequence 0003 INS lt S OUT BQ 1 OUTM AQ Press the ENT key 0004 INS lt S 9 164 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Bit Clear BITCLR Function 24 The Bit Clear function BITCLR is a conditionally executed function which is used to SET a particular bit in a string of bits to 0 When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable EN input the function is executed by the CPU and a new bit clear function will take place The IN parameter specifies the beginning of the bit string The BIT parameter specifies the number of the bit to be set in the bit string Bits in the bit string are numbered beginning with 1 starting with the least significant bit to the most significant bit The LEN parameter specifies the length of the string bit in words The state of the power flow output is determined by the ability of the function block to operate properly based upon the value of the parameters at the time of execution Since the BIT parameter can be specified from a word in a re
57. 01 PLC lt S ID3 4500_H The default I O parameter allows you to view and change the current state of the default I O configuration function The following example shows the key sequences and resulting screens to view or edit this parameter You can request that the PLC reconfigure the I O based on the default I O configuration refer to Chapter 4 Reconfiguration for details Refer to Table 5 3 for a list of the default I O configuration Initial display Chapter 3 Series 90 30 20 PLC Configuration RO 01 PLC lt S ID3 0000H Press the key two times RO 01 PLC lt S DEF I O ENABLE Press the key oa ee ee bene Note that on the previous display the word DISABLE will be flashing to signify that you have initiated a change to the current value of the configuration parameter Also because of the ramifications of changing the value of this parameter you will be prompted to confirm the change This confirmation display is shown below Press the A key RO 01 PLC lt S lt ENT gt Y lt CLR gt At this point you can either confirm or cancel the change to the default I O configuration parameter If the change is confirmed and the value of the parameter has been changed from DISABLE to ENABLE all I O modules will be reconfigured as as shown in Table 4 3 Note that all smart I O modules such as the HSC and GCM will be dropped from the configuration since they are not included in the default configuration The slots that
58. 117 Word SRGTW 118 Greater Than Integer SRGTI 119 Double PrecisionInteger SRGTDI 120 Byte SRGEB 121 Word SRGEW 122 Greater Than or Equal To Integer SRGEI 123 Double PrecisionInteger SRGEDI 124 The following pages contain a description of each of the Array Search functions listed in the above table Programming examples can be found at the end of the descriptions of all of the Array Search functions Note Please note the following Because of the similarity of the Array Search instructions only one group of programming examples is provided The previous table Array Search Functions lists all of the Array Search instructions along with their corresponding abbreviations and function numbers GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 269 9 Search Equal To Byte SREQB Function 101 Search Equal To Word SREQW Function 102 Search Equal To INT SREQI Function 103 Search Equal To DINT SREQDI Function 104 The Search Equal To functions are conditionally executed functions which are used to search for all array values equal to a specified value Each function has four input parameters and two output parameters When the function receives power the array is searched starting at AR input NX This is the starting address of the array AR plus the index into this array input NX The search continues until the array element whose value is equal to the search object IN is found or until the
59. 147 483 647 When using the Hand Held Programmer to program a constant into parameters P1 or P2 the constant must be in the range of a single precision number 32768 to 32767 The memory locations for P1 P2 and P3 are each 32 Bits long The storage area for each Register Al and AQ is 16 Bits long therefore two consecutive registers AI words or AQ words must be used for each double precision signed number which is to be stored The address of the lower of the two registers AI words or AQ words is used as the reference to store and retrieve the double precision number The Hand Held Programmer can only display a maximum of 16 bits one Register AI or AQ word at a time therefore a double precision number outside of the range 32768 to 32767 can not be monitored using the Hand Held Programmer The hexadecimal or binary number for each register AI or AQ word may be programmed or monitored provided that they are placed together outside of the CPU to form the 32 Bit double precision signed number If the division results in overflow a value outside of the range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 the results of the division will be set to the largest possible value 2 147 483 648 or 2 147 483 647 The sign is set to show the direction of the overflow This function will pass power flow when there is power flow to the enable input and the GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 77 results of the division are with
60. 18 Program Syntax ErrOrS 12 seis sers sed wien abel sete dae oth ite a E AEAEE 6 20 Aborting the Insert Edit Operation 0 c cece eens 6 20 Completing the Insert Replace Operation 000000 6 21 Exiting Program Mode 6 cece EKOE E 6 21 Chapter 7 Reference Tables js asisa isd te Gs wae Gs S64 iiec Wa ee 7 1 Entering Data Mode 6 eee eens 7 1 Keypad Functionality 0 eens 7 2 Display Format wo cicero ent a iE ok e E Aa ed a BH Cae ae 7 3 Changing the Format of a Display 0 cece eee eee 7 5 Selecting a Different Top Reference 6 cece cee ee 7 7 Changing Table Data Siria tiruri occ 7 7 Overriding a Discrete Reference 666 unnan nrnna 7 9 Clearing a Data Tables israr aha ener clined ke EEE E OEE 7 9 Clearing all Overrides en aina rE AA o AE TARERE EE RE TERE 7 11 Viewing Special System Registers 0 6 6 7 11 Exiting Data M d orein eiet E EEE e E Wear nine We eae E E 7 12 Chapter 8 PLC Control and Status ss 8 066 5 408 645345 oa sone de o9 0 08 8 1 Protection Levels taeniata e tole AAAS Sot ole BON tla e 8 1 Entering Protection Mode 0 6 6 6 ccs 8 2 Password Enable and Disable Configuration 00005 8 3 Keypad Functionality 0 coe eens 8 4 Moving to another level of access 6 c cece eee ee 8 5 Displaying and Modifying Passwords 0000 cece eee eee 8 7 Canceling a Password Change 6c
61. 2 147 483 647 the results of the addition will be set to the largest possible value 2 147 483 648 or 2 147 483 647 The sign is set to show the direction of the overflow The DPADD function will pass power flow when there is power flow to the enable input and the results of the addition are within the range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 no overflow Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 1 Input 1 P2 Input 2 P3 Q Logic for controlling enabic EEE 6 2 flow output to power flow DINT a coil or another function Value to be added P1 Il Q P3 Location where result is Value to be added P2 12 stored Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 4 5 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element Type of function either Function 60 ADD or Function 61 DPADD Parameter P1 input 1 one of the values to be added This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored Parameter P2 input 2 the other value to be added Parameter P3 Q the memory location where the result is to be stored The following tables specify the valid memory types for each of the parameters for the ADD and DPADD functions Allowable Memory Types for ADD Function 60 a DG GIS El T ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee FES aaa a FP E EE
62. 21 will have the bit pattern as shown The last bit shifted out of Register 10 was a one therefore this function will pass powerflow Ladder Diagram Representation 00001 R0010 P1 CONST 0002 CONST 0001 P2 R0020 I0002 I a45054 STATUS OF B2 AFTER SHIFTING R0010 gt o o ol lolol l lolololilili lol H gt INITIAL REGISTER BIT R0011 1 loli l lo l ilololololil ililolilo PATTERN R0020 0 o lolol lolo lil ilolololilil ilo RESUS OE THE SHIFT R0021 1 l lol l ilol ilolololol lilil iloli FUNCTION Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 145 9 146 Statement List Representation 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 LD OUT LD LD FUNC OUT 10001 MO0001 MO0001 10002 SHR R0010 0001 0002 R0020 Q0001 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes Initial display Press the key sequence A 1 LD Al j Press the T key Press the key sequence OUT OUTM u T y Press the ay key Press the key sequence L C M j HHP Display 0001 INS lt S Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Press the J
63. 4 Program Transfer Keys 0 nnn tenes 2 6 Table 2 5 PowerUp Options 24 iink a Mec e ean eh WAR ks 2 7 Table 2 6 Special Key Sequences fres ae sates aes ra Be BAG Es a SE wae Ba ete ES 2 8 Table 2 7 EEPROM and EPROM Memory Catalog Numbers 0 0 0 66 66 2 12 Table 2 8 Read Write rify Series 90 Memory Card or EEPROM 066 c cece eee eee 2 13 Table 3 1 User Configurable PLC Parameters 6 666 eee 3 1 Table 3 2 Keypad Functionality in PLC Configuration Mode 66 666 3 3 Table 3 3 Configuration Screen Format 0 00000 c occ ccc rren 3 4 Table 4 1 Micro PLC Parameters 0 0 teeta 4 2 Table 4 2 Common Parameter Abbreviations 0 0 0 000 c cece cece eee eens 4 7 Table 4 3 Abbreviations for All Type A Counter Configuration 6 666 sarreraren 4 8 Table 4 4 Abbreviations for Type B1 3 A4 Counter Configuration 6 cece eee ee eee 4 10 Table 5 1 Keypad Functionality in I O Configuration Mode 00666 5 8 Table 5 2 Configuration of a Non Intelligent I O Module 0 0 66 5 9 Table 5 3 Default I O Configuration 0000 0 eee ee eens 5 14 Table 5 4 Configuration of an Intelligent I O Module Installed 0000008 5 17 Table 5 5 Configuration of an Intelligent I O Module Not Installed 0 0000 5 17 Table 6 1 Keypad Functionality in Program Mode 6c cece eee eee 6 2 Table 6 2 On Line Substitut
64. 5 I O Configuration 5 3 Press the ey sequence to go to the config mode RO 01 PLC lt S KEY CLK OFF Press the key to view the rack size RO 00 PWR SUP lt S RK SIZE 10 SLOT Press S to select the other 5 slot rack size If there are no modules configured in slots 6 through 10 then the new rack size will be RO 00 PWR SUP lt S RK SIZE 5 SLOT selected If there are any modules configured in slots 6 through 10 the following error message is displayed R0 00 CFG ERR lt S RK SIZE 5 SLOT Note Configuring a rack size different from the actual rack size will produce a Non fatal hardware failure fault in the PLC Fault Table This is only a diagnostic fault and will not inhibit the PLC from going to RUN mode Although RUN mode is allowed problems may occur during RUN mode due to the rack size mismatch Selecting Slots in a Rack 5 4 Slots in 5 slot racks are selected for display and editing in the same manner as selecting slots in a 10 slot rack First go to the initial config mode screen RO 01 PLC lt S KEY CLK OFF Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable ControllersUser s Manual February1996 GFK 0402G Then press the key four times to view the contents of slot 5 RO 05 EMPTY lt S If the current rack is configured to be a 5 slot rack the next down arrow key press will display the first slot in rack 1 If the current rack is configured to be a 10 slot rack then a
65. 6 6666s 3 8 Port Idle Time Parameter 0 6 00 cece 3 9 Baud Rate Parameter te tiina ia EEEE E EOE 3 9 Data Bits Parameter cortrsmimety es Tertos Senne r aiea 3 9 Stop Bits Parameter romina pene Ei ea eee 3 9 Parity Parameter i2 4cd13 eons hewn enbra ne e E Eoinn Ea 3 9 Modem Turnaround Time Parameter 00 0 unran eee eee 3 9 Password ENABLE DISABLE Parameter 0 2 e eee eee 3 10 CPU ID Parameters ID1 ID2 and ID3 1 cee 3 10 Default 7O 0 ove bed ee tee E Ph a ee eae lh oe ee ies 3 11 Checksum Words Per Sweep 0 6 66 eee eens 3 13 Canceling a Configuration Operation 60 c cece eee 3 13 Exiting Configuration Mode 0 0 0 6 6c cece eee eee 3 13 Chapter 4 Series 90 Micro PLC Configuration 0 eee eens 4 1 Section 1 Micro PLC Configuration 0c eee ee 4 2 HHP Configuration Screens ernier a he ne eee 4 3 Storing the User Program Using the HHP 00005 4 6 Section 2 High Speed Counter Configuration 4 7 Parameter Definitions srr terien a UAN AENA RANEE EAE eee nes 4 7 Configuration Screens Common to both Counter Types ALL Aand BEI AF oree uiuat aea aia a EE A A aa elie 4 15 A4 Counter Specific Screens 0 66 66 4 16 Type B Counter Specific Screens 6 0 00 eee eee eee 4 20 Chapter 5 I OConfiguration 44 tis005 eas ask daw es we ea aes eee a 5 1 Selecting Rack Size T ra a e eens 5 3 Selecting Sl
66. 60 Double Precision Addition DPADD Function 61 0 9 62 Subtraction SUB Function 62 Double Precision Subtraction DPSUB Function 63 9 67 Multiplication MUL Function 64 Double Precision Multiplication DPMUL Function 65 9 72 Division DIV Function 66 Double Precision Division DPDIV Function 67 05 9 77 Modulo Division MOD Function 68 Double Precision Modulo Division DPMOD Function 69 9 82 Square Root INT SQRT Function 70 Square Root DINT DPSQRT Function 71 00 cece eee ee 9 87 Section 3 Relational Functions 0 cece eee eee eee 9 90 Equal EQ Function 52 Double Precision Equal DPEQ Function 72 0 00 cece ee eee 9 91 Not Equal Comparison NE Function 53 Double Precision Not Equal Comparison DPNE Function 73 9 95 Greater Than Comparison GT Function 57 Double Precision Greater Than Comparison DPGT Function 77 9 99 Greater Than or Equal Comparison GE Function 55 Double Precision Greater Than or Equal Comparison DPGE Function 75 9 103 Less Than Comparison LT Function 56 Double Precision Less Than Comparison DPLT Function 76 9 107 Less Than or Equal To Comparison LE Function 54 Double Precision Less Than or Equal To Comparison DPLE Function 74 9 111 Integer Range RANGI Function 140 Double Precision Range RANGDI Function 141 Word Range RANGW Function 142
67. Comparison DPGE Function 75 GFK 0402G There are two greater than or equal to comparison functions The greater than or equal to test GE is a conditionally executed function which tests for one signed word value greater than or equal to another The double precision greater than or equal to test DPGE is a conditionally executed function which tests for one signed double word value greater than or equal to another When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable input the function is executed by the CPU and a new signed comparison for GE or double precision signed comparison for DPGE will take place During the execution of a signed greater than or equal to comparison or double precision signed greater than or equal to comparison the signed value in P1 input 1 is compared to see if it is greater than or equal to the signed value in P2 input 2 The GE and DPGE functions operate on INT signed integer and DINT double precision integer respectively The GE function is Function 55 and the DPGE function is Function 75 GE Function Description The two values specified by parameters P1 and P2 must be the same data type 16 bit two s complement signed integers and must be within the range 32768 to 32767 This function will pass power flow when there is power flow to the enable input and the value specified by parameter P1 is greater than or equal to the value specified by parameter P2
68. Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G 9 Programming Example for MCR Function The following example shows a nested MCR function assigned a LABEL number of 14 that is to be paired with an END MCR assigned the same number Ladder Diagram Representation Statement List Representation 0001 LD NOT 10001 0002 FUNC 04 MCR P1 14 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display 0001 INS lt S Initial display Press the key sequence 0001 INS lt S a K LD NOT I 1_ Le me LJ Press the A key 0002 INS lt S Press the key sequence 0002 INS lt S FUNC 04_ MCR Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 247 Press the S key 0002 MCR lt S P0O1 _ Press the key sequence 0002 MCR lt S P01 14_ ENT Press the 3 key 0003 INS lt S Programming Example for END MCR Function The following example shows an END MCR function assigned a LABEL number of 14 that is to be paired with the above nested MCR function assigned the same label number Ladder Diagram Representation MC014 END MCR l Statement List Representation 0021 FUNC 08 ENDMCR P1 14 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display Initial display 0021 INS lt S 9 248 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Press the key se
69. Double precision signed integer range signed integer or word value to be within a 115 RANGW 142 Word range specifiedrange 115 GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 31 2 Table 9 4 Statement List Language Standard Functions and Function Blocks Continued Abbreviation Page FunctionNo FunctionName Description 9 xx OperationFunctions AND Bitwise and Bitwise and two words 122 OR Bitwise or Bitwise or two words 126 XOR Bitwise exclusive or Bitwise exclusive or two words 130 NOT Bitwise one s complement Bitwise negate one s complements a word 134 SHL Bit shift left Shift all bits in a word array left a given number of bit 137 positions SHR Bit shift right Shift all bits in a word array right a given number of bit 143 positions ROL Bit rotate left Rotate all bits in a word array left a given number of bit 149 positions ROR Bit rotate right Rotate all bits in a word array right a given number of bit 155 positions BITSET Bit set Set a particular bit in a string to a 1 161 BITCLR Bit clear Set a particular bit in a string of bits to 0 165 BITTST Bit test Determine if a certain bit in a string of bits is setto 1or 0 169 BITPOS Bit position Determines which bit in a string of bits is set to 1 172 MSKCMPW 143 Masked Compare Word Compare contents of two bit strings 16 bit words with 176 ability to mask selected bits MSKCMPD 144
70. EEPROM To read load the contents of a previously programmed Series 90 Memory Card or EEPROM into RAM memory follow this procedure 1 Inprogram mode press the READ VERIFY key READ MEM CARD lt S If EEPROM is desired press the key to toggle the selection to EEPROM 2 Then press the ENT key twice to complete the read operation see Reading Program Logic Only for selective read The above screen will be displayed while the transfer is taking place This time is approximately 1 35 one minute 35 seconds for an OK program in a Model 311 READ OK lt S Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Storing RAM to the Memory Card or EEPROM To store write a copy of the contents of RAM memory into a Series 90 Memory Card or EEPROM follow this procedure Note for the Model 340 or 341 use steps 1 2 an 3 for all other models use only steps 1 and 3 1 In program mode press the WRITE key WRITE MEM CARD lt S If EEPROM is desired press the key to toggle the selection to EEPROM 2 Then in the Model 340 or 341 press the ENT key to choose the number of registers to save either 9999 or 2048 The second line of the display will read REGS TO SAVE 9999 To save 2048 registers instead press the key to toggle the selection to 2048 3 For all models press the ENT key to complete the write operation The above screen will be dis
71. February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Editing Functions and Function Blocks Functions and function blocks are programmed by first pressing the FUNC key followed by a one or two digit function number with the exception thatTMR ONDTR UPCTR DNCTR can also be selected by pressing the applicable key on the HHP Refer to appendix C for a list of supported functions and function blocks All functions and function blocks except for the CEND LABEL ENDMCR NOOP and END functions have at least one Boolean input several have more than one Boolean input The logic controlling a Boolean input must be programmed prior to the actual programming of the function or function block For those functions and function blocks with more than one Boolean input the logic for each input must be programmed in top to bottom order Many functions and function blocks have a single Boolean output which either indicates a result of the operation or merely propagates power flow In addition many functions and function blocks have parameters which must be specified as part of programming them Refer to the following sections in this chapter for information on Boolean inputs Boolean outputs and parameters associated with each function and function block The functions CEND LABEL ENDMCR NOOP and END are referred to as single instruction sequences These functions have no Boolean inputs or Boolean output When one of them appears it is treated as an instruction sequence cons
72. Function 27 Bit Position BITPOS Function 28 Parameter P1 Timer Accuracy P2 Preset Time P3 TimerLocation P1 Timer Accuracy P2 Preset Time P3 TimerLocation P1 Timer Accuracy P2 Preset Time P3 TimerLocation P1 Preset Value P2 Counter Location P1 Preset Value P2 Counter Location P1 Begin string P2 Bit to Set P3 String Length P1 Input P2 Input P3 Output P1 Begin String P2 Bit to Set P3 String Length P1 Input P2 Input P3 Output P1 Begin String P2 Bit to Test P3 String Length P1 Input P2 Input P3 Output P1 Begin String P2 String Length P3 Destination Logicmaster Abbreviation Toun Tun Toun ORS B52 ORS B52 ORS B52 Default Display Format signed decimal signeddecimal signeddecimal signed decimal signeddecimal signeddecimal signed decimal signeddecimal signeddecimal signed decimal signeddecimal signed decimal signeddecimal signed decimal signeddecimal signeddecimal signed decimal signeddecimal signeddecimal signed decimal signeddecimal signeddecimal signed decimal signeddecimal signeddecimal signed decimal signeddecimal signeddecimal signed decimal signeddecimal signeddecimal signed decimal signeddecimal signeddecimal GFK 0402G D 1 gt Table D 1 Function Parameters continued Logicmaster Default Function Parameter Abbreviation Display Format LogicalNO
73. High Limit R0 04 HSC lt S HI LIM x 32767 These screens are used to specify the highest most positive value of the count accumulator The default is 32767 which is the maximum value the Type A counters can handle As with the time base use the Hand Held Programmer numeric keys to change the value then press the ENT key to record it Pressing CLR instead of ENT cancels the entry Screens 12 25 Low Limit R0 04 HSC LO LIM x These screens specify the lowest most negative value for the count accumulator Screens 13 26 ON Preset Value R0 04 HSC lt S ON PST x 32767 When the counter accumulator reaches this value depending also on the value of the OFF preset the associated output is turned on depending on the state either enabled or disabled of the output control flags in the Q data word Chapter 4 Series 90 Micro PLC Configuration 4 21 Screens 14 27 OFF Preset Value RO 04 HSC lt S OFF PST x 0 This value is used in conjunction with the ON preset to indicate the accumulator value at which the associated output point will be turned off Screens 15 28 Preload Value R0 04 HSC PRELD x 0 This parameter specifies the value that will be loaded into the accumulator when the associated PRELOAD input on the terminal strip is asserted Screen 29 PWM Output R0 04 HSC lt S PWM OUT4 DISBL This screen selects PWM pulse width modulation as the counter 4 output Note th
74. INT RANGI P1 Lower limit value L1 signeddecimal Function 140 P2 Upper limit value L2 signeddecimal P3 Value to be compared IN signeddecimal Range DINT RANGDI P1 Lower limit value L1 signeddecimal Function 141 P2 Upper limit value L2 signeddecimal P3 Value to be compared IN signeddecimal Range WORD RANGW P1 Lower limit value L1 signeddecimal Function 142 P2 Upper limit value L2 signeddecimal P3 Value to be compared IN signeddecimal Masked Compare Word MSKCMPW P1 Firstbitstring signed decimal Function 143 P2 Second bit string signeddecimal P3 Bit string mask signeddecimal P4 Start of nextcompare signeddecimal P5 words in string signeddecimal P6 Copy of M bit string signeddecimal P7 of last compare bit signeddecimal Masked Compare DWord MSKCMPD P1 Firstbitstring signed decimal Function 144 P2 Second bit string signeddecimal P3 Bit string mask signeddecimal P4 Start of nextcompare BIT signeddecimal P5 words in string LEN signeddecimal P6 Copy of M bit string Q signeddecimal P7 of last compare bit BN signeddecimal D 8 Hand HeldProgrammerSeries90 30 20 MicroProgrammableControllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G A Abbreviations hand held programmer Micro plc common counter Type A counter Type B Access levels protection mode 5 ay constant sweep mode parameter 3 6 m constant sweep setting parameter b 7 Analog I O modules input 32 uration 5 27
75. Language 9 107 P1 Input 1 lt P2 Input 2 Logic for controlling enable power flow Value to be compared P1 Power flow output to a coil or another function Other value to be P2 compared lt means less than Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element 2 Type of function either Function 56 LT or Function 76 DPLT 3 Parameter P1 input 1 one of the values to be compared This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored 4 Parameter P2 input 2 the other value to be compared This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored The following tables specify which memory types are valid for each of the LT and DPLT function parameters Allowable Memory Types for LT Function 56 ee Eee e eer E pe e e a e Allowable Memory Types for DPLT Function 76 eo e e e ee a a a ee ee Note that double precision constants are constrained to the range 32 768 to 32 767 9 108 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G Programming Example for LT Function This example of programming uses the LT function 9 In this example when input I0001 is closed passing power flow to the enable input the data located in register 240 Par
76. Memory location for the starting bit P04 Location Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This logic must start with an LD element 2 Logic controlling the reset input from the left bus This logic must start with an LD element 3 Logic controlling the direction input from the left bus This logic must start with an LD element 9 214 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 4 Parameter P1 STEP the number of the step that the pointer is to go to when power flow is received at the reset input This can be a constant value or a memory address location where the value is stored 5 Parameter P2 STRI starting memory address where the stage bit sequencer is stored in memory address which contains the first step of the stage bit sequencer 6 Parameter P3 LEN a constant value specifying the number of steps in the stage bit sequencer 7 Parameter P4 LOC the number of the first register of the three sequential registers containing the operating values The following table specifies which memory types are valid for each of the SEQB function parameters Allowable Memory Types for SEQB Function 47 a A e e Te Tai a E Tenno e e e a N a Only positive constants are allowed except 1 which indicates no step parameter Only constant 1 which
77. Micro PLC 4 8 Type B counter Micro plc HHP installation High speed counter configuration Micro plc e Series 90 30 I OConfiguration analogI Omodules 16 channel current input 16 channel voltage input 8 channel current voltage input current voltagecombinationinput output auto configuration automatic configuration 5 7 Genius communications module high speed counter Series 90 30 I Olinkinterface module I Oslots intelligent I O module 5 17 intelligent I O modules 5 17 keypad functionality 5 8 non intelligent I O module 5 9 non intelligent I O mode Ba es coprocessor module 5 22 reading a saved configuration 6 7 remote I O rack 5 selecting rack size selecting slots in rack slots for I O modules 5 5 system configuration default 90 30 5 14 I Olinkinterface configuration I O scan in sweep mode parameter I Oslots configuration of 1C693CBL303 cable for HHP Input references discrete Input register references analog Installation HHP INT Index Integer to BCD Conversion BCD Func tion 80 9 225 Intelligent I O modules Internal references discrete J Jumper user PROM option 2 1 K Key change OEM cancel Key click parameter Key sequences special 2 8 Key OEM Keypad functionality data mode 7 2 in I O configuration mode Keys edit display 4 2 4 numeric l program transfer bd L Less than comparison LT function 56
78. OFF gt ON Preset lt OFF Preset gt OFF Preset lt ON Preset lt OFF Preset lt ON Preset gt ON Preset gt OFF Preset The output may be either on or off when the accumulator value lies between the Preset points ON OFF a42970 PRESET PRESET ON CONDITION INCLUDES PRESET POINTS OFF ON PRESET PRESET OFF CONDITION INCLUDES PRESET POINTS For example COUNTS ACCUMULATOR a43003 VALUE axe OFF PRESET VALUE ON PRESET VALUE TIME CORRESPONDING ON OUTPUT OFF GFK 0402G Chapter 4 Series 90 Micro PLC Configuration 4 13 4 14 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 Location of Preset Points The Preset points may be located anywhere within the counter range When the accumulator value is between the Preset points the output ON OFF state will always be that of the lowest most negative Preset point When the accumulator value is not between the Preset points the output ON OFF state will be that of the most positive preset This is true regardless of the counter direction The following example compares the output state and accumulator value of a 16 bit counter OUTPUT lt 4 COUNTER RANGE gt i ON i i 0 i 8000H COUNTER OFF ACCUMULATOR ON_ COUNTER 7FFFH MINIMUM LOW PRESET ENTA s PRESET HIGH MAXIMUM LOWLIMIT LIMIT lt gt LIMIT HIGH LIMIT If both preset points are within
79. P01 1 input P02 2 and output Q P03 are all 16 bit words If input P2 and output P3 begin at the same reference a 1 placed in the bits specified by P1 will cause the corresponding bit specified by P2 and P3 to alternate between 0 and 1 changing state with each scan as long as power is received Longer cycles may be programmed by pulsing the power flow to the function at twice the desired rate of flashing The power flow pulse should be one scan long one shot type coil or self resetting timer If discrete memory types are used for parameters P1 P2 and P3 the beginning address must be on a byte boundary Power flow through this function will follow the condition of this functions enable input Logic controlling the enable Em E Power flow output to coil enable input or another function Location of value or P03 Location of Results constant to be XORed Location of value or constant to be XORed Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element 2 Type of function Function 27 XOR 3 Parameter P1 input 1 one of the values to be XORed This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored 4 Parameter P2 input 2 the other value to be XORed This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored 5 Parameter P3 Q The memory location where the resul
80. PLC or Series 90 Micro PLC Relay Ladder Logic GFK 0402G The basic programming structure of a programmable controller is relay logic The ladder logic is made up of a group of logic elements called rungs The relay ladder rungs as drawn on paper have two sides with contacts function blocks function blocks explained later in this chapter and coils connecting the two sides together The left side is called the power bus simulating the L1 side of the power line This is the starting side and usually has input coils and coil contacts attached to it The right side is the side of this logic group and usually has outputs and coils attached to it Contacts are basic symbols used to represent conditions to be evaluated in order to determine the control of an output coil Each contact and coil has a label attached to it which identifies the external or internal device that it represents This label is also the programmable controllers internal storage location for storing the conditions of this contact or coil A contact may represent the status of an external push button attached to an input to the PLC If this was the first input to the PLC the contact would normally be labeled 10001 I for input and 0001 for the number of the input it represents A contact can also represent the status of an internal or external output coil In this case it would have the same label as the coil Coils are usually labeled with a Q for an external real world
81. Press the ai key gt Press the key sequence 1 Press the A key Press the key sequence B Q AJJ L Press the S key 0004 INS lt S 0004 INS lt S FUNC 47_ SEQB 0004 SEQB lt S PO1 _ 0004 SEQB lt S P01 I2_ 0004 SEQB lt S P02 _ 0004 SEQB lt S P02 Q 17_ 0004 SEQB lt S P03 _ Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Press the 0003 SROB lt S key sequence Press the ay key 0004 SEQB lt S P04 _ Press the key sequence 0003 SEQB lt S P04 R 1_ Press the ai key 0005 INS lt S Press the key sequence DERE Press the ENTI key 0006 INS lt S J ey BQ OUTM AQ OUT GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 219 9 Communications Request COMMREQ Function 88 The communications request function COMMREQ is a conditionally executed function which allows the program to communicate with an intelligent module such as a Programmable Coprocessor Module in the system The information presented here shows the format of aCOMMREQ function Additional information is required in order to program the COMMREQ for each type of device This information can be found with the documentation for each intelligent module function faulted logic When the COMMREQ function receives power flow to t
82. Press the key Each time that you press the key allows the selection of other combinations of program configuration and or registers which will be read from the device All possible combinations or these three data types can be read When the lower line of the display contains the desired combination to be read Press the ew key READ MEM CARD lt S PRG XXXX Note that the address displayed at the end of the lower line will be continually updated as the read operation progresses If the read is completed successfully the HHP will display READ OK lt S If an error is detected during the read operation an error message will be displayed for example READ PRG ERR lt S Chapter 2 Operation 2 19 2 20 If an error is detected the contents of the PLC logic program will be cleared If the attempt had been to read more then one type of data for example program and registers then each of those types of data would have been cleared upon detection of an error Differing CPU Models If the CPU model of the source PLC is not the same as the CPU model of the target CPU then the model must be changed when the configuration is read from the device For example the device may have been written using a Series 90 20 model 211 CPU and the contents of the device are being read into a Series 90 30 model 311 CPU This changing of the CPU model type applies ONLY when reading configuration To read the contents of a dev
83. Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Description of Parameters for Search Not Equal To Functions Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the operation is performed AR P01 AR contains the starting address of the array to be searched Input NX P02 Input NX contains the index into the array IN P03 IN contains the object of the search LEN P04 LEN specifies the number of elements starting at AR that make up the array to be searched Output NX P05 Output NX holds the position within the array of the search target FD FD indicates that an element whose value is not equal to IN has been found and the function wassuccessful Allowable Memory Types for Search Not Equal To Functions Parameter How Wl O OM WT 5 6G HR WAT MAG const none E a ea eee leet TT ES PCAN PC RO RC PCO o iO SS Fa i E ee ee ee eee Pa Mae alee ae 2 eae af ae aa Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function Valid reference for INT BYTE or WORD data only not valid for DINT Valid reference for BYTE or WORD data only not valid for INT or DINT SA SB SC only S cannot be used ou ou ul 5 O o GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 273 9 Search Less Than Byte SRLTB Function 109 Search Less Than Word SRLTW Function 110 Search Less Than INT SRLTI Function 111 Search Less Than DINT SRLTDI Function 112 The Se
84. Programmer The analog I O modules included in this section are IC693ALG222 Voltage Input 16 Channels 1IC693ALG223 Current Input 16 Channels IC693ALG392 Current Wltage Output 8 Channels IC693ALG442 Current Wltage Combination Module 4 Input 2 Output Channels For detailed information on Series 90 30 Analog I O modules refer to GFK 0898 the Series 90 30 Programmable Controller I O Module Specifications manual Configuring the 16 Channel Voltage Input Module The 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input module catalog number IC693ALG222 provides up to 16 single ended or eight differential input channels each capable of converting an analog input signal to a digital value for use as required by your application This module provides two input ranges e Oto 10 V unipolar e 10to 10 V bipolar Voltage Ranges and Input Modes GFK 0402G The default input mode and range is single ended unipolar with the user data scaled so that 0 volts corresponds to a count of 0 and 10 volts corresponds to a count of 32000 The other range and mode are selected by changing the configuration parameters using the Logicmaster 90 30 configurator software or the Hand Held Programmer The range can be configured for bipolar 10 to 10 V where 10 V corresponds to a count of 32000 0 V corresponds to a count of 0 and 10 V corresponds to a count of 32000 High and Low alarm limits are available on all rang
85. R The key is used to toggle between the RUN MODE and STOP MODE states Pressing the key initially selects RUN MODE Press the key RUN MODE lt R Pushing the key toggles the selection to STOP MODE Press the key STOP MODE lt R Each time the key is pressed the mode is toggled When the desired operating mode is displayed on the screen the change is initiated by pressing the ENT key Press the key 0001 lt S lt END OR PROGRAM gt Note that the PLC State field now indicates stopped by lt S being displayed Enter the Insert Mode of Operation Press the key 0001 INS lt S Blinking You are now ready to enter an element into Step 1 0001 on the screen This is the beginning of the program and the beginning of a rung of logic therefore the contact must be a normally open or normally closed series contact GFK 0402G GFK 0402G 9 Enter a normally open contact that is attached to the left power bus and reference this contact to input number 1 10001 The ladder logic will look like the following I0001 The statement list for the above ladder logic is 0001 LD 10001 Initial display 0001 INS lt S Press the key 0001 INS lt S A exits Press the key sequence At this point if an error was made or a wrong key was pressed press the CLR key as many times as needed to clear the ERROR and re enter the data or start over Se
86. R0001 through R0016 is read and then written to the destination R0104 through R0108 of the array R0100 through R0115 Ladder Diagram Representation P06 R0100 P05 Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 FUNC 132 MOVAW P01 MO001 P02 3 P03 5 P04 5 P05 16 P06 R0100 0003 OUT Q0001 GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 299 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display 0001 INS lt S Initial display Press the key sequence LD if 1 Press the key 0001 INS Press the key sequence 0002 INS lt S FUNG 2 FUNC 132_MOVAW Press the key 0002 MOVAW lt S POl _ Press the key sequence 0002 MOVAW lt S P01 R 1_ Press the at key 0002 MOVAW lt S P02 _ 9 300 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Press the 3 key Press the key Press the key Press the key Press the key Press the A key Press the key sequence Press the S key GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 0002 MOVAW lt S P02 3_ 0002 MOVAW lt S P03 _ 0002 MOVAW lt S P03 5_ 0002 MOVAW lt S P04 _ 0002 MOVAW lt S P04 5_ 0002 MOVAW lt S PO5 _ 0002 MOVAW lt S PO5 16_ 0002 MOVAW lt S PO6 _ 9 301 Press the key sequence
87. RUN key The desired state run mode or stop mode is then selected The key is used to toggle between the run mode and stop mode states Pressing the key initially selects run mode pressing the key again toggles the selection to stop mode Each time you press the key the mode is toggled When the desired operating mode is displayed on the screen press the ENT key In the following example the current operating state of the PLC in the configuration mode is changed from run mode to stop mode 1 If protect mode is selected the initial display screen would appear as LEVEL3 lt R This screen indicates that the PLC is running executing a program as shown by the lt R in the PLC state field upper right corner of the display screen 2 Press the RUN key to initiate a change in the PLC operating state PRESS lt gt KEY lt R 3 Press the key to initially select run mode RUN MODE lt R Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 4 Press the key again to toggle the selection to stop mode STOP MODE lt R Each time the user presses the key the mode is toggled When the desired operating mode is displayed on the screen the user initiates the change by pressing the ENT key 5 Then press the ENT key LEVEL3 lt S This screen indicates that the PLC is now stopped as indicated by the lt S in the P
88. S Bree ey OPERE 0002 NO SUBR If you have accessed the subroutine from a Subroutine Call Function in other subroutines use of the zoom out key sequence as shown above will return you one call level at a time If you have accessed the subroutine from a Subroutine Call Function in the Main program the key sequence Z will return you to the location of that Call in the Main program Otherwise this key sequence will return you to the Declaration Level in Subroutine Mode where you had first zoomed into a subroutine OUT OUTM If you are at the subroutine declaration level already you can either declare additional subroutines using the above method cursor up or down to subroutines that are already declared and zoom into them for editing zoom back to the main program Call Subroutine Function by entering the Z key sequence or return to Program Mode by pressing the MODE key Subroutine Deletion In order to delete an existing subroutine from the program you must be at the subroutine declaration level using the key sequence described above Once in the Subroutine Declaration level you can cursor to the subroutine being deleted and enter the DEL ENT key sequence Subroutines that are called in the main program or in other subroutines cannot be deleted If this is attempted an error will be detected by the program check and the error message USE ERR will be displayed on the HHP screen Chap
89. S R 0 P03 R100_ Press the S key 0005 PIDISA lt S P0O4 _ 0005 INS lt S FUNC 86_ PIDISA FUNC Press the key sequence B Oo 9 264 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Press the key sequence 0005 PIDISA lt S P04 R3_ Press the ay key 0006 INS lt S Press the key sequence CJ Press the ENTI key 0007 INS lt S J ey BQ AQ OUT OUTM GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 265 9 Subroutine Call CALLSUB Function 90 9 266 Entering a Subroutine Call Function 90 When a Subroutine Call Function is entered see Entering Subroutines page 9 7 that subroutine will be automatically declared although it will be a null program no logic until you define it To define the subroutine zoom into it through the CALLSUB instruction or from the Subroutine Declaration List and enter the desired logic The Subroutine Call function has one parameter P1 which is the number of the subroutine you want to call The following example shows how to enter a Subroutine Call function Assume that you want to implement the following logic aE SI0001 Sa aL IAT sub Programming Example for CALLSUB Function The statement list instructions that you will enter to call subr
90. Search Less Than or Equal To functions are shown in the following illustration The form of the function is the same for all Search Less Than or Equal To functions the only difference being the data type Logic for controlling enable BAES M power flow Starting address of array P1 Set to 1 if element found 0 if not found P4 Length of array Index into array P2 P5 Set to position in array of element Object of search P3 9 276 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Description of Parameters for Search Less Than or Equal To Functions Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the operation is performed AR P01 AR contains the starting address of the array to be searched Input NX P02 Input NX contains the index into the array IN P03 IN contains the object of the search LEN P04 LEN specifies the number of elements starting at AR that make up the array to be searched Output NX P05 Output NX holds the position within the array of the search target FD FD indicates that an element whose value is less than or equal to IN has been found and the function wassuccessful Allowable Memory Types for Search Less Than or Equal To Functions Parameter How I O MOM WT HS RG VR AT WAG const none Ha a eee teeta tt ee eee ia a a Es a Ee ee a Se i ae ee ee ee ee ee ee
91. Series90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Counter Type This parameter specifies the counter configuration type A4 selects four identical independent Type A counters B1 3 A4 selects one Type B counter for A Quad B counting and one Type A counter Output Failure Mode If the module detects a loss of the CPU it can respond in three different ways e itcan continue to operate normally processing the inputs and controlling the outputs according to its configuration NORMAL e itcan force all four outputs to turn off FRCOFF e the module can hold the outputs at the current state HOLD These responses remain in effect until the CPU returns to operation or the module is power cycled Counter Direction Each counter can be configured to count either up or down The default is Up Counter Mode Each counter on a module has programmable count limits that define its range The counter can either count continuously within these limits or count to either limit then stop Continuous Counting In the continuous counting mode if either the upper or lower limit is exceeded the counter wraps around to the other limit and continues counting Continuous counting is the default mode Single Shot Counting If single shot counting is selected the counter will count to its upper or lower limit then stop When the counter is at the limit counts in the opposite direction will count i
92. Speed Counter function and the abbreviations for those parameters as they are displayed on the Hand Held Programmer Note that parameters 1 through 4 are common to both A and B type counters Definitions for each parameter are provided on pages 4 11 through 4 15 For detailed information on operation of the Series 90 Micro PLC High Speed Counter function see GFK 1065 the Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual Table 4 2 Common Parameter Abbreviations HHP Screen Default Number HHP Abbreviation Parameter Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 FAILMODE NORMAL FRCOFF HOLD Counter Type Output Failure Mode NORMAL GFK 0402G Chapter 4 Series 90 Micro PLC Configuration 4 7 Table 4 3 Abbreviations for All Type A Counter Configuration HHP Screen HHP Parameter Number Abbreviation Value 1 Value 2 Default Counter1 Enable Disable DISABLE Counter 1 Output Enable Disable DISABLE Counter 1 Preload Strobeelection PRELOAD Counter 1 PWM Output Enable Disable DISABLE Counter 1 PulseOutputEnable Disable DISABLE Counter Enable Disable DISABLE Counter 2 Output Enable Disable DISABLE Counter 2 Preload Strobeelection CTR2 PRELOAD Counter 2 PWM Output Enable Disable DISABLE Counter 2 PulseOutputEnable Disable 32 PULSEOUT2 ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE These parameters apply only to DC IN DC OUT type Series 90 Micro PLCs 4 8 Hand Held Programmerfor Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Cont
93. Statement List 0001 LD 10001 0002 RSTM Q0001 Key Strokes HHP Display Initial display 0001 INS lt s Press the key sequence Press the key 0002 INS lt S Press the key sequence a LJ Press the key 0003 INS lt S e LD RSTM RST GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 27 SERIES PARALLEL CONTACTS WITH A LATCH To implement the following logic using LD OR NOT AND NOT SET 0001 0002 0003 0004 Key Strokes Initial display Press the key sequence aut Br LJ Press the key o Press the key sequence E OR E OR Fir 2l 3 fa i Press the key 10001 NOT 10003 NOT 10002 Q0001 HHP Display 0001 INS lt S 0001 INS 0002 INS lt S OR NOT I 3_ 0003 INS lt S Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G Press the key sequence D F A gt AND NOT 7 Press the ay key Press the key sequence SETM SETM BQ i SET SET AQ f Press the A key Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 0003 INS lt S AND NOT I 2_ 0004 INS lt S 0005 INS lt S 9 29 9 Data Types Data types include the following Table 9 3 Data Types Name Descripti
94. Sweep Mode is enabled in the PLC during RUN mode then the Active Constant Sweep Setting parameter can be used to adjust the sweep time This allows you to fine tune the sweep time while the PLC is running a program Changing this parameter does not affect the Configured Constant Sweep Setting parameter The Active Constant Sweep Setting is only valid during the current RUN mode as long as Active Constant Sweep Mode is enabled Upon going from STOP to RUN mode the Configured Sweep Setting parameter value is copied to the Active Sweep Setting parameter If the Active Constant Sweep mode is disabled this parameter is ignored The active constant sweep value can range between 5 and 200 milliseconds Use the Right cursor key to scroll through the PLC parameters until the Active Constant Sweep setting ACT CONS TM parameter is displayed To set the active sweep time enter a value between 5 and 200 milliseconds and press the ENT key The default setting is 100 milliseconds Configured Constant Sweep Mode Parameter The PLC can be configured to use a constant amount of time per sweep The Constant Sweep Mode parameter should be enabled when I O points or register values must be polled at a constant frequency such as in control algorithms The Configured Sweep Mode parameter can be overridden by the Active Constant Sweep Mode parameter during RUN mode but upon going from STOP to RUN mode the Configured Sweep Mode parameter value is copied to the Acti
95. The RANGE function has four parameters a Boolean enable EN limit 1 L1 limit 2 L2 and an input IN The RANGE function can operate on either signed integer INT double precision signed integer DINT or word WORD values The default data type is signed integer however it can be changed after selecting the function When the logic controlling the enable input EN to the function passes power flow the function is enabled by the CPU and the RANGE function block will compare the value in input parameter IN P03 against the range specified by the values in the limit parameters L1 P01 and L2 P02 The values specified by L1 and L2 must be the same data type When the value in IN is within the range specified by L1 and L2 inclusive output parameter Q is set ON 1 Otherwise Q is set OFF 0 enable INT limit parameter I1 eeu es ale output parameter Q limit parameter I2 oie value to be compared 203 Note Limit parameters L1 and L2 represent the end points of a range There are no minimum maximum or high low connotation assigned to either parameter Thus a desired range of 0 to 100 could be specified by assigning 0 to L1 and 100 to L2 or 0 to L2 and 100 to L1 Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element 2 Type of function either Function 140 RANGI Function 141 RANGDI or Function
96. To select configuration mode press the MODE key to display the operating mode selections _ 1 PROGRAM lt S 2 DATA 2 Press the 4 key to select configuration mode 4 1 PROGRAM lt S 2 DATA 3 2 Hand Held Programmerfor Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 3 Press the ENT key to enter the new mode The first screen displayed will be R0 00 for Model 311 321 and 313 323 or RO 01 for Model 331 340 341 351 and Model 211 Model 211 is Series 90 20 This is the first PLC configuration screen displayed Use the Z keys to view the other parameters and the key to select the variable for a parameter Keypad Functionality RO 00 PLC KEY CLK lt S OFF The following table gives an overview of how the keypad on the Hand Held Programmer is used in PLC configuration mode Table 3 2 Keypad Functionality in PLC Configuration Mode Key Group 0 9 VAI A Q AQ B M T C AND D OR E NOT F HEX DEC CLR Up and Down cursor keys Left and Right cursor keys ENT RUN MODE Description Specify a slot number or PLC parameter value value format can be either binary signed decimal or hexadecimal A F these keys are used for entering hexadecimaldigitsA F Change the display format between decimal hexadecimal and 8 bitbinary Toggle the PLC configuration parameter setting Abort or cancel the current operation
97. a AN ADEN A DINT R0199 P1 I1 Q RO0203 R0201 P2 I2 Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 OUT MO0001 0003 LD MO0001 0004 FUNC 67 DPDIV P1 R0199 P2 R0201 P3 R0203 0005 OUT Q0001 After pressing Key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display 0001 INS lt S Initial display Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 79 9 80 Press the sequence Press the key fo e Press the key sequence OUT OUTM a fe E l y Press the a key Press the key sequence f T Press the S key Press the key sequence LJ Press the key FUNC Py 0002 INS lt S 0003 INS lt S 0004 INS lt S 0004 INS lt S FUNC 67_ DPDIV 0004 DPDIV lt S POI _ Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Press the key sequence GJU Press the ay key Press the key sequence B00 o Press the S key Press the key sequence EEEE Press the J key Press the key sequence OUT em er LJ Ba AQ Press the A key Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 0004 DPDIV lt S PO1 R 199_ 0004 DPDIV lt S
98. a coil input or another function Beginning of bit string P01 IN Number of bit in bit PO2 IBIT string to be set Length of bit string in Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element 2 Type of function Function 26 BITTST 3 Parameter P1 IN the memory address location for the first word in the bit string containing the bit to be set 4 Parameter P2 BIT the number of the bit in the bit string to be tested This can be a constant or a memory location containing the value 5 Parameter P3 LEN specifies the length of the bit string in words This isaa constant number The following table specifies which memory types are valid for each of the BITTST function parameters Allowable Memory Types for BITTST Function 26 eea ce e Enma e e a e T e e e E ea sea E e E e ee GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 169 Programming Example for BITTST Function In this example output Q of the function block will be set to the current state of I0007 in the bit string 10001 10032 Ladder Diagram Representation BIT_TST I0001 P1 IN const P2 BIT 7 P3 0002 Statement List Representation 0001 LD MO0015 0002 FUNC 26 BITTST P1 10001 P2 7 P3 2 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes HH
99. a constant specifying the number of words each word is 16 bits long that will be connected together to form the total number of bits in the group Parameter P4 Q the memory address location where the first word of the group of words containing the results of the bits that have been rotated is to be stored The following table specifies which memory types are valid for each of the ROR function parameters Allowable Memory Types for ROR Function 33 ER a N B A E Benene e EES B S B S D O E COA A A EE t Only SA SB and SC are used S cannot be used Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G 9 Programming Example for ROR Function In the following example a contact for a one shot OUT is used as the controlling element for power flow to the enable function When input one closes passes power flow M0001 will pass power flow to the input of the ROR function for one sweep of the CPU scan Therefore ROR will occur only once When the ROR function takes place the 48 bits of register RO032 RO033 and R0034 specified by parameter P1 will rotate right two bit spaces N P2 2 The result will be placed into the 16 bit words of registers R0032 R0033 and R0034 specified by parameter P4 any register or memory location could have been used here it does not have to be the same as the input location Parameter P2 is a co
100. address specified by parameter P2 and ending at the highest address which is an address equal the address specified by parameter P2 plus the number of addresses specified by the LEN constant parameter P3 minus one The bits stored in the memory location specified by parameter P4 Q and parameter P1 IN are not changed by the reset of this function Power flow to the reset input is dominant over power flow to the enable input That is if power flow is received at both the enable and the rest input at the same time no shift or move of memory contents will take place and all of the 16 bit of each word in every memory location from the lowest to the highest location in the group of memory locations will be set to zero Power flow through this function will follow the condition of the enable input Parameters P1 P2 and P4 are memory locations representing 16 bit words Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 201 WORD IN 5 Shift Locations P3 16 BITS lt First memory address location 16 BITS gt of shift register Number of words Memory address in shift gt location of word Register to be shifted in P3 P1 WORD OUT pee V _ ve Memory address gt 16 BITS location of word shifted out of the group of locations P4 _ Last and highest location of the group of locations Power flow through this function Logic controlling crab IE controlling another function
101. ai 24 VDC SBA MAX 0 8 i 1 felel elel oe lt rm H gt w a44646 Q E Fa ag O ce O N O pwr GE Fanuc o arzsase7e A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 _ A12345678p A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 SERIES90 30 pun B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 O BATT STANDARD POWERSUPPLY PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER ES Xe A N Figure 5 1 Series 90 30 Model 311 or Model 313 Programmable Logic Controller 5 1 An example of a 5 slot and a 10 slot Series 90 30 PLC Model 331 340 341 or 351 PLC is shown in the following figure Models 331 340 341 and 351 look physically the same a4456 OPWR CPU O GE Fanuc 0 ox A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 SERIES90 30 O RUN B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 O BATT STANDARD Lh o POWER SUPPLY PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER INPUT 100 240 VAG 50 60 HZ S0VA 125VDC 50W wees 24 VOC OUTPUT 0 8A MAX i pg
102. also rack type will remain EMPTY Reading a Saved Configuration When a saved configuration is read from a user memory device EEPROM UVEPROM MEM card or flash memory the type of each rack that was configured when the data was saved is restored Each rack is compared to the restored configuration and if the rack types are different a mismatch alarm is generated for slot 0 of that rack Modules in that rack will not be scanned until the mismatch is corrected If the DEFAULT I O CPU parameter is enabled in the configuration being read the configured type for each rack in which a module will be configured is set to the type of rack actually present None of the modules in a rack that is configured to be a type different then the rack actually present will be scanned In addition COMM_REQ function blocks whose target module is in such a rack will have their fault output set if the COMM_REQ is executed The parameters of intelligent I O modules in such a rack cannot be edited with the HHP Loss mismatch or addition of module alarms will be generated for modules in the rack as if the rack were not mismatched For example if the module in slot 4 matches the module configured for slot 4 then no alarm will be generated for that slot GFK 0402G Chapter 5 I O Configuration 5 7 Keypad Functionality 5 8 The following table is an overview of how the keypad on the Hand Held Programmer is used in I O Configuration mode Table 5 1 Keypa
103. an Operating Mode 6 666 c ccc eee eens 2 8 Read Wiite Wrify Functions 0 0 cece eee eee 2 9 Starting StoppingthePLC 1 6 eens 2 9 Canceling a Mode Change 6 6 6 2 11 User PROM Optlott ee ero ee ae eee Whe a ede 2 11 Series 90 Memory Card q Jeres cence 2 13 Program ConfigurationPortability 0 2 17 Chapter 3 Series 90 30 20 PLC Configuration 0 cece eee e eens 3 1 Entering Configuration Mode 66 c cece nnn 3 2 Keypad Functionality ereserki eeraa eee 3 3 Display Format srete ie pietia hoe ee VEE eV ae sy 3 4 Locating a Slot or Rack and PLC Parameters 0 000 cece 3 4 Key Click Parameter Tas roosen irere h E rE acts aa bie wae E lates 3 5 Clock Parameter Sors omaa eitea EEA tetas ELE EE a EA bene 3 5 Program Source Parameter unuunu ranan eens 3 6 Register Source Parameter 0 06666 3 6 Power Up Mode Parameter 6 60 cee 3 6 Active Constant Sweep Mode Parameter 000 0c cease 3 6 Active Constant Sweep Setting Parameter 0 00000 3 7 Configured Constant Sweep Mode Parameter 004 3 7 Configured Constant Sweep Setting Parameter 0 3 7 I O Scan in Stop Mode Parameter 00 0000 c cece eee eee ee 3 8 vi Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Contents Dual Use Checking Parameter 1 0
104. and Rack 0 Slot 1 for Model 331 Model 340 Model 341 and Model 351 Use the right arrow key to advance to the password enable and disable screen The initial display screen shows that passwords are enabled RO 01 PLC lt S PASSWRD ENABLE 2 Press the key the display will toggle to password disable RO 01 PLC lt S PASSWRD DISABLE 3 Press the ENT key RO 01 PLC lt S lt ENT gt Y lt CLR gt N 4 Since password protection cannot be easily re enabled this screen will prompt you to confirm the request to disable it Chapter 8 PLC Control and Status 8 3 Pressing the CLR key cancels the disable request and no change will occur Pressing the ENT key confirms the request and password protection will be disabled If you attempt to re enable password protection on this screen by pressing the key again the request will be denied and an error message will be displayed The same error message will be displayed if you attempt to later password protect RO 01 PROTECT lt S PASSWRD DISABLE any access level through the protect mode function Keypad Functionality 8 4 The following table gives an overview of how the keypad on the Hand Held Programmer is used in protection mode Table 8 3 Keypad Functionality in Protection Mode Key Group 0 9 I AJA Q A B M TC AND D OR E NOT F CLR Up cursor key Down cursor key Right cursor key Left cursor key DEL ENT RUN MODE D
105. and data is stored This memory is battery backed CMOS RAM User Reference Type A reference assigned to data which indicates the memory in which it is stored in the PLC References can be either bit oriented discrete or word oriented register Verify A function used to compare program configuration and reference data between the CPU and memory card or EEPROM Volatile Memory Atype of memory that will lose the information stored in it if power is removed from the memory devices Requires a backup battery for retention of contents of memory In the Series 90 30 PLC a Lithium battery is used for this purpose Watchdog Timer A timer in the CPU used to ensure that certain hardware conditions are met within a predetermined time The watchdog timer value in the Series 90 30 PLC is 200 milliseconds Word A measurement of memory length usually 4 8 or 16 bits long in the Series 90 PLCs a word is 16 bits in length Write To transfer record or copy data from one storage device to another for example from CPU to memory card or EEPROM Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Glossary of Basic Instructions and Reference Types for Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Software Developed Programs Basic Instruction Specific Term Generic Term normally open contact contact normally closed contact contact _ coil coil
106. array values less than a specified word value Search for all array values less than a specified integer value Search for all array values less than a specified double precision integer value Search for all array values less than or equal to a specified byte value Search for all array values less than or equal to a specified word value Search for all array values less than or equal to a specified integer value Search for all array values less than or equal to a specified double precision integer value Search for all array values greater than a specified byte value Search for all array values greater than a specified word value Search for all array values greater than a specified integer value Search for all array values greater than a specified double precision integer value Search for all array values greater than or equal to a specified byte value Search for all array values greater than or equal to a specified word value Search for all array values greater than or equal to a specified integer value Search for all array values greater than or equal to a specified double precision integer value Copy a specified number of elements from a bit source array to a bit destination array Copy a specified number of elements from a byte source array to a byte destination array Copy a specified number of elements from a word source array to a word destination array Copy a specified number of elements from an integer source array to an integer
107. as specified by P1 is multiplied by the value located in registers 201 and 202 as specified by P2 The results of this multiplication is stored in registers 203 and 204 as specified by P3 If the value of this multiplication is in the range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 power flow will be passed on to the output coil Q0001 for only one scan of the CPU only while the enable input has power flow For example if register 199 has a value of 75 in it and register 201 has a value of 20 in it after input 1 closes the value in register 203 will be 1500 75 x 20 1500 Ladder Diagram Representation M0001 e A Mun DINTI R0199 P1 I1 Q RO0203 R0201 P2 12 Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 OUT MO0001 0003 LD MO0001 0004 FUNC 65 DPMUL P1 R0199 P2 R0201 P3 R0203 0005 OUT Q0001 After pressing Key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display 0001 INS lt S Initial display Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Press the key sequence A SR E Press the ay key 0002 INS lt S Press the key sequence 7A o OUT OUTM y LJ Press the ENTI key 0003 INS lt S J ey Press the key sequence LJ Press the ENTI key 0004 INS lt S J ey Press the key sequence M
108. between run and stop mode in any mode Specify a signed decimal or hexadecimal constantin program mode Change display format between binary signed decimal and hexadecimal in data mode Change display format between decimal hexadecimal and 8 bitbinary in configurationmode Program Transfer Keys The Program Transfer keys are located in the blue shaded area in the lower right portion of the keypad They include the READ VERIFY and WRITE keys Table 2 4 Program Transfer Keys Description Read or verify the memory card or system EEPROM in program mode Read configuration of module currently installed in slot Write the memory card or system EEPROM in program mode 2 6 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Power Up Key Sequences The key sequences listed below can be used during power up to provide additional start up instructions for the PLC or to override the previous configuration When used to override the previous configuration these keys must be depressed simultaneously while the ROM CHECK OK amp RAM CHECK OK screen is being displayed and held depressed until the mode screen is displayed on the HHP The keys must be pressed simultaneously until the ROM CHECK OK RAM CHECK OK message is removed from the screen During power up the PLC may be instructed to totally clear all data stored within it This includes progra
109. cece cece eee eens 8 8 Locking and Releasing OEM Protection 0 00 cece eee ee 8 8 Canceling an OEM Protection Operation 00 00 e eee 8 9 Displaying and Modifying the OEM Key 0 00 e eens 8 9 Removing OEM Protection 06666 8 11 Canceling an OEM Key Change 606 c cece eee 8 11 Reading EEPROM Memory Card or Flash Memory With an OEM Key 8 11 Subroutine Protection Levels 6 666 8 12 GFK 0402G Table of Contents ix Contents Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language eee eee 9 1 Relay Ladder Logic 2 0 cece eens 9 1 Entering a Programi orci 05 etacteul aA BO E ely bk ates nay 9 5 Guidelines for Entering Programs 00 0000 c cece eee eee eee 9 6 Entering Subroutines arassa naaa o EA eens 9 7 How to Enter a Logic Element Using the HHP 9 11 DatacTy pes mori t o AE EAE E E AA oink EEE EE 9 30 Standard Functions and Function Blocks 0 cess eee 9 31 Section 1 Timers and Counters cc cee eee eee eee 9 37 Stop Watch Timer TMR Function 10 aanas c eee eee eee 9 39 On Delay ONDTR Function 13 0 0 cee eee 9 43 Off Delay OFDTR Function 14 000000 9 48 Up Counter UPCTR Function 15 2 0 0 eee eee 9 53 Down Counter DNCTR Function 16 0 0 00 e eee eee eee 9 57 Section 2 Arithmetic Functions 0 cece eee eens 9 61 Addition ADD Function
110. completed when the lt END OF PROGRAMS step is reached Press the CLR key to abort search mode Assume that the following simple program already exists in the PLC and that the first step is currently being viewed Both the Ladder Diagram LD and Statement List SL forms of the program are given Examples follow of the usage of the search operation to view this program 6 12 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Ladder Diagram Representation TMR O 1s CONST PV 00025 R0001 Representation of the Ladder Diagram in Statement List Programming Language 0001 LD 10001 0002 OR NOT Q0001 0003 FUNC 10 TMR P1 10 P2 25 P3 R0001 0004 OUT Q0001 Using the MODE key and the ENTER key go to the Program mode of operation Also use the RUN key the key and the ENTER key to be sure the PLC is in the stop mode of operation 0001 lt S Initial display LD I0001 O Search For Q1 Press the key 0001 SRCH lt S Press the key sequence 0001 SRCH lt S Q 1_ Press the key 0002 lt S OR NOT Q0001 J GFK 0402G Chapter 6 Program Edit 6 13 Press the SRCHI _ 0002 lt S ENT 0004 lt S Press the ezl OUT Q0001 O Search for TMR Instruction Press the ISRCH 0004 SRCH lt S Press the E key 0004 SRCH lt S FUNC 10_ TMR Press the ENT key 0003 lt S FUNC 10 TMR
111. configuration Micro PLC functions remote I O rack Slot selection in rack 4 Slot rack locating 5 10 Special contact references B 1 Square root double precision integer function 71 9 87 Square root integer function 70 Stage bit sequencer SEQB function 47 9 212 Index 9 Index Start stop PLC P 9 Table Functions Statement List Language ee eo arithmetic functions B 61 pen a basie emeni programming examples array move 9 292 programming examples search func tions bit operation functions 9 121 control functions 9 233 conversion functions 9 224 s arch egual qual to data move functions 9 183 search greater than 9 278 editing search greater than or equal to 9 280 i functions and function blocks search less than 9 274 search less than or equal to 9 276 9 279 entering a program search not equal to 9 function blocks search array 9 269 relational functions 9 90 Tables reference relay ladder logic 9 1 f standard functions 9 31 Temporary references discrete timers and counters 9 37 Terms glossary of Statement list Language table functions Timers and Counters 9 268 down counter DNCTR 9 57 off delay timer OFDTR Status references system on delay timer ONDTR 9 43 Stop bits parameter stop watch timer TMR 9 39 up counter UPCTR 9 53 Stop watch timer TMR function 10 9 39 Top reference select
112. contact for a one shot OUT is used as the controlling element for power flow to the enable function Thus when input one closes passes power flow MO0001 will pass power flow to the input of the ROL function for one sweep of the CPU scan Therefore ROL will occur only once When the ROL function takes place the 48 bits of registers R0030 R0031 and R0032 specified by parameter P1 will rotate left two bit spaces N P2 2 The result will be placed into the 16 bit words of registers R0002 ROO03 and R0004 specified by parameter P4 Parameter P2 is a constant of 2 specifying the number of bits to be rotated shifted each time a rotate is executed P3 specifies the number of words to be connected together to form the total number of bits in the word Before Rotate Left a43864 yroos0 1 folololililololililololololi 1 Ssa gt FA ypoost 1folililolilolololilolil1lololo Sy gt AMn R0032 1 1 l lol lolololi ilolololo ololilol SH gt After Rotate Left a43865 R0002 ol olililololilia lolololol1alifi 4 R0003 1 1lolilolololijolilifololo 1lo R0004 1ololololilololololololiloli1lo Ladder Diagram Representation I0001 ta Ub 2o M0001 t Ub ROL WORD R0030 Pl IN QI P4 R0002 LEN 001 P3 0003 CONST P2 N 0002 Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 151 9 152
113. current value will increment until the decimal number 32767 is reached This up counter will pass power flow when the current value is equal to or greater than the the number programmed as the preset value When the logic controlling the reset R input passes power flow to the reset input the current value will be reset to zero and the power flow through this function will be removed Power flow to the reset input is dominant over the count input If power flow is being received at the reset input when the count input goes from a condition of no power flow to a condition of power flow the current value will stay at a value of zero and will not increment These power flow conditions are shown in the following table this table is applicable to both the Up Counter and Down Counter functions PowerFlow Condition at ResetInput Power Flow at Counter Input Power Flow Through This Counter Previous Current Condition Execution Counter Execution CV w PV No No CV does not increment CV increments by 1 Yes CV does not increment Yes CV does not increment Yes CV resets to zero Off CV resets to zero Off CV resets to zero Off CV resets to zero Off CV cur rent value PV preset value Yes power flow No no power flow lt less than W greater than or equal to When there is no power flow to the enable input and the preset value is changed to less than the current count power flow will pa
114. data tables within the programmable controller Entering Data Mode In order to display the data tables you must first select the data mode of operation 1 2 GFK 0402G To select data mode press the MODE key to display the operating mode selections _ 1 PROGRAM lt S 2 DATA Press the 2 key to select data mode 2_ 1 PROGRAM lt S 2 DATA 3 Press the ENT key to invoke the new mode The first screen displayed in data mode will be gt I0001 0 I0002 0 Upon entering this function the display defaults to what was displayed the last time the reference tables function was selected since the PLC was powered up If this is the first time data mode was entered the discrete inputs I table is displayed I0001 is the topmost reference displayed and binary is the display format Keypad Functionality 7 2 The following table gives an overview of how the keypad on the Hand Held Programmer is used in data mode Table 7 1 Keypad Functionality in Data Mode Key Group TMR ONDTR UPCTR DNCTR I AI Q AQ M T G S R HEX DEC 0 9 I AJA Q A B M TC AND D OR E NOT F CLR Up and Down cursor keys Right cursor key Left cursor key ENT RUN MODE Description Change display format totimer counter automatically selectregister tableif notdisplayed Specify a memory reference type Change display format between binary signed decimal and hexadecimal Specify a
115. eal B 9 cancel 3 13 clock VEI er B 1 3 5 configuration mode B one sweep mode parameter 3 1 3 7 one sweep setting parameter 3 1 3 7 cpu id parameters data bits paramster 5 9 defaultl O B dual use eine parameter B 1 3 8 I Oscan parameter B 1 3 8 key click parameter 3 1 ace turnaround time parameter 3 9 parameter listing parity parameter password enable Tabi B 10 port idle time parameter 3 1 B 9 power up mode parameter B 6 program source parameter 5 1 3 6 register source parameter stop bits parameter B 9 PLC control and status 8 1 PLC parameters Micro 4 2 Port idle time parameter Index Portability program configuration 2 17 Power up disconnect 2 2 beat vea key seq a eg mode 2 7 ine p modes options sequences Power up mode parameter Program check Program Edit abortinsert edit 6 20 complete insert replace delete program delete step displaystep Se 5 description of 6 enter instruction type 6 enter operand insert step 4 F monitor program on line changes program syntax errors replace st step search 6 Program entry guidelines Program Mode enter 6 2 exit keypad summary 6 2 Program organization and user refer ences data retentiveness of data 1 5 transitions and overrides Program protection 8 1 Program source parameter 3 6 Program entering Program config
116. ee ee ee ee fg ee I I ae elt ae et Se ee ots Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function Valid reference for INT BYTE or WORD data only not valid for DINT Valid reference for BYTE or WORD data only not valid for INT or DINT SA SB SC only S cannot be used 65 O o oil GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 277 9 Search Greater Than Byte SRGTB Function 117 Search Greater Than Word SRGTW Function 118 Search Greater Than INT SRGTI Function 119 Search Greater Than DINT SRGTDI Function 120 The Search Greater Than functions are conditionally executed functions which are used to search for all array values greater than a specified value Each function has four input parameters and two output parameters When the function receives power the array is searched starting at AR input NX This is the starting address of the array AR plus the index into this array input NX The search continues until the array element whose value is greater than the search object IN is found or until the end of the array is reached If an array element is found the output parameter FD is set to true and output parameter output NX is set to the relative position of this element within the array If no element is found with a value less then IN before the end of the array is reached then output parameter FD is set to false and output parameter output NX is set to zero The
117. es ce ec ce a e Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function Constants are limited to integer values for double integer operations GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 87 Allowable Memory Types for DPSORT Function 71 Parameter Row RO eM MT MS MG VR GAT AQ const none enable ee SH HH 4 FS aa ee ee a a ee S Fe eS Pcs Oe FE e Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function Constants are limited to integer values for double integer operations Programming Example for Square Root Function In the following example the square root of the constant 180 is calculated When input 50005 closes passes power flow the SQRT function is executed The value 13 which represents the integer portion of the result will be placed in AI001 and the OK output will be set to TRUE Ladder Diagram Representation AI0001 Statement List Representation 0001 LD S0005 0002 FUNC 70 SORT P01 180 P02 AI001 0003 OUT Q0001 After pressing Key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display 0001 INS lt S Initial display Press the key sequence G G Le LE Led 9 88 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G NS o Press the ai key Press the key sequence CJL FUNC Press the J key Pre
118. first of eight which defines the relative mapping of each node 16 through 23 inclusive on the Genius bus into the global G memory space By default 32 bits are assigned to each node accounting for the full 256 bits supported by the module The following table shows the starting address and data size for each bus address Bus Address Starting G Reference Address Valid Data Size Bits 16 G0001 0 256 17 G0033 0 224 18 G0065 0 192 19 G0097 0 160 20 G0129 0 128 21 G0161 0 96 22 G0193 0 64 23 G0225 0 2 32 Press the Right cursor key to view each of the default node bus address assignments In this example the Genius Communications module will occupy bus address 17 6 Press the Right cursor key to display the screen showing 17 as the bus address RO 06 GCM BA17 lt S G032 G0033 G0064 The asterisk character preceding the bus address indicator BA17 denotes that address as being assigned to the Genius Communications module for data transmission All other nodes are for data reception from other devices 7 For this example the Genius Communications module will be configured to support 32 bits on node 16 64 bits on node 17 and 128 bits on node 20 Nodes 18 21 22 and 23 will not support any data as they are covered by the requirements of nodes 17 and 20 No device is installed on node 19 so it will not be used 8 Node 16 is already configured for 32 bits by default so no change is required 9 Press
119. found the output parameter FD is set to true and output parameter output NX is set to the relative position of this element within the array If no element is found with a value less then IN before the end of the array is reached then output parameter FD is set to false and output parameter output NX is set to zero The valid values for the input NX are 0 to LEN 1 This value increments by one at the time of execution Therefore the values of the output NX are 1 to LEN If the value of the input NX is out of range lt 0 or w LEN its value is set to the default value of zero The function parameters for the Search Greater Than or Equal To functions are shown in the following illustration The form of the function is the same for all Search Greater Than or Equal To functions the only difference being the data type Logic for controlling enable BAES m power flow Starting address of array P1 Set to 1 if element found 0 if not found P4 Length of array Index into array P2 P5 Set to position in array of element Object of search P3 9 280 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Description of Parameters for Search Greater Than or Equal To Functions Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the operation is performed AR P01 AR contains the starting address of the array to be searche
120. func 76 9 107 double precision less than or equal to comparison func 74 9 111 double 73 PS equal comparison 9 95 func 73 19 95 double precision signed integer range function 141 9 115 equal func 52 9 91 greater than comparison func 57 greater than or equal comparison func 55 6 103 less than comparison func 56 less than_or equal to comparison func not equal comparison func 53 9 95 signed integer range function 140 9 115 word range function 142 9 115 Relational functions NE DPNE 9 90 RANGI RANGDI RANGW Remote I O rack configuration of Removing OEM protection Index Replacing a configuration S Screens configuration Micro plc Type A counter 4 16 type B counter 4 20 Search Functions list of search equal to search greater than 9 278 search greater than or equal to 9 280 search less than 9 274 search less than or equal to 9 276 9 273 search not equal to Selecting a different top reference 7 7 Selecting rack size 5 3 Selecting slots in a rack Series 90 Micro plc connection to Series 90 20 connection to aa PLC compatibility with 4 4 45 Series 90 30 connection to Service request programming example 9 252 Shift register bit GHFRB function 46 9 208 Shift register SHFR SHFRW function 45 5 201 Signed integer 9 30 Slot assignments automatic configuration 5 7 default configuration 5 14 manual
121. function examines each bit in the memory location specified by P1 input 1 and the corresponding bit in the memory location specified by P2 input 2 beginning at the first lowest addressed bit in each For each two bits examined if both are 1 then a 1 is placed in the corresponding location in the string of bits starting at the location specified by P3 output Q If either or both bits is 0 then a 0 is placed in the corresponding location in the string of bits starting at the location specified by P3 The three parameters P01 input 1 P02 input 2 and P03 Q are all 16 bit words If discrete memory types are used for parameters P1 P2 and P3 the beginning address must be on an 8 point boundary Power flow through this function will follow the conditions of this functions enable input Logic for controlling enable ower flow output to a coil enable input or another function WORD Location of value to P01 I1 QI I P 03 Location of Results be ANDed or a constant P02 I2 Location of value to ANDed or constant Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element 2 Type of function Function 23 AND 3 Parameter P1 input 1 one of the values to be ANDed This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored 4 Parameter P2 input 2 the other value to be ANDed This can b
122. function passes power flow to the functions enable input the function is executed by the CPU and a new Do I O function will take place During the execution of a Do I O function the logic solving portion of the CPU scan is suspended placed on hold and a specified group of real world inputs or output are serviced updated That is the on off condition of the specified inputs are placed into memory or the data from the CPU memory is sent out to update the specified hardware outputs This takes place when the step containing this Do I O is solved during the logic solution portion of the CPU scan and does not wait for the normal output scan which takes place at the end of the logic solution or the input scan which takes place just before the logic solution portion of the CPU scan The normal input and output scans will still take place at their regular time during the CPU s total scan Only one type of real world inputs or outputs may be updated during a single execution of a Do I O function and only those inputs or outputs that are in the range specified by parameters P1 ST and P2 END Parameter P1 ST is the starting address of the group of real world inputs or outputs to be serviced The reference associated with the starting and ending address must have the same prefix I Q AI or AQ The update of the inputs and outputs during this Do I O function is performed in groups of eight 8 points at a time when discrete inputs or outputs
123. input module is configured at I0001 through 10016 in slot 10 of a 10 slot main rack the ST parameter must be 10001 the END parameter must be 10016 and the ALT parameter must be 10 as shown below 9 240 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G The following table compares the execution times of a normal DOIO function block for an 8 point 16 point or 32 point discrete input output module with those of an enhanced DOIO function block Normal DOIO Enhanced DOIO Module Execution Time Execution Time 8 Pt Discrete Input Module 224microseconds 67microseconds 8 Pt Discrete Output Module 208microseconds 48microseconds 16 Pt Discrete Input Module 224microseconds 68microseconds 16 Pt Discrete Output Module 211microseconds 47microseconds 32 Pt Discrete Input Module 247microseconds 91microseconds 32 Pt Discrete Output Module 226microseconds 50microseconds Terminate Program Logic Execution ENDSW Function 0 The terminate program logic execution function ENDSW is an unconditionally executed function which acts as a temporary program logic execution stream terminator It is normally used during system debug ENDSW is an unconditionally executed function which terminates the execution of program logic instructions This function is normally not used in a program but may be used as a temporary end of program while debug
124. installed in the PLC backplane or a Series 90 Memory Card inserted into the Hand Held Programmer For either secondary storage device the following PLC data is always stored Program logic Statement List instructions e Registers e Slot configuration data e Passwords OEM key Functionality is provided for writing reading and verifying this data with either an EEPROM or Series 90 Memory Card This functionality is available only in program mode when the PLC is stopped and not scanning I O Series 90 30 CPU models 340 341 and 351 and the Series 90 Micro PLC can have data written to flash memory During a write to flash there is no in progress indication Other CPU models that use EEPROM as a storage device do have an in progress indication during a write operation Starting Stopping the PLC GFK 0402G The PLC may be started or stopped while in the Mode Selection screen or in any of the four major operating modes program data protection or configuration Selecting RUN STOP Mode from Mode Selection Screen The initial mode selection screen indicates that the PLC sweep is in the STOP mode as shown by the lt S in the upper right corner of the display screen Initial display _ 1 PROGRAM lt S 2 DATA To select the RUN mode Press the key PRESS lt gt KEY lt S After exiting the RUN STOP Sweep Mode function the HHP will return you to the Mode Select menu Chapter 2 Operation 2 9 2 10 Sel
125. instruction press the ENT key Replace mode is exited with the just replaced instruction still displayed When you press the ENT key to accept an instruction the instruction is checked in its entirety to ensure that the instruction is correct and that all required operands have been specified For functions only the current parameter is checked Any constant reference address or function number present is checked to ensure that it falls into the range of acceptable values An INS ERR message will be displayed if any errors are found Exiting Program Mode To exit the program edit function press the MODE key The mode selection screen will be displayed 1 PROGRAM lt S 2 DATA GFK 0402G Chapter 6 Program Edit 6 21 Chapter Reference Tables The Reference Table function data mode enables you to view and change the contents of data tables within the PLC You can also change the format of the display to better reflect the numerical base and type of the data items The following tables can be accessed from within the Reference Tables function Discrete inputs I Discrete outputs Q Internal coils M Temporary coils T Discrete globals G System status references S SA SB and SC Analog inputs AIT Analog outputs AQ Register references R System register references SR This chapter describes how to enter the data mode of operation and how to view and or change the contents of
126. it requires This description includes any associated I O reference range mapping the number of parameters a text string for each parameter to be used as a prompt the valid data value range for each parameter and the default data display format binary signed decimal or hexadecimal which the data should be displayed input in In order for this information to be used you must indicate to the PLC that it should read the indicated slot in which the intelligent module resides If the indicated slot does not contain a module the configuration request will be refused and an EMPTY message will be displayed You must then install the desired module in the slot and attempt the operation again GFK 0402G Chapter 5 I O Configuration 5 17 Section 3 Genius Communications Module The Series 90 30 Genius Communications module is an intelligent module that provides automatic global data communications between a Series 90 30 PLC and other PLCs Refer to GFK 0412 Series 90 30 Genius Communications Module User s Manual for more information on this module Refer to the Series 90 30 Enhanced Genius Communications Module User s Manual GFK 0695 for information on configuration of that module with the Hand Held Programmer Reading a Configuration The Genius Communications module cannot actually be read to determine its current configuration When a command is initiated to read the slot containing a Genius communications module the PLC will respond
127. key 0004 INS lt S Press the key sequence J LJ Press the key 0005 LD H zZ n A n Press the amp sequence Press the key 0005 SHR lt S PO1l _ Press the key sequence 0005 INS lt S 1 FUNC 31 _ SHR Fund 0005 SHR H i j k P01 R 10_ Press the key 0005 SHR lt S P02 _ Press the key sequence 0005 SHR lt S P02 1_ Press the key 0005 SHR lt S P03 _ GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 147 Press the key sequence 0005 SHR lt S P03 2_ Press the S key 0005 SHR lt S P04 _ Press the key sequence LF Press the J key 0005 INS lt S Press the key sequence f Press the A key 0007 INS lt S 0005 SHR lt S P04 R 20_ B i OUT OUTM Ba AQ 9 148 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Bit Rotate Left ROL Function 32 GFK 0402G The bit rotate left function ROL is a conditionally executed function which rotates all bits in a word array left a given number of bit positions LSB When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable EN input the function is executed by the CPU During the execution all of the bits in a word or a group of consecutive 16 bit words connected togeth
128. logic instructions The optional Series 90 Memory Card or EEPROM can be used at any point to save or recall a particular version of the program While attempting to debug a logic program you may need to view and modify data in one or more reference tables Selecting data mode allows you to accomplish this Once in data mode you can view any of the PLC reference tables in binary hexadecimal or signed decimal format Only the system register R table can be viewed in timer counterformat Chapter 1 Introduction to the Hand Held Programmer 1 7 Once a system has been properly configured and its logic program is functioning correctly you may want to protect parts of the system from any changes Selecting protection mode allows you to password protect certain types of changes A special OEM protection feature can also be enabled to prevent unauthorized access GE Fanuc LCD 5 SCREEN TWO LINES 16 CHARACTERS PER LINE SERIES 90 30 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER HAND HELD PROGRAMMER 5 LD OUT SETM RSTM TMR OUTM SET RST ONDTR MODE D E F UPCTR AND OR NOT BLK Sierp RUN AL BPa om a Al AQ T S FUNC DEL KEYPAD lt zils lio llr SRCH 4 5 6 WRITE 4 INS READ 1 2 3 J anl 1 gt HEX ENT o 4 8 S a43409 Ma BS SLOT FOR MEMORY CARD N
129. negated coil coil SET SET coil coil R RESET coil coil T positivetransitioncoil coil negativetransition coil coil M retentivecoil coil M negated retentive coil coil SM retentive SET coil coil RM retentive RESET coil coil horizontallink link verticallink link Reference Type Specific Term Generic Term l input discrete Q output discrete M internal discrete T temporary discrete G global discrete S system discrete SA system discrete SB system discrete SC system discrete R register register AI analog inputregister register AQ analog outputregister register Rnnnn nnnn is the address GFK 0402G Appendix A Glossary A 11 Appendix Special Contact References B In the Series 90 30 and 90 20 programmable logic controllers 128 bits of discrete storage are reserved for special contact references These references are addressed in four groups 1 S0001 S0032 2 SA001 SA032 3 SB001 SB032 4 SC001 SC032 The meaning for each of the 128 system references is listed in the following tables Special Contact References Special Contact References Reference Reference Address Reference _Reference Description Address Reference _ Reference Description T s0o001 Current sweep is the first sweep T Saoo Program checksum failure S0002 Current sweep is the last sweep SA002 Exceeded constant sweep time S0003 0 01 second timer co
130. nesting level is the maximum number 256 which can be assigned to LABEL plus the END MCR limit The MCR function must be located in the program prior to its matching END MCR function New MCR instructions cannot be within the scope of the previous format release 1 MCRs and JUMPs previous format not available in CPU351 In addition the previous format of MCRs and JUMPs can not be programmed within the scope of new MCR instructions The following table specifies which memory types are valid for the P1 parameter of the nested MCR function Allowable Memory Types for Nested Master Control Relay Function 4 7 aS a GN CT END MCR Function 8 The END MCR is an unconditionally executed function is used to resume normal program execution after a nested MCR function The END MCR has one parameter which is a number assigned to LABEL between 0 and 255 This number and the matching LABEL number of a prior nested MCR function identify the scope of the nested MCR function A maximum of 256 LABELS END MCRs and CEND CEND available with release 1 only instructions are allowed in a program The following table specifies which memory types are valid for the P1 parameter of the END MCR function Allowable Memory Types for End MCR Function 8 Parameter I Q M T G S SA SB SC R AI AQ Constant Cee RS ee ee ee CEE fe etfs ape ae 9 246 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable
131. of the program and stops with the first error found If no errors are found the current instruction step remains displayed and no message is displayed The following table lists non system errors and the corrective action required for each error SRCH El ENT Table 10 1 Non System Errors Error T O ERR DATA ERR CEND ER Description Corrective Action Improper nesting of JUMP MCR and orCENDfunc Correct the program logic to eliminate the improper tions The instruction step shown is where the error nesting was detected Overlap of I or AI references between two slot con Eliminate the input address overlap from the config figurations uration Specification of a constant reference address or Change the constant reference address or function function number which is out of the range of accept number to an acceptable value able values GFK 0402G 10 1 Table 10 1 Non System Errors continued Error Description NOTEND Specificationof a search target which was not found within the existing program logic REF ADJ Specification of a reference address which was not on an acceptable boundary for a particular function parameter MEM OVR Attempted to accept additional program logic instruction steps without sufficient user program memory remaining Attempted to exceed the 16K bytes available per subroutineblock PROTECT Attempted an op
132. off delay timer OFDTR increments while power flow is off and resets to zero when power flow is on Time may be counted in tenths of seconds the default selection or hundredths of seconds The range is 0 to 32767 time units The state of this timer is retentive on power failure no automatic initialization occurs at power up When the OFDTR first receives power flow it passes power to the right and clears the current value CV located in the operating registers of the timer The output remains on as long as the function receives power flow If the function stops receiving power flow from the left it continues to pass power to the right and the timer starts accumulating time in CV Each time the function is invoked with the enabling logic set OFF the current value is updated to reflect the time since the timer was turned off When the current value CV is equal to or greater than the preset value PV the function stops passing power flow to the right When the function receives power flow again the current value resets to zero and the output is enabled again ENABLE We Myl A B C D E FG H A ENABLE and Q both go high timer is reset CV 0 B ENABLE goes low timer starts accumulating time C CV reaches PV Q goes low and timer stops accumulating time D ENABLE goes high timer is reset CV 0 E ENABLE goes low timer starts accumulating time F ENABLE goes high
133. or power flow to the a coil enable input WORD Logic controlling power Address of storage location flow to the reset reset for the word shifted out of input the group Number of memory locations in the group Memory address for word to be moved into the shifting register Memory address of the first word of the group of words to be shifted Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element 2 Logic controlling the reset input from the left bus This must start with an LD element 3 Type of function Function 45 GHFRW 4 Parameter P1 IN the address for the memory location which contains the 16 bit word which is to be moved into the memory location left vacant when the word shift took place 5 Parameter P2 ST the memory address location for the first memory location of the group of memory locations containing the words to be shifted 6 Parameter P3 LEN a constant specifying the number of memory locations in the group of memory locations making up the shift register 7 Parameter P4 Q the memory address location where the 16 bit word which was moved out of the group of 16 bit memory locations is to be stored 9 202 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G The following table specifies which memory types are valid for eac
134. or equal to a specified value SRCH_GT Search for all array values greater than a specified value SRCH_GE Search for all array values greater than or equal to a specified value ARRAY MOVE Array Move Copy a specified number of data elements from a source array toa destination array The maximum length allowed for these functions is 32 767 Each of the Table functions can operate on the types of data shown in the following table Data Type Description INT Signed integer DINT Double precisioninteger BIT Bit data type BYTE Byte data type WORD Word data type Only available for ARRAY_MOVE 9 268 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Array Search Functions The Array Search Functions can each operate on byte word integer or double precision integer data types Each of these functions and their function numbers are listed in the following table Table 9 9 Array Search Functions Array Search type Array data Type Abbreviation Function Number Byte SREQB 101 Word SREQW 102 Equal To Integer SREQI 103 Double Precision SREQDI 104 Byte 105 Word 106 Not Equal To Integer 107 Double PrecisionInteger 108 Byte SRLTB 109 Word SRLTW 110 Less Than Integer SRLTI 111 Double PrecisionInteger SRLTDI 112 Byte SRLEB 113 Word SRLEW 114 Less Than or Equal To Integer SRLEI 115 Double PrecisionInteger SRLEDI 116 Byte SRGTB
135. power flow to the for the bit shifted out of reset input the shift register Memory address for bit to P01 to be moved into shift register Starting address of the P02 shift register Length of shift register Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element 2 Logic controlling the reset input from the left bus This must start with an LD element 3 Type of function Function 46 GHFRW 4 Parameter P1 IN the address for the memory location which contains the bit which is to be moved into the shift register 5 Parameter P2 ST the memory address location for the first memory location of shift register 9 208 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 6 Parameter P3 LEN a constant specifying the length of the shift register in bits 7 Parameter P4 Q the memory address location where the bit which was moved out of the shift register is to be stored The following table specifies which memory types are valid for each of the SHFRB function parameters Allowable Memory Types for SHFRB Function 46 co cl e m fa a cee eS Ee ea es ee eae ee E LEN is between 1 and 256 The ending address determined by ST and LEN must not cross reference table boundaries Programming Example for SHFRB Function In this example the bi
136. reference to store and retrieve the double precision number The Hand Held Programmer can only display a maximum of 16 bits one Register AI or AQ word at a time therefore a double precision number outside of the range 32768 to 32767 cannot be monitored using the Hand Held Programmer The hexadecimal or binary number for each register AI or AQ word may be programmed or monitored provided that they are placed together outside of the CPU to form the 32 Bit double precision signed number If the multiplication results in overflow a value outside of the range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 the results of the multiplication will be set to the largest possible value 2 147 483 648 or 2 147 483 647 The sign is set to show the direction of the overflow This function will pass power flow when there is power flow to the enable input and the results of the multiplication are within the range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 no overflow 9 72 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 1 Input 1 x P2 Input 2 P3 Q Logic for controlling enab1e EEN ove flow output to power flow a coil or another function Value to be multiplied P1 The result is stored in this location Other value to be multiplied P2 12 Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 5 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus
137. select the level of coil checking desired SINGLE WARNMULTIPLE or MULTIPLE Refer to Chapter 3 for more information about this feature The Q prefix is followed by the reference s address in the output table for example Q0016 Q refer ences are located in the output status table which stores the state of the output references as last set by the application program This output status table s values are sent to output modules at the end of the programscan Areferenceaddressisassigned todiscrete outputmodulesusing the Logicmaster90 30 20 Micro configuration software or the Hand Held Programmer Until a reference address is assigned no data is sent to the module A particular Q reference may be either retentive or non retentive The M prefix represents internal references The dual use coil checking function of the HHP software checks for multiple uses of M references with relay coils or outputs on functions Beginning with Release 3 of Series 90 30 and Release 2 of Series 90 20 firmware you can select the level of coil checking de sired SINGLE WARNMULITIPLE or MULTIPLE Refer to Chapter 3 for more informationabout this feature A particular M reference may be either retentive or non retentive The T prefix represents temporary references These references are never checked for multiple coil use and can therefore be used many times in the same program even when coil use checking is enabled Because this memory is intende
138. sequence A soll 2 Al Press the S key 0003 INS lt S Lo GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 19 Press the key sequence rele Ee Press the T key 0004 INS lt S D Press the key sequence 0004 INS lt S AND BLK Press the T key 0005 INS lt S Press the key sequence l OUT OUTM OUT OUTM Press the T key 0006 INS lt S Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G NESTED MULTIPLE COILS PILOT LIGHT To implement the following logic coils in parallel using the OUT NOT element Statement List 0001 LD 10001 0002 OUT NOT MO0001 0003 OUT Q0001 Key Strokes HHP Display Initial display 0001 INS lt s Press the key sequence a Te 1 Press the S key 0002 INS lt S Press the key sequence out fF Cy p OUT NOT M 1_ OUTM NOT gt Press the ay key 0003 INS lt S Press the key sequence i Press the ENTI key 0004 INS lt S J ey Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 21 o 0002 INS lt S OUT OUTM BQ AQ NON NESTED MULTIPLE COILS To implement the following logic using LD BLK and OUT BLK elements SI0001 10002 I
139. set to EMPTY 5 When reading registers from a CPU which supports a different number of registers then the target CPU those registers higher then those supported by the smaller CPU will be ignored 6 When configuration is read from one CPU model into a different model the PLC must change the CPU model in the configuration to match the target model After this configuration has been read and the model changed the contents of the configuration in RAM memory cannot be verified with the contents of the configuration on the device 7 The Model 351 CPU does not support the Series 90 Memory Card and its flash memory is not removeable Transporting programs to and from Model 351 CPUs is done using Logicmaster 30 20 Micro software With this exception the following discussions on reading the device also apply to reading data from the Model 351 flash memory A list of the error messages which can be produced as a result of attempting to read a device can be found in Chapter 9 in this manual along with a description of possible causes and corrective actions If the entire contents of the device are not read then the data which was not read remains intact within the PLC For example if only the program is being read then the configuration and registers will remain unchanged by the attempted read regardless of any errors encountered while reading the program Examples of program configuration compatibility operations with the HHP are shown on th
140. setting is 100 milliseconds I O Scan in Stop Mode Parameter By default the PLC will not scan I O in stop mode Enabling this parameter however allows you to debug and test input and output wiring without a control program installed Use the Right cursor key to scroll through the PLC parameters until the I O scan in stop mode STOP MD parameter is displayed Then use the key to toggle the selection between NOI Oand DOI O Dual Use Checking Parameter The dual use checking parameter allows you to select whether or not M and Q references should be restricted to single use as outputs within the user logic program When enabled the system will not allow you to assign the same reference to two different coils Note This feature is not editable in a Model 351 CPU since this parameter applies to the user program not the configuration Use the Right cursor key to scroll through the PLC parameters until the dual use checking COIL US parameter is displayed Then use the key to toggle between SINGLE WRN MUL and MULT By default WRN MUL is enabled When toggling from MULT to SINGLE or WRN MUL the program is checked for multiple coil usage If multiple coils are detected you can go to program mode and find the multiple coil usage with the SRCH 1 key sequence When going to SINGLE the transition is not allowed when going to WRN MUL the transition is allowed SINGLE check prevents using the same M or Q coil refer
141. slot and perform the operation again slot COMMER Communications error during a read write or Make sure that the MEM CARDis inserted properly verify operation with the MEM CARD into the HHP slot and perform the operation again RETNWRN The last instruction entered changed the retentive This message is a warning only The user must de nature of its operand cide whether it is an error or is OK FROZEN Intelligent module s previous configuration being Press WRITE and ENT keys to complete editing of used new parameters REF ER Invalid reference type entered Refer to the appropriate section of this manual to determine the valid reference type for the instruc tion you are entering and choose one PRG ERR Read or Verifyoftheprogramfrom withEEPROM Correct invalid logic ensure that program is consis Mem Card tent with the model of PLC NEST ERR Exceeded CALLSUB nesting level limitation of 8 Remove CALLSUBinstruction s which caused the illegal nesting sequence This error is displayed when you try to zoom into the ninth illegally nested subroutine in the CALL SUB sequence If no zoom is attempted the error will be logged as a fault at runtime CFG ERR Read or Verify ofthe Config from withEEPROM Ensure that Config matches the Config in the PLC Mem Card verify that the PLC model is correct ZOOM ER Attempted to zoom into an instruction that is not a Locate the CALLSUBinstruction you wish to zoom CALLSUB i
142. state of the Series 90 30 PLC where the CPU no longer executes the application program STOP mode can either be STOP OUTPUTS DISABLED or STOP OUTPUTS ENABLED InSTOP OUTPUTS DISABLED mode the PLC only communicates with the programmer and other devices GBC PCM etc recovers faulted boards reconfigures boards and executes background tasks All other portions of the sweep are skipped InSTOP OUTPUTS ENABLED mode the PLC CPU can monitor I O This feature provides a way to monitor and debug I O without actually executing the application program Storage Used synonymous with memory Sweep The CPU s repeated execution of all program logic I O service peripheral service and self testing This occurs automatically many times each second Termination Resistor Pack Aresistor pack used to properly terminate the I O bus signals physically installed inside of the terminator plug Terminator Plug A plug containing a resistor pack which must be installed at the end of the I O bus chain to properly terminate the I O bus signals In a Series 90 30 Model 331 Model 340 and Appendix A Glossary A 9 A 10 Model 341 PLC system this plug must be installed on the unused connector on the last I Oexpansion cable in the I O bus chain Timer A function block that can be used to control the operating cycle of other devices by a preset and accumulated time interval User Memory The portion of system memory in which the application program
143. tables identifies the protection available at each of the four levels of user password protection capabilities Note that Level 1 access is always available it can not be password protected Levels 2 3 and 4 can all be password protected to prevent unauthorized access to certain functions The second table shows how access to the different functions is modified when the OEM level of protection is engaged Note that in the OEM protection mode the end user s privileges of reading or writing to viewing and changing the logic program are taken away Table 8 1 Password Protection CO eem Data Configuration Passwords M a a ae ee ewe oe e eR a a We EE Not OEM protected OEM key unlocked R Read privilege W Writeprivilege GFK 0402G 8 1 Table 8 2 OEM Protection Module Program Data Configuration Passwords e o eae E Ee ee ee ee ee a ee ios ae l Ee a a ee ae ae R Read privilege W Writeprivilege The actual access availability to the different functions of the programmable controller at a given time is governed by the last level which was viewed on the HHP screen This availability of access level can automatically change when disconnecting the Hand Held Programmer from the programmable controller or by cycling power on the PLC In either case the access level is returned to a default level If the programmable controller is not password protected all levels have a NULL password this defaul
144. the Right cursor key to display node 17 Node 17 needs to support 64 bits so this setting must be modified by pressing the key sequence 6 4 ENT RO 06 GCM BA17 lt S G064 G0033 G0096 10 Node 18 is skipped because its 32 bits are used as part of node 17 s configuration No device is installed as node 19 so no data is expected from it Press the Right cursor key to display node 19 then press 0 ENT RO 06 GCM BA19 lt S GOOO GFK 0402G Chapter 5 I O Configuration 5 19 Note that the 32 references associated with node 19 G0097 GO128 are now lost to the user 11 Press the Right cursor key to display node 20 Then press the key sequence 1 2 8 RO 06 GCM BA20 lt S G 128_ 12 Press the ENT key RO 06 GCM BA20 lt S G128 G0129 G0256 Since all 256 bits are now accounted for you will not be allowed to view the settings for nodes 21 22 or 23 or make assignments to them Creating a Generic Module Configuration 5 20 TheG Skey may be used to configure a slot for a Genius Communications module not currently installed in the slot 1 With slot 6 displayed in its initial state as empty press the G S key 2 Then press the ENT key The same default configuration is established as previously described Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable ControllersUser s Manual February1996 GFK 0402G Section 4 High Speed Counter The Series 90 30 High Speed Counter HSC catalog num
145. the destination array N provides a count indicator of number of elements to be moved LEN specifies the number of elements starting at SR and DS that make up each array DS contains the starting address of the destination array For Bit Array Move any discrete reference may be used it does not need to be byte aligned However 16 bits beginning with the reference address specified are displayed online The ok output is energized whenever the function is enabled Allowable Memory Types for Array Move Functions EE ie E oe ee ee EA E E E E e e a E A E Tb E Pe E E ee Rees eee is aie eee ee ee ee eee EE E ea E E ee e E E EEA E E E MAM Lx je T E T T oa e th eed e Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function For Bit Array Move discrete user references I Q M and T need not be byte aligned o Valid reference for INT BIT BYTE or WORD data only not valid for DINT A Valid data type for BIT BYTE or WORD data only not valid for INT or DINT t SA SB SC only S cannot be used Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 291 Programming Examples for Array Move Functions The following examples illustrate how to enter the Bit Byte and Word Array Move Functions on the HHP The ladder diagram representation of the example is shown followed by the equivalent HHP statement list and the key sequence required to enter the statement list Example 1 Bit Array Move
146. the program copy in RAM should be used or that the program copy in EEPROM should be loaded into RAM and used This can be helpful when you are running a program without battery backup Use the Right cursor key to scroll through the PLC parameters until the program source PRG SRC parameter is displayed Then use the key to toggle the selection between RAM and EEPROM By default the program copy in RAM will be used Register Source Parameter At power up you can specify that the register table R values in RAM should be used or that the register table initialization values in EEPROM should be loaded into RAM and used This is also useful when you are running a program without battery backup Use the Right cursor key to scroll through the PLC parameters until the register source REG SRC parameter is displayed Then use the key to toggle the selection between RAM and EEPROM By default the register table copy in RAM will be used Note Setting this parameter to EEPROM has no effect unless Program Source is also set to EEPROM Power Up Mode Parameter The PLC can be configured to always power up in one of these modes 1 RUN mode 2 STOP mode 3 The SAME mode Powered Down in SAME PD STOP mode should be used when the program is not fully debugged or requires manual intervention during start up RUN mode on the other hand should be used when manual intervention is neither required nor allowed The normal selecti
147. the valid memory types each of the parameters for the SUB and DPSUB functions Allowable Memory Types for SUB Function 62 ee ee oe Fa an a De De a e FESS OI e a a E Allowable Memory Types for DPSUB Function 63 EE EC CC AC TAS ee ee ee ee ee RSS Sco e e a E E A E Note that double precision constants are constrained to the range 32 768 to 32 767 9 68 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G 9 Programming Example for Subtraction This example of programming uses the DPSUB function In this example a contact from a one shot OUT is used as the controlling element for power flow to the enable function When input I0001 closes passes power flow M0001 will pass power flow to the enable input of the SUB function for one sweep of the CPU scan Therefore the subtraction will occur only once When the subtraction takes place a decimal number representation of the binary bits located in memory locations AI33 through AI64 as specified by P2 will be subtracted from the value stored in register 200 and 201 as specified by P1 The results will be stored in registers R203 and R204 as specified by P3 If the value of this subtraction is in the range of 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 no overflow power flow will be passed on to the coil Q0001 for only one CPU scan only while the enable input receives power flow For examp
148. there is power flow to the enable input and the value specified by parameter P1 is greater than the value specified by parameter P2 Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 99 Logic for controlling enable power flow Value to be compared P1 Power flow output to a coil or another function Other value to be compared P2 P1 Input 1 gt P2 Input 2 gt means greater than Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element 2 Type of function either Function 57 GT or Function 77 DPGT 3 Parameter P1 input 1 one of the values to be compared This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored 4 Parameter P2 input 2 the other value to be compared This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored The following tables specify which memory types are valid for each of the GT and DPGT function parameters Allowable Memory Types for GT Function 57 Allowable Memory Types for DPGT Function 77 oe ee eae ee en Note that double precision constants are constrained to the range 32 768 to 32 767 9 100 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G 9 Programming Example for Greater Than Function This example
149. to the appropriate limit and the integral storage is adjusted accordingly This is referred to as anti reset windup After the control variable is calculated it is placed in the manual register Ref 13 and in the control variable storage register YoRef 16 when the control is in auto mode When the function block is placed in manual mode power flow is passed to the manual input the control variable output is held to the value in the manual register and the manual register can be incremented or decremented by the up or down inputs to the function block The manual register can also be loaded under program control in manual mode Bumpless operation is provided between manual and automatic modes because the integral storage term is adjusted while in manual mode much as it is when a clamp or limit is reached In manual mode the control variable output is still restricted by the configured clamps and the slew rate limit The slew rate limit can be used to prevent an operator from trying to adjust the control variable too quickly while in manual mode Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 259 Difference between the PIDISA and PIDIND Functions The standard ISA PID algorithm PIDISA applies the proportional gain to each of the proportional differential and integral terms as shown in the block diagram below 243858 DIFFERENTIAL SP gt TERM BIAS By DEAD PROPORTI
150. values are CURRENT VALUE The current value is the present count or elapsed time since the timer counterstarted PRESET VALUE The preset value indicates how many time units tenth of a second or hundredth of a second or counts the function should delay from the time the function received power flow to the time it passes power flow through it CONTROL WORD The control word is used to store the state of the enable input Q output and the timer accuracy These values are located in and occupy three sequentially numbered register locations of the register memory The lowest numbered register of the three is the defining location for this timer or counter Table 9 5 Operating Registers and Register Locations Consecutive Data Located in the Register Registers current value CV register 1 preset value PV register 2 Programmed as the Timer CounterLocationRegisterAddress The timer counter location register register 1 is the register number that is programmed as parameter P3 timer location when programming a timer and as parameter P2 counter location when programming a counter The data found in this register is the current value of the timer or counter it represents The preset value can be found in the second of the three consecutive registers which for a timer is programmed as parameter P2 and for a counter is programmed as parameter P1 The third register of the three consecutive registers has the control word stor
151. with each memory location containing a 16 bit word The number of 16 bit memory storage locations in the sequentially numbered group of storage locations is specified by the constant programmed in P3 the LEN parameter maximum 512 for a model 311 CPU 2048 for a model 331 CPU The address of the first and lowest numbered storage location is specified by parameter P2 The address for the last and highest numbered storage location in the group is equal to the address specified for the first address plus the number of memory locations in the group specified by parameter P3 LEN minus one To make this group of sequentially numbered memory storage location be a shift register each time a shift command is received the contents 16 bit word of each memory location is moved to the next higher numbered memory location Thus a 16 bit word starts at the first memory location and on every shift command will move one memory storage location to the next higher numbered memory storage location until it reaches the highest numbered last memory storage location in this group of storage locations When this 16 bit word reaches the last storage area available in this group it is transferred to the storage location specified by parameter P4 The previous contents of the storage location specified by parameter P4 are lost The limits of LEN depend on the memory type being used and the starting address of the first word of the group of words in the shift register a
152. words Nstage shift register of 16 bit words Implements a shift register to shift a bit Nstate bit sequencer Test for one signed integer equal to another Test for one signed integer not equal to another test for one signed integer less than or equal to another Test for one signed integer greater than or equal to another Test for one signed integer less than another Test for one signed integer greater than another Add one signed integer to another Add one signed double precision integer to another Subtract one signed integer from another Subtract one signed double precision integer from another Multiply two signed integers together Multiply two signed double precision integers together Divide one signed integer by another Divide one signed double precision integer by another Modulo divide one signed integer by another Modulo divide one signed double precision integer by another Find the square root of one signed integer Find the square root of one double precision integer Test for one signed double precision integer equal to another Test for one signed double precision integer not equal to another Test for one signed double precision integer less than or equal to another Test for one signed double precision integer greater than or equal to another Test for one signed double precision integer less than another Test for one signed double precision integer greater than another Convert a signed integer value to BCD Convert
153. 0 mA corresponds to a count of 32000 The other ranges are selected by changing the configuration parameters using the IC641 configurator software or the Hand Held Programmer The range can be configured so that the input range is 0 to 20 mA with user data scaled so that 0 mA corresponds to a count of 0 and 20 mA corresponds to a count of 32000 Full 12 bit resolution is available over the 4 to 20 and 0 to 20 mA ranges A 4 to 20 mA Enhanced range can also be selected When this range is selected 0 mA corresponds to a count of 8000 4 mA corresponds to a count of 0 zero and 20 mA corresponds to a count of 32000 The Enhanced range uses the same hardware as the 0 to 20 mA range but automatically provides 4 to 20 mA range scaling with the exception that negative digital values are provided to the user for input current levels between 4 mA and 0 mA This gives you the capability of selecting a low alarm limit that detects when the input current falls from 4 mA to 0 mA which provides for open wire fault detection in 4 to 20 mA applications High and Low alarm limits are available on all ranges Ranges can be configured on a per channel basis The module also reports module status and user side supply status to the CPU Although you can change the number of actively scanned channels with the Logicmaster 90 30 configurator function the Hand Held Programmer does not support editing the number of actively scanned channels If the 16 Channel Analog Input
154. 0 milliseconds as noted above Signed word values defining the upper and lower limits of the dead band inter val in counts If no dead band is required these terms should be set to 0 If the error is between the dead band and values the function is solved with the error term set to 0 In other words the error must grow beyond these limits before the PID block begins to adjust the CV output in response A signed word value that sets the proportional gain in hundreds of seconds A signed word value that sets the derivative in hundreds of seconds An unsigned word value that sets the integral rate in units of repeats per 1000 seconds A signed word value that sets the bias term in units of counts Feed forward control can be implemented by adjusting this value Signed word values that define the upper and lower limits on the CV output in units of counts Anti reset windup is applied to the PID integral term when a clamp limit is reached The integral term is adjusted to a value that holds the output at the clamped value An unsigned word value that defines the output minimum slew time This termlimits how quickly the output is allowed to change from 0 to 100 This has the effect of limit ing how quickly the integral term is allowed to change preventing windup Ifno slew rate limit is desired this term should be set to 0 The slew rate limit is given in seconds for full travel A word value with the following forma
155. 00 Each analog output is capable of providing four output ranges two voltage and two current Oto 10 volts unipolar default range for both input and output channels e 10to 10 volts bipolar e Oto 20 milliamps e 4to20 milliamps Although you can change the number of actively scanned channels with the Logicmaster 90 30 configurator function the Hand Held Programmer does not support editing the number of actively scanned channels If the 8 Channel Analog Current Wltage Output module is initialized by a Hand Held Programmer the number of actively scanned channels is 8 If a module had been previously configured with Logicmaster 90 30 software and the number of actively scanned channels has been changed from 8 that number will be displayed on the bottom line of the Hand Held Programmer display following the AQ entry You can edit data with the Hand Held Programmer only for the active channels but you can not change the number of actively scanned channels 5 42 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable ControllersUser s Manual February1996 GFK 0402G Module Present If a module is physically present in a system it can be added to the system s configuration by reading the module into the configuration file For example assume that an 8 Channel Analog Current Wltage Output module is installed in slot 3 of a Model 311 PLC system It can be added to the configuration with the following sequence Use the
156. 0001 is 500 and the value in ROOO2 is 0 I0001 R0001 P1 R0002 P2 L2 SAI001 P3 IN RANGE Truth Table Enable State L1 Value L2 Value IN Value Q State 10001 RO001 RO002 AI001 C or 0 Notappliable O Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 FUNC 140 RANGI P1 R0001 P2 R0002 P3 AI001 0003 OUT Q0001 After pressing key Key Strokes HHP Display 0001 INS lt S Initial display Press the key sequence GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 119 NS e LD 9 120 Press the ai key Press the key sequence 1 4 d FUNG ENT Press the 9g key Press the key sequence i Press the S key Press the key sequence i Press the ay key Press the key sequence CAS Al A Al Press the key Press the key sequence Press the T key OUT BQ OUTM AQ 0002 INS lt S 0002 INS lt S FUNC 140 _RANGI 0002 RANGI lt S POI _ 0002 RANGI lt S P01 R1_ 0002 RANGI lt S P02 0002 RANGI lt S P02 R2 0002 RANGI lt S P03 _ 0002 RANGI lt S P03 AI1 0003 INS lt S 0003 INS lt S OUT Q 1_ 0004 INS lt S Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996
157. 0100 5 R0101 Q0001 After pressing the INS Key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display 0001 INS lt S Initial display Press the key sequence 0001 INS Al LD 1 a Al Press the ENT key J y Press the key sequence 0002 INS lt S i 2 FUNC 103_SREQI 1 unc 0002 SREQI lt S Press the key POI _ Press the key sequence 0002 SREQB lt S L i POL R 1_ 0002 SREQI lt S Press the T key P02 _ 9 286 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G Press the key Press the ay key Press the key sequence Pll LIE Press the zi key Press the key Press the ENT key J y Press the key sequence JJ J Press the ENTI key J y Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 0002 SREQI lt S P02 2 0002 SREQI lt S P03 _ 0002 SREQI lt S P03 R 100_ 0002 SREQI lt S P04 _ 0002 SREQI lt S P04 5 0002 SREQI lt S PO5 _ 0002 SREQI lt S P05 R 101_ 0003 INS lt S 9 287 Press the key sequence BQ a LJ Press the key i OUT OUTM 9 288 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Array Move Functions Th
158. 02 P3 R0003 0003 OUT Q0001 Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 123 9 124 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes Initial display Press the key sequence Ay Al Press the key o Press the key sequence LJL Press the key rund Press the key sequence Press the ai key LD HHP Display 0001 INS lt S 0001 INS 0002 INS lt S 0002 FUNC INS lt S 23_ AND 0002 AND lt S P01 0002 AND lt S P01 R 1_ 0002 AND lt S P02 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G Press the key sequence Press the ay key Press the key sequence i Press the A key Press the key sequence Pa OUTM AQ OUT Press the J key Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 0002 AND lt S P02 0002 AND lt S P03 _ 0002 AND lt S R 3_ P03 R 2_ 9 125 9 Bitwise or OR Function 25 The bitwise or function OR is a conditionally executed function which bitwise or s one 16 bit word to another When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable EN input the function is executed by the CPU and a new Bitwise OR function will take place Each scan that power flow is received at the enable inp
159. 02G 9 The following table specifies which memory types are valid for each of the OR function parameters Allowable Memory Types for OR Function 25 E a Ee oe Ee eee a ee i ae E a EF Fa a e E FES See e ee FE e e t Only SA SB and SC are used S cannot be used Programming Example for OR Function In this example when input I0001 is closed passing power flow to the enable input The 16 bits of register 1 specified by parameter P1 are bitwise ORed to the 16 bits of register 2 specified by parameter P2 and the result is stored in register 3 as specified by parameter P3 For example if decimal number 337 is stored in R0001 and decimal number 346 is stored in RO002 the result will be decimal number 347 in R0003 The binary bits stored in the register are roo oo Jo Jo o fo Jo fofr Jo o Jo Jo rooz o o Jo Jo o fo Jo o a Jo 2 Jo fi Jo roos o o Jo Jo o Jo Jo ofa Jo 2 Jo fa ji Ladder Diagram Representation OR WORD l l R0001 P1 I1 Q P3 l l R0002 P2 1I2 Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 FUNC 25 OR P1 R0001 P2 R0002 P3 R0003 0003 OUT Q0001 Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 127 9 128 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display Initial display 0001 INS lt S Press the key sequence 0001 INS LD On 1 LD Al Press the key 0002 INS lt S Press the key se
160. 142 RANGW 3 Parameter P1 limit 1 one of the limit values This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored 4 Parameter P2 limit 2 the other limit value This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored 5 Parameter P3 input the value to be compared to the limit values The following tables specify which memory types are valid for each of the LE and DPLE function parameters Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 115 Allowable Memory Types for RANGI Function 140 and RANGW Function 142 tmine e ef E E a A E i AE AERE mpe e e Constantsare limited to integer values for precision a integer EEEE Allowable Memory Types for RANGDI Function 141 minen J T es e ee ee 2 eT a a AC inputs i Constants are limited to integer values for i precision integer EEEE Programming Examples for RANGE Function The following two examples for the RANGE function illustrate how to enter the INT and DINT RANGE instructions using the Hand Held Programmer Example 1 In the following example AI001 is checked to be within a range specified by two constants 0 and 1000 RANGE INT 1000 P1 L1 Q 0 P2 SFL2 SAI001 P3 IN RANGE Truth Table RANGE Truth Table O OO 10001 Constant Constant AI001 PONT w o lt 0 on Sc E on w o 1000 o F 1000 0 N
161. 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Not Equal Comparison NE Function 53 Double Precision Not Equal Comparison DPNE Function 73 Two not equal test functions are available The not equal test NE is a conditionally executed function which tests for one signed word value not equal to another The double precision not equal test DPNE is a conditionally executed function which tests for one signed double word value not equal to another When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable input the function is executed by the CPU and a new comparison for NE or double precision signed comparison for DPNE will take place During the execution of a not equal comparison or double precision signed comparison the signed value in P1 input 1 is compared to see if it is not equal to the signed value in P2 input 2 If the comparison is not equal power flow is passed The NE and DPNE functions operate on INT signed integer and DINT double precision signed integer data respectively The INT NE function is Function 53 and the DINT NE function is Function 73 NE Function Description The two values specified by parameters P1 and P2 must be the same data type 16 bit two s complement signed integers and must be within the range 32768 to 32767 This function will pass power flow when there is power flow to the enable input and the value specified by parameter P1 is not equal to the value specified by parameter P2
162. 2 SBO001 SB032 SC001 SC032 R0001 RO256 AI001 AI016 AQ001 AQ016 SR001 SRO16 Size 1K words 16bits 32 bits 12bits Abits 32 bits 1280bits 1024bits 256 bits 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 256 words 16words 16words 16words For reference table viewing only can not be referenced in a user logic program Using the Hand Held Programmer GFK 0402G When power is applied to the PLC the Hand Held Programmer begins diagnostic tests on its hardware Once these tests are successfully completed the Hand Held Programmer can interact with the PLC Initially you must select an operating mode program mode protection mode data mode or configuration mode When setting up a new system you will normally want to select configuration mode first in order to configure the I O modules to be used in the system In configuration mode you can identify which PLC backplane slots contain I O modules and the size number of Input or Output points for each module Based on the size of each module a range of discrete input and output references can either be assigned automatically by the Hand Held Programmer or optionally specified by the user The configuration of these I O modules can be changed at any time After configuring the IO modules the next step is to program the actual logic program Program mode is selected for this Once in program mode you can create modify and monitor the execution of program
163. 2 25 P3 R0203 0005 OUT Q0001 After pressing Key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display Initial display 0001 INS lt S Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Press the key sequence Bi LD a 1 Press the ay key Press the key sequence 7A OUT OUTM y LJ Press the ai key Press the key sequence LJ M y Ea Press the A key Press the key sequence eJ Press the S key Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 0002 INS lt S 0003 INS lt S 0004 INS lt S 0004 INS lt S FUNC 61_ 0004 DPADD lt S P0O1 _ DPADD 9 65 9 66 Press the key sequence GJA Press the ay key Press the key sequence Press the ai key Press the key sequence LILIES Press the py key Press the key sequence BE OUT out BQ OUTM AQ Press the S key 0004 DPADD lt S PO1 R 201_ 0004 DPADD lt S P02_ 0004 DPADD lt S P02 25 0004 DPADD lt S P03 0004 DPADD lt S P03 R 203 _ 0005 INS lt S 0006 INS lt S Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Subtraction SUB Fun
164. 4 SB005 SB006 SB007 SB009 SB010 SB011 SB012 SB013 SB014 SB015 SB016 SB017 SB018 SB019 SB020 SB021 SB022 SB023 SB024 SB025 SB026 SB027 SB028 SB029 SB030 SB031 SB032 nce Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved ReferenceDescription No user program Corrupted user RAM Passwordaccess failure Nullsystem configuration PLC CPU software failure PLC store failure Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Special Contact References Reference Address ReferenceDescription SCO001 Reserved SCO02 Reserved SC003 Reserved SCO04 Reserved SCO05 Reserved SCO006 Reserved SCO08 Reserved SCO09 Some fault has occurred SC010 System fault has occurred SCO011 I Ofaulthasoccurred SC012 System fault table entry present SC013 I O fault tableentry present SC014 Hardware fault occurred SC015 Software fault occurred SCO16 Reserved SCO17 Reserved SCO18 Reserved SCO19 Reserved SC020 Reserved SCO021 Reserved SCO22 Reserved SCO023 Reserved SCO024 Reserved SCO025 Reserved SC026 Reserved SCO027 Reserved SCO028 Reserved SC029 Reserved SC030 Reserved SC031 Reserved SC032 Reserved Note These references may be viewed in data mode by repeatedly pressing the SR key to toggle through t
165. 6 Q385 416 A1097 104 AQ049 052 1 4 1417 448 Q417 448 AI105 112 AQ053 056 1 5 1449 480 Q449 480 AI113 120 AQ057 060 1 6 1481 512 Q481 512 AI121 128 AQ061 064 This is last slot to receive con figurationin Models 331 340 341 351 1 3 Z 1 8 z r 1 9 z z 1 10 2 For those users who want to configure a system different then the default additional I O modules different I O references etc system configuration can be done by the user with either the Hand Held Programmer or with the Configuration Software available with the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software 5 14 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G I O Link Interface Module Configuration GFK 0402G The I O Link Interface module provides an interface between the Series 9 0 30 PLC and the Fanuc I O Link This module operates as a slave device The module can be configured as a 32 point or 64 point Input and Output combination module by positioning a jumper on the board When set for 64 I O points the module will be configured with the HHP using the same key sequences and displays that are used to configure the 64 point generic I O module For more information on assigning I O references see page 5 10 Assigning Reference Addresses to I O Modules Configuration Sequence The following examples show the key sequences and resulting displays with which to configu
166. 67 The sign is set to show the direction of the overflow This function will pass power flow when there is power flow to the enable input and the results of the subtraction are within the range 32768 to 32767 no overflow If discrete memory types are used for parameters P1 P2 and P3 the beginning address must be on a byte boundary DPSUB Function Description The three values specified by parameters P1 P2 and P3 must be the same data type 32 bit two s complement signed integers and must be within the range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 When using the Hand Held Programmer to program a constant into parameters P1 or P2 the constant must be in the range of a single precision number 32768 to 32767 The memory locations for P1 P2 and P3 are each 32 Bits long The storage area for each Register Al and AQ is 16 Bits long therefore two consecutive registers AI words or AQ words must be used for each double precision signed number to be stored The address of the lower of the two registers AI words or AQ words is used as the reference to store and retrieve the double precision number The Hand Held Programmer can only display a maximum of 16 bits one Register AI or AQ word at a time therefore a double precision number outside of the range 32768 to 32767 cannot be monitored using the Hand Held Programmer The hexadecimal or binary number for each register AI or AQ word may be programmed or monitored provided that th
167. 8 17 Q Pointer will increment I3 on Passing Power Flow to step 14 memory location Q30 and return to step 1 memory location Q17 on the next execution e Pointer will decrement 13 OFF no power flow to step 1 memory location Q17 then on the next execution will move to step 14 memory location Q30 e Upon reset I2 on passing power flow memory locations 17 through 32 are set to zero except 28 step 12 the reset step location which is set to a one Memory location 33 is unaffected because it is not within the group bits of the 16 bit word boundary of Q17 Ladder Diagram Representation CONST 0012 00017 ST Location P04 R0001 9 216 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 LD 10002 0003 LD 10003 0004 FUNC 47 SEQB P1 12 P2 Q0017 P3 14 P4 R0001 0005 OUT Q0001 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display Initial display 0001 INS lt S Press the key sequence LD A aT 1 Press the ai key 0002 INS lt S Press the key sequence LD zi aT 2 Press the ay key 0003 INS lt S GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 217 9 218 Press the key sequence LD an Ki 3 ENT Press the key Press the key sequence en La Lz
168. 9 275 9 Search Less Than or Equal To Byte SRLEB Function 113 Search Less Than or Equal To Word SRLEW Function 114 Search Less Than or Equal To INT SRLEI Function 115 Search Less Than or Equal To DINT SRLEDI Function 116 The Search Less Than or Equal To functions are conditionally executed functions which are used to search for all array values less than or equal to a specified value Each function has four input parameters and two output parameters When the function receives power the array is searched starting at AR input NX This is the starting address of the array AR plus the index into this array input NX The search continues until the array element whose value is less than or equal to the search object IN is found or until the end of the array is reached If an array element is found the output parameter FD is set to true and output parameter output NX is set to the relative position of this element within the array If no element is found with a value less than or equal to IN before the end of the array is reached then output parameter FD is set to false and output parameter output NX is set to zero The valid values for the input NX are 0 to LEN 1 This value increments by one at the time of execution Therefore the values of the output NX are 1 to LEN If the value of the input NX is out of range lt 0 or w LEN its value is set to the default value of zero The function parameters for the
169. 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Section 2 Arithmetic Functions This section describes the arithmetic functions for Series 90 30 and 90 20 PLCs Arithmetic functions provide both single and double precision addition subtraction multiplication and division operators Abbreviation Function Description ADD Add two numbers DPADD Adds two signed double word numbers SUB Subtraction Subtract one number from another DPSUB Subtracts one signed double word number from another MUL Multiplication Multiply twonumbers DPMUL Multiplies one signed double word number by another DIV Division Divide one number by another giving only the quotient asa result DPDIV Double PrecisionDivision Divides one signed double word number by another giving only the quotient as a result MOD ModuloDivision Divide one number by another giving a remainder as a result DPMOD Double PrecisionModuloDivision Divides one signed double word number by another giving the remainder as a result SORT Square Root Finds the square root of an integer DPSQRT Double Precision Square Root Finds the square root of a double precision integer Note Division and modulo division are similar functions which differ in their output division finds a quotient while modulo division finds a remainder GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 61 2 Addition ADD Function 60 Double Prec
170. 996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G Selecting Output Channel Ranges The range for each of the output and input channels can be displayed and selected or changed as described below There are two current and two voltage ranges that can be selected for each channel Initial Display Output Channels RO 03 AIO 1 00 lt S AQ2 AQ035 AQ036 To display the output channel ranges press gt The display will show Channel 1 or the currently selected channel and the first available range RO 03 AIO 1 00 lt S CH 1 9 0 10 You can toggle through the range for each channel by pressing the t key Each range will be displayed as shown Each of the ranges are shown below The range that will be selected is the one currently displayed RO 03 AIO 1 00 lt S CH 1 Q 10 10 RO 03 AIO 1 00 lt S CH 1 Q 4 20 RO 03 AIO 1 00 lt S CH 1 9 0 20 When the desired range for the module is displayed on the screen it can be accepted by pressing the ENT key To return to the previous screen press the lt key To view the next channel s range display press the key RO 03 AIO 1 00 lt S CH 2 9Q 0 10 Edit this channel s range the same as you did for the first channel The range of all active output channels can be changed in the same manner To view the first of the Input channels press the key and the following screen is displayed Chapter 5 I O Configuration 5 47 Selecting Input Channel Ranges To display the input channel ranges press
171. ABI Source Start signeddecimal Function 130 Index Into Source signeddecimal Index into Destination signeddecimal Elements to Move signeddecimal Elements in Array signeddecimal Destination Start signeddecimal Array Move Byte MOVABY Source Start signed decimal Function 131 Index Into Source signeddecimal Index into Destination signeddecimal Elements to Move signeddecimal Elements in Array signeddecimal Destination Start signeddecimal Array Move Word MOVAW Source Start signeddecimal Function 132 Index Into Source signeddecimal Index into Destination signeddecimal Elements to Move signeddecimal Elements in Array signeddecimal Destination Start signeddecimal Array Move INT MOVAI Source Start signed decimal Function 133 P2 Index Into Source signeddecimal P3 Index into Destination signeddecimal P4 Elements to Move signeddecimal P5 Elements in Array LEN signeddecimal P6 Destination Start DS signeddecimal GFK 0402G Appendix D Function Parameters D 7 gt Table D 1 Function Parameters continued Logicmaster Default Function Parameter Abbreviation Display Format Array Move DINT MOVADI P1 Source Start signed decimal Function 134 P2 Index Into Source signeddecimal P3 Index into Destination signeddecimal P4 Elements to Move signeddecimal P5 Elements in Array signeddecimal P6 Destination Start signeddecimal Range
172. C L E V E L unused Protection unused State Level S E T unused unused Password unused In the following example level 4 is password protected with password 1234 level 3 is not password protected and level 2 is password protected with password 0AB1 Follow this procedure to assign the password 0AB1 to level 3 instead of level 2 and remove the password from level 2 1 The initial display screen shows level 4 as the current access level LEVEL4 lt S 2 Press the Right cursor key three times to display the level 2 password GFK 0402G Chapter 8 PLC Control and Status 8 7 3 Press the DEL key and then the ENT key to delete the level 2 password LEVEL4 lt S SET 2 NULL At this point the password assigned to level 2 has been successfully deleted The deletion of a password affects only that password no other level s password is affected A password for level 3 can now be assigned 4 Press the Left cursor key to display the level 3 password LEVEL4 lt S SET 3 NULL 5 Press the keysequencel AI Q AQ 1 then press the ENT key Altematively you could have assigned password 0AB1 to level 3 first and then deleted the password from level 2 Passwords for different levels do not have to be unique Canceling a Password Change The CLR key may be used to cancel a password change prior to activating it pressing the ENT key If a password is currently specified pressing the CLR key will only erase th
173. Controllers User s Manual February 1996 Attempt to Make Changes to Edit Locked Subroutine If you zoom into an edit locked subroutine from either the Subroutine Declaration List or a Subroutine Call Function any attempt to change the statement list instructions will cause the PROTECT error message to be displayed Note The subroutine must be unlockedusingLogicmaster90 30 20 Micro software before any editing within that subroutine will be permitted Deletion of a Locked Subroutine There are no restrictions against the deletion of a locked subroutine or a program containing a locked subroutine As described in Entering Subroutines in Chapter 9 a subroutine can only be deleted if the program contains no CALLs to that subroutine Program Check If an error is detected by program check within a view locked subroutine only the entry for that subroutine in the Subroutine Declaration List is displayed No zoom into the subroutine s statement list will occur GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language This chapter does not apply to the Model 351 CPU Logicmaster90 30 20 Micro programming software must be used to program the Model 351 CPU The Statement List programming language allows you to implement any well formed Boolean equation as a sequence of contacts and coils This chapter defines the basic elements functions and function blocks which you can use to program an attached Series 90 30 PLC Series 90 20
174. Display Initial display 0001 INS lt S Press the sequence Press the key 0002 INS lt S Press the ac sequence Press the key 0003 INS lt S e LD e LD GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 56 Press the key sequence 0003 INS lt S FUN 1 5 p pecel FUNC 15_ UPCTR UNC 0 DITA Press the ay key 0003 UPCTR lt S PO1_ Press the key sequence 0003 UPCTR lt S P01_ 8_ Press the ai key 0003 UPCTR P02 _ Press the key sequence 0003 UPCTR lt S DIE o P02 R 10_ Press the A key 0004 INS lt S Press the key sequence 0004 INS zS or Ea fy OUT Q1_ OUTM AQ i Press the S key 0005 INS lt S Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Down Counter DNCTR Function 16 GFK 0402G The down counter DNCTR is a conditionally executed function which provides decremental counting from a preset value Each time the logic controlling the count input goes from a condition of no power flow to a condition of power flow the current value will be decremented by a value of one The current value will decrement in value from the preset value until a decimal value of 32768 is reached This down counter will pass power flow when the current value is equal to or less then zero Wh
175. E Allowable Memory Types for DPADD Function 61 Papa e e e e ee FE E A E A A E TE ES E E e E ee er Note that double precision constants are constrained to the range 32 768 to 32 767 GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 63 202Programming Example for Addition This example of programming uses the DPADD function In this example a contact from a one shot OUT is used as the controlling element for power flow to the enable function When input 10001 closes passes power flow M0001 will pass power flow to the enable input of the ADD function for one sweep of the CPU scan Therefore the addition will occur only once When the additions take place a value located in registers R201 and R202 as indicated by P1 is added to the constant 25 specified by P2 The results of this addition is stored in registers R203 and R204 as specified by P3 If the value of this addition is in the range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 no overflow power flow will be passed on to output coil Q0001 for only one scan of the CPU only while the enable input has power flow For example register 201 has the value of 50 and register 203 has a value of 20 in it before input 1 closes After input 1 closes the value in register 203 will be 75 50 25 75 Ladder Diagram Representation Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 OUT MO0001 0003 LD MO0001 0004 FUNC 61 DPADD P1 R0201 P
176. EEPROM will be rejected in its entirety if the EEPROM configuration is not compatible with the CPU model in which it is installed The EEPROM used as a program source during power up MUST have been written by a CPU of the same model If the models differ or if the configuration is incompatible with the CPU in which it is installed the program configuration and registers in RAM memory will be cleared and the PLC will power up in STOP mode If this happens a fatal fault will be generated Before Power Cycle After Power Cycle CPU will run with Configuration of Program Source CPU program that was in EEPROM EEPROM Configuration of Program Source CPU EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM No EEPROM present EEPROM EEPROM Blank no program GFK 0402G Chapter 2 Operation 2 21 Chapter Series 90 30 20 PLC Configuration 3 Anumber of PLC parameters are user configurable Each of these parameters has a default value which for many users will not need to be changed These parameters their selections and default selections are shown in the following table Note This chapter describes configuration for the Series 90 30 and 90 20 PLCs See Chapter 4 for configuration information for the Micro PLC Table 3 1 User Configurable PLC Parameters Parameter Selections Default Value Key click ON ENABLED OFF OFF DISABLED Time of day clock Notav
177. EM Protection 8 1 cancel 8 9 cancel key change display modif 8 9 levels of 8 2 lock release 8 9 reading EEPROM or memory card remove 8 11 Off delay OFDTR function 14 On delay ONDTR function 13 9 43 On line changes boolean instruction 6 8 reference address 6 8 valid On line substitution groups Operating modes 1 2 config 2 8 data uration mode data 2 8 data mode program 2 8 program edit program mode protect 2 8 protection mode 1 2 selection of 2 8 Option user PROM 2 11 Output references discrete 1 4 Output register references analog 1 3 Overrides 1 4 Overrides clearing all 7 11 Overriding discrete reference P Parameter definitions for Micro plc for Micro plc HSC configuration 4 7 Parameters for Micro plc Parameters function Parameters rack 3 4 Parity parameter Password parameter GFK 0402G Password protection 8 1 Password protection levels Passwords cancel change OEM protection 8 PID data structure 9 256 PID function ziegler and nichols tuning approach 9 261 PID function block data 9 257 PID functions differences 9 260 PID IND function 87 PID initialization values 9 259 PIDIND block diagram PIDISA block diagram 9 260 PLC Configuration accessing parameters for configuration active constant sweep mode parameter 3 6 a tant sweep setting parame ter B 7 baud rae
178. FANUC GE Fanuc Automation Programmable Control Products Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micr o Programmable Controllers User s Manual GFK0402G February 1996 GFL 002 Warnings Cautions and Notes as Used in this Publication Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages currents temperatures or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be associated with its use In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment a Warning notice is used Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken Note Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and operating the equipment This document is based on information available at the time of its publication While efforts have been made to be accurate the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software nor to provide for every possible contingency in connection with installation operation or maintenance Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software systems GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty expressed implied or statutory with respect to a
179. HP Display Initial display 0001 INS lt s Press the key sequence Press the key 0002 INS lt S Press the key sequence e e LD OUT p Blo 2 LJ Press the key 0003 INS lt S 9 24 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G ONE SHOT ON POWER FLOW To implement the following logic using LD and OUT Initial display Statement list 0001 LD 10001 0002 OUT Q0001 Key Strokes Press the key sequence e LD Press the key Press the key sequence out me ou AQ Press the EYT key GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language HHP Display 0001 INS lt S 0002 INS lt S 0003 INS lt S 9 25 RETENTIVE LATCH To implement the following logic using SETM Statement List 0001 LD 10001 0002 SETM Q0001 Key Strokes HHP Display Initial display 0001 INS lt s Press the key sequence Press the key 0002 INS lt S Press the key sequence a LJ Press the key 0003 INS lt S e LD SETM SET 9 26 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G RESETTING A RETENTIVE LATCH To implement the following logic using RSTM
180. Held Programmer Connection to a Series 90 20 PLC a45438 Hand held n Programmer Series 90 IC693PRG300 Micro PLC _ Cable IC693CBL303 Figure 2 3 Hand Held Programmer Cable Connection to a Series 90 Micro PLC GFK 0402G 2 1 Powering up the Hand Held Programmer The Hand Held Programmer may be connected to a programmable logic controller which is powered up or it may be connected prior to power up When connected during power up the Hand Held Programmer momentarily displays the following messages on the screen if no power up diagnostic problems are found ROM CHECK OK RAM CHECK OK Following this momentary display the screen will display CONFIGURING SYSTEM The amount of time this is displayed can be as long as 7 seconds if there are intelligent modules plugged into the I O slots The initial screen displayed depends upon what was last displayed when the Hand Held Programmer was powered down If the last display was a data table in data mode that same data table will be the first screen displayed when power is restored If any other display in a different mode was displayed the Mode Selection screen will be displayed when the Hand Held Programmer is powered up again The following example shows the Hand Held Programmer screen viewing the register R table in timer counter display format in data mode with R4 as the top reference displayed when the unit was powered down T C R0004 00 lt R 0 0 The same
181. I 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 Key Strokes Initial display Press the key sequence o F NOT AG G 1 Press the key Statement List LD LD AND OUT OUT AND OUT Press the key sequence BLK Press the key Press the key sequence A Al 2 D AND NOT 10001 BLK 10002 Q0001 BLK 10003 Q0002 HHP Display 0001 INS lt S 0001 INS lt S LD NOT I 1_ 0002 INS lt S 0005 INS lt S LD BLK 0003 INS lt S 9 22 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Press the ae key Press the key sequence B a Oe aJ L Press the key OUT OUTM OUT Press the key sequence a Press the key Press the key sequence A Al 3 f AND Press the T key Press the key sequence BQ a OUT OUTM Press the T key Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 0004 INS 0004 INS OUT 0005 INS Q 1_ lt S lt S lt S 0005 INS lt S OUT BLK 0007 INS 0007 INS OUT 0008 INS lt S lt S lt S 9 23 ONE SHOT ON LOSS OF POWER FLOW To implement the following logic using LD and OUT Statement List 0001 LD 10001 0002 OUT Q0001 Key Strokes H
182. I or Q are specified therefore the minimum number of points in the group of points specified by parameter P1 and P2 is 8 and the maximum is restricted by the number of real inputs or outputs points supported by the system Note that Do I O scans occur on I O module boundaries and I O scans of part of the module s I O are not supported For example if 8 points are specified in a Do I O function for a 16 point Input module the entire module s 16 points will be scanned This also means that when discrete inputs or outputs are specified by parameters P1 P2 or P3 the parameter number specified must be on an 8 point boundary if an 8 point discrete module is used except when parameter P3 ALT specifies a register R location then the number specified by parameter P1 and P2 must be on a 16 point boundary When analog inputs or analog outputs AI or AQ are specified by parameter P1 P2 or P3 the minimum number of points specified is 16 or one analog channel and the maximum is restricted by the number of real analog channels supported by the system This also means that if discrete memory points are used for parameter P3 the number specified by parameter P3 must be on a 16 point boundary Execution of the function continues until all inputs or outputs in the selected range specified by parameters P1 and P2 are serviced Then the program logic execution will return to execute the logic located in the next step following the step containing thi
183. If discrete memory types are used for parameters P1 and P2 the beginning address must be on a byte boundary DPGE Function Description The two values specified by parameters P1 and P2 must be the same data type 32 bit two s complement signed integers and must be within the range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 When using the Hand Held Programmer to program a constant into parameters P1 or P2 the constant must be in the range of a single precision number 32768 to 32767 The memory locations for P1 and P2 are each 32 Bits long The storage area for each Register Al and AQ is 16 Bits long therefore two consecutive registers AI words or AQ words must be used for each double precision signed number to be stored The address of the lower of the two registers AI words or AQ words is used as the reference to store and retrieve the double precision number The Hand Held Programmer can only display a maximum of 16 bits one Register AI or AQ word at a time therefore a double precision number outside of the range 32768 to 32767 cannot be programmed into the CPU or monitored using the Hand Held Programmer The hexadecimal or binary number for each register AI or AQ word can be programmed or monitored provided that they are placed together outside of the CPU to form the 32 Bit double precision signed number This function will pass power flow when there is power flow to the enable input and the value specified by parameter P1 is gre
184. Initial display 0001 INS lt s Press the key sequence 0001 INS lt S F A o nor 4 1 LD NOT I Press the ENT key 0002 INS lt S J y Press the key sequence D A s o E e Press the A key 0003 INS lt S GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 17 Press the key sequence wle felfe S S S t Press the T key 0004 INS lt S Press the key sequence 0004 INS lt S D F Cy AND NOT M 1_ AND NOT Tr 1 ENT Press the 3g key 0005 INS lt S Press the key sequence 0005 INS lt S OR BLK _ Press the T key 0006 INS lt S Press the key sequence OUT Bg a 4 Fe LJ mu 0007 INS lt S Press the J key Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G SERIES PARALLEL CONTACTS SINGLE COIL To implement the following logic using the AND BLK element 10001 10002 I I JI TOOO1 Statement List 0001 LD NOT 10001 0002 LD 10002 0003 OR T0001 0004 AND BLK 0005 OUTM M0001 Key Strokes HHP Display Initial display 0001 INS lt S Press the key sequence 0001 INS lt S F A o hor a LD NOT I1_ Press the S key 0002 INS lt S Press the key
185. Keypad Functionality in Program Mode Key Group Description LD OUT OUTM SETM SET RSTM RST AND OR NO BLK FUNC Programa function or function block instruction Programa boolean logic instruction 6 2 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Table 6 1 Keypad Functionality in Program Mode Continued Key Group Description I AI Specify a memory reference type Q AQ M T G S R Specify an instruction step 0 9 Specify a decimal possible signed or hexadecimalvalue I AJA These keys are used to specify the hexadecimaldigitsA through E Q AQ B M C AND D OR E NOT F CLR Abort or cancel the current operation or user input Up and Down cursor keys Move between instructionsteps Left and Right cursor keys Move between function parameters ENT Complete an operation or user input INS Begin an instruction step insertion operation WRITE Write MEM CARD or system EEPROM READ VERIFY Read or verify MEM CARD orsystem EEPROM SRCH Search for a given target DEL Delete an instruction step RUN Start or stop the PLC MODE Select an HHP operating mode Displaying a Step or Parameter GFK 0402G Asingle instruction step or function parameter can be viewed on the LCD screen at a time Four cursor keys allow you to sequentially scroll through an existing statement list program These keys include the Up Down Left
186. LC state field of the display screen Canceling a Mode Change The CLR key may be used to cancel an operating mode change before activating it Press the CLR key twice to exit from the mode change screen and return to the currently entered function User PROM Option Application programs are normally developed in the CPU s RAM memory and executed from RAM memory If additional program integrity is desired or operation of the PLC without a battery is desired an optional EEPROM or EPROM can be installed in a spare socket labeled PROGRAM PROM on the Model 311 backplane or in a socket on the Model 331 CPU module EEPROMs can be written to and read from EPROMS can be read when installed in the PLC however they must be written to using an external PROM burning device Non removable flash memory performs this function on the Model 340 341 and 351 CPUs A typical scheme for using these devices is to develop programs using an EEPROM When the program in RAM has been developed and debugged it is saved to EEPROM The EEPROM can then be removed from the PLC and used as a master to make backup or multiple copies of the program to EPROM memory The EPROM can then be installed in the socket provided in the CPU and used as a non volatile memory for battery less operation or to run the same program in multiple PLCs The Model 331 CPU has a jumper JP1 located next to the EEPROM EPROM socket to let you select between EEPROM or EPROM Jumper Selects
187. Language 0002 MSKCMPW lt S P04 _ 0002 MSKCMPW lt S P04 R 1_ 0002 MSKCMPW lt S PO5 _ 0002 MSKCMPW lt S P05 1_ 0002 MSKCMPW lt S P0O6 _ 0002 MSKCMPW lt S P06 M33_ 0002 MSKCMPW lt S P07 _ 0002 MSKCMPW lt S PO7 _ R 1_ 9 181 9 182 Press the S key Press the key sequence OUT OUTM Ba AQ Press the S key 1 0003 INS 0004 INS lt S lt S Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Section 5 Data Move Functions Data Move functions provide move single word constant and word array initialization shift register bit sequencer and communications request operations Abbreviation Function Description MOVEN Move Copies data as an array of multiple 16 bit words Data can thus be moved into a different data type without prior conversion MOVBN Move one or more bits from one reference to another BMOVE Block Move Copies a block of seven constants to a specified memory location The constants are input as part of the function BLKCL BlockClear Replaces the content of a block of data with all zeros This function may be used to clear an area of bit memory I Q M and T or word memory R AT or AQ SHFR Shift Register Fills an area of memory with selected data SEQB SHFRB Shift Register Bit Implements a shift register which shifts a single
188. Low Bound High Bound Rack Slot The rack and slot fields indicate the currently displayed rack and slot The range of these fields depends on the CPU model 311 or 331 and the backplane 5 or 10 slot or rack main or expansion type Module Type or Message The module type or message field normally displays the currently configured module type If no module is configured the module type will be displayed as EMPTY The possible non intelligent module types are I Discrete Input Q Discrete Output AI Analog Input AQ Analog Output QI DiscreteInput Output This field also functions as an error message window PLC State The PLC state field indicates whether the PLC is currently stopped or is running executing a program A leading lt character followed by S if the PLC is stopped or Rif itis running indicates the state of the PLC Reference Type The reference type field indicates a memory reference type Its possible values include I Q AI AQ or QI Points The points field indicates the number of points discrete modules or channels analog modules supported by the configured module Reference Range Low Bound and High Bound The low and high bound reference range fields indicate the logical reference address range assigned to the slot The range is based on the number of points channels on the module to be installed When configuring a slot for a non intelligent 1 O module both the module type and point ch
189. MODE selection menu is displayed Series 90 Memory Card In addition to EEPROM a Series 90 Memory Card inserted into the Hand Held Programmer may be used to save retrieve or verify program logic data and configuration data contained on it versus the actual PLC contents The Series 90 Memory Card is not supported by the Model 351 CPU If the memory card or EEPROM has not been properly inserted before attempting a write read or verify operation the absence of the card or EEPROM will be detected as an error and an error message will be displayed The PLC must also be stopped and must not be scanning IO before you can perform a memory card or EEPROM operation If you attempt to write read or verify data when the PLC is running a RUNNING error message will be displayed on the screen You must first stop the PLC before attempting the desired operation again Also when the CPU is configured for DO IO a DO I O error message will be displayed on the screen Change the CPU configuration STOP MD DO IO to STOP MD NO IQ It is possible that a communications error between the Hand Held Programmer and the memory card may occur during a write read or verify operation If this occurs the operation will be canceled and a COMM ER error message will be displayed Make sure that the memory card is properly seated in the Hand Held Programmer slot before attempting the operation again The following screen format is used to write read or verify the mem
190. MP MCR or END MCR nesting errors The use of more then 256 total JUMP and MCR functions The placement of an ENDSW function within a JUMP or MCR range Incorrect instruction sequences The dual use of Q or M references if the dual use checking configuration parameter is disabled at the time the instructions are entered This prompts a warning only e Corrupted memory unknown instructions The program check function automatically scans for these errors whenever the operating state of the PLC is changed from stopped to running Please refer to chapter 7 PLC Control and Status for additional information on stopping and starting the PLC Chapter 9 Error Messages provides a listing of possible non system errors and their corrective action To begin the program check function enter the following key sequence in order while in the program mode of operation and when the CPU is in STOP The program check function always begins at the start of the program and stops with the first error found Chapter 9 describes the corrective action to take for each non system error If no errors are found the current instruction step remains displayed and no message is displayed SRCH LIL ENT J The program check function is automatically performed before writing a program to EEPROM or memory card and before a LOAD operation is performed by Logicmaster 90 software If a non system error is dete
191. Messages in Binary Format PLC gt Top Reference Message State Table 7 8 Screen Format for Displaying Messages in Signed Decimal and Hexadecimal Format PLC gt Top Reference Message State Table 7 9 Screen Format for Displaying Messages in Timer Counter Format EN PLC Top Reference 0 1 0 y 1 State TaT2Ts Ts 1718 9 n sleeps Changing the Format of a Display GFK 0402G TheHEX DEC TMR ONDTR and UPCTR DNCTRkeys are used to change the format of adisplay The current display format binary signed decimal or hexadecimal is maintained when changing the display to view a different reference table The exception to this is when changing from the display of the R table in timer counter format to another table or when remaining in the R table and pressing the HEX DEC key In these cases the display format is returned to what it was before the TMR ONDTRorUPCTR DNCTRkey was pressed Changing the Format of a Discrete Reference Table The following example illustrates how to change the format of a discrete reference table 1 After entering data mode use the Down cursor key to display 10022 as the top reference displayed The initial display format is single bit binary gt I0022 0 I0023 0 Chapter 7 Reference Tables 7 5 2 Pressthe HEX DEC key to change the display format to signed decimal Note that 10022 is no longer the top reference displayed it has been replaced as the top reference by 10017 becaus
192. NOT I0001 O Reference Address Change To change the current instruction step from LD 10001 to LD Q0001 The initial display is Press the key sequnece 0003 REPLACE lt S 2 LD Q1 oO Press the T key 0003 lt S LD Q0001 O Boolean Instruction and Reference Address Change To change the current instruction step from LD 10001 to LD NOT Q0001 0003 lt S The initial display is LD 10001 0 Press the key sequence 0003 REPLACE lt S vor a LD NT Q11 _ 0 NOT AQ 1 ee ae 0003 zS LD NOT Q0001 O Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 6 Reference Address to Constant Change To change parameter P01 of the currently displayed instruction step FUNC 60 ADD from R0001 to 12 0007 ADD P01 R0001 The initial display is Press the key sequence 0007 REPLACE lt S POL 12_ O Press the key 0007 ADD P01 12 Replacing Functions and Function Block Parameters Simple replacement changes for function and function block parameters may only be performed on the currently displayed parameter Use the Left cursor key to display the parameter you wish to change Reference address changes are performed the same as for basic elements as described in the preceding paragraphs If the Left cursor key is pressed when the first parameter is displayed the function declaration screen is display
193. O operation If no user input had been specified when the CLR key is pressed the first time only a single press of the CLR key is required to cancel the GOTO operation Exiting Configuration Mode To exit the PLC configuration function press the MODE key The mode selection screen will be displayed GFK 0402G Chapter 3 Series 90 30 20 PLC Configuration 3 13 Chapter Series 90 Micro PLC Configuration GFK 0402G 4 The Series 90 Micro PLC can be configured and programmed using the Series 90 30 20 MicroHand HeldProgrammer IC693PRG300 Configuration and programming using the Hand Held Programmer must be done with the Hand Held Programmer HHP attached to and interfacing with the PLC This chapter has two Sections Section 1 describes configuration of the Micro PLC CPU parameters Section 2 describes configuration of the High Speed Counter that is built into the Micro PLC For detailed information about the Series 90 Micro PLC refer to GFK 1065 the Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual T a45452 OOOO QUO OnO OUSO n 2 3 O4 COM i i I7 I8 COM2 Il kenaf L J L f 2FNDC OUT 24 VDC INPUT POS NEG PWR GE F anuc OK SERIES 90 MICRO RUN INPUT 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 OUTPUT PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER 85 265VX C 24 VDC 120 240 VAG N O RELAY OUT es T 1
194. ONAL SLEW SAND TERM gt gt P x gt Pimrr CLAMP gt POLARITY gt Cv p INTEGRAL SY TERM Figure 9 1 Standard ISA PID Algorithm PIDISA The independent term algorithm PIDIND applies the proportional gain only to the proportional gain term as shown in the block diagram below Otherwise the algorithms are identical a43859 DIFFERENTIAL SP gt TERM BIAS DEAD PROPORTIONAL z SLEW BAND TERM D gt LIMIT gt CLAMP gt POLARITY gt Cv p INTEGRAL PY TERM Figure 9 2 Independent Term Algorithm PIDIND 9 260 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Ziegler and Nichols Tuning Approach Changes to the proportional gain and the integral gain will affect the output immediately They should be adjusted slowly and in small increments to allow the system to respond to their adjustments Loop tuning should be done according to any established method used for process control loop tuning One such method explained below is the Ziegler and Nichols Tuning Approach 1 Determine the process gain apply a unit step to the control variable output and measure the process variable response after it has stabilized This response is K the process gain 2 Determine the process lag time The process lag time t can be estimated as the time it takes the pr
195. P Display 0001 INS lt S Initial display Press the key sequence 0001 INS lt S C LD m 5 LD M 15_ T Press the ENT key 0002 INS lt S 9 170 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Press the key sequence 0002 INS lt S FUNC 26_ BITTST FUNG 2 6 Press the T key 0002 BITTST lt S POI _ Press the key sequence an 0002 BITTST lt S P01 I 1_ Press the Z9 key 0002 BITTST lt S P02 _ Press the key sequence 0002 BITTST lt S P02 7_ Press the Z9 key 0002 BITTST lt S P03 _ Press the key sequence 0002 BITTST lt S P03 2_ EM key 0003 INS lt S Press the 49 Key GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 171 9 Bit Position BITPOS Function 28 The Bit Position function BITPOS is a conditionally executed function which is used to determine which bit in a string of bits is set to 1 When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable EN input the function is executed by the CPU and a new Bit Position function will take place The IN parameter specifies the beginning of the bit string and LEN specifies the length of the bit string in words When executed the function block searches the bit string starting with the least significant bit until either a bit eq
196. P02 0004 DPDIV lt S P02 R 201 0004 DPDIV lt S P03_ 0004 DPDIV lt S P03 R 203_ 0005 INS lt S 0006 INS lt S 9 81 2 Modulo Division MOD Function 68 Double Precision Modulo Division DPMOD Function 69 Two modulo division functions are available Division and modulo division are similar functions which differ only in their output division finds a quotient while modulo division finds a remainder The signed modulo division function MOD is a conditionally executed function which modulo divides one signed word value by another The double precision signed modulo division function DPMOD is a conditionally executed function which modulo divides one signed double word value by another When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable EN input the function is executed by the CPU and a new signed division for MOD or double precision signed division for DPMPOD will take place During a signed division or double precision signed division execution the value in P1 input 1 is divided by the value in P2 input 2 The result of this signed division is the remainder only the quotient is lost and is stored in the memory location specified by P3 Q To obtain the quotient use the DIV Function 66 for signed division or DPDIV Function 67 for double precision signed division Functions 66 and 67 find only the quotient the remainder is lost MOD Function Description
197. P2 Input I2 signeddecimal Double Precision Not Equal DPNE P1 Input I1 signeddecimal Function 73 P2 Input I2 signeddecimal DP Less Than or Equal DPLE P1 Input I1 signeddecimal Function 74 P2 Input I2 signeddecimal DP Greater Than or Equal DPGE P1 Input Il signed decimal Function 75 P2 Input I2 signeddecimal Double Precision Less Than DPLT P1 Input I1 signed decimal Function 76 P2 Input I2 signeddecimal Double Precision Greater Than DPGT P1 Input I signed decimal Function 77 P2 Input I2 signeddecimal INT to BCD Conversion BCD P1 Input I1 signed decimal Function 80 P2 Output Q signeddecimal BCD to INT Conversion INT P1 Input I1 signed decimal Function 81 P2 Output Q signeddecimal Dol O DOI O P1 Start ST signed decimal Function 85 P2 End END signeddecimal P3 Destination ALT signeddecimal PIDISA PIDISA Desired Set Point SP signed decimal Function 86 Process Variable PV signeddecimal Data StructureLocation LOC signeddecimal Control Variable CV signeddecimal PIDIND PIDIND Desired Set Point SP signed decimal Function 87 Process Variable PV signeddecimal Data StructureLocation LOC signeddecimal Control Variable CV signeddecimal Communications Request COMRQ CMD signed decimal Function 88 SYSID signeddecimal TASK signeddecimal Service Request SVCRQ P1 Request Number FNC signed decimal Function 89 P2 Output PARAM signeddecimal D 4 _ Hand Held Programmer Series 90 30 20 MicroProgramma
198. PTY After selecting the starting AQ address and pressing the ENT key the next screen that appears is RO 03 AIO 1 00 lt S AI4 AI_ Selecting Al Reference 5 44 This screen allows you to select the starting address for the AI reference by specifying the starting reference in the AI field You can select the next available address the default or enter a specific address Pressing the ENT key will allow the PLC to select the starting addresses To enter a specific address for example AI35 press the starting reference number keys and the ENT key For example to specify a starting address of AQ35 press the key sequence 3 5 ENT RO 03 AIO 1 00 lt S AI4 AI035 AI038 Note that the length of the status field 4 is displayed as the first digit following the first AQ on the second line of the display Note This field cannot be changed with the Hand Held programmer However it can be changed using the Logicmaster 90 30 software configurator func tion The Hand Held Programmer will always reflect the currently active length of the status field You can press the CLR key at any time to abort the configuration you have just selected and return the slot to EMPTY After selecting the starting AQ address and pressing the ENT key the next screen that appears is RO 03 AIO 1 00 lt S I24 I_ Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable ControllersUser s Manual February1996 GFK 0402G Selecti
199. S CHANNEL 1 0 20 RO 03 HI DEN C gt S CHANNEL 1 4 20 Alarm Limits Display To view the alarm limits for the channel currently displayed press the gt key again the first time caused the channel ranges to be available for editing The following screen is displayed RO 03 HI DEN C gt S CHAN 1 LO 00000 The display is the entry field for the low alarm limit for the displayed channel in this case Channel 1 You can enter the desired low alarm limit value using the numeric keys and the key for specifying negative values Enter the low alarm limit using a value within the valid limits as listed in Table 2 After you have entered the low alarm limit value press the gt key again to advance to the high alarm limit display for this channel The following screen is displayed at this time Chapter 5 I O Configuration 5 35 RO 03 HI DEN C gt S CHAN 1 HI 32000 The display shows the entry field for the high alarm limit for the currently displayed channel You can enter positive or negative numbers see table 2 using the and numeric keys After selecting the low and high alarm limits for channel 1 or the currently displayed channel you can view the next channel by pressing the key RO 03 HI DEN C gt S CHANNEL 2 4 20 Edit the range and low and high alarm limits as described for Channel 1 All active channels can be changed in this manner Return to the initial display screen by pressing the ENT key
200. Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G 9 The constant specified by parameter P1 or the value located in the 16 bit memory location specified by parameter P1 should not be allowed to be larger then the number of steps specified by parameter P3 in this stage bit sequencer If the step number is larger then the number of steps in the stage bit sequencer upon power flow to the reset input a one 1 will be placed into the single bit memory location equal to the equivalent step number The next execution of the stage bit sequencer will move the pointer to step number one if incrementing and to the highest numbered step when decrementing Power flow to the reset input is dominant over the enable input That is if power flow is received at both the enable input and the reset input at the same time the pointer will move to the step number specified by parameter P1 Power flow through this function will follow the condition of the logic connected to the enable input of this function When parameters P1 and P2 are memory locations they represent 16 bit words If discrete memory types are used for parameters P1 and P2 the beginning address must be on a 16 point boundary The enable EN input is interpreted differently depending on the state it was in the previous time the bit sequencer function block was executed The reset R input dominates over the enable input as shown in the follow
201. State In the following example the current access level is level 4 and an OEM key has not yet been set Follow this procedure to establish FEDC as the OEM key and then lock OEM protection 1 The initial display screen shows level 4 as the current access level LEVEL4 lt S 2 Press the Left cursor key the system will prompt you for the OEM key Press the key LEVEL4 OEM KEY _ 8 10 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 3 Since OEM protection is not currently locked and level 4 access has been achieved you can view the current OEM key Press the Left cursor key again Press the key pacha NULL i Since no OEM key has ever been specified NULL is displayed to signify the absence of a key 4 Press the following key sequence to enter the OEM key then press the ENT key LEVEL4 lt S SET KEY FEDC F E NOT OR At this point the OEM key has been set but OEM protection has not been locked 5 To initiate the lock operation press the Right cursor key to display the previous screen Press the key pig i 6 From this screen you can lock OEM protection by entering the key sequence of the OEM key and pressing the ENT key Removing OEM Protection The OEM key can be removed when OEM protection is no longer required In order to delete an existing OEM key it must first be displayed as desc
202. T NOT P1 Input 1 signed decimal Function 29 P2 Output Q signeddecimal Bit Shift Left SHL Input Array IN signed decimal Function 30 Shift Distance N signeddecimal Length LEN signeddecimal Output Array Q signeddecimal Bit Shift Right SHR Input Array IN signeddecimal Function 31 Shift Distance N signeddecimal Length LEN signed decimal Output Array Q signeddecimal Bit Rotate Left ROL Input Array IN signeddecimal Function 32 Shift Distance N signeddecimal Length LEN signeddecimal Output Array Q signeddecimal Bit Rotate Right ROR Input Array IN signeddecimal Function 33 Shift Distance N signeddecimal Length LEN signeddecimal Output Array Q signeddecimal Multiple Word Move MOVIN IN signed decimal Function 37 LE signeddecimal signeddecimal Constant Block Move BMOVI Constant signed decimal Function 38 Constant signeddecimal Constant signeddecimal Constant signeddecimal Constant signeddecimal Constant signeddecimal Constant signeddecimal Output signeddecimal Move Bits MOVBN P1 Begin String signed decimal Function 40 P2 String Length signeddecimal P3 Destination signeddecimal Multiple Word Move MOVWN P1 Input signed decimal Function 42 P2 Length signeddecimal P3 Output signeddecimal Constant Block Move BMOVW P1 Constant signed decimal Function 43 P2 Constant signeddecimal P3 Constant signeddecimal P4 Constant signeddecimal P5 Constant signeddecimal P6 Const
203. T 1 f 1 L H QI COM Q2 COM2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 COM3 OE OL OO O O O OF O O OQ Figure 4 1 Series 90 Micro Programmable Logic Controller 4 1 Section 1 Micro PLC Configuration Table 4 1 lists all parameters for the Micro PLC except those concerning the High Speed Counters see Section 2 for details on configuring the High Speed Counters Parameters that are displayed for the user s information only are denoted not editable in the description Table 4 1 Micro PLC Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value I C amp can Stop Determines whether I O is to be scanned while the PLC YES NO is in STOP mode NO Pwr Up Mode Selects power up mode LAST LAST STOP RUN Logic From Source of logic when the PLC is powered up RAM RAM PROM flash memory Registers Selects source of register data when the PLCis powered RAM RAM up PROM flash memory Passwords Determines whether the password feature isenabled or ENABLED ENABLED disabled Note If passwords are disabled the only way DISABLED to re enable them is to clear the Micro PLC memory by power cycling the unit with the battery removed Baud Rate Data transmission rate in bits per second 300 4800 19200 600 9600 1200 19200 2400 Data Bits Determines whether the CPU recognizes 7 bit or 8 bit 7 8 words 8 Parity Determines whether parity is added to words ODD ODD EVEN NONE Stop Bits Number of sto
204. TA Use the Up and Down cursor keys to scroll the menu selection display in order to view other possible selections Each press of the Up cursor key scrolls the menu up one position each press of the Down cursor key scrolls the menu down one position Possible selections include 1 PROGRAM 2 DATA 3 PROTECT 4 CONFIG To select an operating mode enter the single digit corresponding to the desired mode The name of that mode does not have to be currently displayed on the menu display in order for that mode to be selected Press the ENT key to invoke the new mode One alternate method of selecting the operating mode is to use the Up and Down cursor keys to display the desired mode at the top of the screen and press the ENT key to execute the selection If the desired mode is already displayed at the top of 2 8 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G the screen simply press the ENT key Pressing the ENT key with no mode value entered will execute the current top menu selection Modes 1 2 3 and 4 are currently the only modes supported If any other number is entered on the mode selection screen it will be ignored To cancel a mode change request press the CLR key or press the desired new number Read Write V erify Functions Support is provided for the storage of data in a secondary storage device The secondary storage device may be either an EEPROM
205. These faults are identified by time date and location 1 0 Module A printed circuit assembly that interfaces between user devices and the Series 90 30 PLC K An abbreviation for kilo or exactly 1024 in the language of computers Ladder Diagram A graphic representation of combinational logic LED Status Display Adisplay consisting of a group of LEDs with two rows of eight LEDs at the top of each discrete I O module Each LED in the two groups of eight indicates the state of the respective input or output point on the board Link Horizontal and vertical links are used to carry power around an element in a ladder logic program or to place elements in parallel or series with one another List A group of consecutive storage locations in memory used for data manipulation The beginning address and length of the list are set up in the user program Data is accessed from either the top or the bottom of the list Logic Solution Time The time required to execute all active instructions in the application program Main Baseplate The baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system in which the CPU is installed This rack must always be included in a system and is always rack number 0 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G Memor y Card Amemory cartridge containing EEPROM memory which is inserted into a slot in the Hand Held Programmer Thi
206. This must start with an LD element Type of function either Function 64 MUL or Function 65 DPMUL Parameter P1 input 1 value to be multiplied This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored Parameter P2 input 2 the other value being multiplied This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored Parameter P3 Q memory location where the result is to be stored The following tables specify which memory types are valid for each of the parameters for the MUL and DPMUL functions Allowable Memory Types for MUL Function 64 ee ee oe e ro a De ee ee FSO e a a ee E Allowable Memory Types for DPMUL Function 65 EGE ECR CC OC 2 ee ee ee ee ee orpoa E SS a E Note that double precision constants are constrained to the range 32 768 to 32 767 GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 73 Programming Example for Multiplication This programming example uses the DPMUL function In this example a contact from a one shot OUT is used as the controlling element for the power flow to the enable input of the multiply function When input 10001 closes passes power flow M0001 will pass power flow to the enable input of the multiply function for only one sweep of the CPU scan Therefore the multiplication will only occur once each time input 1 is closed When the multiplication takes place a value located in registers 199 and 200
207. UMP TON You must ensure that the logic solution repetition caused by a backward jump is terminated with the maximum allowable sweep time 200 ms If the repetition is allowed to continue beyond the maximum sweep time the PLC watchdog timer will time out This will cause the PLC to come to a complete shut down with the OK and RUN LEDs off and with the outputs placed in their default states This could create a situation which could damage equipment or cause personal injury For Model 311 313 and 331 CPUs the only way to get the PLC out of this state is to power off the PLC and then power it back on with the Hand Held Programmer connected and simultaneously pressing the RUN and NOT keys CPU Models 340 341 351 and 211 will reset themselves generate a watchdog timer fault and resume operation in STOP mode The following programming rules apply to the JUMP function e JUMP instructions and their associated labels can be nested in any order e Multiple JUMPs to the same label are allowed e The JUMP nesting levels are restricted only by the maximum number of 256 specified by LABEL plus the END MCR limit Backwards jumps are allowed e New JUMP instructions cannot be within the scope of the format of release 1 of MCRs and JUMPs In addition the previous format of MCRs and JUMPs cannot be programmed within the scope of new MCR instructions The new release 2 and later of JUMP instructions can be nested within the scope of
208. UT BQ 1 OUTM AQ Press the ENT key 0004 INS lt S 9 168 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Bit Test BITTST Function 26 The Bit Test function BITTST is a conditionally executed function which is used to determine if a particular bit in a string of bits is set to 1 or 0 When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable EN input the function is executed by the CPU and a new Bit Test function will take place The IN parameter specifies the beginning of the bit string The BIT parameter specifies the number of the bit to be tested in the bit string Bits in the bit string are numbered beginning with 1 starting with the least significant bit to the most significant bit The LEN parameter specifies the length of the string bit in words The output Q of the function block is set to the current state 1 or 0 of the tested bit The BITTST function has the possibility of not being able to execute properly since the BIT parameter can be specified from a word in a reference table and a bit number greater than the length of the bit string could be encountered at the time of execution However there is not a power flow output to indicate failure of the function block to execute When this error situation occurs the function block output Q will be 0 Logic for enable cnab1e eT i ove flow output to
209. VABI lt S Press the key sequence 0002 MOVABI lt S J Le PO5 16_ Press the T key a os MOVABI lt S 9 294 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G Press the key sequence B Q JJ Press the key Press the key sequence BO AQ OUT OUTM Press the S key Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language oF 0003 INS 0003 INS OUT Q1_ 0004 INS lt S lt S lt S 9 295 Example 2 Byte Array Move In this example when input 10001 is closed passes power flow to the enable input the function is executed Bit memory is used for the SR and DS inputs 10017 to I32 of the array I0001 to I0040 is read and then written into the destination Q0041 to Q0056 of the array Q0041 through Q0080 Ladder Diagram Representation Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 FUNC 131 MOVABY P01 10001 P02 3 P03 1 P04 2 P05 5 P06 Q0041 0003 OUT Q0001 After pressing the INS Key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display 0001 INS lt S Initial display Press the key sequence 0001 INS lt S Aa Al D 1 LD I 1_ 9 296 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual Febr
210. Wltage Output module is installed in slot 3 of a Model 311 PLC system It can be added to the configuration with the following sequence Use the and J arrow cursor keys or the key to display the selected slot GFK 0402G Chapter 5 I O Configuration 5 37 Initial Display To add the IC693ALG392 module to the configuration press the READ VERIFY ENT key sequence The following screen will be displayed RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S I16 I_ For more information on assigning I O references see page 5 10 Assigning Reference Addresses to I O Modules Selecting l Reference At this point the starting I reference address for the status data returned from the module must be entered Notice that the length of the status field 16 is displayed as the first two digits following the first I on the second line of the display Note This field cannot be changed with the Hand Held programmer However it can be changed using the Logicmaster 90 30 software configurator function The Hand Held Programmer will always reflect the currently active length of the status field Pressing the ENT key will allow the PLC to select the starting address of the status data You can select a specific starting address by pressing the key sequence for the desired address and pressing the ENT key For example to specify the starting address as 117 press the key sequence 1 7 ENT The following screen will be displayed RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S I16 10017 10032 You c
211. a 1 when the function is executed Affected Word 10024 10009 Q0136 Q0121 After Move 0110 100111101010 11010011 11010011 Before Move 01101001 11101010 1100 0000 0000 0011 Ladder Diagram Representation MOVE_BIT l I0012 P1 IN l const P2 LEN 0009 Q I P3 000125 Statement List Representation 0001 LD G0007 0002 FUNC 40 MOVBN P1 10012 P2 9 P3 Q0125 GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 189 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display Initial display 0001 INS lt S Press the key sequence G S 0001 INS lt S fi 7 LD G 7 Press the key 0002 INS lt S Press the key sequence LJL Press the key 0002 MOVBN lt S PO1 0002 INS lt S k FUNC 40_ MOVBN FUNC Press the key sequence 0002 MOVBN lt S OG aes Press the at key 0002 MOVBN lt S P02 9 190 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Press the key sequence 0002 MOVBN lt S P02 9 Press the ay key 0002 MOVBN lt S P03 _ Press the key sequence 0002 MOVBN lt S BG P03 Q125 AJJ Press the A key 0003 INS lt S Press the key sequence Bo AQ OUT OUTM
212. a BCD value to signed integer PerformimmediateI Osnapshot Implements an ISA standard PIDISA algorithm Implements an ISA standard PID IND algorithm C 2 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Table C 1 List of Functions continued Function Number 88 89 90 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 130 131 132 133 Function Mnemonic COMRQ SVCRO CALLSUB SREQB SREQW SREQI SREQDI SRLTB SRLTW SRLTI SRLIDI SRLEB SRLEW SRLEI SRLEDI SRGTB SRGTW SRGTI SRGTDI SRGEB SRGEW SRGEI SRGEDI MOVABI MOVABY MOVAW MOVAI nHlHln w Z Z 2 2 m m m m Sh ae a te Description Communicationsrequest System servicerequest Callasubroutine Search for all array values equal to a specified byte value Search for all array values equal to a specified word value Search for all array values equal toa specified integer value Search for all array values equal to a specified double precision integer value Search for all array values not equal to a specified byte value Search for all array values not equal to a specified word value Search for all array values not equal to a specified integer value Search for all array values not equal to a specified double precision integer value Search for all array values less than a specified byte value Search for all
213. a byte boundary DPLT Function Description The two values specified by parameters P1 and P2 must be the same data type 3 bit two s complement signed integers and must be within the range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 When using the Hand Held Programmer to program a constant into parameters P1 or P2 the constant must be in the range of a single precision number 32768 to 32767 The memory locations for P1 and P2 are each 32 Bits long The storage area for each register AI and AQ is 16 Bits long therefore two consecutive registers AI words or AQ words must be used for each double precision signed number which is to be stored The address of the lower of the two registers AI words or AQ words is used as the reference to store and retrieve the double precision number The Hand Held Programmer can only display a maximum of 16 bits one Register AI or AQ word at a time therefore a double precision number outside of the range 32768 to 32767 cannot be programmed into the CPU or monitored using the Hand Held Programmer The hexadecimal or binary number for each register AI or AQ word may be programmed or monitored provided that they are placed together outside of the CPU to form the 32 Bit double precision signed number This function will pass power flow when there is power flow to the enable input and the value specified by parameter P1 is greater than the value specified by parameter P2 Chapter 9 Statement List Programming
214. a second and the preset remained at 50 power flow would occur after 50 one hundredths of a second increments were recorded into the current value which is 0 5 seconds or one half second after the enable input received and maintained power flow Logic for Enable Input enable IE Power flow output to a coil or another function Location Address P3 Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus Must start with an LD element Type of function Function 10 Parameter P1 timer accuracy base value for timing increments 1 one hundredth of a second 01 second 10 one tenth of a second 0 1 second 4 Parameter P2 preset time a constant number or the number of a register that will contain the preset value 5 Parameter P3 timer location number of the first register of the three sequential registers containing the operating values GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 39 The following table specifies the valid memory types for each of the TMR function block s parameters Allowable Memory Types for TMR Function 10 we S retin f f Sme _ Only constants of 1 10 and 100 are allowed Only positive constants are allowed except 1 which indicates no preset parameter Timer Accuracy P01 The timer accuracy parameter indicates the time base of the timer A
215. a second or hundredths or a second When power flow is removed from the enable input the current value stops incrementing and maintains its current value When power flow is restored to this functions enable input the current value will continue to increment starting from this maintained value Power flow will pass through this function when the current value of timing increments is equal to or greater then the specified number of timing increments programmed in as the preset value timer parameter P2 When the logic connected to the reset R input passes power to this function the current value is reset to zero and the power flow through this function is also removed Power flow to the reset input is dominant over the enable input That is if power flow is received at both the enable input and the reset input at the same time the current value will be set to a value of zero it will not increment in value and there will be no power flow through the function The On Delay timer is retentive on power failure to the CPU and when the mode is changed from run to stop and back to run again There is no automatic initialization of this timer during power up i e the current value does not go to zero unless this timer is reset Logic for Enable input enable EES Power flow output to a coil or another function Logic for Reset Input reset Preset Value P2 PV location Address P3 Programming Elements and Sequential Or
216. ailableonModel311 321 Model313 323 or Model211 Programsource RAM RAM EEPROM Registersource RAM RAM EEPROM Power up mode RUN SAMEPD STOP SAMEPD Active Constant Sweep Mode DISABLE DISABLE ENABLE Active Constant Sweep Setting 5 200 msec 100msec Configured Constant Sweep Mode DISABLE DISABLE ENABLE Configured Constant Sweep Setting 5 200 msec 100msec I Oscaninstop mode NOI O NOI O DOI O Dual use checking SINGLE Port idle time 1 60 seconds 10 seconds GFK 0402G Table 3 1 User Configurable PLC Parameters continued Parameter Selections Default Value Baud rate 19 2k Data bits 7 BITS 8 BITS 8 BITS Stop bits 1BIT 1BIT 2 BITS Parity ODD ODD NONE EVEN Modem turnaround time 0 to 255 counts 0 Disablepasswords ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE CPUID 6 ASCII characters 0 F 000000 DefaultI OConfiguration ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE Checksum Words Per Sweep 8 through 32 8 This chapter describes how each parameter is configured The initial screen displayed in configuration mode is the last one viewed the previous time configuration mode was selected since the PLC was powered up If this is the first time configuration mode was entered slot 1 of rack 0 Model 331 340 341 351 CPU rack or slot 0 of rack 0 Model 311 313 is displayed Entering Configuration Mode In order to view and or change the PLC parameters you must first select the configuration mode of operation 1
217. al Test for one signed word number greater than or equal Double Precision Greater Than or Equal to another DPGE Test for one signed double word number greater than or equal to another LT Less Than Test for one signed word number less than another DPLT Double Precision Less Than Test for one signed double word number less than another LE Less Than or Equal Test for one signed word number less than or equal to another Double Precision Less Than or Equal DPLE Test for one signed double word number less than or equal to another RANGI Integer Range Test for an integer to be within a specified range RANGDI Double Precision Range Test for a double word value to be within a specified range RANGW Word range Test for a word value to be within a specified range Each of the relational functions is described in this section 9 90 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Equal EQ Function 52 Double Precision Equal DPEQ Function 72 Two equal functions are available The equal test EQ is a conditionally executed function which tests for one signed word value equal to another The double precision equal test DPEQ is a conditionally executed function which tests for one signed double word value equal to another When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to this functions enable input the function is executed by
218. already configured the power supply can be added to the configuration in one of two ways First any module can be added into an I O slot of the rack In this case the PLC will automatically configure the power supply into slot 0 of the rack Alternately the power supply can be configured manually as shown in the following steps Initial display R1 00 EMPTY lt S GFK 0402G Chapter 5 I O Configuration 5 5 To add the power supply to the configuration Press the key sequence R1 00 PWR SUP lt S RK SIZE 10 SLOT Racks an be configured in this manner even if they are not physically present The default rack type is an expansion rack If no modules are configured in a rack then the rack type can be deleted from the configuration by pressing the DEL and ENT keys while viewing the power supply slot for that rack This can be used to prevent display of power supplies in unused racks when the configuration is to be LOADed to Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micreoftware To view the configured rack press gt R 00 PWR SUP lt S RACK TYPE EXPAN The configured rack type can be changed if desired If the actual rack type does not match the configured rack type then a mismatch alarm will be generated for the power supply slot of that rack and none of the I O modules in that rack will be scanned Note that the rack type of the main rack rack 0 cannot be changed If you want to select another rack type for example a remote rack use the follo
219. alue Chapter 4 Series 90 Micro PLC Configuration 4 17 Screens 11 26 41 56 High Limit RO 04 HSC lt S HI LIM x 32767 These screens are used to specify the highest most positive value the count accumulator can reach The default is 32767 which is the maximum value the Type A counters can handle As with the time base use the Hand Held Programmer numeric keys to change the value then press the ENT key to record it Pressing CLR instead of ENT cancels the entry Screens 12 27 42 57 Low Limit R0 04 HSC lt S LO LIM x 0 These screens specify the lowest most negative value for the count accumulator Screens 13 28 43 58 ON Preset Value R0 04 HSC lt S ON PST x 32767 When the counter accumulator exceeds this value depending also on the value of the OFF preset the associated output is turned on depending on the state either enabled or disabled of the output control flags in the Q data word For details see Output Preset Positions on page 6 22 Screens 14 29 44 59 OFF Preset Value R0 04 HSC lt S 0 OFF PST x When the counter accumulator exceeds this value the associated output is turned off Screens 15 30 45 60 Preload Value This parameter specifies the value that will be loaded into the accumulator when the associated PRELOAD input on the terminal strip is asserted 4 18 Hand Held Programmerfor Series90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual
220. ameter P1 is compared to the constant 38 programmed as parameter P2 If the value in register 240 is less than 38 then the output Q0001 will be turned on Assume that the value in register 240 is 38 The output Q0001 will not turn on because the value in register 38 is equal to the constant 38 and this is a less than function Ladder Diagram Representation CONST 0038 Statement List Representation 0001 LD 0002 FUNC 56 P1 P2 0003 OUT After pressing key Key Strokes Initial display Press the key sequence Press the key e LD Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 10001 LT R0240 38 Q0001 HHP Display 0001 INS lt S NS 0002 INS lt S 9 109 Press the key sequence 0002 INS lt S Fund 5 6 FUNC 56 LT Press the ay key 0002 LT PO1l _ Press the key sequence 0002 LT zS manim n Press the S key 0002 LT P02 _ Press the key sequence 0002 LT P02 38_ Press the key 0003 INS lt S Press the key sequence SENE Press the S key 0004 INS lt S BQ AQ OUT OUTM 9 110 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Less Than or Equal To Comparison LE Function 54 Double Precision Less Than or Equal To Comparison DPLE Function 74 GFK 0402G There are two less than or equal
221. ammable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 HHP Display 0001 INS lt S GFK 0402G Press the key 0004 INS lt S Press the key sequence BIE Press the ay key 0004 ROR lt S POI _ Press the key sequence 0004 INS lt S E FUNC 33_ ROR fand 0004 ROR lt S PII GI eo Press the key 0004 ROR lt S P02 Press the key sequence 0004 ROR lt S P02 2_ Press the key 0004 ROR lt S P03 Press the key sequence 0004 ROR lt S P03 3o GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 159 Press the key 0004 ROR lt S P04 _ k Press the key sequence 0004 ROR zS gag ae Press the key Press the key sequence 0005 INS zS o a il OUT Q 1 OUTM AQ Press the ERT key 9 160 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Bit Set BITSET Function 22 GFK 0402G The Bit Set function BITSET is a conditionally executed function which is used to SET a particular bit in a string of bits to a 1 When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable EN input the function is executed by the CPU and a new bit set function will take place The IN parameter specifies the beginning of the bit string The BIT parameter specifies the number of the bit to be set in the bit s
222. ammer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 The PID ISA PIDISA and PID IND PIDIND functions are conditionally executed functions which when executed will implement the ISA standard algorithm PID ISA or the independent term algorithm PID IND respectively Boolean outputs parameters and memory type restrictions are identical for both algorithms PID is an acronym for proportional Antegral Merivative The PID function is designed to solve one loop equation in one execution The function block data uses 40 registers in a loop data table The first 35 registers are reserved for the function and should not be used by any application program The last 5 registers are reserved for external use Registers cannot be shared If there are multiple occurrences of the same PID function controlling multiple loops each occurrence requires a separate block of 40 registers The PIDISA and PIDIND functions provide two PID proportional integral Merivative closed loop control algorithms The PID function has seven input parameters a Boolean enable a process set point SP a process variable PV a manualAuto Boolean switch MAN a manual mode up adjustment input UP and a manual mode down adjustment DN It also has an address which specifies the location of a block of parameters associated with the function It has two output parameters a successful Boolean output ok and the control variable re
223. an ONLY be automatically configured when it is physically present in a baseplate GFK 0402G Chapter 5 I O Configuration 5 45 Removing Module From Configuration If required this module can be removed from the current rack configuration Assume that the module is currently configured in rack 0 slot 3 It can be deleted with the following sequence RO 03 AIO 1 00 lt S AQ2 AO To delete the module press the DEL ENT key sequence The display will then be RO 03 EMPTY lt S If the CLR key had been pressed after the DEL key instead of the ENT key the delete operation would have been aborted Selecting Module Default Mode 5 46 The default STOP mode of the module either HOLD or DEFLOW can be displayed and modified if required by using the following procedure R0 03 AIO 1 00 lt S AQ2 AQ035 AQ036 To display the module s default STOP mode press the key The display will show the current mode of the module The default mode is HOLD RO 03 AIO 1 00 lt S HLS DEF HOLD You can toggle between the HOLD and DEFLOW modes by pressing the key The range selected is the one currently displayed on the screen RO 03 AIO 1 00 lt S HLS DEF DEF LOW When the desired mode for the module is displayed on the screen it can be accepted by pressing the ENT key To return to the previous screen press the lt key Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February1
224. an be read into any Release 4 or later Series 90 30 CPU cannot be read into a Series 90 20 CPU Refer to Chapter 2 of this manual for detailed information on the Save and Restore operations GFK 0402G Chapter 5 I O Configuration 5 41 Configuring the Current Voltage Combination Input Output Module The Analog Current Voltage Combination Input Output module catalog number IC693ALG442 provides up to 4 differential input current or voltage channels and 2 single ended output channels with either current loop outputs or voltage outputs Each channel can be individually configured for the current or voltage range as applicable required for your application All module configuration is done through software except for a jumper required for selecting the current input mode All ranges can be configured using either the Logicmaster 90 30 programming software configurator function or the Series 90 30 Hand Held Programmer Note that in this module s description the module will be referred to simply as the Analog Combo Module Each analog input is capable of providing five input ranges two voltage and three current which are 0 to 10 volts unipolar default range for both input and output channels e 10 to 10 volts bipolar e Oto20mA 4to20mA 4to 20 mA Enhanced The default input range is voltage mode 0 to 10 volts unipolar with user data scaled so that OV corresponds to a count of 0 and 10V corresponds to a count of 320
225. an press the CLR key at any time to abort the configuration you have just selected and return the slot to EMPTY After selecting the starting I address and pressing the ENT key the following screen appears RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S AQ8 AQ Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February1996 GFK 0402G Selecting AQ Reference This screen allows you to select the starting address for the AQ reference by specifying the starting reference in the AQ field You can select the next available address the default or enter a specific address Pressing the ENT key will allow the PLC to select the starting addresses To enter a specific address for example AQ35 press the starting reference number keys and the ENT key For example to specify a starting address of AQ35 press the key sequence 3 5 ENT RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S AQ8 AQ035 AQ043 Note that the length of the status field 8 is displayed as the first two digits following the first AQ on the second line of the display Note This field cannot be changed with the Hand Held programmer Howev er it can be changed using the Logicmaster 90 30 software configurator function The Hand Held Programmer will always reflect the currently active length of the status field You can press the CLR key at any time to abort the configuration you have just selected and return the slot to EMPTY Removing Module From Configuration I
226. ance to the next alarm limit screen for this channel RO 03 AIO 1 00 lt S CH 1 I HI 32000 This screen shows the entry field for the high alarm limit for this channel You can enter positive or negative integer values using the key and the numeric keys To view the next channel again press the key RO 03 AIO 1 00 lt S CH 2 1I 0 10 Edit the alarm limits in the same manner as you did for the first channel All active channels can be changed with the above key sequences Return to the initial display screen by pressing the ENT key or by repeatedly pressing the lt key until the initial screen is displayed If parameter data is entered to values that are illegal such as a low limit alarm greater than an upper limit value or entering a negative alarm for unipolar modes the module will enter freese mode This mode will not allow you to exit from the present channel parameters range low alarm limit and high alarm limit until the illegal condition is removed If you should press the lt key to go below the range parameter or the gt key to try to move past the high alarm limit the Hand Held Programmer will stay on those parameters If you press the T and J keys to change slots the screen will display SAVE CHANGES lt S lt ENT gt Y lt CLR gt N If you do not want to save the changes to the CPU press the CLR key the screen display will then be DISCARDCHANGES lt S lt ENT gt Y lt CLR gt N If you do
227. annel count must be provided If either is invalid that is a module type of R the configuration request will be refused and an EMPTY message will be displayed TOM ERR is displayed when a wrong point module type is entered All discrete I O modules require a point count that is a multiple of 8 Chapter 5 I O Configuration 5 9 Assigning Reference Addresses to I O Modules You can specify where the I O module should map into the reference tables or you can allow the module to default to a PLC assigned range When the CPU chooses a default reference it wil always choose an address higher than the highest reference address of this type that has ever been used regardless of which addresses are currently being used If such a selection is not possible because the highest possible address has previously been used then REF ERR will be displayed and you must specify an address You must specify a starting reference address whereby the entire module can be mapped into the available reference address space If the module will not completely fit into the reference address space the configuration request will be refused and a DAT ERRmessage will be displayed The starting reference must be on a byte multiple of 8 boundary in the reference space If you enter a starting reference not on a byte boundary it will be automatically adjusted to the next lowest byte boundary and a REF ADJ warning will be issued You can accept the adjusted starting ref
228. ant signeddecimal P7 Constant signeddecimal P8 Output signeddecimal Block Clear BLKCL signed decimal Function 44 signeddecimal Shift Register SHFRW P1 Input IN signed decimal Function 45 P2 Location ST signeddecimal P3 Length LEN signeddecimal P4 Output Q signeddecimal D 2 _ Hand Held Programmer Series 90 30 20 MicroProgrammableControllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G gt Table D 1 Function Parameters continued Logicmaster Default Function Parameter Abbreviation Display Format Shift Register Bit SHFRB P1 Bit to Shift IN signed decimal Function 46 P2 Start Address ST signeddecimal P3 Register Length LEN signeddecimal P4 Bit Destination Q signeddecimal Bit Sequencer SEQB P1 Length signed decimal Function 47 P2 Start Address signeddecimal P3 Sequencer Location signeddecimal P4 Sequencer Location signeddecimal Equal EQ P1 Input Il signeddecimal Function 52 P2 Input I2 signeddecimal Not Equal NE P1 Input I1 signeddecimal Function 53 P2 Input I2 signeddecimal Less Than or Equal LE P1 Input I1 signed decimal Function 54 P2 Input I2 signeddecimal Greater Than or Equal GE P1 Input I1 signed decimal Function 55 P2 Input I2 signeddecimal Less Than LT P1 Input I1 signed decimal Function 56 P2 Input I2 signeddecimal Greater Than GT P1 Input I1 signeddecimal Function 57 P2 Input I2 signeddecimal Addition ADD P1 Input I1 signed decimal Function 60 P2 In
229. arch Less Than functions are conditionally executed functions which are used to search for all array values less than a specified value Each function has four input parameters and two output parameters When the function receives power the array is searched starting at AR input NX This is the starting address of the array AR plus the index into this array input NX The search continues until the array element whose value is less than the search object IN is found or until the end of the array is reached If an array element is found the output parameter FD is set to true and output parameter output NX is set to the relative position of this element within the array If no element is found with a value less than IN before the end of the array is reached then output parameter FD is set to false and output parameter output NX is set to zero The valid values for the input NX are 0 to LEN 1 This value increments by one at the time of execution Therefore the values of the output NX are 1 to LEN If the value of the input NX is out of range lt 0 or w LEN its value is set to the default value of zero The function parameters for the Search Less Than functions are shown in the following illustration The form of the function is the same for all Search Less Than functions the only difference being the data type Logic for controlling enable BAE M power flow Starting address of array P1 Set to 1 if elemen
230. are used for parameters P1 P2 and P4 the beginning address must be on an 8 point boundary Power flow through this function occurs only when the functions enable input is receiving power flow and the last bit shifted out is a one Note B2 is used with Logicmaster 90 as a connection point for connecting another function or coil to the power flow condition of this function Logic for controlling enable SRN Power flow through this function the enable input as determined by state of last bit WORD shifted out of B2 Memory location for P01 IN B2 first word LEN 001 P03 Number of words to be shifted Constant value specifying number of bits to be P02 N Q l P04 Location of first word where shifted results of shift are stored Logic controlling state B1 of bits into vacant positions Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element Logic from the left bus controlling the state of input B1 This logic must start with an LD element Type of function Function 31 SHR Parameter P1 IN the memory address location for the first word of the group of words containing the bits to be shifted Parameter P2 N a constant specifying the number of bits to be shifted each time a shift takes place Parameter P3 a constant specifying the number of words each word is 16 bits long that will be connect
231. at this option can only be enabled if CTR is set to DISABLE and the configured Series 90 Micro PLC is a DC IN DC OUT model 4 22 Hand HeldProgrammerfor Series90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Chapter I O Configuration 5 GFK 0402G The left slot in a Series 90 30 PLC rack always contains the power supply Model 311 and 313 CPUs are embedded in the backplane in 5 and 10 slot baseplates Model 331 340 341 and 351 CPU modules are always located in slot 1 of rack 0 for configuration purposes the 211 CPU is in slot 1 of rack 0 Model 331 340 341 and 351 CPU and expansion baseplates are available in 5 and 10 slot versions Slots for IO modules are referenced as slots 1 to 5 for the Model 311 813 5 slot baseplates slots 1 to 10 for the Model 323 10 slot baseplate slots 2 to 10 or 2 to 5 for the Model 331404151 CPU baseplate and slots 1 to 10 or 1 to 5 for Model 331840841851 expansion baseplates An example of a 5 and a 10 slot Series 90 30 PLC Model 311 or 313 is shown in the following figure Models 311 and 313 appear physically the same a43080 FE eal A12345678 A12345678 O PWR GE Fanuc 6 ok A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 SERIES90 30 O RUN 812345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 O BATT B12345678 STANDARD POWER SUPPLY PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER 100 240 VAG 50 60 HZ SOVA 125VBC 50W rO Fo
232. ata value of the top reference can be changed PLC State The PLC state field indicates whether the PLC is currently stopped or is running executing a program A leading lt character followed by an S if the PLC is stopped or R if it is running indicates the state of the PLC Bottom Reference The bottom reference field indicates the address of the second item in the data table which can be viewed Binary Field The binary field contains the data value associated with a reference address with a display format of single bit binary Signed Decimal The signed decimal field contains the data value associated with a reference address with a display format of 16 bit signed decimal Hexadecimal The hexadecimal field contains the data value associated with a reference address with a display of 16 bit 4 digit hexadecimal Chapter 7 Reference Tables 7 3 7 4 Register Reference Tables The register reference tables R AI AQ and SR each support three common display formats when in data mode Two of these signed decimal format and hexadecimal format are exactly like those detailed above for the discrete tables The third binary format is different then the binary format for the discrete tables For register tables the binary field contains a data value with a display format of 16 bit binary The screen format is as follows Table 7 5 Screen Format of a Register Table in Binary Format gt Top Reference PLC State Bina
233. ataa mesha nie eaen 8 5 Table 8 6 Specify Change Password for Specified Level 1 0 0 00 cece 8 7 Table 8 7 Lock and Release OEM Protection 0 0 ccc cece eens 8 8 Table 8 8 Specify Change OEM Key lt p insidan ote deea eee enn eee 8 10 Table 9 1 Statement List Language Basic Elements 006 e cece cece ees 9 3 Table 9 2 Allowable Memory Types for Basic Elements 0 0600000 c cece cece ee eee 9 6 Table 9 32 Data Types noi ci ec ee ben herre doing Sols Let i Seb i aside EEEE 9 30 Table 9 4 Statement List Language Standard Functions and Function Blocks 9 31 Table 9 5 Operating Registers and Register Locations 0 ccc cee eee eee 9 37 Table 9 6 Operating Registers and Register Locations 0 ccc cece eee eee 9 214 Table 9 7 Service Request Functions etae eha inae a ia eee nena 9 251 Table 9 8 PID Function Block Data 0 06 c occ eee eens 9 257 Table 9 9 Array Search FUNGHONS sernai i eaa eA a AE nen nae 9 269 Table 10 1 Non System Errors sa mat enkaa iea a E BE aane E AE aE ER a a ER S 10 1 Table B 1 Special System Registers lt oss crescuse rot erid nnn e B 2 T bl e C l List f PUMCHONS rasere peron HERRE EE EAE EASA where AEA EEE RER OMS C 1 Table D 1 Function Parameters 2 0636 cesor cee eee d oris BES oE e e Da E D 1 GFK 0402G Table of Contents xv
234. ater than or equal to the value specified by parameter P2 Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 103 P1 Input 1 w P2 Input 2 Logic for controlling enable power flow Value to be compared P1 Power flow output to a coil or another function Other value to be P2 compared w means greater than or equal to Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element 2 Type of function either Function 55 GE or Function 75 DPGE 3 Parameter P1 input 1 one of the values to be compared This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored 4 Parameter P2 input 2 the other value to be compared This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored The following tables specify which memory types are valid for each of the GE and DPGE function parameters Allowable Memory Types for GE Function 55 Sc a Se NF ee FF a a aa Note that double precision constants are constrained to the range 32 768 to 32 767 9 104 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G 9 Programming Example for Greater Than or Equal Comparison This example of programming uses the DPGE function In this example when input 10001 is closed passing power flow to the e
235. ation Input Output Module 5 42 Module Present sssrini kait iradiat adii Bee ak Benga Ree ES 5 43 Selecting AQ Reference 6 eee eens 5 43 Selecting WAT Reference sess seein rd sean Sai caste hein a RE le ble ee el as 5 44 Selecting Yl Reference sissa aiis aa Base 6 a AE i aaa K aiai aaa 5 45 Default Configuration 2000 0c cence 5 45 Removing Module From Configuration 0000 eee eens 5 46 Selecting Module Default Mode 0 000 5 46 Selecting Input Channel Ranges 00 00000 c cece eee eee ee 5 48 Selecting Low and High Alarm limits 000 e eee eee eee 5 48 Freeze Mode ces fecteots seats iaasa se a E OE E E ae EE EEES 5 49 Saved Configurations ryresnpi s rerintA cece eee 5 50 viii Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Contents Chapter 6 Program Edite sca cererass hae hia ou nee en KEER A 6 1 Entering Program Mode 0 066 c cc eee eee nee 6 2 Keypad Functionality 0 eens 6 2 Displaying a Step or Parameter 666s 6 3 Inserting an Instruction Step 6 66 6 5 Replacing an Instruction Step 0 6 06 eee eee 6 6 Deleting an Instruction Step 0 6 66 6 10 Deleting a Program e eneee he eds Bie EE A ibe 6 11 Searching for an Instruction Element 0 0000 c eee eee 6 12 Monitoring Program Execution 6666s 6 17 Making On Line Changes 000666 6
236. ber IC693APU300 module provides direct processing of rapid pulse signals up to 80 kHz for industrial control applications This module is able to sense inputs process the input count information and control the outputs without needing to communicate with a CPU The High Speed Counter parameters can be configured using the HHP as described in the Series 90 30 High Speed Counter User s Manual GFK 0293 Note that with an earlier version release 1 of the Series 90 30 PLC only the first 15 configuration parameters for the HSC were saved in volatile RAM memory This version of the PLC release 2 allows all 78 bytes to be saved To save ALL of the High Speed Counter parameters in the non volatile RAM of a PLC release 2 or later simply edit the parameters as described in the HSC manual When power is cycled ALL of the edited parameters will be sent to the HSC by the CPU For details of using the Hand Held Programmer to configure the High Speed Counter refer to Chapter 6 Configuration Programming in the Series 90 30 High Speed Counter User s Manual GFK 0293 GFK 0402G Chapter 5 I O Configuration 5 21 Section 5 Programmable Coprocessor Module Editing PCM Parameters Programmable Coprocessor Module parameters can be edited with the Hand Held Programmer if you have a Release 3 or later CPU and a Release 2 51 or later PCM The parameters are edited in exactly the same manner as for Intelligent I O Modules described previously in this c
237. binary decimal possible signed or hexadecimalvalue These keys are only used for specifying the hexadecimal digits A through E Abort or cancel the current operation or user input Move view window around currently displayed table Invoke a reference table contents change Abort a reference table contents change Override or cancel the override on a discrete reference Complete an operation or user input Start or stop the PLC Select an HHP operating mode Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Display Format GFK 0402G Anumber of display formats may be encountered depending on which table is displayed Discrete Reference Tables The discrete reference tables I Q M T G S SA SB and SC each support three possible display formats when i in data mode as shown below Table 7 2 Screen Format of a Discrete Reference Table in Binary Format Binary PLC gt Top Reference 0 1 State Binary gt Bottom Reference 0 1 Table 7 3 Screen Format of a Discrete Reference Table in Signed Decimal Format PLC Top Reference x Signed Decimal 32768 32767 MEJ Table 7 4 Screen Format of a Discrete Reference Table in Hexadecimal Format PLC Rg Top Reference ki Hexadecimal 0000 FFFF ME F pooner recaese fa Top Reference The top reference field indicates the address of the current reference address Only the d
238. bination of Series and Parallel Contacts When there is continuous current flow or power is passed through a continuous line of connected contacts starting at the power rail and traveling towards the right to the coil at the end of this rung of logic the coil will turn on Power flow only travels from left to right through contacts and horizontal connecting lines On vertical connecting lines power flow can travel in either direction top to bottom or bottom to top The Statement List is a mnemonic form used to enter the ladder logic program using the Hand Held Programmer HHP The instructions AND OR NOT AND NOT OR LOAD OUT etc along with input and output address are used to place the program logic into the programming memory of the Central Processing Unit CPU The following table lists all of the basic elements that you can use when programming in the Statement List Language Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Table 9 1 Statement List Language Basic Elements LDNOT LDBLK AND AND NOT AND BLK Graphic Description Normally open contact start of sequence a Normallyclosed contact start of sequence notapplicable Marka point within a rung Normally open contact continue seriessequence Normallyclosed contact continue seriessequence ANDtwo blocks of seriallogic Normally open
239. bleControllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 2 Table D 1 Function Parameters continued Logicmaster Default Function Parameter Abbreviation Display Format SubroutineCall CALLSUB P1 Subroutine Number none signeddecimal Function 90 Search Equal To Byte SREQB Array Start Address signeddecimal Function 101 Index Into Array signeddecimal Object of Search signeddecimal Length signeddecimal TargetLocation signeddecimal Search Equal To Word SREQW Array Start Address signed decimal Function 102 Index Into Array signeddecimal Object of Search signeddecimal Length signeddecimal TargetLocation signeddecimal Search Equal To INT SREQI Array Start Address signed decimal Function 103 Index Into Array signeddecimal Object of Search signeddecimal Length signeddecimal TargetLocation signeddecimal Search Equal To DINT SREQDI Array Start Address signeddecimal Function 104 Index Into Array signed decimal Object of Search signeddecimal Length signeddecimal TargetLocation signeddecimal Search Not Equal To Byte SRNEB Array Start Address signed decimal Function 105 Index Into Array signeddecimal Object of Search signeddecimal Length signeddecimal TargetLocation signeddecimal Search Not Equal To Word SRNEW Array Start Address signed decimal Function 106 Index Into Array signeddecimal Object of Search signeddec
240. cations for the program and configuration to work properly The screen shown above also shows the first configuration item which allows you to change the Hand Held Programmer Key Click feature The default is KEY CLK OFE Pressing the up arrow key causes the next screen to be displayed RO 00 PWR SUP lt S IO BASE I8 Q6 This screen indicates that the baseplate located at rack 0 and slot 00 is a generic 8 Input 6 Output module Pressing the down arrow key causes the previous screen to be displayed RO 01 PLC lt S KEY CLK OFF Use the left and right arrow keys to view the other Micro PLC parameters for configuration and the key to select the items within each parameter Refer to Table 4 1 for acceptable values and default values for Micro PLC parameters 4 4 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 5 When all Micro PLC parameters have been configured press the down arrow key again to cause the input screen to be displayed this is not configurable RO 02 I lt S I16 10001 10008 If the program is transferred to a Series 90 30 Model 311 Model 313 Model 331 Model 340 Model 341 or Model 351 the input module should be located in the first I O slot slot 02 on the Model 331 Model 340 Model 341 and Model 351 and slot 01 on the Model 311 and Model 313 6 Pressing the down arrow key again causes the output screen to be displayed t
241. cimal P3 Object of Search signeddecimal P4 Length signeddecimal P5 TargetLocation signeddecimal D 6 Hand Held Programmer Series 90 30 20 MicroProgrammableControllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 2 Table D 1 Function Parameters continued Logicmaster Default Function Parameter Abbreviation Display Format Search Greater Than DINT SRGTDI Array Start Address signed decimal Function 120 Index Into Array signeddecimal Object of Search signeddecimal Length signeddecimal TargetLocation signeddecimal Search Greater Than or Equal To Byte SRGEB Array Start Address signed decimal Function 121 Index Into Array signeddecimal Object of Search signeddecimal Length signeddecimal TargetLocation signeddecimal Search Greater Than or Equal To Word SRGEW Array Start Address signed decimal Function 122 Index Into Array signeddecimal Object of Search signeddecimal Length signeddecimal TargetLocation signeddecimal Search Greater Than or Equal To INT SRGEI Array Start Address signed decimal Function 123 Index Into Array signeddecimal Object of Search signeddecimal Length signeddecimal TargetLocation signeddecimal Search Greater Than or Equal To DINT SRGEDI Array Start Address signeddecimal Function 124 Index Into Array signed decimal Object of Search signeddecimal Length signeddecimal TargetLocation signeddecimal Array Move Bit MOV
242. coil or an M for an internal memory coil This Q or M is followed by a number which is the number of the coil being represented The I Q and M also represent the internal location where the status of the contact or coil is stored in the memory of the programmable controller Horizontal Power T0001 10002 Connecting Line Q0002 Q0001 Rail J CE I I JAF G2 Normally Open Normally Closed Normally Open External Contact Contact Contact Output Representing Representing Representing Coil No Input No 1 Input No 2 Condition of External Output No 2 9 1 A ladder rung is built by connecting the contacts in series and parallel combinations to form sequences of logic Contacts connected in series are said to be ANDed together and those that are connected in parallel are said to be ORed together These contacts are of two types normally open and normally closed similar to that of a mechanical relay A normally open contact will pass power from its left side to its right side when the device it represents is on passing power or current A normally closed contact will pass power from its left side to it right side only when the device it represents is off has no current flow or no power flow When this normally closed contact is connected in series with another contact it is said to be NOT ANDed and when it is connected in parallel it is said to be NOT ORed T0001 10002 T0001 10003 Vertical connecting line Com
243. constant of 1 indicates a time base of 0 01 seconds 10 indicates a time base of 0 1 seconds and 100 indicates a time base of 001 seconds Preset Time P02 The preset time parameter indicates the time period for the stop watch timer If specified it is indicated by a positive only 16 bit two s complement signed integer 0 32 767 The constant 1 indicates that no preset time parameter is specified For this case the preset time will be accessed from the timer data structure Operating Register Timer Location P03 The timer location gives the address of a three word data structure which is used by the timer function block Programming Example for TMR Function In the following example power flow will be passed through the Timer to turn on Q0001 at a time of 2 5 seconds after input 1 is closed or input 2 is opened The Time Base or Timer Accuracy is a tenth of a second 01 the Preset is a constant of 25 and Location of this Timer is Register 1 Ladder Diagram Representation TMR l l l l l l CONST PV 0025 SROOOL Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 OR NOT 10002 0003 FUNC 10 TMR P1 10 P2 25 P3 R0001 0004 OUT Q0001 9 40 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G After pressing Key Programming sequence Key Strokes Initial display Press the key sequence maf zai Ee Pre
244. crete outputs internal Discrete internal coils Discretetemporary coils System status references System registerreferences Analog and High Speed Counter inputs Notapplicable 1001 1016 1017 1048 Q0001 Q0016 Q013 Q016 Q017 Q048 G0001 G1280 MO001 M1024 T0001 T0256 S0001 S0032 SA001 SA032 SBO001 SB032 SC001 SC032 R0001 RO256 AI001 AI016 AQ001 AQ016 SR001 SRO16 Size 1K words 16bits 32 bits 12bits Abits 32 bits 1280bits 1024bits 256 bits 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 256 words 16words 16words 16words For reference table viewing only can not be referenced in a user logic program Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Table 1 6 Range and Size of User References for the Series 90 Micro PLC Reference Type Userprogram logic Discreteinputs Discrete inputs internal Discreteoutputs Discrete outputs internal with LED indicators Discrete outputs internal Discreteglobals Discreteinternal coils Discretetemporary coils System status references System registerreferences Analog and High Speed Counter inputs Analogoutputs System registers Reference Range Notapplicable 1001 1016 1017 1048 Q0001 Q0016 Q013 Q016 Q017 Q048 G0001 G1280 MO001 M1024 T0001 T0256 S0001 S0032 SA001 SA03
245. cted the program header is marked to indicate that error Aborting the Insert Edit Operation 6 20 After beginning the insert or edit of an instruction you may decide to abort the current changes This is done by pressing the CLR key Press the CLR key once to erase the current instruction entry and remain in insert mode Press the CLR key a second time to abort the insert operation All instructions beginning with the next instruction step are scrolled up one instruction step in the program If you had just begun the insert operation and no data was currently entered on the screen only a single press of the CLR key would be required Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable ControllersUser s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 6 Completing the Insert Replace Operation When all the necessary information has been entered as part of an insert or replace operation the operation may be completed by pressing the ENT key The ENT key functions differently depending on whether the operation was to insert or replace To complete the insert of the current instruction and continue inserting additional instructions press the ENT key once This allows you to remain in insert mode To complete the insert of the current instruction and then exit insert mode press the ENT key a second time with no data entered This second press of the ENT key allows you to exit insert mode To complete the replacement of the current
246. ction 62 Double Precision Subtraction DPSUB Function 63 Two subtraction functions are available The signed subtraction function SUB is a conditionally executed function which subtracts one signed integer value from another The double precision signed subtraction function DPSUB is a conditionally executed function which subtracts one signed double word value from another When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable EN input the function is executed by the CPU and a new signed subtraction for SUB or double precision signed subtraction for DPSUB will take place During a signed subtraction or double precision signed subtraction execution the value in P2 input 2 is subtracted from the value in P1 input 1 The results of this signed or double precision signed subtraction is stored in the memory location specified by P3 Q The SUB and DPSUB functions operate on INT signed integer and DINT double precision signed integer data respectively The INT SUB function is Function 62 and the DINT SUB function is Function 63 SUB Function Description The three values specified by parameters P1 P2 and P3 must be the same data type 16 bit two s complement signed integers and must be with the range 32768 to 32767 If the subtraction results in overflow a value out side of the range 32768 to 32767 the results of the subtraction will be set to the largest possible value 32768 or 327
247. ction block 3 To complete the replacement of the current instruction press the ENT key Replace mode is exited with the just replaced instruction still displayed 4 Press the CLR key to abort replace mode Replacing Part of a Basic Element The instruction type of a basic element may be changed any time prior to accepting the instruction step into the rung If only a modifier such as NOT or BLK needs to be added the base of the instruction type is preserved To remove a modifier you must specify the base again A different base may also be specified but the modifier is not preserved as part of this replacement The reference address operand of a basic element may also be changed any time prior to accepting the instruction step You may change only the address offset portion of the reference address by pressing only numeric keys If the memory type indicator is specified again the address offset portion of the operand is not preserved To replace both the instruction type and the reference address operand each may be replaced individually Or you may replace all the current entries for an instruction step at one time by pressing the CLR key Boolean Instruction Change To change the current instruction step from LD 10001 to LD NOT 10001 0003 lt s LD I0001 O The initial display is Press the ior key 0003 REPLACE lt S LD NOT I0001 O GFK 0402G Chapter 6 Program Edit 6 7 6 8 Press the key 0003 lt S LD
248. d Input NX P02 Input NX contains the index into the array IN P03 IN contains the object of the search LEN P04 LEN specifies the number of elements starting at AR that make up the array to be searched Output NX P05 Output NX holds the position within the array of the search target FD FD indicates that an element whose value is greater than or equal to IN has been found and the function wassuccessful Allowable Memory Types for Search Greater Than or Equal To Functions _Permeter flow Vl OTR RT S WG MR WAT AO const none Sa a a e aaa ee fe e e ee e e a ERD A EC PC EEE FP a E E a E a ea e ee ee ee ee ee ee a aa e eae RS a a ee es Valid reference or where power may flow through the function Valid reference for INT BYTE or WORD data only not valid for DINT Valid reference for BYTE or WORD data only not valid for INT or DINT SA SB SC only S cannot be used 50 Weil GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 281 Programming Examples for Array Search Functions The following programming examples illustrate how to enter the Search Equal To Byte SREQB and Search Equal To Integer SREQI functions on the HHP The ladder diagram representation of the example is shown followed by the equivalent HHP statement list and the key sequences required to enter the statement list Example 1 Byte Array Search Equal To In this example the array AR is defined as memo
249. d N is greater than the number of bits in the array LEN 16 then the array Q is filled with copies of the input bit B1 and the input bit is copied to the output power flow B2 If the number of bits to be shifted is zero then no shifting is performed the output array is untouched and power flow is OFE Also the same number of bits are shifted into the vacant locations located at the left end highest bit location of the group of bits The state of the bits being shifted into the vacant locations is specified by the condition of the logic programmed into the B1 input Power flow from the left bus to the B1 input will enter a one No power flow to the B1 input will enter a zero into the group of vacant bit locations If a length N parameter P2 greater than one has been specified as the number of bits to be shifted each of the vacant locations will be filled with the same value 0 or 1 The results of the shifted operation are stored in the location of the word or group of consecutive words specified by parameter P4 Q which is the memory address location for the first word of the group of consecutive words containing the group of bits that has been shifted Parameters P1 and P4 are memory locations representing 16 bit words and parameters P2 and P3 are constants while B1 input is the results of some logic attached to this functions B1 input GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 143 If discrete memory types
250. d of binary digital data to an analog output for use as required by your application All eight channels are updated every 12 ms User data in the AQ registers is in a 16 bit 2 s complement format In current modes an open wire fault is reported to the CPU for each channel The module can go to a known last state when system power is interrupted As long as user power is applied to the module each output will maintain its last value or reset to zero as determined by how you have configured the module Although you can change the number of actively scanned channels with the Logicmaster 90 30 configurator function the Hand Held Programmer does not support editing the number of actively scanned channels If the 8 Channel Analog Current Wltage Output module is initialized by a Hand Held Programmer the number of actively scanned channels is 8 If a module had been previously configured with Logicmaster 90 30 software and the number of actively scanned channels has been changed from 8 that number will be displayed on the bottom line of the Hand Held Programmer display following the AQ entry You can edit data with the Hand Held Programmer only for the active channels but you can not change the number of actively scanned channels Module Present If a module is physically present in a system it can be added to the system s configuration by reading the module into the configuration file For example assume that an 8 Channel Analog Current
251. d Functionality in I O Configuration Mode Key Group I AI Q AQ G S 0 9 VAI A Q AQ B M T AND D OR E NOT F HEX DEC CLR Up and Down cursor keys Left and Right cursor keys DEL READ VERIFY ENT RUN MODE Description Specify a module type I AI Q AQ QI AQL Used to configure a GCM Specify a slot number reference address point count or parameter value value format may be either binary signed decimal or hexadecimal A F these keys are used to enter hexadecimaldigits A E Change display format between decimal hexadecimal and 8 bit binary Abort or cancel the current operation or user input Select a different slot for viewing Display a different module parameter or field Indicate anew rack slotnumber GOTO Delete configuration of currentlydisplayed slot Read configuration of module currently installed in slot Complete an operation or user input Start or stop the PLC Select a Hand Held Programmer operatingmode Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 Section 1 Non Intelligent I O Modules GFK 0402G The following screen format is used to configure non intelligent I O modules Table 5 2 Configuration of a Non Intelligent I O Module Rack Slot PLC R unused Module Type or Message unused State Reference Reference Range Reference Range Type Points
252. d and the function wassuccessful Allowable Memory Types for Search Greater Than Functions _Perameter flow Vl RO M RT MS WG MR WAT AO const none Se a a e a a ee e e e e e e tf a ERD A On fe fe pele tet tf Sa a an SF a a E ee ee ee ee aa Rae eae RS a a ee es Valid reference or where power may flow through the function Valid reference for INT BYTE or WORD data only not valid for DINT Valid reference for BYTE or WORD data only not valid for INT or DINT SA SB SC only S cannot be used 5 O o Watt A GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 279 9 Search Greater Than or Equal To Byte SRGEB Function 121 Search Greater Than or Equal To Word SRGEW Function 122 Search Greater Than or Equal To INT SRGEI Function 123 Search Greater Than or Equal To DINT SRGEDI Function 124 The Search Greater Than or Equal To functions are conditionally executed functions which are used to search for all array values greater than or equal to a specified value Each function has four input parameters and two output parameters When the function receives power the array is searched starting at AR input NX This is the starting address of the array AR plus the index into this array input NX The search continues until the array element whose value is greater than or equal to the search object IN is found or until the end of the array is reached If an array element is
253. d are zooming down through the CALLSUBinstructions you will receive a NEST ERR message when you attempt to zoom into the ninth subroutine in the call sequence A subroutine call cannot be connected directly to the power rail If this is done the error message SEQ ERR will be displayed on the HHP screen If the 64 Call instruction limit per logic block is exceeded the error message CAL OVR will be displayed Impact on Other PLC Functions The use of subroutines will have the following impact on PLC operation 9 10 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 A Read or Write operation to from EEPROM MEMCARD is not allowed when in Subroutine Declaration Mode A Search operation will search the current block i e main program block or current subroutine block that is being edited or viewed Program check will check the entire program including all subroutine blocks ARead Write EEPROM MEMCARD will read store the entire program including all subroutine blocks GFK 0402G 9 How to Enter a Logic Element Using the HHP In order to program the attached PLC you must first select the program mode of operation When selecting the program mode of operation the initial instruction step displayed is the last one viewed the previous time that program mode was selected since the PLC was powered up If entering program mode for the first time by default the first instruction
254. d for temporary use it is never retained through power loss or RUN to STOP to RUN transitions and cannot be used with retentive coils The S prefix represents system status references These references are used to access special PLC data such as timers scan information and fault information System references include S SA SB and SC references S SA SB and SC can be used on any contacts SA SB and SC can be used on retentive coils M S can be used as a word or bit string input reference to functions or function blocks SA SB and SC can be used as a word or bit string input or output reference to functions and function blocks The G prefix represents global data references These references are used to access data shared among several PLCs G references can be used on contacts and retentive coils because G memory is always retentive G cannot be used on non retentive coils Transitions and Overrides 1 4 The I Q M and G user references have associated transition and override bits T S SA SB and SC references have transition bits but not override bits The CPU uses transition bits for counters and transitional coils Note that counters do not use the same kind of transition bits as coils Transition bits for counters are stored within the locating reference Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G I
255. d in internal memory from reference M0001 through M0064 The real input points are not updated This form of the function can be used to compare the current values of input points with the values of input points at the beginning of the scan Ladder Diagram Representation I0064 M000 Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 OUT M0067 0003 LD MO0067 0004 FUNC 85 DOIO P1 10001 P2 10064 P3 M0001 0005 OUT Q0001 Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 237 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display 0001 INS lt S Initial display Press the key sequence Ey LJ 1 Al Press the key 0001 INS o Press the key sequence y OUT OUTM Press the key T Press the key sequence J 9 238 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Press the S key 0004 INS lt S Press the key sequence LIL Press the key 0004 DOIO lt S POl _ Press the key sequence 0004 INS lt S FUNC 85_ DOIO FUNC 0004 DOIO lt S AL Press the ae key 0004 DOIO lt S P02 _ Press the key sequence 0004 DOIO lt S aE JEL Press the ay key 0004 DOIO lt S P03 _ Press the key sequence 0004 DOIO lt S
256. d into the vacant locations created by the shift which is located at the right end lowest bit location of the group of bits If the number of bits to rotate N is greater then the specified length of the array LEN in bits and there is power flow into the ROL function then the entire output array will be set equal to the input array and power flow out of ROL will be off If power flow into ROL is ON and no error is detected then power flow out of ROL is on The results of the shifted operation are stored in the location of the word or group of consecutive words specified by parameter P4 Q which is the memory address location for the first word of the group of consecutive words containing the string of bits that has been shifted Parameters P1 P2 and P4 are 16 bit word memory locations representing 16 bit words and parameter P3 is a constant If discrete memory types are used for parameters P1 P2 and P4 the beginning address must be on an 8 point boundary Power flow through this function occurs only when the functions enable input is receiving power flow To prevent multiple rotations from taking place it is advisable to have the power flow to the enable input be controlled by a contact of a one shot element OUT or OUT Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 149 Logic controlling enable RO Power flow output toa enable input coil or another function WORD Location of first P01 IN QI P04 Location of
257. dditional presses of the down arrow key will display the contents of slots 6 through 10 When the PLC automatically generates the default configuration for the system it will determine the rack size which is present and contains configurable modules This information will be used to configure the rack size The reference address mapping for slots in rack 0 is the same when rack 0 is a 5 slot rack as it is when rack 0 is a 10 slot rack 1 0 Slots Each I slot may contain either a discrete analog or intelligent module Intelligent modules include Genius or Enhanced Genius Communications High Speed Counter I O Link Interface Axis Positioning Modules I O Processor Module and in the Models 3314041 51 only Programmable Coprocessor Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Communications Control and State Logic Processor modules A slot may be configured whether or not the module is physically present if present the module s characteristics may be read in as the default configurations Two types of I O modules may be configured non intelligent and intelligent Each of these types is discussed in this chapter Remote O Rack Configuration Configuration of remote I O racks is similar to the configuration of the rack size described previously A second parameter in the power supply slot RACK TYPE must also be configured Manual Rack Configuration If no modules have been configured in a rack the power supply slot will show EMPTY If not
258. deStatus The SVCRQ function has three inputs and one output When the SVCRQ function receives power flow the PLC is requested to perform the function FNC indicated Parameters for the function begin at the reference given for PARM The SVCRQ function passes power flow unless an incorrect function number incorrect parameters or out of range references are specified The OK output is set to a one true if a system service request is activated and is successful otherwise it is set to a 0 false enable CE OK REQ P01 FNC 222 P02 PARM Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This logic must start with an LD element 2 Function type Function 89 3 Parameter P1 FNC this is a number corresponding to the available special service requests see table above This can be a constant number or the memory location of a register containing the value 4 Parameter P2 PARAM memory location of parameters for the requested function This is a register memory location that contains a block of parameters for the selected function Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 251 The following table specifies which memory types are valid for each of the SVCRQ function parameters Allowable Memory Types for SVCRQ Function 89 SS a a aa E E a a a E A Programming Example for SVCRQ Function In t
259. der of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus Must start with an LD element 2 Logic controlling the reset input from the left bus This logic must start with an LD element Type of function Function 13 4 Parameter P1 Timer Accuracy or base value for timing increments 1 one hundredth of a second 01 second 10 one tenth of a second 0 1 second 5 Parameter P2 Preset Time a constant number or the number of a register that will contain the preset value 6 Parameter P3 Timer Location number of the first register of the three sequential registers containing the operating values Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 43 The following table specifies the valid memory types for each of the ONDTR function block s parameters Allowable Memory Types for ONDTR Function 13 wee reine t f f Sme 1 1 _ Only constants of 1 10 and 100 are allowed Only positive constants are allowed except 1 which indicates no preset parameter Timer Accuracy P01 The timer accuracy parameter indicates the time base of the timer A constant of 1 indicates a time base of 0 01 seconds 10 indicates time base of 0 1 seconds and 100 indicates a time base of 001 seconds Preset Time P02 The preset time parameter indicates the time period for the on delay timer It is indicated by a positive only 16 bit two s complement signed
260. des tination array GFK 0402G Appendix C List of Functions C 3 Table C 1 List of Functions continued Function Function Number Mnemonic Description 134 MOVADI Copy a specified number of elements from a double precision integer source array toa double precision integer destination array 140 RANGI Determine if a value is within the range of two signed integer values 141 RANGDI Determine if a value is within the range of two double precision signed integer values 142 RANGW Determine if a value is within the range of two word values 143 MSKCMPW Compare contents of two bit strings 16 bit words with the ability to mask selected bits 144 MSKCMPD Compare contents of two bit strings 32 bit words with the ability to mask selected bits C 4 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Appendix D The following table lists the parameters for each function and their default display format Function Parameters Table D 1 Function Parameters Function On Delay Timer TMR Function 10 On Delay Timer ONDTR Function 13 Off Delay Timer OFDTR Function 14 Up Counter UPCTR Function 15 Down Counter DNCTR Function 16 Bit Set BITSET Function 22 Logical AND AND Function 23 Bit Clear BITCLR Function 24 LogicalOR OR Function 25 Bit Test BITTST Function 26 LogicalXOR XOR
261. display returns after restoring power In the next example the Hand Held Programmer was viewing instruction step 0015 in program mode when the system was powered down 0015 lt R LD NOT S0001 In this case the mode selection screen is displayed after restoring power 1 PROGRAM lt R 2 DATA Disconnecting the Hand Held Programmer Keypad The Hand Held Programmer can be disconnected from the PLC while power is still applied If this occurs in the middle of a modification operation such as inserting a new logicinstruction step the operation is automatically canceled The protection access level will be set to its default state Refer to chapter 7 PLC Control and Status for more information on password protection The keypad consists of 42 keys arranged as a matrix of six keys across by seven keys down as shown in the following illustration 2 2 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G a43047 O GE Fanuc SERIES 90 30 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER AND HELD PROGRAMW OUT OUTM SETM SET RSTM RST TMR ONDTR D pa s m 0 D gt N O 4 pe 4 D D a zZ 42 KEY KEYPAD le ee a ajo Cc H a m Ty o Sja S z a gt Z Q lt o O 3 Figure 2 4 Hand Held Programmer Keypad The keypad on the Hand Held Programmer is color coded for easier identification o
262. e F Press the S key Press the key sequence Ay z Al D AND Press the S key Press the key sequence B Q OUT OUTM Press the ae key Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language NOT 10001 10002 Q0001 HHP Display 0001 INS lt S 0001 INS lt S LD NOT 1_ 0004 INS lt S 9 15 SINGLE PARALLEL CONTACTS SINGLE COIL To implement the following logic using the OR element I0001 I T 1 I0002 i Statement List 0001 LD NOT 10001 0002 OR 10002 0003 OUT Q0001 Key Strokes HHP Display lt Initial display 0001 INS Press the key sequence F A ED NOT aT t Press the S key Press the key sequence A Al 2 i E OR Press the a key Press the key sequence B EGE zJ LJ OUT OUTM Press the T key 0004 INS lt S Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G MULTIPLE PARALLEL CONTACTS SINGLE COIL To implement the following logic using the OR BLK element 110001 10002 JFL 1 l l SA001 M0001 ad ot EO Statement List 0001 LD NOT 10001 0002 AND 10002 0003 LD SA001 0004 AND NOT M0001 0005 OR BLK 0006 OUT Q0001 Key Strokes HHP Display
263. e A BQ Cy Specify a binary decimal possible signed or hexadecimal valuein program and data mode Al AQ T Specify a slot number reference address point count or PLC parameter D E F value value format may be either binary signed decimal or hexadecimalin AND OR NOT configuration mode Specify the alpha characters of a 1 4 digit hexadecimalpasswordvalue Specify an instruction step in program mode Override or cancel the override on a discrete reference in data mode Indicate anew rack slotnumber GOTO in configuration mode Zoom into or out of subroutine logic Chapter 2 Operation 2 5 Numeric Keys The white Numeric keys are located on the lower left side of the keypad They include the keys for the numerals 0 through 9 the key and the HEX DEC key A description of these keys is provided in the following table Table 2 3 Numeric Keys HEX DEC Description Specify a binary decimal possible signed or hexadecimal valuein program and data mode Specify a slot number reference address point count or PLC parameter value value format may be either binary signed decimal or hexa decimalin configuration mode Specify a 1 4 digit hexadecimal password value in protection mode Specify a binary decimal possible signed or hexadecimal valuein program and data mode Toggle PLC configuration parameter setting in configuration mode Toggle
264. e flow DINT I1l Q Power flow output to a coil or another function Value to be compared T2 P1 Other value to be compared P2 v means less than or equal to Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element 2 Type of function either Function 54 LE or Function 74 DPLE 3 Parameter P1 input 1 one of the values to be compared This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored 4 Parameter P2 input 2 the other value to be compared This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored The following tables specify which memory types are valid for each of the LE and DPLE function parameters Allowable Memory Types for LE Function 54 ma er CES EN EC a a RT aT a NS RE Ee t Note that double precision constants are constrained to the range 32 768 to 32 767 Programming Example for LE Function This example of programming uses the LE function In this example when input I0001 is closed passing power flow to the enable input the data located in register 240 parameter P1 is compared to the data located in register 280 parameter P2 If the value in register 240 is less than or equal to the value in register 280 than output Q0001 will be turned on Lets say that the value located in register 240 is 860 a
265. e chapter 5 Program Edit for more details Pressing the Enter key at this point will place the programmed element into the CPU memory The display will then advance to the next step Press the key 0002 INS lt S Important Please Read the Following To enter program steps using the Hand Held Programmer the CPU must be in the STOP mode and the Hand Held Programmer must be in the PROGRAM and INSERT modes After you press the INS key the initial display will be 0001 INS lt S You can now begin entering program steps Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 13 SINGLE CONTACT SINGLE COIL To implement the following logic using LD NOT and OUT I0001 I T Statement List 0001 LD NOT 10001 0002 OUT Q0001 Key Strokes HHP Display Initial display 0001 INS lt s Press the key sequence 0001 INS lt S A Le bed Ee LJ xD NOE A Press the T key 0002 INS lt S Press the key sequence B Q AS Press the T key 0003 INS lt S OUT OUTM 9 14 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G SERIES CONTACTS SINGLE COIL To implement the following logic using the AND element SIOQ001 S10002 I 70 imal Statement List 0001 LD 0002 AND 0003 OUT Key Strokes Initial display Press the key sequence By ary ft y
266. e Array Move functions are used to copy a specified number of data elements from a source array to a destination array The Array Move functions can each operate on bit byte word integer or double precision data types Each of the Array Move functions and their respective function numbers are listed in the following table Array Move Functions Array Move Data Type Abbreviation Function Number Wor im Integer INT 133 Double Precision Integer DINT MOVADI 134 GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 289 9 Array Move Bit MOVABI Function 130 Array Move Byte MOVABY Function 131 Array Move Word MOVAW Function 132 Array Move INT MOVAI Function 133 Array Move DINT MOVADI Function 134 9 290 The Array Move function has six input parameters and two output parameters When the function receives power flow to the enable input the function is executed by the CPU and the number of data elements in the count indicator N is extracted from the input array starting with the indexed location SR SNX 1 The data elements are then written to the output array starting with the indexed location DS DNX 1 The LEN operand specifies the number of elements that make up each array For the Bit Array Move function when word oriented memory is selected for the parameters of the source array and or destination array starting address the least significant bit of the specified word is the fi
267. e ENT key once This allows you to remain in insert mode 4 To complete the insert of the current instruction and then exit insert mode press the ENT key a second time with no data entered This second press of the ENT key allows you to exit insert mode 5 Press the CLR key to abort insert mode Entering an Instruction Type For each instruction step you must indicate an instruction type The instruction type may be either A basic element e A standard function e A function block Refer to the beginning of chapter 9 for a complete listing of the basic elements and standard functions and function blocks of the Statement List SL language Other guidelines to follow when entering an instruction step include After beginning the insert or edit of an instruction you may decide to abort the current changes This is done by pressing the CLR key Chapter 6 Program Edit 6 5 1 When entering a reference address you must enter the reference type first and then the number For example to enter the reference address Q12 use the key sequence shown below Ba 1 AQ 2 When entering a basic element which uses the modifier NOT BLK or the base part of the instruction type must be entered before the modifier For example to enter an LD NOT element you must first enter the base part LD followed by the modifier NOT 2 3 When entering a function or function block the FUNC key must be pressed before
268. e a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored 5 Parameter P3 Q The memory location where the result is to be stored 9 122 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G oo y yY YO GFK 0402G The following table specifies which memory types are valid for each of the AND function parameters Allowable Memory Types for AND Function 23 E E e ee ee ee EE E e ENEE ae ee ee Seem ee ee eo ee a ee ee i t Only SA SB and SC are used S cannot be used Programming Example for AND Function In this example when input 10001 is closed passing power flow to the enable input The 16 bits of register 1 specified by parameter P1 are bitwise ANDed to the 16 bits of register 2 specified by parameter P 2 and the result is stored in register 3 For example if the decimal number 337 is stored in R0001 and decimal number 346 is stored in R0002 the result will be decimal number 336 stored in RO003 The Binary Bits stored in the registers for this example are roo o Jo Jo fo fo fo fo fa fo fi fo fi Jo fo fo roo o Jo Jo Jo fo fo fo fa foi lofi ja fo Jo roos o Jo Jo fo fo fo fo fa fo fifo fifo fo fofo Ladder Diagram Representation AND WORD l l R0001 P1 I1 Q P3 l l SR00002 P2 1I2 Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 FUNC 23 AND P1 R0001 P2 R00
269. e all word sized data signed decimal and hexadecimal is word aligned within a discrete memory table on a multiple of sixteen points boundary gt I0017 I0033 3 Press the HEX DEC key again to change the display format to hexadecimal gt I0017 0000H lt S I0033 0000H 4 Pressing the HEX DEC key a third time will return the display format to single bit binary However 10017 is retained as the top reference instead of restoring the original top reference to 10022 Changing the Format of a Register Reference Table The following example illustrates how to change the format of a register reference table 1 From the last discrete reference table screen in the previous example enter the key sequence R 1 and press the ENT key The R reference table is displayed in 16 bit binary form with ROOOI the top reference displayed gt ROOO1 lt S 0000000000000000 2 Pressthe HEX DEC key to change the format to signed decimal gt ROOO1 0 lt S R0002 0 3 Press the HEX DEC key again to change the format to hexadecimal gt R0001 0000H lt S R0002 0000H 4 Pressing the HEX DEC key a third time returns the display format to 16 bit binary gt ROOO1 lt S 0000000000000000 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 5 PresstheTMR ONDTR orUPCTR DNCTRkey to change the format to timer counter T C R0001 0 0 lt S 0 0 6 P
270. e assigned to the communications port is selectable The baud rates supported are 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 and I will add the Range function19 2k with the default setting at 19 2k Use the Right cursor key to scroll through the PLC parameters until the baud rate BAUD RT parameter is displayed Then use the key to toggle the selection between the baud rates supported Data Bits Parameter You can select either 7 or 8 data bits per word for Series 90 Protocol SNP communications The default value is 8 data bits per word Stop Bits Parameter You can also select either 1 or 2 stop bits for Series 90 protocol communications The default value is 1 stop bit Use the Right cursor key to scroll through the PLC parameters until the stop bits STOP BT parameter is displayed Then use the key to toggle the stop bits selection between 1 BIT and 2 BITS Parity Parameter The selections for parity in Series 90 protocol communications include even odd and no parity Odd parity is the default value parity Use the Right cursor key to scroll through the PLC parameters until the parity parameter is displayed Then use the key to toggle the parity selection between ODD NONE and EVEN Modem Turnaround Time Parameter This parameter allows you to configure the turnaround delay time required for a particular modem You must specify a given number of counts where each count represents 0 01 seconds 10 msec The numb
271. e cece eens 9 268 Array Search Functions 066s 9 269 Search Equal To Byte SREQB Function 101 Search Equal To Word SREQW Function 102 Search Equal To INT SREQI Function 103 Search Equal To DINT SREQDI Function 104 0000 9 270 Search Not Equal To Byte GRNEB Function 105 Search Not Equal To Word GRNEW Function 106 Search Not Equal To INT SRNEI Function 107 Search Not Equal To DINT GRNEDI Function 108 9 272 Search Less Than Byte GRLTB Function 109 Search Less Than Word SRLTW Function 110 Search Less Than INT SRLTI Function 111 Search Less Than DINT SRLTDI Function 112 9 274 Search Less Than or Equal To Byte SRLEB Function 113 Search Less Than or Equal To Word GRLEW Function 114 Search Less Than or Equal To INT SRLED Function 115 Search Less Than or Equal To DINT SRLEDI Function 116 9 276 Search Greater Than Byte SRGTB Function 117 Search Greater Than Word SRGTW Function 118 Search Greater Than INT SRGTI Function 119 Search Greater Than DINT SRGTDI Function 120 9 278 Search Greater Than or Equal To Byte GRGEB Function 121 Search Greater Than or Equal To Word SRGEW Function 122 Search Greater Than or Equal To INT SRGEI Function 123 Search Greater Than or Equal To DINT SRGEDI Function 124 9 280 Array Move Functions aisr oei gd nep eee eens 9 289 Ar
272. e count range for the up counter If specified it is indicated by a positive only 16 bit two s complement signed integer 0 32 767 The constant 1 indicates that no preset count parameter is specified For this case the preset count will be accessed from the counter data structure Operating Register Counter Location P02 The counter location gives the address of a three word data structure which is used by the counter function block Programming Example for UPCTR Function In the following example power flow will be passed through the Counter Function to turn on Q0001 after the input I0001 goes from an open state to a closed state 8 times for a count of 8 Each time input 1 goes from open line no power flow to closed power flow the current value will increment by one When input 10002 closes gives power flow the reset line is activated setting the current count to zero and preventing power flow through this counter and Q0001 is turned OFE The preset value is a constant 8 the location register is register 10 Ladder Diagram Representation SIO001 lsh ol SI0002 Location R0010 9 54 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 LD 10002 0003 FUNC 15 UPCTR P1 8 P2 R0010 0004 OUT Q0001 After pressing Key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP
273. e current user input Pressing the CLR key from any screen while viewing passwords returns the user to the display of the current access level Pressing the CLR key a second time cancels the operation If no user input has been specified when the CLR key is pressed the first time only a single press of the CLR key is required to cancel the operation Locking and Releasing OEM Protection OEM protection is a level of security intended for OEM use as opposed to the normal four levels of passwords which are intended for end user use With OEM protection locked enabled the privilege versus protection level table is modified as shown below refer to Table 7 2 Note that both read and write privileges are lost to the end user The following screen format is used to lock and release OEM protection Table 8 7 Lock and Release OEM Protection Level OEM PLC L E V E L unused Protection unused State O E M K E Y OEM Key unused Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G The OEM key field contains a 1 to 4 hexadecimal digit password which controls OEM protection Four hexadecimal digits provide 65 536 unique passwords The same password can be used for more then one level OEM passwords can also be used as user passwords they do not have to be unique The specification of leading zeros is optional 12 012 and 0012 all refer to different passwords Zero counts as par
274. e currently displayed channel You can enter positive or negative numbers see table 3 7 using the and numeric keys After selecting the low and high alarm limits for channel 1 or the currently displayed channel you can view the next channel by pressing the key RO 03 HI DEN V gt S CHAN 2 0 10 Edit the range and low and high alarm limits as described for Channel 1 All active channels can be changed in this manner Return to the initial display screen by pressing the ENT key or by pressing the lt key until the initial screen is displayed Saved Configurations GFK 0402G Configurations that contain a 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input module can be saved to an EEPROM or MEM card and read into the CPU at a later time MEM cards and EEPROMs containing these configurations can be read into any Release 4 or later CPU Refer to Chapter 2 of this manual for detailed information on the Save and Restore operations Chapter 5 I O Configuration 5 31 Configuring the 16 Channel Current Input Module The 16 Channel Analog Current Input module catalog number IC693ALG223 provides up to 16 single ended input channels each capable of converting an analog input signal to a digital value for use as required by your application This module provides three input ranges 4to20mA e 0Oto20mA e 4to 20 mA Enhanced Current Ranges The default range is 4 to 20 mA with user data scaled so that 4 mA corresponds to a count of 0 and 2
275. e following pages GFK 0402G Chapter 2 Operation 2 17 2 18 Reading the entire device To read load the entire contents of an EEPROM previously programmed from the same CPU model follow this procedure In PROGRAM mode press the key READ MEM CARD lt S To select which items will be read Press the ENT key READ MEM CARD lt S J PRG CFG REG To read the logic program configuration and registers saved on the card Press the ENT key READ MEM CARD lt S J PRG CFG REG XXXX The address at the end of the lower line will be continually updated as the read operation progresses If the read is completed successfully the HHP will display READ OK lt S If an error is encountered during the read operation an error message will be displayed for example READ PRG ERR lt S If a program error is read the contents of the PLC will be cleared program configuration and registers Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G Reading Program Logic Only If desired you can read only the program logic from the device ignoring the configuration and register data which was saved on the device To do this use the following procedure In PROGRAM mode press the key READ Es CARD 5S To select which items will be read Press the ENT key READ MEM CARD lt S J PRG CFG REG To read only the program logic
276. e key C Press the key sequence Press the key Press the key Press the ay key Press the key sequence B Q aJJ Lb Press the key Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 0002 SREQB lt S P02 2_ 0002 P03 _ SREQB lt S 0002 SREQB lt S P03 M 5 0002 PO4 _ SREQB lt S 0002 SREQB lt S P04 5 0002 P0O5 _ SREQB lt S 0002 SREQB lt S P0O5 Q 41_ 0003 INS lt S GFK 0402G GFK 0402G Press the key sequence Bo AQ Press the key Example 2 Integer Array Search Equal To m OUTM 1 In this example the array AR is defined as memory addresses R1 to R5 When I1 closes passes power flow to the enable input the portion of the array between R3 and R5 will be searched for an element whose value is equal to IN If R1 7 R2 9 R3 6 YR4 7 R5 7 and R100 7 then the search will begin at R3 and conclude at R4 when FD will be set to true and a 4 the array index will be written to R101 Ladder Diagram Representation I0001 jf R0001 P01 P04 CONST P02 P05 SRO101 0002 SROLQO PG3 Statement List Representation 0001 LD 0002 FUNC 103 P01 P02 P03 P04 P05 0003 OUT Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 10001 SREQI R0001 2 R
277. e key sequence LAL Press the key 0002 XOR lt S P01 0002 INS lt S FUNC 27_ XOR fand Press the key sequence Dininin Press the A key 0002 XOR lt S P02 9 132 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G Press the key sequence Dininin Press the ay key Press the key sequence JAHJA Press the A key Press the key sequence Press the J key BO AQ OUT OUTM Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language E 9 133 9 Bitwise NOT NOT Function 29 9 134 The bitwise one s complement function NOT is a conditionally executed function which bitwise negates one s complements a 16 bit word When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable EN input the function is executed by the CPU and a new NOT function will take place All bits in P1 input 1 are altered when power flow is received making output P2 Q a mirror image of the bits specified by P1 input 1 The two parameters input P01 1 and output P02 Q are both 16 bit words If discrete memory types are used for parameters P1 and P2 the beginning address must be on a byte boundary Logic controlling enable Power flow to a coil the enable input or another function WORD Locati
278. e on a coil instruction determines its retentive state Table 1 3 Range and Size of User References for the Series 90 30 PLC Models 311 313 331 340 341 CPUs Model311 313 CPU Model331 340 341CPU Reference Type Notapplicable 3K words Notapplicable User program memory 8K words model 331 40K words model 341 16K words model 340 512bits 512bits 10001 10512 Q0001 Q0512 512bits 512bits 10001 10512 Q0001 Q0512 Discrete inputs Discrete outputs F Discreteglobals G0001 G1280 1280bits G0001 G1280 1280bits Internal coils MO0001 M1024 1024bits MO0001 M1024 1024bits Temporary coils T0001 T0256 256 bits T0001 T0256 256 bits S0001 S0032 SA001 SA032 SB001 SB032 SCO001 SC032 R0001 RO512 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 512 words S0001 S0032 SA001 SA032 SB001 SB032 SCO001 SCO032 R0001 R2048 R0001 R9999 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 2048 words model 331 9999 words model 34041 System status references System register references Analoginputs AI001 AI064 64 words AI001 A128 128 words model 331 AI001 AT1024 1024 words model 340841 Analogoutputs AQ001 AQ032 32 words AQ001 AQ064 64 words model 331 AQ0N01 AQ256 256words model340 341 System registers SR001 SRO16 16 words SR001 SRO16 16 words
279. e preset register only A change to the preset value will be retained only if 1 has been specified for the preset parameter or 1 in the register specified for holding the preset variable of the associated timer counter function block Please refer to section 1 of chapter 8 for additional information on timers and counters The following example illustrates how to change the value of the top selected reference 1 Assume that the lI reference table is currently displayed and that 10022 is the top reference The display format is single bit binary gt I0022 0 lt S I0023 0 2 Press the Right cursor key gt I0022 _ lt S I0023 0 The blinking _ underscore character on the display screen indicates that a new data value can be entered for the top reference displayed 3 Press the 1 key gt I0022 1_ lt S I0023 0 4 Press the ENT key gt I0022 1 lt S I0023 0 The data value of 10022 has now been changed from 0 to 1 Canceling a Data Value Change Operation To completely abort a data change operation that has already been started press the Left cursor key to immediately terminate the change The data value change operation is immediately aborted and the original data value is restored To continue with a data change operation but erase the change value typed in so far press the CLR key The data value which has already been typed in is erased but the data change operation is still active Pres
280. e specified by parameter P1 is not equal to the value specified by parameter P2 GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 95 P1 Input 1 P2 Input 2 Logic for controlling enable power flow DINT Value to be compared P1 a coil or another function I2 P1 Other value to be compared P2 Il Q Power flow output to 0 means not equal to Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element Type of function either Function 53 NE or Function 73 DPNE Parameter P1 input 1 one of the values to be compared This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored Parameter P2 input 2 the other value to be compared This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored The following tables specify which memory types are valid for each of the NE and DPNE function parameters Allowable Memory Types for NE Function 53 me ee Fe am Pa a a a ee Allowable Memory Types for DPNE Function 73 a a ESE a RT a a S a S ee Note that double precision constants are constrained to the range 32 768 to 32 767 9 96 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Programming Example for Not Equal Comparison Function This example
281. e user logic program when the PLC is running Normally only changes which are simple byte for byte substitutions that do not change the size of the program are supported 1 To begin an on line change you must first be in replace mode with the PLC running Once the change is begun data monitoring of that instruction step is not performed Use the cursor keys to display the step where the edit is to occur You may now proceed to edit or replace the instruction Press the ENT key to complete the on line change Ol H GS Press the CLR key to abort replace mode or if an error is made 6 18 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Valid On Line Changes 6 The following table lists programming functions by groups The groups listed below indicate what parts of an instruction step may be legally changed in an on line substitution Note that on line changes may occur only within the same group changes cannot be made across groups Multiple changes within the same instruction step are supported Function Group Reference address Decimal constant Hexadecimal constant LD LD NOT AND AND NOT OR OR NOT OUT OUTM OUTNOT OUTM NOT OUT OUT Function 15 UPCTR Function 16 DNCTR Function 23 AND Function 25 OR Function 27 XOR Function 30 SHL Function 31 SHR Function 32 ROL Function 33 ROR Function 52 EQ Function 53 NE
282. ecified by parameter P1 is greater than the value specified by parameter P2 If discrete memory types are used for parameters P1 and P2 the beginning address must be on a byte boundary DPGT Function Description The two values specified by parameters P1 and P2 must be the same data type 32 bit two s complement signed integers and must be within the range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 When using the Hand Held Programmer to program a constant into parameters P1 or P2 the constant must be in the range of a single precision number 32768 to 32767 The memory locations for P1 and P2 are each 32 Bits long The storage area for each Register Al and AQ is 16 Bits long therefore two consecutive registers AI words or AQ words must be used for each double precision signed number which is to be stored The address of the lower of the two registers AI words or AQ words is used as the reference to store and retrieve the double precision number The Hand Held Programmer can only display a maximum of 16 bits one Register AI or AQ word at a time therefore a double precision number outside of the range 32768 to 32767 cannot be programmed into the CPU or monitored using the Hand Held Programmer The hexadecimal or binary number for each register AI or AQ word can be programmed or monitored provided that they are placed together outside of the CPU to form the 32 Bit double precision signed number This function will pass power flow when
283. ecimal Length signeddecimal TargetLocation signeddecimal Search Less Than or Equal To Byte SRLEB Array Start Address signed decimal Function 113 Index Into Array signeddecimal Object of Search signeddecimal Length signeddecimal TargetLocation signeddecimal Search Less Than or Equal To Word SRLEW Array Start Address signeddecimal Function 114 Index Into Array signed decimal Object of Search signeddecimal Length signeddecimal TargetLocation signeddecimal Search Less Than or Equal To INT SRLEI Array Start Address signed decimal Function 115 Index Into Array signeddecimal Object of Search signeddecimal Length signeddecimal TargetLocation signeddecimal Search Less Than or Equal To DINT SRLEDI Array Start Address signed decimal Function 116 Index Into Array signeddecimal Object of Search signeddecimal Length signeddecimal TargetLocation signeddecimal Search Greater Than Byte SRGTB Array Start Address signed decimal Function 117 Index Into Array signeddecimal Object of Search signeddecimal Length signeddecimal TargetLocation signeddecimal Search Greater Than Word SRGTW Array Start Address signed decimal Function 118 Index Into Array signeddecimal Object of Search signeddecimal Length signeddecimal TargetLocation signeddecimal Search Greater Than INT SRGTI Array Start Address signed decimal Function 119 Index Into Array signedde
284. ecting RUN STOP Mode from an Operating Mode Before the PLC s operating state may be changed a minimum access level of 2 must first be selected If the access privilege is only level 1 the change mode request will be refused and a PROTECT error message will be displayed See Chapter 7 for more information on PROTECTION Before the PLC s operating state is changed from stopped to running the program is first checked to ensure that no syntax errors exist in the program If an error is found the request to execute the program is refused and an indication of the problem is displayed by an error message By exiting the start stop function and entering program mode if not already in that mode you may view the instruction step containing the error It is possible that the program may contain multiple errors but only the first error detected beginning with the start of the program is displayed When making a mode change from STOP to RUN the following screen may be CLEAR FAULTS lt S lt ENT gt Y lt CLR gt N displayed This indicates that there is a fault in the CPU Check the fault indicator system tables SA SB and SC A fatal fault will not allow you to proceed into the run mode until it is removed and cleared A diagnostic fault must be cleared To clear faults press the ENT key again Press the CLR key to return to the stop mode and check tables for faults A change in the PLC operating state is first initiated by pressing the
285. ed You may then replace the current function or function block with another one As long as the new selection is of the same substitution group the current contents of all parameters are retained If the new selection belongs to a different substitution group the contents of the parameters will be lost Refer to the information on making on line changes in this chapter for a listing of the available substitution groups Function Parameter Change To change parameter P01 of the current function FUNC 55 GE from R0001 to R0002 0019 The initial display is FUNC 55 GE GFK 0402G Chapter 6 Program Edit 6 9 Press the cursor key 0019 GE P01 R0001 Press the key sequence and 0019 REPLACE lt S P0O1 R 2_ O Press the key 0019 GE P0O1 R0002 Function Substitution Change To change the current instruction step from FUNC 57 GT to FUNC 55 GE 0019 FUNC 57 GT Press the key sequence 0019 z5 Fun Gi s FUNC 55_ GE Press the 3 key 0019 lt S FUNC 55 GE Deleting an Instruction Step The initial display is The current instruction step may be deleted by pressing the DEL key and then the ENT key All instruction steps beneath the step deleted will scroll up in the program to fill the gap left by the deletion Note that instruction steps may only be deleted when the PLC is stopped as indicated by lt S in the upper right corner of the display screen To delete the current
286. ed in it Do not write to the third register of the three sequential registers which contain Timer and Counter operating values Changing the data in the control information word may result in unexpected operation of the PLC When programming the preset parameter which is P2 for a timer and P1 for a counter a special constant value of 1 minus 1 may be used This special constant value of 1 tells the controller to use the data located in the second register of the three sequential operating registers as the preset value Thus by programming a 1 as the preset GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 37 parameter you can go to the data mode and call up the second operating register for a specific counter or timer and load data into this register to represent the preset value Note When programming a 1 as the preset parameter value the preset data is not stored in the program and is retained only as a value in this operating register 9 38 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Stop Watch Timer TMR Function 10 The stop watch timer TMR is a conditionally executed function which provides simple stop watch timing When the logic controlling the enable EN input passes power flow to this function the current value starts at a value of zero and increments in steps which are equal to the value programmed as the timer accuracy parame
287. ed together to form the total number of bits in the group Parameter P4 Q the memory address location where the first word of the group of words containing the results of the bits that have been shifted is to be stored The following table specifies which memory types are valid for each of the SHR function parameters Allowable Memory Types for SHR Function 31 a a AN B A T Benene e a a E a SRTA EEE A AAE cel t Only SA SB and SC are used S cannot be used 9 144 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G 9 Programming Example for SHR Function In the following example a contact from a one shot out is used as the controlling element for powerflow to the enable function When input one closes passes power flow M0001 will pass powerflow to the enable input of the SHR function for one sweep of the CPU scan The 32 bits of the two consecutive 16 bit words start at Register 10 and end with Register 11 note that the length P3 is 2 These two 16 bit words will shift right one bit space N P2 1 The result will be placed into two consecutive 16 bits words starting at R20 The last bit of Register 11 will have the same state as the logic controlling the powerflow to B1 Lets say that B1 is passing powerflow giving an on condition for a state of 1 and Registers 10 and 11 have the bit pattern shown below then Registers 20 and
288. ee E E ie ee eh peste OC e 2 i i ee es T Note that double precision constants are constrained to the range 32 768 to 32 767 9 78 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G 9 Programming Example for Division This example of programming uses the DPDIV function In this example a contact from a one shot OUT is used as the controlling element for the power flow to the enable input of the divide function When input I0001 closes passes power flow M0001 will pass power flow to the enable input of the divide function for only one sweep of the CPU scan Therefore the division will only occur once each time input 1 is closed When the division takes place a value located in registers 199 and 200 as specified by P1 is divided by the value located in registers 201 and 202 as specified by P2 The results of this division is stored in registers 203 and 204 as specified by P3 If the value in register 201 is not zero divide by zero power flow will be passed through this function to turn on output Q1 for only one CPU scan only while the enable input has power flow For example if register 199 and 200 has a value of 50 and register 201 and 202 has a value of 4 then register 203 and 204 will have a value of 12 after input 1 is closed 50B 4 12 50 only the quotient is given as a result of this division Ladder Diagram Representation M0001
289. em RAM An acronym for Random Access Memory which is a solid state memory that allows individual bits to be stored and accessed at random This memory stores the Logicmaster software program files and related data while power is applied to the system This type of memory however is volatile Because data stored in RAM is lost under no power conditions a backup battery is required to retain the contents under those conditions The Series 90 30 PLC uses a long life Lithium battery mounted on the Power Supply and PCM modules Read To have data entered or to extract data from a storage device Release Lever A molded lever on the bottom of each Model 30 I O module which when depressed upwards releases the module in its slot to allow removal of the module Reference Type A specific group of memory types in the Series 90 30 and Series 90 20 PLC for example l references discrete inputs and Q references discrete outputs The symbol is used to distinguish machine references from nicknames Register A group of 16 consecutive bits in register memory referenced as R Each register is numbered beginning at 0001 Register memory is used for temporary storage of numerical values and for bit manipulation Removable Terminal Connector The removable assembly which attaches to the front of a printed wire board and contains the screw terminals to which field wiring is connected Restart Pushbutton A pushbutton on the front of
290. en the logic controlling the reset R input passes power flow to the reset input the current value will be set to the value programmed as the preset value and power flow through the function will be removed Power flow to the reset input is dominant over the count input That is if power flow is being received at the reset input when the count input goes from a condition of no power flow to a condition of power flow the current value will stay at the value programmed as the preset value and will not decrement The down counter is retentive on power failure to the CPU and when the mode is changed from run to stop and back to run again There is no automatic initialization of the down counter during power up i e the current value does not go to the preset value unless the down counter is reset Logic for count input count ESET flow output to a coil or another function Logic for reset input reset R Preset Value P1 PV location Address P2 Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the count input from the left bus Must start with an LD element 2 Logic controlling the reset input from the left bus This logic must start with an LD element 3 Type of function Function 15 4 Parameter P1 preset value This can be a constant number or the number of a register that will contain the preset value 5 Parameter P2 counter location numb
291. enable power flow to enable input Location of first word of block of words to be cleared P01 BLOCK CLR IN1 Power flow through this function to control a coil or another function P02 Constant specifying number of words to be cleared Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element 2 Type of function Function 44 BLKCL 3 Parameter P1 IN location of word or group of words that are to have their bits changed to 0 zero This is the starting memory location for the first word of the group of words to be zeroed 4 Parameter P2 LEN a constant specifying the number of 16 bit words in the consecutive group of words to be zeroed 9 198 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 The following table specifies which memory types are valid for each of the BLKCL function parameters Allowable Memory Types for BLKCL Function 44 A Vice Ra oe Ve Mesime a d O O T T A T Se Only SA SB and SC are used S cannot be used Programming Example for BLKCL Function In this example when input I0001 is closed passing power flow to the enable input of the function block zeros will be moved into the 32 two 16 Bit words specified by parameter P2 discrete Global memory location beginning at G0017 specified by
292. ence in two or more locations in the program WRN MUL allows multiple coil uses of the same M or Q reference but provides a warning screen to the user that this is being done and MULT allows multiple coil usage without a warning Note When an instruction is added and the coil use warning message is displayed the warning message should be verified with the search function It is possible that the use warning message is displayed even though the coil is used only once in the program The PLC parameters described on the following pages are controlled by the Hand Held Programmer but do not affect its operation They are used for communications through the power supply port with devices other than the HHP 3 8 Hand Held Programmerfor Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Port Idle Time Parameter This parameter allows you to specify the maximum amount of time a communications attachment to the PLC can be idle no communications before the PLC assumes that communications has either been lost or terminated The maximum allowable idle time can range between 1 and 60 seconds inclusive The default value is 10 seconds Use the Right cursor key to scroll through the PLC parameters until the port idle time IDLE TM parameter is displayed To specify the amount of allowable idle time enter a value between 1 and 60 seconds inclusive and press the ENT key Baud Rate Parameter The baud rat
293. end of the array is reached If an array element is found the output parameter FD is set to true and output parameter output NX is set to the relative position of this element within the array If no element is found with a value equal or not equal to IN before the end of the array is reached then output parameter FD is set to false and output parameter output NX is set to zero The valid values for the input NX are 0 to LEN 1 This value increments by one at the time of execution Therefore the values of the output NX are 1 to LEN If the value of the input NX is out of range lt 0 or w LEN its value is set to the default value of zero The function parameters for the Search Equal To functions are shown in the following illustration The form of the function is the same for all Search Equal To functions the only difference being the data type Logic for controlling enable Ea power flow EQ_ Starting address of array P1 AR FD Set to 1 if element found 0 if not found LEN P4 Length of array Index into array P2 P5 Set to position in array of element Object of search P3 9 270 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Description of Parameters for Search Equal To Functions Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the operation is performed AR P011 AR contains the star
294. er 10 Error Messages Summarizes the non system errormessagesand or displays which may occur during the operation of the Hand Held Programmer Appendix A Glossary This is a glossary of terms for the Series 90 30 and 90 20 programmable controllers Appendix B Special Contact References This appendix lists the special contact references which are located in four segments of S memory as S SA SB and SC Appendix C List of Functions This appendix lists the Series 90 30 20 functions that can be programmed using the Hand Held Programmer A description of each function is included Appendix D Function Parameters This appendix lists the default display formats for each function parameter Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Preface Related Publications For more information on Series 90 30 Series 90 20 and Micro PLC products refer to these publications GFK 0255 Series 90 PCM and Support Software User s Manual GFK 0256 MegaBasic Programming Reference Manual GFK 0293 Series 90 30 High Speed Counter User s Manual GFK 0401 Workmaster II PLC Programming Unit Guide to Operation GFK 0402 Series 90 30 and 90 20 PLC Hand Held Programmer User s Manual GFK 0412 Genius Communications Module User s Manual GFK 0466 Logicmaster 90 Series 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0467 Series 90
295. er of counts can range from 0 0 msec delay to 255 2 55 sec delay Use 0 zero for direct connection with no turnaround time Use the Right cursor key to scroll through the PLC parameters until the modem turnaround time MDM TAT parameter is displayed To specify the number of counts enter a value between 0 and 255 inclusive and press the ENT key GFK 0402G Chapter 3 Series 90 30 20 PLC Configuration 3 9 Password ENABLE DISABLE Parameter This parameter lets you enable or disable the password parameter The default for this parameter is ENABLE See Chapter 7 for more information on passwords CPU ID Parameters ID1 ID2 and ID3 The next PLC parameter you can configure is CPU ID parameter ID1 This parameter is the first of three consecutive parameters used to input a network identification name on a Series 90 protocol network Each parameter is a 4 digit hexadecimal number The four hexadecimal digits correspond to two ASCII characters thus a 6 character identifier is entered two characters at a time If the total identifier consists of less then six characters all trailing characters must be set to the NULL character ASCII 00H By default the PLC is not assigned a network name all characters are set to NULL Use the Right cursor key to scroll through the PLC parameters until the first ID parameter is displayed Enter the key sequence of the ASCII hex numbers which correspond to the network name you wish to specify Then p
296. er of the first register of the three sequential registers containing the operating values Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 57 9 58 The following table specifies which memory types are valid for each of the DNCTR function block s parameters Allowable Memory Types for DNCTR Function 16 ES a a a a We ee RSS CE T Only positive constants are allowed except 1 which indicates no preset parameter Preset Value P01 The preset value parameter indicates the count range for the down counter If specified it is indicated by a positive only 16 bit two s complement signed integer 0 32 767 The constant 1 indicates that no preset count parameter is specified For this case the preset count will be accessed from the counter data structure Counter Location P02 The counter location gives the address of a three word data structure which is used by the counter function block Programming Example for DNCTR Function In the following example each time input 10001 goes from open no power flow to closed power flow the current value will decrement by a value of one When the current value is less then or equal to zero power flow through this function will take place and output coil Q0001 will be turned on In this example the starting number is 8 the preset value thus after 8 counts Q0001 will turn on When input I0002 closes power flow is removed coil Q0001 will turn off and the current value
297. er to form a continuous string of bits are shifted left a specified number of memory bit locations The bits which are shifted out of the left end highest bit location of the group of bits are shifted into the vacant locations at the right end lowest bit location of the group of bits The location of the word or group of words is specified by parameter P1 which is the memory address location for the first word of the group of consecutive words containing the group of bits to be rotated The number of 16 bit words in the consecutive group of words forming the continuous string of bits is specified by parameter P3 LEN The limits of LEN depend on the memory type being used and the starting address of the first word of the group of words containing the bits to be shifted and the starting address of the final memory location where the shifted bits are to be stored If the length plus the memory address exceed the total number of words for that memory type DATA ERR will be displayed on the screen of the Hand Held Programmer The number of bit locations that each bit is shifted each time this function is executed is specified by parameter P2 N The number of locations specified by N must be more then zero and less then the total number of bits in the group of consecutive words When the shift occurs a number of bits specified by N will be shifted out of the left end highest bit location of the last word of the group of bits These bits are shifte
298. eration without the proper privi lege level or attempted to program a write pro tected Memory Card Attempt made to view or edit a locked subroutine RUNNING Attempted an operation which is not valid when the PLC is running INS ER Attempted to accept an incomplete or invalid instruction REPLCER Attempted to make an illegal on line substitution change STKOVR Created an instruction sequence whose stack depth usage exceeds 9 SEQ ERR Created an invalid instruction sequence USEWRN Dual use of a Q or M reference as an output exists in the program USE ERR Attempt to reuse a Q or M reference as an out put with dual use checking enabled PSWERR Specifying a password or OEM key which is incor rect for the indicated access level IOMER Specification of an invalid module type for the con figuration of a slot IDERR Specification of an invalid board or module ID for genericconfiguration ROMERR Failure attempting to read or write EEPROM VRFY ER Verification of RAM contents against either EE PROM or the MEM CARD contents failed due to miscompares Corrective Action No action is required The system automatically adjusted the reference address to an acceptable boundary No further ac tion is required Abort the current instruction step insert or edit op eration Examine logic and redo as necessary Use protection mode to change the privilege level to the proper setting or remove t
299. erence by pressing the ENT key a second time and the configuration of this slot will be complete Or you can abort the configuration attempt by pressing the CLR key Input addresses I and AI may not be overlapped as part of a slot configuration If you attempt such an overlap the configuration request will be refused and an I OERR message will be displayed You must either map this module into a different reference range or abort the configuration of the module For discrete and analog outputs Q and AQ the reference range default will be overlaid in the highest range of the map if there is no room left in the address map Module configuration changes whether additions or modifications can be performed only when the PLC is stopped You must first place the PLC in stop mode before attempting to configure a module If you attempt to make a change with the PLC running the configuration request will be refused and a RUNNING message will be displayed Locating a Slot or Rack For information on the procedure for locating a slot or rack refer to Chapter 3 page 3 4 Locating a Slot or Rack and Parameters Configuring a Discrete Module Follow this procedure to configure a discrete module 1 Use the Up and Down cursor keys or the key to display the correct slot in the rack For example to configure a 16 point input module in slot 5 of the main rack the initial display would appear as RO 05 EMPTY lt S Hand Held Programmer f
300. erence range Q0025 Q0032 follow this procedure 1 The initial display appears as RO 04 EMPTY lt S 2 Pressthe READ VERIFY key RO 04 READ lt S Chapter 5 I O Configuration 5 11 3 Next press the ENT key 4 Press the key sequence 2 5 5 Press the ENT key to complete this operation RO 04 Q lt S Q08 90025 90032 Deleting an Existing Configuration The DEL key may be used to delete a non intelligent module from a particular backplane slot Use the Up and Down cursor keys or the key to display the configuration of the slot to be deleted Press the DEL key and then the ENT key to delete the reference type and address from the slot and return it to its initial state empty Replacing a Configuration 5 12 To change the current configuration by replacing the reference type you must first delete the existing slot configuration and then enter the new configuration as previously described If the module type remains the same and only the reference address changes you can simply enter the new data over top of the old data The following example shows how to remap the currently configured 8 point discrete output module from the reference range Q0025 Q0032 to the reference range Q0033 Q0040 1 The initial display appears as RO 04 Q lt S 008 90025 90032 2 Press the key sequence 3 3 for the new reference range 3 Then press the ENT key to complete this replacement o
301. eries 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Press the st key Next cursor down to SUBR Press the key _ 2 SUBR lt S Then to enter the Subroutine Declaration mode edia iy 0001 NO SUBR lt S 0002 NO SUBR You are now in Subroutine Declaration mode where declarations of up to 64 subroutines can be viewed To locate the desired subroutine declaration use the Tord key or the key with the desired subroutine number At this point use the and keys to zoom into the desired subroutine If the subroutine is view locked an error message is displayed Note In this case you must first unlock the subroutine or change its locked status to edit locked using Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software before you can zoom into the program statement list The following screen will appear when you attempt to zoom into view locked subroutine 01 Press the key sequence 0001vPROTECT lt S 0002 SUBRO2 Zoom From a Subroutine Call Function If you cursor to the Subroutine Call Function and attempt to zoom into the subroutine logic by entering the keys and the subroutine is view locked the PROTECT error message is displayed Note You must use Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software to unlock the subroutine or change its locked status to edit locked in order to zoom in Chapter 8 PLC Control and Status 8 13 8 14 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable
302. ers Allowable Memory Types for PIDISA PIDIND Functions 86 87 _Perameter Row SO eM WT S MG UR GAT AQ const none e Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 255 PID Data Structure The parameter block associated with each PID function block contains the data items as shown below The location of this parameter must be a register specified by the entry for the LOC P03 parameter uC i Ref 0021 Int Term Storage Ref 0022 Slew Term Storage Ref 0023 Clock Ref 0024 Ref 0025 time last executed Ref 0026 Y Remainder Storage Ref 0027 Lower Range for SP PV Ref 0028 Upper Range for SP PV Ref 0029 Reserved for internal use Ref 0034 Ref 0035 e Reserved for external use Ref 0039 May be set by the user Set and maintained by the PLC 9 256 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 The loop number execution interval deadband proportional gain differential gain integral rate bias upper Aower clamp minimum slew time and config word values must be set by the application program The other values are maintained by the PID function block There is an important restriction on the use of the PID function The PID will not execute more often than once every 10 msec This cou
303. ers 199 and 200 as specified by P1 is divided by the value located in registers 201 and 202 as specified by P2 The remainder of this division is stored in registers 203 and 204 as specified by P3 If the value in register 201 is not zero divide by zero power flow will be passed through this function to turn on output Q1 for only one CPU scan only while the enable input has power flow For example if register 199 and 200 has a value of 50 and register 201 and 202 has a value of 4 then register 203 and 204 will have a value of 2 after input 1 is closed 50 B 4 12 50 only the remainder is given as a result of this division 50 B 4 12 50 12 x 4 48 50 48 2 remainder Ladder Diagram Representation M0001 k ils MOD DINT R0199 P1 I1 Q RO203 R0201 P2 12 Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 OUT MO0001 0003 LD MO0001 0004 FUNC 69 DPMOD P1 R0199 P2 R0201 P3 R0203 0005 OUT Q0001 9 84 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G After pressing Key Programming sequence Key Strokes Initial display Press the key sequence A zai o Press the T key Press the key sequence Te OUT OUTM Press the key E T Bi Press the key sequence C SLJ T ENT Press the key
304. es Ranges can be configured on a per channel basis Although you can change the number of actively scanned channels with the Logicmaster 90 30 configurator function the Hand Held Programmer does not support editing the number of actively scanned channels If the 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input module is initialized by a Hand Held Programmer the number of actively scanned channels is 16 If a module had been previously configured with Logicmaster 90 30 software and the number of actively scanned channels has been changed from 16 that number will be displayed on the bottom line of the Hand Held Programmer display following the AI You can edit data with the Hand Held Programmer only for the active channels but can not change the number of actively scanned channels Chapter 5 I O Configuration 5 27 Module Present If a module is physically present in a system it can be added to the system s configuration by reading the module into it For example assume that a 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input module is installed in slot 3 of a Model 311 PLC system It can be added to the configuration with the following sequence Use the Up and Down cursor keys or the key to display the selected slot Initial Display To add the IC693ALG222 module to the configuration press the READ VERIFY key The following screen will be displayed RO 03 HI DEN V gt S I40 I_ Note This field cannot be changed with the Hand Held programmer However it ca
305. escription Specify a 1 to 4 digit hexadecimalpasswordvalue Hexadecimal letter A to F is in upper left corner of designated key Abort or cancel the current operation or user input Enter lower access level Enter higher access level Display password for lower access level Display password for higher access level view modify OEM key Delete password at specified access level Complete an operation or user input Start or stop the PLC Select an HHP operating mode Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 Once the system has been configured to disable passwords they can only be re enabled by clearing the PLC s memory through a power cycle To do this press the CLR and M T keys simultaneously see Table 2 5 while the PLC is powering up GFK 0402G Moving to another level of access GFK 0402G Two different screen formats are used to change the current access level one which shows the current access level and a second screen format for specifying a higher access level Both of these screen formats are shown below Table 8 4 Current Access Level Level OEM PLC L E V E E unused Protection unused State Table 8 5 Higher Access Level ries OEM PLC unused Protection unused State eG unused unused Password unused Level The level field indicates a password level Its value can range between 1 and 4 inclusive OEM Protection T
306. eset latch coil Retentive set latch coil Non retentive reset latch coil Retentive reset latch coil KeySequence Non retentive coil with normally open contacts Operation The coil sets a discrete output ON while it receives power flow It is non retentive The retentive coil sets a dis crete output ON while it re ceives power flow The state of the retentive coil is re tained across power failure The negated coil sets a dis crete output ON when it does not receive power flow It is not retentive The negated retentive coil sets a discrete output ON when it does not receive power flow The state of the negated retentive coil is re tained across power failure When a set coil receives pow er flow its reference stays ON whether or not the coil itself receives power flow until it is reset by power flow to a reset coil The set coil is non retentive The retentive set coil sets a discrete output ON if the coil receives power flow The output remains ON until re set by a reset coil The state of the retentive coil is retained across power failure or when the PLC transitions from stop mode to run mode The reset coil sets a discrete machine output or internal output OFF if the coil re ceives power flow The out put remains OFF until reset by aset coil The reset coil is non retentive The retentive reset coil sets a discrete machine ou
307. ete global G table or an internal coil M table can be cleared of all overrides when the PLC is stopped The procedure is the same as described above for clearing a data table and initializing its contents to all zeros except that the key is added to the sequence of keys to press Press the key that corresponds to the type of data table you wish to clear then press LJ GIG 7 L er Viewing Special System Registers GFK 0402G A special view only reference table is supported as part of the Reference Tables function This table known as the System Registers SR table contains information about certain PLC operating parameters Interaction with this table is identical to that of the standard register R table except that timer counter display format is not valid table value changes are not allowed and System Register 15 Program Memory Available is always displayed in decimal The system register definitions are listed in the following table along with the display format required for proper viewing Table 7 10 Special System Registers SR001 SR002 SRO003 SRO06 Encoded form of level 2 password SRO07 SRO10 Encoded form of level 3 password SRO11 SRO14 Encoded form of level 4 password SRO15 SRO016 Reference Display Format Description Revision code of the PLC s firmware Signeddecimal User programmemorystillavailable Signeddecimal Current scan time o
308. evice has DEFAULT I O enabled the verify will always be successful When configuration is verified with Logicmaster 90 30 and the configuration on Logicmaster 90 30 has DEFAULT CONFIG enabled the results of the verify will be determined by the value of the checksums This means that a configuration that will 3 12 Hand Held Programmerfor Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G verify may not produce the same results if STOREd since modules may have been physically added since the Logicmaster 90 30 configuration was LOADed from the PLC Checksum Words Per Sweep This parameter allows you to select the number of words per sweep to be checksummed The selectable range is from 8 to 32 words any number of words between 8 and 32 Canceling a Configuration Operation The CLR key can be used to cancel the current parameter modification and restore the original setting When attempting to change the configuration of a PLC parameter a valid value must be entered If an invalid value is specified the configuration request will be refused and a DAT ERR message will be displayed In a GOTO operation described in the beginning of this chapter the CLR key can be used to cancel the operation and remain on the currently viewed slot If a slot number has already been entered press the CLR key to erase the current input and remain in slot selection mode Pressing the CLR key a second time cancels the GOT
309. ey are placed together outside of the CPU to form the 32 Bit double precision signed number If the subtraction results in overflow a value outside of the range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 the results of the subtraction will be set to the largest possible value 2 147 483 648 or 2 147 483 647 The sign is set to show the direction of the overflow This function will pass power flow when there is power flow to the enable input and the results of the addition are within the range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 no overflow GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 67 1 Input 1 P2 Input 2 P3 Q Logic for controlling enab1c EEN over flow output to power flow a coil or another function Value to be subtracted from P1 The result is stored here Value to be subtracted by P2 1I2 Constant or Location Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 5 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element Type of function either Function 62 SUB or Function 63 DPSUB Parameter P1 input 1 value to be subtracted from This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored Parameter P2 input 2 value to be subtracted This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored Parameter P3 Q memory location where the result is to be stored The following tables specify
310. f bits The state of the bits being shifted into the vacant locations is specified by the condition of the logic programmed into the B1 input Power flow from the left bus to the B1 input will enter a one No power flow to the B1 input will enter a zero into the group of vacant bit locations If a length N parameter P2 greater than one has been specified as the number of bits to be shifted each of the vacant locations will be filled with the same value 0 or 1 If the number of bits to be shifted N is greater than the number of bits in the array LEN 16 then the array Q is filled with copies of the input bit B1 and the input bit is copied to the output power flow B2 If the number of bits to be shifted is zero then no shifting is performed the output array is untouched and power flow is OFE The result of the shifted operation is stored in the location of the word or group of consecutive words specified by parameter P4 Q which is the memory address location for the first word of the group of consecutive words containing the string of bits that has been shifted Parameters P1 and P4 are memory locations representing 16 bit words and parameters P2 and P3 are constants while B1 input is the result of some logic attached to this functions B1 input If discrete memory types are used for parameters P1 P2 and P4 the beginning address must be on an 8 point boundary Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 137 Power flow th
311. f data that does not vary Can be stored in a register Counter A function block which can be programmed to control other devices according to a preset number of on off transitions CPU Central Processing Unit The central device or controller that interprets user instructions makes decisions and executes the functions based on a stored application program Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G Data Memory User references within the Series 90 30 and 90 20 PLC CPU which are accessible by the application program for storage of discrete or register data Data Table A consecutive group of user references of the same size accessed with table read write functions Discrete The term discrete includes both real and internal I O that are one bit user references Expansion Baseplate A 5 slot or 10 slot baseplate added to a Series 90 30 PLC Model 331 Model 340 Model 341 or Model 351 system when the application calls for more modules then the main baseplate can contain A Series 90 30 PLC Model 331 Model 340 Model 341 or Model 351 system can have up to 4 expansion baseplates Expansion Cable Acable which propagates the parallel I O bus signals between expansion baseplates The total length of all expansion cables from the main baseplate to the last expansion baseplate in a system can be no more then 50 feet 15 meters in a local expan
312. f required this module can be removed from the current rack configuration Assume that the module is currently configured in rack 0 slot 3 It can be deleted with the following sequence Initial Display RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S AQ8 AQ To delete the module press the DEL ENT key sequence The display will then be If the CLR key had been pressed after the DEL key instead of the ENT key the delete operation would have been aborted GFK 0402G Chapter 5 I O Configuration 5 39 Selecting Module Default Mode 5 40 The default STOP mode of the module either HOLD or DEFLOW can be displayed and modified if required by using the following procedure RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S I16 10017 10032 To display the module s default STOP mode press gt The display will show the current mode of the module The default mode is HOLD RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S HLS DEF HOLD You can toggle between the HOLD and DEFLOW modes by pressing the key The range selected is the one currently displayed RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S HLS DEF DEF LOW When the desired mode for the module is displayed on the screen it can be accepted by pressing the ENT key To return to the previous screen press the lt key Selecting Output Channel Ranges The range for each of the 8 channels can be displayed and selected or changed as described below There are two current and two voltage ranges that can be selected Initial Display RO 03 AO 1 00
313. f the different keys Becoming familiar with the programmer keys and their functions will increase your programming efficiency Note Several keys provide access to two instructions To access the instruction printed on the lower half of the key press the key twice GFK 0402G Chapter 2 Operation 2 3 Edit and Display Control Keys The blue Edit and Display Control keys are located on the right side of the keypad The CLR key is red A description of these keys is provided in the following table Table 2 1 Edit and Display Control Keys Key Description Select an HHP operating mode O m RUN Start or stop the PLC S Delete an instruction step in program mode DEL Delete configuration of currently displayed slotinI1 O configuration mode Delete password at specified access level in protection mode SRCH Search for a given target or initiate a program check in program mode Begin an instruction step insertion operation in program mode Move between instruction steps in program mode Move view window around currently displayed table in data mode Select anI O slot for viewing in configuration mode Enter a lower or higher access level in protection mode Move between function parameters in program mode Invoke or abort a reference table contents change in data mode INS t 4 Display a different PLC parameter or position different binary bit for change in PLCconfigurationmode Display a d
314. f the PLC in milliseconds The following example illustrates how information about the PLC operating parameters can be obtained from the special system registers 1 Assume that the I table is displayed in binary mode as shown below gt I0001 0 lt R I0002 1 2 Press the keysequenceG S G S R 1 to view system register SROO1 Chapter 7 Reference Tables 7 11 3 Press the ENT key SROO1 lt R 0011010100000000 4 Press the key sequence HEX DEC HEX DEC From this screen you can determine the CPU model number and firmware revision code In the following example screen the CPU is a Model 311 0331 would be displayed for a Model 331 etc and the firmware revision code is 01 10 gt SR001 0311H lt R SR002 0110H 5 Press the Down cursor key twice to display system registers SR003 and SR004 From this screen you can view the first two words of the encoded password for level 2 gt SR003 EODDH lt R SROO4 3D98H 6 Pressing the Down cursor key twice again will display the last two words of the encoded password for level 2 SRO05 and SR006 Subsequent presses will display the first two words SRO07 and SRO08 or the last two words SRO09 and SR010 of the level 3 password and the first two words SRO11 and SRO12 or the last two words SRO13 and SRO14 of the level 4 password 7 Press the cursor key twice to display system registers SRO15 and SRO16 Press the HEX DECkey twice to change the display fr
315. f the current access level is 1 and you wish to change this to 3 you would press the Down cursor key twice and and then enter the password If the password for level 3 is A5A5 you would press the key sequenceI AI 5 I AI 5 and then press the ENT key If the wrong password is entered or no password is entered at all the access change request will be refused and a DATA ER message will be displayed If the correct password is known specify it correctly and attempt the level change again Otherwise press the CLR key to abort the change lt Initial display LEVEL1 R Press the key Press the key Press the key sequence LEVEL1 lt R Al A l PSW 3 A5A5_ arf to yar pe yp Press the key LEVEL3 lt R It is possible that the higher access level which you wish to invoke is not password protected The PLC can not be password protected at all In this case the reserved Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G password which indicates a NULL password should be specified The NULL password is specified when ENT is pressed while the password field is empty The CLR key can be used to cancel the access level change prior to activating it Ifa password is currently specified pressing the CLR key will only erase the current user input Pressing the CLR key a second time cancels the operation If no user input has been specified when
316. f words is specified by parameter P1 which is the memory address location for the first word of the group of consecutive words containing the group of bits to be shifted The number of 16 bit words in the consecutive group of words forming the continuous string bits is specified by parameter P3 LEN The limits of LEN depend on the memory type being used and the starting address of the first word of the group of words containing the bits to be shifted and the starting address of the final memory location where the shifted bits are to be stored If the length plus the memory address exceeds the total number of words for that memory type DATA ERR will be displayed on the screen of the Hand Held Programmer The number of bit locations that each bit is shifted each time this function is executed is specified by parameter P2 N The number of location specified by N must be more then zero and less then the total number of bits in the group of consecutive words When the shift occurs a number of bits specified by N will be shifted out of the left end highest bit location of the last word of the group of bits The last bit shifted out of the group will determine the condition of B2 see note below which is power flow through this function A zero shifted out will be no power flow and a one shifted out will give power flow Also the same number of bits are shifted into the vacant locations located at the right end lowest bit location of the group o
317. fault table listing PLC faults These faults are identified by time date and location Power Flow In a ladder diagram the symbolic flow of power represents the logical execution of program functions For each function it is important to know what happens when power is received and under what conditions power flow is output Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G Preset Value Anumerical value specified in a function which establishes a limit for a counter or timer Program Block A unit of an application program It contains the control logic and certain overhead data This program block can have up to 8K words including logic and overhead Program Sweep Time The time from the start of one cycle of the application program to the next The program sweep is composed of the following perform start of sweep system tasks read the inputs execute the user s program write the outputs recover faulted boards complete minimal checksum calculation schedule the next sweep communicate with the programmer and other intelligent option modules and execute background tasks Programmable Logic Controller PLC A solid state industrial control device which receives signals from user supplied control devices such as switches and sensors implements them in a precise pattern determined by ladder diagram based application programs stored in user memory and p
318. ference table it is possible that a bit number greater than the length of the bit string could be encountered by the function block In this case the function block cannot execute the power flow output is 0 and the contents of the bit string are not affected If the function block can execute properly the power flow output is a 1 and the bit specified by IN and BIT is set to 0 Logic for enable cnan o EERIE ov flow output to a coil input or another function Beginning of bit string P01 IN string to be set Length of bit string in Number of bit in bit P02 BIT Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element 2 Type of function Function 24 BITCLR 3 Parameter P1 IN the memory address location for the first word in the bit string containing the bit to be set 4 Parameter P2 BIT the number of the bit in the bit string to be set This can be a constant or a memory location containing the value 5 Parameter P3 LEN specifies the length of the bit string in words This isaa constant number The following table specifies which memory types are valid for each of the BITCLR function parameters Allowable Memory Types for BITCLR Function 24 a a e ce es ee a ee ee Fi PR a a rene PP pp tt as ee GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 165 Program
319. fix AI represents an analog input register This prefix is followed by the register address of the reference for example AI0015 An analog input register holds the value of one analog input or other value APAQ The prefix AQ represents an analog output register This prefix is followed by the register address of the reference for example AQ0056 An analog output register holds the value of one analog output or other value Note All register references are retained across a power cycle to the CPU GFK 0402G Chapter 1 Introduction to the Hand Held Programmer 1 3 Table 1 2 Discrete References Type I Q M T S G Description The l prefix represents input references This prefix is followed by the reference s address in the input table for example I0121 I references are located in the input status table which stores the state of all inputs received from input modules during the last input scan Areference address is assigned to discrete input modules using the Logicmaster 90 30 90 20 configuration software or the Hand Held Programmer Until a reference address is assigned no data will be received from the module The Q prefix represents physical output references The dual use coil checking function of the HHP checks for multiple uses of Q references with relay coils or outputs on functions Beginning with Release 3 of Series 90 30 and Release 2 of Series 90 20 firmware you can
320. flow output to another power flow to the function or coil enable input Memory location of P01 P02 Memory location of binary the BCD Bits to be representation of the decimal converted integers Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This logic must start with an LD element 2 Function type Function 81 3 Parameter P1 IN the memory location where the BCD number to be converted is stored 4 Parameter P2 Q the memory location where the binary representation of the decimal integers are to be stored Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 229 The following table specifies which memory types are valid for each of the INT function parameters Allowable Memory Types for INT Function 81 ESIC am Fe Ra P e e a XE a a Oa RAR Programming Example for BCD to INT Function In this example the 16 bits stored in register R0001 specified by parameter P1 are split into four BCD digits that will each be converted to a decimal number whose binary representation will be stored in register R0002 specified by parameter P2 If the following Binary Bits are in Register R0001 PT PoP Po PoPoTo PoE Polo TPL ssasttexadecima Then the following Binary bits will be stored in R0002 after the conversion fofofolafofofa ofif afo afafo 1 fo Binary representation of decimal number 4826 which is hexadecimal12DA Ladder Diagram Represen
321. g RO 02 PCM301 lt S Press the key MODE PROGRAM PRT The asterisk to the left of PCM indicates that the module s configuration is now frozen That is the new mode value of PROGRAMMER PORT is remembered and displayed but the module is still using the old value of CCM ONLY If power were cycled at this time the mode parameter would have the old value of CCM ONLY If you should attempt to change HHP modes or go to RUN mode when the module s configuration is frozen the FROZENerror message will be displayed For example RO 08 FROZEN lt S Press the key MODE PROGRAM PRT GFK 0402G Chapter 5 I O Configuration 5 23 To refresh the display of the module name press any key for example RO 02 PCM301 lt S Press the a key MODE PROGRAM PRT If an attempt is made to view the configuration of a module in another slot at this time the HHP will prompt you for the changes For example Press th kas SAVE CHANGES lt S i ie lt ENT gt Y lt CLR gt N Since the port baud rate parameters have not yet been edited at this point in our example we do not want to save the changes yet Press the key a pa If the changes are discarded at this time we will lose the change we made to the mode parameter That is the configuration would revert to CCM ONLY which is what it was before the configuration was frozen Since we have more parameters to edit Press the key Bete NT oan Again the asterisk indicates that the mod
322. g Key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display Initial display 0001 INS lt S Press the sequence NS e LD 9 50 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Press the ai key Press the key sequence LIL Or press the key 3 times ONDTR FUNC Press the S key Press the key sequence Press the T key Press the key sequence Press the key Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language B 0002 INS lt S 0002 INS lt S FUNC 14_ OFDTR 0002 OFDTR lt S P01 0002 OFDTR lt S P1 10_ 0002 OFDTR lt S P02 0002 OFDTR lt S P02 25 0002 OFDTR lt S PO3 _ 9 51 9 52 Press the key sequence Press the T key Press the key sequence J OUT OUTM BQ AQ Press the ay key 0002 OFDTR lt S P03 R1_ 0003 INS lt S 0003 INS lt S OUT Q 1_ 0004 INS lt S Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Up Counter UPCTR Function 15 The up counter UPCTR is a conditionally executed function which provides incremental counting Each time the logic controlling the count input goes from a condition of no power flow to a condition of power flow to this function the current value will be incremented by a value of one The
323. ging program logic Programming of this function does not prevent you from viewing succeeding instructions No Operation NOOP Function 1 GFK 0402G The no operation function NOOP is an unconditionally executed function which performs no operation It is used only in support of the Logicmaster 90 30 20 software package NOOPs may appear ina statement list program after Logicmaster 90 30 20 software has downloaded a program This function can be only be viewed and deleted by the Hand Held Programmer It cannot be entered using the Hand Held Programmer Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 241 2 Nested Jump JUMP Function 3 9 242 The nested JUMP function is an unconditionally executed function which is used to cause a specified portion of the program logic to be bypassed Normal program execution will continue at the portion of the program specified by the LABEL function The nested JUMP function is enabled when power flows to the enable input When the function executes the program will jump to the LABEL specified by the JUMP function If this jump is in the forward direction the instructions between the JUMP function and the LABEL function will be skipped If the jump is in the backward direction the instructions between the LABEL and the JUMP functions will be repeated A forward jump sequence has the following form JUMP TO N LABEL N A backwards jump sequence has the following form LABEL N J
324. git BCD value to an integer value 229 9 32 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Table 9 4 Statement List Language Standard Functions and Function Blocks Continued Abbreviation Page FunctionNo FunctionName Description 9 xx Control Functions DOI O DoI Oupdate Perform an immediate update of a 234 designated range of discrete or analog inputs or outputs PIDISA PlIl proportional integral derivativeon Implements a standard PID ISA algorithm 254 trolalgorithm ISA PIDIND PIQproportional integral derivativeon Implements an independent term PID IND 254 trol algorithm IND algorithm SVCROQ System servicerequest Request one of the PLC s special services 251 CALLSUB Callsubroutine Requesta particular subroutine 266 ENDSW Terminate program logic execution Anunconditionally executed function that 241 acts as a temporary program logic execution stream terminator Normally used during system debug NOOP No operation Anunconditionally executed function usedin 241 supportofLogicmaster90 30 20 Microsoft ware package It supports rung comments functionality JUMP Nested jump Control the execution path through the user s 242 logic program The jump range extends to theprevious next matching LABEL function encountered MCR Nested master control relay Used as a master control relay MCR range 246 extends to the next END MCD f
325. gt The display will show Channel 1 or the currently selected channel and the first available range RO 03 AIO 1 00 lt S CH 1 1 0 10 You can toggle through the range for each input channel by pressing the key Each range will be displayed as shown Each of the ranges are shown below The range that will be selected is the one currently displayed RO 03 AIO 1 00 lt S CH 1 I 10 10 RO 03 AIO 1 00 lt S CH 1 1 4 20 RO 03 AIO 1 00 lt S CH 1 1 0 20 RO 03 AIO 1 00 lt S CH 1 1 4 20 When the desired range for the module is displayed on the screen it can be accepted by pressing the ENT key To return to the previous screen press the lt key Selecting Low and High Alarm limits To view the alarm limits display press the key and the following screen will be displayed RO 03 AIO 1 00 lt S CH 1 I LO 00000 This display is the entry field for the low alarm limit for this channel You can enter alarm limit values using the numeric keys 0 through 9 and the key for negative values To accept the value you have entered or you can press the ENT key or press the lt key to return to the previous screen To view and make entries for each of the channels press 5 48 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February1996 GFK 0402G Freeze Mode GFK 0402G the key until you have viewed the alarm lo limit screen for each channel Press the key again to adv
326. h of the SHFRW parameters Allowable Memory Types for SHFRW Function 45 Input IN P01 oe Teme Tenne omae e e e e e a t Only SA SB and SC are used S cannot be used Programming Example for SHFR Function In the following example when input 10001 is closed passing power flow to the enable input and when a SHFR function is executed the bits in the 16 bit word which has the highest memory address of the group R0014 of 16 bit words is copied into the 16 bit memory location of R0060 specified by parameter P4 After the bits are stored the data stored as bits in each of the other words specified by registers R0011 R0012 RO013 automatically remove one 16 bit word at a time starting with R0013 R0013 moves to RO014 R0012 moves to R0013 and R0011 moves to RO0012 Also the 16 Bit word in P1 specified by R0001 is copied into R0011 After the Shift has been completed a reset operation takes place All of the 16 bit words stored in Registers Y R011 to R0014 specified by parameter P2 and set to zero however registers R0001 and R0060 specified by parameters P1 and P4 respectively remain unchanged P1 a43861 16BIT WORD 5 MT P y LOWEST STARTING o MEMORY LOCATION Pecos Le Lal 16 BIT WORD R0011 MEMORY LOCATION 5 y MEMORY LOCA 16 BIT WORD R0012 WHOSE NUMBER IS EQUAL TO y P3 LEN 16 BIT WORD R0013 v P4 R0014
327. hapter Freezing configuration Processing a change to the PCM s configuration takes 15 seconds or more Processing multiple parameter changes simultaneously takes the same time as processing a change to a single parameter Since changing several parameters at once is a common occurrence changes to individual parameters are remembered by the module but are not processed and do not take effect until specifically commanded to do so When a PCM parameter is changed an asterisk will appear before the module name on the top line of the HHP screen This indicates that the module s previous configuration has been frozen and that the module is not yet using the change s you have just made You can continue editing and this and all subsequent changes will be remembered by the module However if power is lost while a module s configuration is frozen the changes edits you have made made will be lost When the configuration for a module is frozen in this manner you can tell the system that editing of all of the parameters is complete by pressing the WRITE and ENT keys The edited changes are then processed all at once by the PCM and the asterisk will disappear from the display indicating that the new values are being used by the PCM and have been saved in the PLC s non volatile memory If you decide to abandon the changes that you have made so far they can be discarded by pressing the CLR and ENT keys If you do this the configuration
328. hat if CTR1 is set to ENABLE then screens 4 15 will appear or 19 30 for counter number 4 Note If the configured Series 90 Micro PLC is a DC IN DC OUT type this screen will appear only for the type A counter channel 4 if the PWM OUT4 option is disabled see screen 29 Screens 4 19 Count Output Enable RO 04 HSC lt S CTRx OUT ENABLE This series of three screens is used to set the counter output enable Screens 6 20 Counter Strobe Preload Selection R0 04 HSC lt S CTRx PRELOAD This series of three screens is used to set the counters as PRELOAD or STROBE type counting Screens 8 21 Strobe Edge R0 04 HSC lt S STB EDGEx POS These screens configure the strobe input edge to trigger on a positive or negative going signal 4 20 Hand Held Programmer for Series90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G Screens 9 22 Counter Edge RO 04 HSC lt S CTRx EDGE POS These screens configure the counter input edge to trigger on a positive or negative going signal Screens 10 23 Time Base Value R0 04 HSC lt S TIME BS x 1000 These screens allow you to enter the time base that is used in the the Counts Per Time Base calculation The default is 1000 milliseconds 1 second To to change the time base select the value using the numeric keys on the Hand Held Programmer and then press the ENT key to record the value Screens 11 24
329. he OEM protection field indicates whether or not OEM protection has been activated This field will be blank if OEM protection has not been activated it will contain the indicator OEM if it has been activated PLC State The PLC state field indicates whether the PLC is currently stopped or is running executing a program A leading lt character followed by S if the PLC is stopped or R if it is running indicates the state of the PLC Password The password field is where you input a 1 to 4 hexadecimal digit password corresponding to a given access level Four hexadecimal digits provide 65 536 unique passwords The same password can be used for more then one level passwords do not have to be unique The specification of leading zeros is significant 12 012 and 0012 are different passwords The Up and Down cursor keys can be used to display a lower or higher access level respectively For example if the current access level is 4 and you wish to change this to 2 you would press the Up cursor key twice and then press the ENT key to accept the change However since this is a change to a lower level you do not have to specify the password for level 2 in order to make the desired change LEVEL4 lt R Initial display Press the key Chapter 8 PLC Control and Status 8 5 Press the key Press the key To change to a higher level you must specify the password for the higher level in order to make the desired change For example i
330. he enable input a command block of data is sent to the communications TASK as specified in parameter P3 The command block begins at the reference specified by the parameter IN P1 The device to be communicated with is indicated by entering its rack and slot number for SYSID as specified in parameter P2 For additional information on command blocks please refer to the documentation supplied with your intelligent module The communications request may either send a message and wait for a reply or send a message and continue without waiting for a reply If a reply is requested a timeout period is used to resume program execution if the requested device does not respond If the command block specifies that the program will not wait for a reply the command block contents are sent to the receiving device and the program execution resumes immediately The timeout value is ignored The FT output is set to 0 false If the command block specifies that the program will wait for a reply the command block contents are sent to the receiving device and the CPU waits for a reply The maximum length of time the PLC will wait for the device to respond is specified in the command block If the device does not respond in that time program execution resumes The FT output is set to 1 true 9 220 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 The following table specifies which me
331. he following example when the enabling input 10001 is closed it passes power flow to the enable input and a new SVCRQ function number 7 specified in parameter P1 is called with the parameter block located starting at R0001 as specified in parameter P2 Output coil Q0001 is set true if the operation succeeds Ladder Diagram Representation l l RO001 PARM ae O0O007 FNC Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 FUNC 89 SVCRQ P1 7 P2 R0001 0003 OUT Q0001 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display 0001 INS lt S Initial display Press the key sequence 9 252 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G NS e LD Press the ai key 0002 INS lt S Press the key sequence 0002 INS lt S rund 7 p FUNC 89 SVCRQ Press the key 0002 SVCRQ lt S POI _ Press the key sequence 0002 SVCRQ lt S PO1 7_ Press the ai key 0002 SVCRQ lt S P02 Press the key sequence 0002 SVCRQ lt S P02 R 1_ Press the S key 0003 INS lt S Press the key sequence E ENT key 0004 INS lt S OUT OUTM Panu AQ Press the GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 253 A PID ISA PIDISA Function 86 PID IND PIDIND Function 87 9 254 Hand Held Progr
332. he selections Table B 1 Special System Registers Reference Display Format Description SRO01 Hexadecimal Type of PLC SRO02 Hexadecimal Revision code of the PLC s firmware SRO003 SRO06 Hexadecimal Encoded form of level 2 password SRO07 SRO10 Hexadecimal Encoded form of level 3 password SRO11 SRO14 Hexadecimal Encoded form of level 4 password SRO15 Signeddecimal User programmemorystillavailable SRO16 Signeddecimal Current scan time of the PLC in milliseconds B 2 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Appendix C List of Functions The following table lists the functions available for the Series 90 30 Hand Held Programmer A brief description of each function is included Table C 1 List of Functions Function Number 00 01 03 04 07 08 10 13 14 15 16 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 37 38 Function Mnemonic ENDSW NOOP JUMP MC LABEL ENDMCR M ONDTR OFDTR UPCTR DNCTR BITSET AND BITCLR vw 4 vw O x BITTST Xi BITPOS O ize Z Q SHL SHR ROL RO MOVIN BMOVI oi Description Terminateprogram logic execution Perform no operation Nested Jump Jump to prior next LABEL function Nested MCR Exert master control relay to next END MCR function Provides destination for JUMP with matching label number Terminate MCR function range Simple
333. he write protect from the Memory Card Remove locked status using Logicmaster 90 30 can not be removed with the HHP Stop the PLC then perform the operation again Complete or correct the instruction then press the ENT key again Make a correct substitution change or cancel the substitution change request Change the instruction sequence so that the stack depth usage is less then or equal to eight Correct the instruction sequence to make it valid This message is a warning only you must decide if itis an error Use the program check function to verify that there are multiple coil usages Choose a different reference address which has not been used previously or disable dual use checking and program the instruction step again Specify the correct password or OEM key Specify the valid module type Specify a valid board or module ID This failure typically occurs when the EEPROM chip is either not installed or not installed properly Install the chip or a new one and try again You must decide if the verification failure is ex pected or not 10 2 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Table 10 1 Non System Errors continued Error Description Corrective Action NO CARD Attempted a read write or verify operation with the Insert the MEM CARD into the Hand Held Pro MEM CARD when it was not inserted in the HHP grammer
334. his is not configurable RO 03 Q lt S Q16 Q0001 9Q0006 If the program is transferred to a Series 90 30 Model 311 Model 313 Model 331 Model 340 Model 341 or Model 351 the output module should be located in the second I O slot slot 03 on the Model 331 Model 340 Model 341 and Model 351 and slot 02 on the Model 311 and Model 313 7 Pressing the down arrow key again causes the first HSC screen to be displayed RO 04 HSC lt S I16 10497 10512 If the program is transferred to a Series 90 30 Model 311 Model 313 Model 331 Model 340 Model 341 or Model 351 the HSC module should be located in the third I O slot slot 04 on the Model 331 Model 340 Model 341 and Model 351 and slot 03 on the Model 311 and Model 313 The complete HSC configuration screens are discussed in Section 2 GFK 0402G Chapter 4 Series 90 Micro PLC Configuration 4 5 Storing the User Program Using the HHP Unlike other Series 90 30 PLC models or the Series 90 20 PLC the Series 90 Micro PLC requires that after a program has been edited you save the program to the user program in non volatile flash memory To do this perform the following steps 1 With the HHP showing a screen that resembles the following press the WRITE key XXXX lt S lt END OF PROGRAM gt The following screen will result WRITE MEM CARD lt S PRG CFG REG 2 Next press the key twice The following screen will appear WRITE USR PRG lt S ONLY
335. his must start with an LD element Type of function either Function 52 EQ or Function 72 DPEQ Parameter P1 input 1 one of the values to be compared This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored Parameter P2 input 2 the other value to be compared This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored The following tables specify which memory types are valid for each of the parameters for the EQ and DPEQ functions Allowable Memory Types for EQ Function 52 ee a BS E E Mea Fa Allowable Memory Types for DPEQ Function 72 ET a CC PC a ER eam a A Note that double precision constants are constrained to the range 32 768 to 32 767 9 92 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Programming Example for Equal Function This example of programming uses the EQ function In this example when input I0001 is closed passing power to the enable input the data located in the 16 bits of register 250 parameter P1 is compared to the data represented by the 16 bits of the discrete input 17 through 32 parameter P2 117 If these two values are equal then power flow will be passed onto output coil Q0001 For example assume that the value in register 250 is decimal value 156 which is 0000000010011100 in binary In order to have power flow pass through this function when
336. i P02 M 1_ GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 239 Press the J key 0005 INS lt S Press the key sequence ajaja OUTM AQ Press the T key 0006 INS lt S Enhanced DO I O Function for Model 331 and Higher If the Enhanced DO I O function is used in a program the program should not be loaded by a version of Logicmaster 90 30 20 software earlier than 4 01 An enhanced version of the DO I O DOIO function is available for Release 4 20 or later of all models except the Model 211 CPU This enhanced version of the DOIO function can only be used on a single discrete input or discrete output 8 point 16 point or 32 point module The ALT parameter identifies the slot in the main CPU rack that the module is located in For example a constant value of 2 in this parameter indicates to the CPU that it is to execute the enhanced version of the DOIO function block for the module in slot 2 Note The only checking done by the enhanced DOIO function block is to check the state of the module in the slot specified to see if the module is okay The enhanced DOIO function only applies to modules located in the main CPU rack Therefore the ALT parameter must be between 2 and 5 for a 5 slot rack or 2 and 10 for a 10 slot rack The start and end references must be either I or Q These references specify the first and last reference the module is configured for For example if a 16 point
337. ically used to read data from a BCD format device such as a thumbwheel and make the data usable by the CPU When the logic controlling the enable input to this function passes power flow to the function s enable input the function is executed and a new BCD to integer conversion function will take place During the execution of a BCD to Integer conversion the 16 bits stored in the memory location specified by parameter P1 are split into four groups Each group contains four bits which represent one BCD binary coded decimal number The LSB Least Significant Bit being the lowest discrete memory location or the first bit of a 16 bit memory location specified by parameter P1 Each of the four bit BCD numbers will be converted into a single digit decimal number from 0 through 9 The total 16 bit word is thus converted into a decimal number four digits long The binary representation not BCD of this decimal number is stored in the memory location specified by parameter P2 When each of the four BCD numbers converts to a single decimal number from 0 through 9 and the enable input to this function is receiving power flow power flow will pass through this function to another function or a coil If any of the BCD numbers converts to a decimal value from 10 through 15 the value stored in the location specified by parameter P2 will be the binary representation of the decimal number 32768 which is also 8000 Hexadecimal Logic controlling cnan o EEE 2
338. ice from a different CPU model use the following steps In PROGRAM mode press the key READ MEM ERD HSS Press the key READ EEPROM lt S To select which items will be read Press the ENT key READ EEPROM lt S J PRG CFG REG To read the logic program configuration and registers saved on the card Press the ENT key READ EEPROM lt S J PRG CFG REG XXXX The address at the end of the lower line will be continually updated as the read operation progresses If the read is completed successfully the HHP will display CHANGE MODEL lt S lt CLR gt N lt ENT gt Y Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G To change the model of the configuration being read into the PLC the device contents will be unaffected Press the ENT key READ OK lt S If you do not want to change the model number of the new configuration thereby rejecting the data and aborting the read use this step Press the k READ ABORTED lt S If the read operation is aborted the contents of the memory areas in the PLC which were being read from the device will be cleared For example if program and configuration is being read and you elect to not change the model number both the program and configuration will be cleared EEPROM Source at Power Up If the EEPROM is chosen as the program source during the power up sequence then the contents of the
339. icro Programmable ControllersUser s Manual February1996 GFK 0402G Chapter GFK 0402G 6 Program Edit The Series 90 30 20 Micro Hand Held Programmer supports four major operating modes Of these four modes Program mode is used to create alter monitor and debug Statement List SL logic programs entered by the user CPU 351 operations The only operations supported by the Model 351 CPU in PROGRAM mode are writing to and reading from the user flash memory You must use Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro programming software to edit the CPU 351 Interaction Read Write and Verify with an EEPROM or Series 90 Memory Card is also possible in program mode For information on performing a read write or verify operation please refer to chapter 2 Operation Program mode allows you to Program a boolean logic function or function block instruction Specify a memory reference type Specify an instruction step Specify a decimal possibly signed or hexadecimal constant or value Change the display format of a monitored value between signed decimal and hexadecimal Begin an instruction step insertion operation Move between instruction steps Move between function parameters Search for a given target Delete an instruction step Replace an instruction and or reference with the PLC running Abort or cancel the current operation or user input Check the program for instruction and or reference usage errors Clear program mem
340. ies90 30 20 MicroProgrammable Controllers User s Manual as compared to the previous version GFK 0402F Page 3 12 added three paragraphs at bottom of page regarding default I O configuration Page 3 8 added Note in center of page stating that the dual use checking parameter is not used with the model 351 CPU Pages 5 1 and 5 2 illustrations updated to show Standard power supply Page 5 10 separate heading added Assigning Reference Addresses to I O Modules to make this discussion a separate area that can easily be referenced for other modules as needed Also added new second paragraph beginning with When the CPU Pages 5 15 5 28 5 33 5 38 and 5 43 added paragraph pointing to Assigning Reference Addresses to I O Modules located on page 5 10 Page 9 50 corrected description of function in paragraph at top of page and corrected function block in Ladder Diagram Representation to correctly read 1 seconds Page 9 137 Added paragraph beginning with If the number of bits to be shifted Page 9 143 Added paragraph beginning with If the number of bits to be shifted GFK 0402G iii Preface Using This Manual iv The information in this manual is arranged as chapters that correspond to the main features or operating modes of the programmer Chapter 1 Introduction This chapter presents an overview of the Hand Held Programmer Chapter 2 Opera
341. if communications with the PLC is lost NORMAL indicates that the outputs will continue to operate under control of the counter FRCOFF causes the outputs to be forced off if communications is lost while HOLD causes the High Speed Counter to retain the last state that the output points held before communication was lost GFK 0402G Chapter 4 Series 90 Micro PLC Configuration 4 15 A4 Counter Specific Screens The following screens will be displayed when ALL A is selected in Screen 1 Screens 8 23 38 53 Strobe Edge RO 04 HSC Vx x lt S CTRx STB POS These screens configure the strobe input edge to trigger on a positive or negative going signal Screens 9 24 39 54 Counter Strobe Edges RO 04 HSC Vx x lt S STB EDGE x POS This configuration selects whether the strobe edge will trigger on a positive going or negative going signal Screens 3 18 33 48 Counter Enable RO 04 HSC lt S CTRx DISABLE This series of four screens enables or disables the specified counter This means that for each counter enabled it will use certain portions of PLC reference memory and PLC input and output resources If CTR1 is set to ENABLE screens 4 through15 will appear or 19 through 30 for counter number 2 34 through 45 for counter number 3 and 49 through 60 for counter number 4 Note If the configured Series 90 Micro PLC isa DC IN DC OUT type this screen will only appear if the PWM OUTx option and the PULSE OUTx opti
342. ifferent module parameter or field in I O configuration mode Display password for lower or higher access level view modify OEM key in protectionmode Move between subroutines when in Subroutine Declaration mode Complete an operation or user input CLR Abort or cancel the current operation or user input 2 4 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Ladder Logic Keys The gray Ladder Logic keys are located on the upper portion of the keypad These keys are used to enter the program elements that make up the user s program A description of these keys is provided in the following table Table 2 2 Ladder Logic Keys GFK 0402G Key Description o ee Sy ET RST Programa boolean logic instruction in program mode D E F AND OR NOT BLK FUNC Program a function or function block instruction in program mode ProgramTMR ONDTR UPCTR DNCTR function blocks in program mode Ul UPCTR Change data mode display formattotimer counter automatically select ONDTR DNCTR register table if not displayed in data mode This does not apply to the FUNC key A B Q C M Al AQ T S Specify a memory reference type in program and data mode R I AhndQ AQ and G specify module types in configuration mod
343. ight If no mnemonic is displayed the current function number is not defined The key may be used to sequence through function numbers in increasing order only For functions and function blocks with multiple Boolean inputs the logic for each input is programmed in the top down order in which they appear in the function or function block definition For the ONDTR function block this means the enable input logic is programmed first A Function Block and its associated parameters are programmed into a single CPU logic memory location called a step This step contains the function type and each parameter of this function The Up and Down cursor keys are used to view the next and previous steps respectively of the program from the current instruction step Function parameters cannot be viewed with these keys The Function Type is programmed as the first item in a step then the Left and Right cursor keys are used to view the next and previous parameters respectively of a function They are only valid if the current instruction step is a function New instruction steps may not be viewed with these keys 9 36 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Oo y y y YO Section 1 Timers and Counters Timers and Counters have operating values as well as programming parameters One of the operating values is also the same as a programming parameter The operating
344. ill display the previous step Pressing the Right cursor key when step 0003 is displayed on the screen will display the first parameter of instruction step 0003 6 4 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 6 Pressing the Right cursor key again will display the next parameter of this same step Pressing the Left cursor key will display the previous parameter Inserting an Instruction Step GFK 0402G A new instruction step or series of steps may be inserted before the current instruction step by pressing the INS key A blank step is displayed with an underline cursor indicating where to insert the new instruction New instruction steps may only be inserted when the PLC is stopped as indicated by lt S in the upper right corner of the display screen To insert a new instruction step follow this procedure 1 Use the cursor keys to display the step where the insertion is to occur If this is the start of anew program the display screen appears as 0001 lt S lt END OF PROGRAM gt 2 Press the INS key to enable the insert mode of operation You may now proceed to insert the new instruction as described in the following paragraphs 3 After entering each instruction step or function parameter press the ENT key to accept it To complete the insert of the current instruction and continue inserting additional instructions press th
345. imal Length signeddecimal TargetLocation signeddecimal Search Not Equal To INT SRNEI Array Start Address signed decimal Function 107 Index Into Array signeddecimal Object of Search signeddecimal Length signeddecimal TargetLocation signeddecimal Search Not Equal To DINT SRNEDI Array Start Address signed decimal Function 108 Index Into Array signeddecimal Object of Search signeddecimal Length signeddecimal TargetLocation signeddecimal Search Less Than Byte SRLTB P1 Array Start Address AR signed decimal Function 109 P2 Index Into Array NXIN signeddecimal P3 Object of Search IN signeddecimal P4 Length LEN signeddecimal P5 TargetLocation NX OUT signeddecimal GFK 0402G Appendix D Function Parameters D 5 gt Table D 1 Function Parameters continued Logicmaster Default Function Parameter Abbreviation Display Format Search Less Than Word SRLTW Array Start Address signed decimal Function 110 Index Into Array signeddecimal Object of Search signeddecimal Length signeddecimal TargetLocation signeddecimal Search Less Than INT SRETI Array Start Address signed decimal Function 111 Index Into Array signeddecimal Object of Search signeddecimal Length signeddecimal TargetLocation signeddecimal Search Less Than DINT SRLTDI Array Start Address signed decimal Function 112 Index Into Array signeddecimal Object of Search signedd
346. in the range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 no overflow To prevent multiple divisions from taking place it is advisable to have the power flow to the enable input controlled by a contact from a one shot element OUT or OUT P1 Input 1 B P2 Input 2 P3 Q quotient Logic for controlling enab1 BERAE ove flow output to power flow a coil or another function Value to be divided P1 P3 The result is stored here Value to be divided by P2 12 divisor dividend quotient P1 divided by P2 result stored in P3 Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 5 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element Type of function either Function 66 DIV or Function 67 DPDIV Parameter P1 input 1 value to be divided dividend This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored Parameter P2 input 2 the divisor This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored Parameter P3 Q memory location where the result quotient is to be stored The following tables specify which memory types are valid for each of the parameters for the DIV and DPDIV functions Allowable Memory Types for DIV Function 66 Ea CH I SC EG T BO i ee ee ee ee Ee ee oe Ger a A ie ee Ee ee e Allowable Memory Types for DPDIV Function 67 mm e e e E Te
347. indicates no STRT parameter P1 Reset step number for the pointer to move to P2 Memory address location for the group of bits P3 Number of bit steps within the group P4 Lowest numbered register of the three sequentially numbered control registers Programming Example for SEQB Function In this example there are 14 memory locations specified by parameter P3 which are memory location Q0017 through Q0032 specified by parameter P2 in the stage bit sequencer The pointer will move to step 12 specified by parameter P1 when I0002 is on passing power flow to the reset input The pointer will increment through the step numbers if 10003 is on and decrement through the step numbers if 10003 is off The operating values are stored in registers R0001 RO002 and RO0003 as specified by parameter P4 GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 215 2 Memory locations notin the stage bit Pointer sequencer but are in the 16 point location boundary are affected by the reset execution Step Number 14 13 12 11 10 9 Before execution EDAC CAOCOCENOCANE Memory Location 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 Q Pointer location Step Number 14 13 12 11 10 9 weon Em EN CN CC CC CH CCC Incrementing Memory 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 Q Location Pointer location 4 Step Number 14 13 12 11 10 9 LON After Reset EC EN donda Memory Location 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 1
348. ing Subroutine call function zoom 8 13 Aes 90 20 PLC EA program to a Se declaration mode E edit locked 8 14 Type A counter specific screens for Micro protection levels Plc view locked Type B ea specific screens for Micro Ic 4 20 Subroutine call function 90 9 266 ple 4 20 Subroutines Up counter UPCTR function 15 User PROM option p 11 User reference discrete internal 1 4 Substitution groups on line User references System configuration default analog inputs 1 3 5 analog outputs System register references discrete inputs System registers special discrete outputs discrete references System status references 1 4 7 y Hoi discrete temporary global data T system registers system status Table Data transitions cancel change 7 8 Using the HHP change clear table y Table data override discrete reference Valid on line changes Index 10 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G Verify function Viewing subroutines 9 8 View locked subroutine W Write function Index Index 11 Preface The Hand Held Programmer User s manual for the Series 90 30 90 20 and Micro Programmable Controllers describes how to install and use this compact device to create ladder logic user programs for the Series 90 30 90 20 and Micro Programmable Logic Controllers PLC Revisions to This Manual Following is a list of the revisions and corrections to this version of the Hand Held Programmer forSer
349. ing I1 and the corresponding bitin string Exclusive OR I2 are different place a 1 in the corresponding locationin the output bit string NOT LogicalInvert Set the state of each bit in output bit string Q to the opposite state of the corresponding bit in bit string I1 SHL Shift Left Shift all the bits in a word or string of words to the left by a specified number of places SHR Shift Right Shift all the bits in a word or string of words to the right by a specified number of places ROL Rotate Left Rotate all the bits in a string a specified number of places tothe left ROR Rotate Right Rotate all the bits in a string a specified number of places to the right BITSET Set a bit in a bit string to 1 BITCLR Clear a bit within a string by setting that bit to 0 BITTST Bit Test Test a bit within a bit string to determine whether that bit iscurrently 1 or 0 BITPOS Locate a bit set to 1 in a bit string MSKCMPW Masked Compare the bits in the first string with the corresponding MSKCMPD Compare bits in the second GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 121 9 Bitwise and AND Function 23 The bitwise and function AND is a conditionally executed function which bitwise ands one 16 bit word with another When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable EN input the function is executed by the CPU and a new bitwise AND function will take place The AND
350. ing table R EN EN Current Previous Current Bit Sequencer Execution Execution Execution Execution False Bit sequencer does not execute False True Bitsequencerincrements decrementsby1 False True Bit sequencer does not execute False True True Bit sequencer does not execute True True Bit sequencer reset True True Bit sequencer reset True True True Bit sequencer reset The stage bit sequencer has operating values as well as programming parameters One of the operating values has the same value as a programming parameter The operating values are e CURRENTSTEP The number of the step where the pointer is currently located NUMBER OF STEPS How many steps or single bit memory locations there are in the group of single bit memory locations making up the stage bit sequencer This value is also a programming parameter e CONTROL WORD This is the information used by the CPU to control this function These values are located in and occupy three sequentially numbered register locations in the register memory The lowest numbered register of the three is the defining location for this stage bit sequencer The address for this register must be on a three register boundary Thus if you subtract one from this register number the lowest of the three sequential registers the new number must be divisible by three i e the registers must be grouped as follows R1 R4 R7 R10 etc Chapter 9 Statement List Program
351. instruction step follow this procedure 1 Use the cursor keys to display the step where the deletion is to occur 2 Press the DEL key to enable the delete mode of operation 6 10 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 6 If you press the DEL key only once to enable the delete mode of operation and then press the ENT key you will delete the current instruction step and terminate the delete mode 3 Press DEL a second time to delete the current instruction step and remain in delete mode after the deletion is completed 4 Press CLR to abort delete mode The cursor keys are used to display the step where the deletion is to occur In this example the element to be deleted is in step 0002 0002 lt S OR NOT 10002 J Initial display Press the oct key 0002 DEL lt S OR NOT 10002 J DEL is blinking Press the key Func 10 TMR is the element that was in step 0003 and has now been moved down to step 0002 Deleting a Program GFK 0402G To clear all of the program logic instruction steps from memory without affecting any other memory such as data or configuration press the following keys in the order shown When in the program mode of operation the CPU must be stopped A 3 z oe 0001 lt S lt END OF PROGRAM gt The CLR key may be used to cancel the memory clear request before pressing the DEL key L
352. ion 33 9 155 Bit set BITSET function 22 Bit shift left SHL function 30 Bit shift right SHR function 31 Bit test BITTST function 26 9 169 Bitwise and AND function 23 9 129 Bitwise exclusive or XOR function 27 9 130 Bitwise not NOT function 29 9 134 Bitwise or OR function 25 9 126 Block clear BLKCL function 44 9 198 Block move BMOVE BMOVI and BMOVW function 38 and 43 9 192 C Cable for HHP Cancel configuration operation Cancel OEM key change Canceling a configuration operation ala ig a data value change operation 7 8 Canceling a mode change Catalog numbers EEPROM EPROM 2 2 Clearing all overrides 7 11 Clearing memory 2 7 Communications Index 1 Index Index 2 Communications module enhanced ge nius 5 18 Communications module genius Communications request COMMREQ function 88 9 220 Configuration analog I O modules 16 channel current input 16 channel voltage input 8 channelvoltage current input 5 37 eo outputcombo 42 cancel current operation continuous counting 4 17 count output enable counter direction 4 17 counter edge counter enable 4 16 counter mode counter strobe preload selection deleting discrete module 5 10 generic module genius communications module 5 18 high limit high speed counter Micro plc Series 90 30 1 9 I Olinkinterface module low limit 4 18 Micro plc high speed counter h 7
353. ion Groups 6 6 6 eens 6 19 Table 7 1 Keypad Functionality in Data Mode 0 66 eee 7 2 Table 7 2 Screen Format of a Discrete Reference Table in Binary Format 505 7 3 Table 7 3 Screen Format of a Discrete Reference Table in Signed Decimal Format 7 3 Table 7 4 Screen Format of a Discrete Reference Table in Hexadecimal Format 7 3 Table 7 5 Screen Format of a Register Table in Binary Format 666 ee cece eee eee 7 4 Table 7 6 Screen Format for Viewing a R Table in Timer CounterFormat 55 7 4 Table 7 7 Screen Format for Displaying Messages in Binary Format 0 000 e eee 7 5 Table 7 8 Screen Format for Displaying Messages in Signed Decimal and Hexadecimal Format 7 5 xiv Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Contents Table 7 9 Screen Format for Displaying Messages in Timer CounterFormat 04 7 5 Table 7 10 Special System Registers arcieri rie eri e aa E een nes 7 11 Table 8 1 Password Protection sioi uriene e cece eee eee eens 8 1 Table 8 2 OEM Protection cece x ea a RE E di deniers Radia henna ea nes eS 8 2 Table 8 3 Keypad Functionality in Protection Mode 0 eee eens 8 4 Table 8 4 Current Access L vel orreee Wie ee mele reri eeii PESE cde EEEE EE teas 8 5 Table 8 5 Higher Access evel misit toe arebat uisi si aah
354. is displayed as the first two digits following the first I on the second line of the display Note This field cannot be changed with the Hand Held programmer However it can be changed using the Logicmaster 90 30 software configurator function The Hand Held Programmer will always reflect the currently active length of the status field Pressing the ENT key will allow the PLC to select the starting address of the status data You can select a specific starting address by pressing the key sequence for the desired address and pressing the ENT key For example to specify the starting address as 117 press the key sequence 1 7 ENT The following screen will be displayed RO 03 HI DEN C gt S I140 117 156 GFK 0402G Chapter 5 I O Configuration 5 33 Selecting Al Reference After the starting I address has been selected pressing the ENT key again will cause the following screen to be displayed RO 03 HI DEN C gt S AI16 AI_ This screen allows you to select the starting address for the AI reference Note that the length of the status field 16 is displayed as the first two digits following the first AI on the second line of the display Note This field cannot be changed with the Hand Held programmer However it can be changed using the Logicmaster 90 30 software configurator function The Hand Held Programmer will always reflect the currently active length of the status field In the AI field you can select the next avai
355. ision Addition DPADD Function 61 Two addition functions are available The signed addition function ADD is a conditionally executed function which adds one signed integer value to another and the double precision signed addition function DPADD is a conditionally executed function which adds one signed double word value to another When power flow to the enable EN input occurs and the function is executed by the CPU a new signed addition for ADD or double precision signed addition for DPADD will take place During a signed addition or double precision signed addition execution the value located in P1 input 1 is added to the value in P2 input 2 The result of this addition is stored in the memory location specified by P3 Q The ADD and DPADD functions operate on INT signed integer and DINT double precision integer data respectively The INT ADD function is Function 60 and the DINT ADD function is function 61 ADD Function Description The three values specified by parameters P1 P2 and P3 must be the same data type 16 bit two s complement signed integers and must be within the range 32768 to 32767 If the addition results in overflow a value outside of the range 32768 to 32767 the results of the addition will be set to the largest possible value either 32768 or 32767 The sign is set to show the direction of the overflow This function will pass power flow when there is power flow to the enable input and the resul
356. isting of only a single instruction Many functions and function blocks have parameters where a constant is a valid memory type You can specify whether a constant should be entered as a decimal or hexadecimal value by pressing the HEX DEC key By default the entry base is always decimal Pressing the HEX DEC key toggles between the two bases Many functions and function blocks have word size parameters where a discrete reference is a valid memory type The discrete reference address must be on a byte boundary for example I1 I9 1I17 I33 If you enter a reference address not on a byte boundary the software will automatically adjust the reference address downwards to the nearest byte boundary The message REF ADJ is displayed to warn you of the adjustment which has been made and the next parameter screen is not displayed as part of this operation For example if you tried to enter I2 as a reference address it would be automatically adjusted down to the nearest word boundary I1 The current screen would be displayed showing the adjustment made along with an informative message indicating that the change was made 0002 REF ADJ lt S P1 I0001_ For all double precision functions the parameters are double size words each of these parameters occupies two registers 32 bits the one specified and the next higher register For TMR ONDTR UPCTR and DNCTR function blocks and the SEQB function the location parameters are t
357. ives power the array is searched starting at AR input NX This is the starting address of the array AR plus the index into this array input NX The search continues until the array element whose value is not equal to the search object IN is found or until the end of the array is reached If an array element is found the output parameter FD is set to true and output parameter output NX is set to the relative position of this element within the array If no element is found with a value not equal to IN before the end of the array is reached then output parameter FD is set to false and output parameter output NX is set to zero The valid values for the input NX are 0 to LEN 1 This value increments by one at the time of execution Therefore the values of the output NX are 1 to LEN If the value of the input NX is out of range lt 0 or w LEN its value is set to the default value of zero The function parameters for the Search Not Equal To functions are shown in the following illustration The form of the function is the same for all Search Not Equal To functions the only difference being the data type Logic for controlling enable BAES M power flow Starting address of array P1 Set to 1 if element found 0 if not found P4 Length of array Index into array P2 P5 Set to position in array of element Object of search P3 9 272 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro
358. key 0004 BMOVI lt S P03 _ GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 195 Press the key sequence 0004 BMOVI lt S P03 1 Press the ay key 0004 BMOVI lt S P04 _ Press the key sequence 0004 BMOVI lt S P04 2_ Press the ai key 0004 BMOVI lt S P05 _ Press the key sequence 0004 BMOVI lt S P05 2_ Press the A key 0004 BMOVI lt S P06 _ Press the key sequence 0004 BMOVI lt S P06 1 Press the S key 0004 BMOVI lt S PO7_ 9 196 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G Press the key sequence Press the ay key Press the key sequence i E Press the A key Press the key sequence o B AQ OUT OUTM A Press the A key Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language LJ 0004 BMOVI P07 1_ 0004 BMOVI P08 0004 BMOVI P08 R 10_ 0005 INS 0005 INS OUT Q 1_ 0006 INS lt S lt S lt S lt S lt S lt S 9 197 9 Block Clear BLKCL Function 44 The block clear function BLKCL is a conditionally executed function which fills an array of 16 bit words with the constant zero When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable EN input the function is executed by the CPU During the execution all of the bits in a word
359. l Press the CLR key again to view the last screen displayed before the key sequence was entered to clear program memory Chapter 6 Program Edit 6 11 o Searching for an Instruction Element The search function may be used to search for Aninstruction Aninstruction plus reference address A reference address A coilinstruction with or without reference address A constant A particular instruction step To search for an element follow this procedure 1 2 6 The search operation is initiated by pressing the SRCH key Then identify the element to be searched for Q12 in example 0001 SRCH lt S 0001 SRCH lt S Q12 Press the ENT key to begin the search operation The search begins in the forward direction with the next step or parameter immediately following the current instruction step or parameter If the lt END OF PROGRAMS step is reached before the element is located the search will wrap to the beginning of the program and continue with instruction step 0001 Use the SRCH and ENT key sequence to search for the next occurrence of the search without specifying a new element to search for If the search proves unsuccessful the current instruction step or parameter will remain displayed on the LCD screen along with a NOT FND message 0003 NOT FND lt S LD I0001 A search for an instruction step number greater then the number of steps in the program will be successfully
360. l be lost 1 Configure the CPU to PRG SRC RAM and REG SRC RAM see NOTE at end of this procedure 2 Remove power from the PLC 3 Remove the CPU from its socket on the baseplate 4 Remove the faceplate and LED lens cover from the CPU The PROM socket is now accessible at the bottom of the CPU board 5 Turn the screw at the center top of the socket counter clockwise so that the slot lines up with the O This allows an EEPROM or EPROM to be inserted 2 12 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 6 Insert the EEPROM or PROM into the socket with the notch facing the screw 7 Turn the screw clockwise so that the slot lines up with the C The EEPROM or EPROM is now locked into the socket 8 Set the jumper plug at the bottom of the socket for EEPROM 3 2 or PROM 2 1 as required 9 Replace the faceplate 10 Insert the CPU into its connector in the baseplate 11 Turn on power to the PLC 12 The CPU can now be configured to PRG SRC EEPROM and REG SRC EEPROM Note If not configured for Program PRG and Register REG from RAM when power is applied after a blank EEPROM is inserted the contents of the blank PROM will be loaded into the RAM memory The CPU can be forced to load Program and Registers from RAM if on power up using the Hand Held Programmer the LD and NOT keys are depressed simultaneously and held depressed during power up until the
361. lable address the default by pressing the ENT key or by entering a specific address To enter a specific address press the starting reference number keys and the ENT key for example 3 5 then ENT RO 03 HI DEN C gt S AI16 AI035 AI051 You can press the CLR key at any time to abort the configuration you have just selected and return the slot to EMPTY Removing Module From Configuration If required this module can be removed from the current configuration Assume that the module is currently configured in rack 0 slot 3 It can be deleted with the following sequence RO 03 HI DEN C gt S AI16 ATI_ To delete the module press the DEL ENT key sequence The display will then be 5 34 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable ControllersUser s Manual February1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G Selecting Input Channel Ranges The range for each of the 16 channels can be displayed and selected or changed as described below Assume that the AI address is as previously selected initialdisplay RO 03 HI DEN C gt S AI16 AI035 AI051 To display the channel ranges press the key The display will show Channel 1 or the currently selected channel and the first available range RO 03 HI DEN C gt S CHANNEL 1 4 20 You can toggle through the range for each channel by pressing the key Each range will be displayed as shown The range selected is the one currently displayed RO 03 HI DEN C gt
362. ld change your expected results if you set it up to execute every sweep and the sweep is less than 10 msec In such a case the PID function will not run until enough sweeps have occurred to accumulate an elapsed time of 10 msec e g if the sweep time is 9 msec the PID function will execute every other sweep with an elapsed time of 18 msec for every time it executes Table 9 8 PID Function Block Data Data Item Description LoopNumber An unsigned integer that provides a common identification in the PLC with the loop number defined by an operator interface device The loop number is displayed under the block address when logic is monitored from the Logicmaster 90 30 software Use of the loop number is optional Algorithm An unsigned integer that is set by the PLC to identify what algorithm is being used by the function block The ISA algorithm is defined as algorithm 1 and the interactive algorithm is identified as algorithm 2 Sample Period The time in increments of 0 01 seconds between executions of the function block The Dead Band ProportionalGain Derivative Integral Rate Bias Upper and Lower Clamps Minimum Slew Time Config Word ManualCommand PID function is calculated at this interval The function compensates for the actual time elapsed since the last execution within 100 microseconds If this value is set to 0 the function is executed each time it is enabled however it is restricted to a minimum of 1
363. le if register 200 has the value of 50 and and the decimal value of AI33 through A164 is 70 After input 1 closes the value in register 203 will be 20 50 70 20 Ladder Diagram Representation I0001 M0001 I SUB DINT l l R0200 I1 QI R0203 l l SAI0033 12 Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 OUT MO0001 0003 LD MO0001 0004 FUNC 63 DPSUB P1 R200 P2 AI33 P3 R0203 0005 OUT Q0001 After pressing Key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display 0001 INS lt S Initial display Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 69 9 70 Press the sequence Press the key eo 5 Press the key sequence 7A OUT OUTM Press the key Press the key sequence LILI Press the key M T Ea Press the key sequence JL Press the key FUNC 1 0002 INS lt S 0003 INS lt S 0004 INS lt S 0004 INS lt S FUNC 63_ DPSUB 0004 DPSUB lt S P0O1 _ Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Press the key sequence 0004 DPSUB lt S R o 0 P01 R 200_ Press the ay key 0004 DPSUB lt S PO2_ Press the key sequence 0004 DPSUB lt S Ay Ay P02 AI 33_ rE LJ Le Press the S key 0004 DPSUB l
364. left unspecified before the next one is programmed The description of each function and function block in chapter 8 includes a listing of the valid memory types for each parameter of a particular function or function block Replacing an Instruction Step When inserting or changing an instruction step you may wish to replace the instruction type operand or both The current instruction step may be edited or replaced by overwriting part or all of the instruction step Existing instruction steps are normally only replaced when the PLC is stopped as indicated by lt S in the upper right corner of 6 6 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 6 the display screen However a special form of replacement called substitution change is supported when the PLC is running Note In order to replace program logic the access privilege must be level 4 if the PLC is running or at least level 3 if the PLC is stopped OEM protection cannot be asserted If either of these conditions is not met replacement changes will not be allowed To replace or edit the current instruction step follow this procedure 1 Use the cursor keys to display the step where the edit is to occur 2 You may now proceed to edit or replace the instruction as described in the following paragraphs The procedure for replacing part of a basic element differs somewhat from that of a function or fun
365. llowed Only positive constants are allowed except 1 which indicates no preset parameter Timer Accuracy P1 The timer accuracy parameter indicates the time base of the timer A constant of 1 indicates a time base of 0 01 second 10 indicates a time base of 0 1 seconds and 100 indicates a time base of 001 seconds Other values are not accepted as a valid parameter value Preset Time P2 The preset time parameter indicates the time period for the off delay timer It is indicated by a positive only 16 bit twos complement signed integer 0 32 767 A constant of 1 indicates that no preset time parameter is specified In this case the preset time will be accessed from the timer s Operating Registers Timer Location P3 The timer location gives the address of a three word data structure used by the timer function block GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 49 Programming Example for OFDTR Function In the following example power flow will be passed through the OFDTR to turn on Q0001 when 1001 is enabled After 2 5 seconds Q0001 goes from being closed to opened The Time Base or Timer Accuracy is a tenth of a second 1 the Preset is a constant of 25 and the Location of this OFDTR is Register 1 Ladder Diagram Representation l 0001 Q0001 0 R0001 Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 FUNC 14 OFDTR P1 10 P2 25 P3 R0001 0003 OUT Q0001 After pressin
366. lock will not update the value of SP and will execute based upon the SP value in the data structure The purpose of the override bit is to allow the operator interface device to take control of the Boolean inputs into the function block so that they may be controlled by the operator interface device In addition since SP is not updated the operator interface unit can also set override and take control of the set point Enable Manual Raise Lower These three bits represent the state of the three Boolean inputs into the function block when the override bit is 0 Otherwise they can be manipulated by an outside source The enable bit will track the enable input into the function block This is a signed word value representing the set point input to the function block This is a signed word value representing the CV output of the function block This is a signed word value representing the process variable input to the function block This is a signed word value representing the output of the function block before the application of the optional inversion If no output inversion is configured and the output polarity bit in the control word is set to 0 this value will equal the CV output If inversion is selected and the output polarity bit is set to 1 this value will equal the negative of the CV output Used internally for storage of intermediate values Do not write to this location Used internally for storage of intermediate value
367. lt CABLE TO PLC IC693CBL303 6 FEET 2 METERS Figure 1 1 Series 90 30 20 Micro Hand Held Programmer 1 8 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Chapter Operation 2 The setup and installation of the Hand Held Programmer is easy The Hand Held Programmer connects to a Series 90 30 90 20 or Micro Programmable Logic Controller through a cable attachment The cable catalog number IC693CBL303 6 feet 2 meters long attaches to both the Hand Held Programmer and the programmable controller through a latching connector one on each end of the cable Power is supplied to the Hand Held Programmer from the PLC through a connection in the cable The cable connection also provides an indication to the PLC that a Hand Held Programmer is attached as the programming device rather then a different programmer since this is the same connection for the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro programmer a43107 Hand held Programmer Series 90 30 PLC pi Cable IC693CBL303 f CuO Figure 2 1 Hand Held Programmer Connection to a Series 90 30 PLC a44549 Series 90 20 PLC Hand held Programmer Cable IC693CBL303 Figure 2 2 Hand
368. lue Register 1 16 bit positions 16 1 Register 1 4 13 1211 4 BCD digits 1613 9 5 1 S Sign bit 0 positive 1 negative 9 30 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Standard Functions and Function Blocks The standard functions and function blocks of the Statement List programming lan guage are listed in the following table The abbreviation mnemonic function number function name and description of each is included All functions are conditionally executed except for the LABEL END MCR NOOP and ENDSW functions Table 9 4 Statement List Language Standard Functions and Function Blocks Abbreviation Page FunctionNo FunctionName Description 9 xx Timers and Counters TMR 10 Stopwatchtimer Providessimple stopwatch timing ONDTR 13 On delay timer Provides on delay timing OFDTR 14 Off delaytimer Providesoff delaytiming UPCTR 15 Up counter Providesincremental counting DNCTR 16 Down counter Provides decremental counting ArithmeticFunctions ADD 60 Signedaddition Add one signed word or double word 62 DPADD 61 Double precision signed addition value to another 62 SUB 62 Signedsubtraction Subtract one signed word or double word 67 DPSUB 63 Double precision signed subtraction value from another 67 MUL 64 Signedmultiplication Multiply one signed word or double 72
369. m logic data tables configuration passwords and the OEM key To do this press and hold the CLR and M T keys simultaneously while the PLC is powering up A ROM CHECK OK or RAM CHECK OK message is displayed on the Hand Held Programmer screen upon receiving power Double key strokes must be held until after the ROM CHECK OK and RAM CHECK OK message is cleared Note that power up sequences from the HHP are not processed for warm start powerups Do not press the CLR and M T keys to clear memory if an OEM program is in RAM memory All configuration data and logic will be lost The PLC can be configured to download a logic program during start up from EEPROM located in the EEPROM socket on the baseplate of the Model 311 and in the CPU module in a Model 331 to RAM instead of running from the existing program in RAM You can override this option when testing changes to the program so that the program in RAM is retained and not overwritten by the program in EEPROM To use RAM memory regardless of the configuration press LD and NOT keys simultaneously while the PLC is powering up The PLC can be configured to power up in RUN or STOP mode or in the same mode it was powered down in This configured state can be overridden to ensure that the PLC will power up in STOP mode regardless of the configuration To do this press NOT and RUN simultaneously during power up until the RAM CHECK OK ROM CHECK OK message is displayed on the screen Table 2 5 Po
370. memory location where the shifted bits are to be stored If the length plus the memory address exceed the total number of words for that memory type DATA ERR will be displayed on the screen of the Hand Held Programmer The number of bit locations that each bit is shifted each time this function is executed is specified by parameter P2 N The number of location specified by N must be more then zero and less then the total number of bits in the group of consecutive words When the shift occurs a number of bits specified by N will be shifted out of the right end lowest bit location of the first word of the group of bits These bits are shifted into the vacant locations created by the shift which is located at the left end highest bit location of the group of bits If the number of bits to rotate N is greater then the specified length of the array LEN in bits and there is power flow into the ROR function then the entire output array will be set equal to the input array and power flow out of ROR will be off If power flow into ROR is ON and no error is detected then power flow out of ROL is on The results of the shifted operation is stored in the location of the word or group of consecutive words which is specified by parameter P4 Q which is the memory address location for the first word of the group of consecutive words containing the string of bits that has been shifted Parameters P1 P2 and P4 are 16 bit word memory locations represen
371. ming Example for BITCLR Function In this example the discrete reference M0244 in the bit string M0233 M0280 will be set to 0 when the function is executed Since the BIT parameter is a constant and less then LEN x 16 the power flow output will be set to 1 Ladder Diagram Representation BIT_CLR M0233 P1 IN const P2 BIT 12 P3 0003 Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10023 0002 FUNC 24 BITCLR P1 M0233 P2 12 P3 3 0003 OUT Q0001 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display 0001 INS lt S Initial display Press the key sequence al 2 3 LD Al Press the ay key 0002 INS lt S 0001 INS 9 166 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Press the key sequence BIE Press the T key 0002 BITCLR lt S POI _ Press the key sequence 0002 BITCLR lt S Cu 5 a fo P0O1 M 233_ Press the Z9 key 0002 BITCLR lt S P02 _ Press the key sequence 0002 BITCLR lt S P02 12_ Press the Z9 key 0002 BITCLR lt S P03 _ Press the key sequence 0002 BITCLR lt S P03 3_ Press the a key 0003 INS lt S 0002 INS lt S E FUNC 24_ BITCLR FUNC GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 167 Press the key sequence O
372. ming Language 9 213 Table 9 6 Operating Registers and Register Locations Sequencer Location Register number programmed as P4 Sequencer Location 1 Number of Steps Sequencer Location 2 ControlInformation This stage bit sequencer location register is the register number which is programmed as parameter P4 The data found in this register is the current step number that the pointer is pointing to the current location of the pointer The number of steps in the bit sequencer can be found in the second of the three consecutive registers which is programmed as parameter P3 The third register of the three consecutively numbered registers has the control word stored in it Do not write to sequencer location 2 Changing the data in the control information word may result in unexpected operation of the PLC When programming the parameter data for a stage bit sequencer note that parameter P3 which specifies the number of steps with in the stage bit sequencer is a constant value and is also automatically placed by the CPU into the second register of the three sequential operating value registers Logic controlling femme Power flow through this function power flow to the controlling another function enable input or coil Logic controlling power flow to the P03 The total number of bits in reset input the group Logic controlling power flow to the direction input Step number where the P01 pointer will reset to
373. mming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display Initial display 0001 INS lt S Press the key sequence 0001 INS Ac LD Le E LJ Press the key 0002 INS lt S Press the key sequence u 2 T A E OR Press the y key 0003 INS lt S GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 46 Next the logic for the reset input is programmed Press the key sequence D f NOT a AQ Press the ENT key Press the key sequence FUNC LIL Press the key Press the key sequence Press the ENT J key Press the key sequence EVE J Press the key Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 0003 INS LD NOT Q1_ 0004 INS 0004 INS 0004 ONDTR P1 _ 0004 ONDTR P1 10_ 0004 ONDTR lt S P2 _ lt S lt S lt S FUNC 13_ ONDTR lt S lt S 0004 ONDTR lt S P2 R 90_ 0003 ONDTR lt S P3 _ GFK 0402G Press the key sequence Press the T key Press the key sequence J OUT OUTM Ba AQ Press the ay key Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 0004 ONDTR lt S P3 R 4_ 0005 INS lt S 0006 INS lt S 9 47 2 Off Delay OFDTR Function 14 9 48 The
374. module is initialized by a Hand Held Programmer the number of actively scanned channels is 16 If a module had been previously configured with Logicmaster 90 30 software and the number of actively scanned channels has been changed from 16 that number will be displayed on the bottom line of the Hand Held Programmer display following the AI You can edit data with the Hand Held Programmer only for the active channels but can not change the number of actively scanned channels Module Present If a module is physically present in a system it can be added to the system s configuration by reading the module into it For example assume that a 16 Channel Analog Current Input module is installed in slot 3 of a Model 311 PLC system It can be added to the configuration with the following sequence Use the Up and Down cursor keys or the key to display the selected slot 5 32 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable ControllersUser s Manual February1996 GFK 0402G Initial Display To add the IC693ALG223 module to the configuration press the READ VERIFY key The following screen will be displayed RO 03 HI DEN C gt S I40 I_ For more information on assigning I O references see page 5 10 Assigning Reference Addresses to I O Modules Selecting l Reference At this point the starting I reference address for the status data returned from the module must be entered Notice that the length of the status field 40
375. mory types are valid for each of the COMMROQ function parameters Allowable Memory Types for COMMREQ Function 88 RIS e Se a a SB a seme T eee l e E D OOE ec EE EA EA Programming Example for COMMREQ Function In the following example when enabling input I0020 is closed a command block located starting at R00016 is sent to communications task 1 in the device located at rack 1 slot 2 of the PLC If an error occurs Q00100 is set Ladder Diagram Representation R0016 P01 CONST P02 0012 CONST P03 00001 Statement List Representation 0001 0002 0003 LD FUNC OUT 88 P1 P2 P3 10020 COMMREQ R0016 12 1 Q0100 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes Initial display GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language HHP Display 0001 INS lt S 9 221 Press the key sequence 0001 INS lt S o HOO ee ee Press the ay key 0002 INS lt S Press the key sequence 0002 INS lt S rund FUNC 88 _ COMRQ Press the ai key 0002 COMROQ lt S POI _ Press the key sequence 0002 COMRQ lt S F falfe P01 R 16_ Press the S key 0002 COMRQ lt S P02 _ Press the key sequence 0002 COMRQ lt S P02 12_ Press the S key 0002 COMRQ lt S P03 _ 9 222 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Contr
376. n Comparison LT Function 56 Double Precision Less Than Comparison DPLT Function 76 GFK 0402G There are two less than comparison functions The less than test LT is a conditionally executed function which tests for one signed word value less than another The double precision less than test DPLT is a conditionally executed function which tests for one signed double word value less than another When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable input the function is executed by the CPU and a new signed less than comparison for LT or double precision signed less than comparison DPLT will take place During the execution of a less than comparison the signed value in P1 input 1 is compared to determine if it is less than the signed value in P2 input 2 The LT and DPLT functions operate on INT signed integer and DINT double precision signed integer data respectively The INT LT function is Function 56 and the DINT LT function is Function 76 LT Function Description The two values specified by parameters P1 and P2 must be the same data type 16 bit two s complement signed integers and must be within the range 32768 to 32767 This function will pass power flow when there is power flow to the enable input and the value specified by parameter P1 is less than the value specified by parameter P2 If discrete memory types are used for parameters P1 and P2 the beginning address must be on
377. n be changed using the Logicmaster 90 30 software configurator func tion The Hand Held Programmer will always reflect the currently active length of the status field For more information on assigning I O references see page 5 10 Assigning Reference Addresses to I O Modules Pressing the ENT key will allow the PLC to select the starting address of the status data You can select a specific starting address by pressing the key sequence for the desired address and pressing the ENT key For example to specify the starting address as 117 press the key sequence 1 7 ENT The following screen will be displayed RO 03 HI DEN V gt S I140 117 156 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable ControllersUser s Manual February1996 GFK 0402G Selecting Al Reference After the starting I address has been selected pressing the ENT key again will cause the following screen to be displayed RO 03 HI DEN V gt S AI16 AI __ This screen allows you to select the starting address for the AI reference Note that the length of the status field 16 is displayed as the first two digits following the first AI on the second line of the display Note This field cannot be changed with the Hand Held programmer However it can be changed using the Logicmaster 90 30 software configurator function The Hand Held Programmer will always reflect the currently active length of the status field In the AI field you can select the
378. n of L 4 discrete inputs T 4 discrete internal 1 4 discrete outputs discrete temporary global data system status Discrete tables 7 3 Display format for configuration Display formats Display changing format of 7 5 Display error messages DOTI O function 9 234 description of 9 234 enhanced for model 331 340 341 and 351 CPUs 9 240 Double precision addition DPADD function 61 division DPDIV function 67 equal DPEQ function 72 greater a DPGT func tion greater than or equal comparison DPGE function 75 9103 less than comparison DPLT function 76 less than or equal to comparison DPLE function 74 mol division DPMOD function 69 9 82 aa a DPMUL function 65 9 72 Index 3 Index Index 4 not equal comparison DPNE function 73 9 95 signed integer 9 30 square root DPSQRT function 71 9 87 subtraction DPSUB function 63 Down counter DNCTR function 16 Dual use checking parameter 3 8 E Edit locked subroutine EEPROM source at power up EEPROM EPROM catalog numbers Enhanced DO I O function for model 331 340 341 and 351 CPUs 9 240 Enhanced genius communications mod ule Entering a logic element 9 11 Entering data mode Entering programs guidelines Entering subroutines 9 7 Equal function Error messages display options EEPROM MEM card operation non system 10 1 Exit data mode Exiting configuration m
379. n on changing data values When viewing a contact which represents an internal or external device the power flow indicator displayed is for the condition of the element displayed on the screen Boolean No Power Flow Display 0005 lt S The O in the lower right position indicates no power flow through LD I0001 O o Boolean Power Flow Display The block indicates power flow through 0017 lt S S0001 Note that this is a NOT contact LD NOT S0001 B ae ie there is power through this GFK 0402G Chapter 6 Program Edit 6 17 Signed Decimal Word Display 0033 ADD lt R P1 R0001 716 Hexadecimal Word Display 0044 AND lt S P1 R0012 3E16H Pressing the HEX DEC key when viewing a function parameter enables you to toggle between hexadecimal and signed decimal format If you display a different parameter or function after changing the display format and then redisplay the first parameter or function the new display format will still be used After power down or when transitioning from run to stop stop to run the display will return to default display Initial display 0059 SUB Decimal Display P2 65 HEX Press the DEC key 0059 SUB lt R Hexadecimal Display P2 0041H Please refer to appendix D for a listing of the default display formats for each function parameter Making On Line Changes The PLC must be in Protection Level 4 to make On Line changes A limited number of changes may be made to th
380. n the Series 90 30 model 331 340 341 and 351 CPU override bits can be set When override bits are set the associated references cannot be changed from the program or the input device they can only be changed on command from the programmer Neither the Series 90 30 model 311 or 313 CPU nor the Series 90 20 model 211 CPU supports overriding discrete references Retentiveness of Data Data is said to be retentive if it is saved by the PLC when the PLC is stopped Unless otherwise stated for a particular model of CPU the Series 90 PLCs preserve program logic fault tables and diagnostics overrides and output forces word data R AI AQ bit data l S SC is retentive not SA or SB G fault bits and reserved bits Q and M data unless used with non retentive coils and word data stored in Q and M T data is not saved Q and M references are non retentive that is cleared at power up when the PLC switches from STOP to RUN whenever they are used with non retentive coils Non retentive coils include coils _ negated coils SET coils S and RESET coils R When Q or M references are used with retentive coils or are used as function block outputs the contents are retained through power loss and RUN to STOP to RUN transitions Retentive coils include retentive coils M negated retentive coils M retentive SET coils SM and retentive RESET coils RM The last use of a Q or M referenc
381. nable input the data located in the two memory locations AI001 and AI002 Parameter P1 is compared to the constant 75 programmed as parameter P2 If the combined value in the two memory locations AIO01 and IA002 is greater than or equal to 75 then the output Q0001 will be turned on For example if the value in memory locations AI001 is 78 the output Q0001 will turn on Ladder Diagram Representation GE DINT l l AI0001 P1 I1 Q CONST P2 12 0075 Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 FUNC 75 DPGE P1 AI001 P2 75 0003 OUT Q0001 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display 0001 INS lt S Initial display A Press the key sequence LD ES 1 Press the key 0002 INS lt S Press the key sequence Func 7 5 0002 INS lt S FUNC 75_ DPGE Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 105 Press the EY key 0002 DPGE lt S P01 _ Press the key sequence A A 0002 DPGE lt S w a d P01 AI 1_ Press the key ae 2 DPGE lt S Press the key sequence ye se 2 DP pe lt S Press the y key 0003 INS lt S OUT Ba Press the key sequence gumm AG 1 Press the key 0004 INS gt S 9 106 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Less Tha
382. nction 44 00 eee eee eee eee 9 198 Shift Register SHFR SHFRW Function 45 0 0 0 0000 c eee ee eee 9 201 Shift Register Bit SHFRB Function 46 0 00 cece eee eee 9 208 Stage Bit Sequencer SEQB Function 47 0 000 e eee eee eee 9 212 Communications Request COMMREQ Function 88 9 220 Section 6 Conversion Functions cece cece eee ees 9 224 Integer to BCD Conversion BCD Function 80 00 eee ee 9 225 BCD to Integer Conversion INT Function 81 0000005 9 229 Section 7 Control Functions 0 cece eee eee eee eee 9 233 DoI OSnapshot DOI O Function 85 0 00 0 9 234 Enhanced DO I O Function for Model 331 and Higher 9 240 Terminate Program Logic Execution ENDSW Function0 9 241 No Operation NOOP Function 1 0 000 00000 e cece eee eee 9 241 Nested Jump JUMP Function 3 000000 9 242 Nested Master Control Relay MCR Function 4 00005 9 246 END MCR Function 8 2 0 0 0 eee eee eea Ea 9 246 LABEL Function Z 0 chest S naa boa e Hine Renee os 9 250 System Service Request SVCRQ Function 89 0 0 cece eee 9 251 PIDISA PIDISA Function 86 PID IND PIDIND Function 87 0 0 cee 9 254 Subroutine Call CALLSUB Function 90 00 eee eee eee 9 266 GFK 0402G Table of Contents xi Contents Section 8 Table Functions ccc ccc ccc ee
383. nd assumes no responsibility for the accuracy completeness sufficiency or usefulness of the information contained herein No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America Inc Alarm Master CIMSTAR Helpmate PROMACRO Series Six CIMPLICITY GEnet Logicmaster Series One Series 90 CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Genius Modelmaster Series Three VuMaster CIMPLICITYPowerTRAC GeniusPowerTRAC ProLoop Series Five Workmaster Copyright 1990 1996 GE Fanuc Automation North America Inc All Rights Reserved Chapter Introduction to the Hand Held Programmer 1 The major features of the Hand Held Programmer catalog number IC693PRG300 for the Series 90 30 90 20 and Micro Programmable Logic Controllers include Creating a Statement List program including insert edit and delete functions Making on line program changes e Searching a logic program for instructions and or machine references Performing optional dual use checking of discrete output references when instructions are entered Monitoring reference data or I O point status while viewing the logic program Monitoring reference data in table form in binary hexadecimal or decimal format Monitoring register reference data in timer counter format Making on line reference data changes Four PLC access privilege levels Using the OEM protection key e ConfiguringI Omodules e Viewing PLC scan
384. nd the number of 16 bit words specified by the parameter P3 LEN If the length plus the memory address exceed the total number of words for that memory type DATA ERR will be displayed on the screen of the Hand Held Programmer When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable EN input the function is executed by the CPU and a new shift register function will take place During the execution of a shift register function all of the bits in the 16 bit word which has the highest memory address of this group of 16 bit words are moved shifted out to the 16 bit memory location specified by parameter P4 Q After these bits are stored and during the same execution of this function the data stored as 16 bit words in each of the other memory locations in this group of memory location is moved shifted one 16 bit word at a time to the next higher 16 bit memory location The bits stored in the 16 bit word whose location is specified by parameter P1 is moved into the lowest 16 bit memory location of this group this is also the starting location of the group specified by parameter P2 which was left vacant when the above shift of words took place When the logic controlling the reset input R to this function passes power flow to the reset R input a reset to this function will take place During a reset all of the bits in all the memory locations within this group of words are set to zero starting at the lowest
385. nd the value in register 280 is 2580 then the output Q0001 will turn on 9 112 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Ladder Diagram Representation Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 FUNC 54 LE P1 R0240 P2 R0280 0003 OUT Q0001 After pressing key Key Strokes HHP Display Initial display 0001 INS lt s Press the key sequence A 1 Al f Press the S key 0002 INS lt S 0001 INS o Press the key sequence Fung 5 4 0002 INS lt S FUNC 54_ LE GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 113 Press the S key 0002 LE lt S POI _ Press the key sequence 0002 LE lt S fa 2 fo P0O1 R 240_ Press the A key 0002 LE lt S P02 _ Press the key sequence 0002 LE lt S fa 2 8 fo P02 R 280_ Press the A key 0003 INS lt S Press the key sequence EJ Press the ay key 0004 INS lt S OUT BQ OUTM AQ 9 114 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Integer Range RANGI Function 140 Double Precision Range RANGDI Function 141 Word Range RANGW Function 142 GFK 0402G The RANGE function is used to determine if a value is between the range of two numbers
386. new logic or modifying old logic e For new logic the CPU must be in the stop mode and the HHP must be in the Program and Insert mode 2 When programming an element the following order of programming must be followed e First enter the element type that is AND OR OUT etc e Second enter the discrete memory type I Q M T G S SA SB SC e Third enter the numerical address reference within the memory type e Fourth press the ENTER key to place the element into the program memory of the CPU Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 3 The first element of a rung must always be a serial contact off of the left power bus The element type will be LD or LD NOT Elements may then be placed in parallel or series with this first element 4 The last element in a rung must be a coil except when CEND NOOP and ENDSW are used and when power flow from a function block is not needed 5 When using the Hand Held Programmer there is no restriction as to the number of parallel contacts that can be placed across a single contact The same is true for contacts being placed in series However if the Logicmaster 90 method of programming is to be used to view monitor or modify the program there are the following restrictions e Only eight 8 parallel contacts are allowed The number of contacts or group of parallel contacts that can be placed in series is
387. next available address the default by pressing the ENT key or by entering a specific address To enter a specific address press the starting reference number keys and the ENT key for example 3 5 then ENT RO 03 HI DEN V gt S AI16 AI035 AI051 You can press the CLR key at any time to abort the configuration you have just selected and return the slot to EMPTY Removing Module From Configuration GFK 0402G If required this module can be removed from the current configuration Assume that the module is currently configured in rack 0 slot 3 It can be deleted with the following sequence Initial Display RO 03 HI DEN V gt S AI16 AI __ To delete the module press the DEL ENT key sequence The display will then be Chapter 5 I O Configuration 5 29 Selecting Module Mode 5 30 To display the module mode press the key The display will show the current mode of the module The default mode is Single Ended RO 03 HI DEN V gt S HI DEN V SINGLE You can toggle between the Single Ended and Differential modes by pressing the key Each mode will be selected as shown The range selected is the one currently displayed RO 03 HI DEN V gt S HI DEN V DIFFERE When the desired mode for the module is displayed on the screen you can selected it by pressing the ENT key Selecting Input Channel Ranges The range for each of the 16 channels can be displayed and selected or changed as described below Assume tha
388. ng l Reference At this point the starting lI reference address for the status data returned from the module must be entered Notice that the length of the status field 24 is displayed as the first two digits following the first I on the second line of the display Note This field cannot be changed with the Hand Held programmer However it can be changed using the Logicmaster 90 30 software configurator function The Hand Held Programmer will always reflect the currently active length of the status field Pressing the ENT key will allow the PLC to select the starting address of the status data You can select a specific starting address by pressing the key sequence for the desired address and pressing the ENT key For example to specify the starting address as 17 press the key sequence 1 7 ENT The following screen will be displayed RO 03 AIO 1 00 lt S I24 1017 1040 You can press the CLR key at any time to abort the configuration you have just selected and return the slot to EMPTY After selecting the starting I address and pressing the ENT key the following screen appears Default Configuration In addition to configuring the Analog Combo module with Logicmaster 90 30 software or by using the READ VERIFY ENT key sequence with the Hand Held Programmer it can automatically be configured when the PLC creates the default configuration at start up Refer to System Configuration Default on page 5 15 for details The module c
389. ng instructions provide basic boolean instructions to execute logical operations such as AND and OR and many functions to execute advanced operations including arithmetic operations data conversion and data transfer On line program changes Search logic programs for instructions and or specificreferences Monitor reference data while viewing logic program Monitor reference data in table form in binary hexadecimal or decimal formats Monitor timer and counter values View PLC scan time firmware revision code and current logic memory use Load store and verify program logic and configuration between the Hand Held Programmer and a removable Memory Card IC693ACC303 which allows programs to be moved between PLCs or loaded into multiple PLCs Start or stop the PLC from any mode of operation Note Unlike other Series 90 30 20 models the Series 90 Micro PLC requires that after a program has been edited you save the program to the user program in non volatile flash memory Refer to Storing the User Program Using the HHP on page 4 6 for the required procedure for saving programs when a Micro PLC program is modified in any way create edit insert etc HHP Configuration Screens GFK 0402G 1 The following screen Main Menu will be displayed on the Hand Held Programmer after the Series 90 Micro PLC has successfully completed its power up sequence _ 1 PROGRAM lt S 2 DATA This screen allows you to select the mode of
390. not want to discard the changes you have made press the CLR key This will take you back to the last parameter that was being modified with all changes intact You can now fix the problem that had caused entry into the freeze mode If you do want to discard the changes you have made in order to get back to the point you were at before entering the illegal value press the ENT key The Hand Held Chapter 5 I O Configuration 5 49 Programmer will then return to the last parameter screen with all of the changes reset to what they were before the illegal data was entered If however at this point you want to save the data to the CPU from the SAVE CHANGES screen shown below SAVE CHANGES lt S lt ENT gt Y lt CLR gt N press the ENT key If there was an illegal value entered the Hand Held Programmer will return with a CFG ERR message on the top line of the screen If all the data is valid then when you press either the T and 4 keys the HHP display will move to the next slot Saved Configurations 5 50 Configurations that contain Analog Combo modules can be saved to an EEPROM or MEM card and read from that device into the CPU at a later time MEM cards and EEPROMs containing these configurations can be read into any Release 4 or later Series 90 30 CPU cannot be read into a Series 90 20 CPU Refer to Chapter 2 of this manual for detailed information on the Save and Restore operations Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 M
391. nput When the logic at the DIR input is passing power flow to the DIR input the pointer will increment to the next higher step number If the logic at the DIR input in not passing power flow to the DIR input the pointer will decrement to the next lower step number When the pointer is at the highest numbered step of the group and is told to increment it will move to the beginning step number lowest step number which is step number one Also if the pointer is located at step number one the lowest step number of the group and is told to decrement it will move to the highest step number of the group When the logic controlling the reset input to this function passes power flow to this functions reset RST input and each time the logic step where this function is stored in programmed memory is executed by the CPU the pointer will move to the step number specified by parameter P1 STEP which may be a constant or a number located in the 16 bit memory location specified by parameter P1 Also all memory locations of the stage bit sequencer except the new pointer location and the remaining memory locations to the next 16 bit boundary will be set to a zero If a minus one 1 or zero 0 is programmed in as parameter P1 it will signify no parameter and the pointer will be moved to step number one while setting as above the bits in the other steps and the remaining memory locations to the next 16 point boundary to a zero 0 Hand Held Programmer for
392. nstant of 2 specifying the number of bits which will be 2 to be rotated shifted each time a rotate is executed P3 parameter specifies the number of words that will be connected together to form the total number of bits in the word which for this example is three words Before Rotate Right p gt See a43862 li1jolololililololilialololololi i R0032 3 4 li1jolililolilolololilolililololo R0033 7 as l1Jililolololol1lololololololifo R0034 lt 4 After Rotate Right a43863 Roos2 0loli1lolololililololililololo o R00331 1 oli1loli ilolilolololilofil1 o RO0O3I4 11 11 11 1 ololololilolololololo SIQ001 Ladder Diagram Representation taal tk M0001 ter CONST 0002 Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 157 9 158 Statement List Representation 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 LD OUT LD FUNC OUT 33 P1 P2 P4 10001 M0001 M0001 ROR R0032 0002 0003 R0032 Q0001 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes Initial display Press the key sequence A LJ Press the ai key o Press the key sequence Ja Press the key OUT OUTM M T B Press the key sequence LJ C M Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Progr
393. nstant or reference for the value on which the square root is to be calculated The SQRT function operates on two types of data INT signed integer and DINT double precision integer The INT Square Root function is function number 70 and the DINT Square Root function is function number 71 OK is set to true if the function is performed without overflow otherwise ok is set false Logic for controlling enab1e BENSAER Power flow output to a power flow INT coil or another function Value whose square root P1 QI P2 Location where square root is to be calculated is stored Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element 2 Type of function either Function 70 SQRT or Function 71 DPSQRT 3 Parameter P1 IN value whose square root is to be calculated This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored 4 Parameter P2 Q the location where the integer portion of the square root of input IN is stored This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored The following tables specify which memory types are valid for each of the SQRT and DPSQRT function parameters Allowable Memory Types for SORT Function 70 _Perameter ow WI SO eM WT MS MG VR GAT AQ const none fab ee SS SS A SAE KERSS es e a es slice e tite wales Fe
394. nt in the program has been entered When the CPU solves the logic it starts at step one and proceeds sequentially to the highest step number then starts over see Chapter 2 in the Series 90 30 PLC Reference Manual GFK 0467 for more information For each instruction step you will need to indicate an instruction type This can be a basic element or a standard function block i e AND OR_ Function 10 etc Also a companion operand in most cases must be provided For a basic element this operand would be the discrete memory type I Q M T G S SA SB SC followed by its reference numbered address location within this memory type In the case of a function block the operand would be one or more parameters Each parameter could be an internal CPU reference address or a constant GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 5 The following table lists the allowable memory types for the basic elements listed in the previous table Table 9 2 Allowable Memory for Basic Elements i Sc a e a e ome e S e a a w eee e a a a m e e e e e E C E dT a Ee Sam pore ee Mees Wee ee a ea FS Spam E Ra el E E E FES a Ha VC FS A a a Fe a a a FS A Sa a Only SA SB and SC are used S cannot be used Guidelines for Entering Programs 9 6 Several rules and guidelines which should be followed when entering new rungs elements of logic or when modifying an existing program are listed below 1 Entering
395. nt or a memory location containing the value 5 Parameter P3 LEN specifies the length of the bit string in words This isaa constant number Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 161 The following table specifies which memory types are valid for each of the BITSET function parameters Allowable Memory Types for BITSET Function 22 a e e e e B WD E a E Programming Example for BITSET Function In this example the discrete reference M0027 in the bit string M0017 M0080 will be set to 1 when the function is executed Since the BIT parameter is a constant and less then LEN x 16 the power flow output will be set to 1 Ladder Diagram Representation BIT_SET l l l l M0017 P1 IN l l l l const P2 BIT 11 Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10023 0002 FUNC 22 BITSET P1 M0017 P2 11 P3 4 0003 OUT Q0001 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display 0001 INS lt S Initial display 9 162 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Press the key sequence Press the S key 0002 INS lt S Press the key sequence BJE Press the Z9 key 0002 BITSET lt S POl _ Press the key sequence 0002 BITSET lt S Pm 5 POL M 17_ T Press the key 0002 BITSET lt S P02 _ Press the key sequence 0002 BITSET lt S P02 11_ Press the ay key
396. ntact SA003 Application fault occurred S0004 0 1 second timer contact SA004 Reserved S0005 1 0 second timer contact SA005 Reserved S0006 1 0 minute timer contact SA006 Reserved S0007 AlwaysON SA007 Reserved S0008 AlwaysOFF SA008 Reserved S0009 System table is full SA009 System configuration mismatch S0010 I O fault table is full SA010 PLC CPU hardware failure S0011 Override exists in I1 Q M G SA011 Battery voltage is low Memory S0012 Reserved S0013 Background program check active S0014 Reserved S0015 Reserved S0016 Reserved S0017 Reserved S0018 Reserved S0019 Reserved S0020 Reserved S0021 Reserved S0022 Reserved S0023 Reserved S0024 Reserved S0025 Reserved S0026 Reserved S0027 Reserved S0028 Reserved S0029 Reserved S0030 Reserved S0031 Reserved S0032 Reserved SA012 Reserved SA013 Loss of IOC SA014 Loss ofI Omodule SA015 Lossofspeciall Omodule SA016 Reserved SA017 Reserved SA018 Addition ofI Ocontroller SA019 Addition of 1 Omodule SA020 Addition of specialI Omodule SA021 Reserved SA022 I Ocontrollerfault SA023 I Omodulefault SA024 Reserved SA025 Reserved SA026 Reserved SA027 Hardware failure in special module SA028 Reserved SA029 Software fault in IOC SA030 Reserved SA031 Software fault in special module SA032 Reserved GFK 0402G B 1 Special Contact References Refere Address SB001 SB002 SB003 SB00
397. nto and retry the key sequence CALLOVR_ Exceeded the 64 CALLSUBinstruction per logic Abort the current instruction step insert or edit op block limit eration GFK 0402G Chapter 10 Error Messages 10 3 Appendix A Glossary This Appendix is a Glossary of Terms for the Hand Held Programmer and the Series 90 30 Series 90 20 and Series 90 Micro PLCs Glossary of Terms for the Series 90 30 20 Micro PLCs GFK 0402G Address Anumber following a reference type which together refer to a specific user reference that is for Innnn l is the reference type and nnnn is the address Alarm Processor A software function that time stamps and logs I O and system faults in two tables that can be displayed by the programmer or uploaded to a host computer or other coprocessor Analog An electrical signal activated by physical variables representing force pressure temperature flow etc AND Logical A mathematical operation between bits All bits must be 1 for the result to be 1 Application Program The program written by the user for control of a machine or process that is the application ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange An eight bit 7 bits plus 1 parity bit code used for data Backplane A group of connectors physically mounted on a board at the back of a rack into which modules are inserted The connectors are wired together by a printed circuit board A 1 A 2 Ba
398. o user input has been specified when the CLR key is pressed the first time only a single press of CLR key is required to cancel the operation Displaying and Modifying the OEM Key The OEM key can be displayed and modified only if level 4 access has been gained and OEM protection is currently released If you attempt to view an OEM key with OEM GFK 0402G Chapter 8 PLC Control and Status 8 9 protection locked the request will be refused and a PROTECT message will be displayed The same error message will be displayed if you attempt to view an OEM key from any access level other then 4 When displaying the OEM key the actual password will be shown if one exists Ifa password does exist it can be changed or deleted If the OEM key does not exist the designation NULL will be shown instead In such a case a password can be set if desired Whenever you attempt to assign an OEM key the OEM key must be specified first Otherwise the assignment is refused and a DATA ER message will be displayed It is up to the OEM to lock OEM protection after programming a new key to protect against the key being viewed or modified Before you lock OEM protection however the OEM key must first be set The NULL key 0000 is not valid as a key specification Other wise the lock request is refused The following screen format is used to display and modify the OEM key Table 8 8 Specify Change OEM Key Level OEM PLC L E V E L unused Protection unused
399. ocating a Slot or Rack and PLC Parameters For configuration purposes the Model 311 321 and 313 323 CPU slot 0 of rack 0 is embedded in the backplane The Model 331 340 341 351 and 211 CPU module is always located in slot 1 of rack 0 The Up and Down cursor keys can be used to view the previous or next slot in the rack If the current slot is at the end of the current rack the next slot displayed will be the adjacent slot in the next previousrack For Model 211 slot 2 is always inputs slot 3 is always outputs and slot 4 is always High Speed Counter The key in conjunction with a slot number can be used to go fo a particular slot as shown in the following example 1 When configuration mode is selected the first screen displayed is the last slot viewed the last time this mode was entered except after power up For this example assume that slot 3 of the main rack was the last slot viewed 3 4 Hand Held Programmerfor Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 2 Press the key to begin the GOTO operation R_ 3 Enter the number of the rack which contains the slot you want to go to For this example enter a zero 0 for the main rack RO 03 EMPTY lt S RO 4 Then enter the number of the slot you want to go to For this example enter a 1 for slot 1 of the main rack RO 03 EMPTY lt S R0 1 5 Then press the ENT key Slot 1 of the main rack is now displayed on
400. ocess variable to begin to react to a step change in the control variable It is typically the point at which the process variable has reached its maximum rate of change 3 Determine the equivalent system time constant The equivalent system time constant T can be determined by the time it takes the process variable to reach 63 of its steady state value from a step applied to the control variable minus the process lag time t 4 Calculate the reaction rate R re T 5 For proportional control only calculate the Proportional Gain P a 1 E RD 6 For proportional and integral control calculate Proportional Gain P and Integral Gain I These should only be used as starting values for the tuning process These values may vary with operating points in the process if the process is time variant or non linear To assure that the tuning parameters are valid all final adjustments should be made manually and the process monitored over all operating conditions and points GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 261 Programming Example for PID Function In this example register R1 contains the set point and register R2 contains the process variable R100 is the first register in the parameter block Whenever I1 is closed a 1 and I2 is open a 0 the PID algorithm is applied to the function s inputs and the result is placed in register R3 Whenever both I1 and I2 are closed both 1 the res
401. ode F Flash memory Micro plc saving the user program in Formats display Function numbers list of Function parameters Functions arithmetic 9 121 bit operation 9 233 control 9 233 control functions timers and counters 37 es for statement list programming 9 31 functions list of G Generic module configuration Genius communications module 5 18 Genius communications module en hanced Global data references Glossary of terms A 1 Glossary basic instructions and reference Types Greater than comparison GT function Greater than function Greater than or equal comparison GE function 55 9 103 Greater than or equal function 9 90 Guidelines for entering programs 9 6 H Hand Held Programmer cable communications with PLC configuration screens for Micro plc connection to Series 90 Micro plc 2 connection to Series 90 20 PLC 2 1 connection to Series 90 30 PLC disconnecting 2 2 discrete references 1 3 features of how to use 1 7 illustration of illustration of keypad 2 3 installation and setup 2 1 keypad 2 2 keypad og tion of 1 1 LCD screen 1 2 memory card memory card insertion 2 13 operating modes 1 2 operation of HHP 2 1 power up sequence subroutine display 8 12 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G subroutine protection status display of 8 12 Hand Held Programmer abbreviations Type A counter
402. of programming uses the GT function In this example when input I0001 is closed passing power flow to the enable input the data located in register 240 Parameter P1 is compared to the constant 75 programmed in as parameter P2 If the value in register 240 is greater than 75 then the output Q0001 will be turned on For example if the value in register 240 is 25 which is greater than 75 output Q0001 will turn on Ladder Diagram Representation SRO240 Pl CONST P2 I2 0075 Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 FUNC 57 P1 R0240 P2 9 0003 OUT Q0001 After pressing key Programming sequence Keystrokes HHP Display Initial display 0001 INS lt S A Press the key sequence LD Es 1 Press the Ey 0002 INS lt S Press the key sequence Func z 0002 INS lt S FUNC 57_ GT Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 101 Press the y key Press the key sequence D J Press the key 2 Press the key sequence 7 5 Te Press the T key oe 03 INS lt S Press the key sequence a 1 Press the key 0004 INS gt S 9 102 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Greater Than or Equal Comparison GE Function 55 Double Precision Greater Than or Equal
403. of programming uses the NE function In this example when input 10001 is closed passing power flow to the enable input the data located in register 240 parameter P1 is compared to the constant 3650 programmed as parameter P2 If the value in register 240 is not equal to the number 3650 then output Q0001 will be turned on For example if the value in register 240 is 3650 then output Q0001 will turn on because this is a signed function and 3650 is not equal to 3650 Ladder Diagram Representation I0001 I NE INT l l R0240 P1 I1 Q l l CONST 3650 P2 12 Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 FUNC 53 NE P1 RO240 P2 3650 0003 OUT Q0001 After pressing Key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display 0001 INS lt S Initial display Press the key sequence 0001 INS Le GJ LJ Al Press the A key 0002 INS lt S GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 97 Press the key sequence 0002 INS lt 8 a 3 5 FUNC 53_ NE Press the ay key 0003 NE lt S POI _ Press the key sequence 0002 NE lt S R affo POl R 240_ Press the S key 0002 NE lt S P02 _ Press the key sequence 0002 NE lt S AHEAD i Press the J key 0003 INS lt S Press the key sequence OUT a 1 Press the A key 0004 INS lt S 9 98 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual
404. ollers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G Press the key sequence Press the ay key Press the key sequence OUT OUTM BQ AQ AJJ Press the A key Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 0002 COMRQ lt S P03 0003 INS 0004 INS 1_ lt S lt S 9 223 2 Section 6 Conversion Functions Conversion functions are used to convert a data item from one number type to another The conversion functions for the Series 90 30 90 20 PLCs are listed in the following table Abbreviation Function Description Integer to BCD Convert an integer value to a 4 digit BCD value BCD to Integer Convert a 4 digit BCD value to an integer value Descriptions of each of these functions are included in this section 9 224 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Integer to BCD Conversion BCD Function 80 The integer to BCD conversion function BCD is a conditionally executed function which converts an integer value to a 4 digit BCD value This function is typically used to prepare CPU data for display on external BCD compatible devices When the logic controlling the enable input to this function passes power flow to the functions enable input the function is executed by the CPU and a new integer to BCD conversion function will take place Du
405. om hexadecimal to decimal From this screen you can determine the amount of program memory available for additional logic and the current scan time In this example the attached PLC still has 5000 bytes of one word of user program memory is two bytes user program memory available for additional logic and its current scan time is 54 milliseconds gt SRO15 5000 lt R SR016 54 Exiting Data Mode To exit the reference table function press the MODE key The mode selection screen will be displayed _1 PROGRAM lt S 2 DATA 7 12 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Chapter PLC Control and Status 8 Protection mode enables you to control access to various functions of the programmable controller You can restrict others from changing or in some cases even viewing program logic configuration data reference data subroutines and the protection levels themselves Four levels of user passwords are provided for PLC protection provisions for setting displaying changing or deleting them are supported Also a software lock can be applied to individual subroutines An additional feature OEM protection is also supported OEM protection supersedesuserspecifiedprotection This chapter describes how to change the current access level display and modify passwords and use the OEM protection feature Protection Levels The first of the following
406. on M0001 P01 POS M0017 P02 P06 M0033 M0033 P03 P07 R0001 R0001 P04 Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 FUNC 143 MSKCMPW P01 M0001 P02 M0017 P03 MO0033 P04 R0001 P05 1 P06 MO0033 P07 R0001 0003 OUT Q0001 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display 0001 INS lt S Initial display Press the key sequence 0001 INS JB 2 GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 179 9 180 Press the ey key Press the key sequence a Press the key FUNC LJ C Press the key sequence Press the key Press the key sequence C HE T Press the key Press the key sequence LIL 0002 0002 lt S INS lt S FUNC 143_MSKCMPW 0002 MSKCMPW lt S P0O1 _ 0002 MSKCMPW lt S P01 0002 MSKCMPW lt S P02 _ M 1_ 0002 MSKCMPW lt S P02 _ 0002 MSKCMPW lt S P03 _ 0002 MSKCMPW lt S P03 M17_ M33_ Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Press the ai key Press the key sequence Press the T key Press the key Press the key Press the key sequence Cu Le Ls Press the key Press the key sequence Chapter 9 Statement List Programming
407. on Type INT Signed Signed integers use 16 bit memory Integer data locations and are represented in 2 s complement notation The valid range of an INT data type is 32768 to 32767 Double Precision Signed Integer DINT Double precision signed integers are stored in 32 bit datamemory locations actually twoconsecutive 16 bit memory locations and represented in 2 s complement notation Bit 32 is the sign bit The valid range of a DINT data type is 2147483648 to 2147483867 BIT A Bit data type is the smallest unit of memory It has two states 1 or 0 A BIT string may have lengthN BYTE A Byte data type has an 8 bit value The valid range of a BYTE data type is 0 to 255 A BYTE string may have length N A Word data type uses 16 consecutive bits of data memory but instead of the bits in the data location representing a number the bits are independent of each other Each bit represents its own binary state 1 or 0 and the bits are not looked at together to represent an integernumber The valid range of word values is 0 to FFFE WORD BCD 4 Four Digit Binary Coded Decimal Four digit BCD numbers use 16 bit data memory locations Each BCD digit uses four bits and can represent numbers between 0 and 9 This BCD coding of the 16 bits has a legal value range of 0 to 9999 Data Format Register 1 S 16 bit positions 16 1 rs 32 1 17 16 Two s Complement Va
408. on delay timing Stopwatch on delay timing Off delaytimer Up counter Down counter Sets a particular bit in a string of bits to 1 Logicallyand one 16 bit word to another Sets a particular bit in a string of bits to 0 Logicallyor one 16 bit word to another Determines if a particular bit in a string of bits is set to a 1 or 0 Logicallyexclusive or one 16 bit word to another Determines which bit in a string of bits is set toa 1 Logicallynegate one 16 bit word to its complement Logically shift left a word array by Nbits Logically shift right a word array by Nbits Logically rotate left a word array by Nbits Logically rotate right a word array by Nbits Move an array of 16 bit words from one location to another Move seven 16 bit constants to a destination GFK 0402G C 1 Table C 1 List of Functions continued Function Number 40 42 43 44 45 46 47 52 53 54 55 56 57 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 80 81 85 86 87 Function Mnemonic MOVBN MOVWN BMOVW BLKCL SHFRW SHFRB SEQB J DPADD S DPSUB MUL DPMUL DIV DPDIV MOD DPMOD SQRT DPSQRT DPEQ DPNE DPLE DPGE DPLT DPGT C INT DOI O PIDISA PIDIND G w B F lea U ies Description Move one or more bits from one reference to another reference Move anarray of 16 bit words from one location to another Move seven 16 bit constants to a destination Zero fill an array of 16 bit
409. on for the same channel are disabled see screens 16 and 17 below Screens 4 19 34 49 Count Output Enable RO 04 HSC lt S CTRx OUT ENABLE 4 16 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G Screens 5 20 35 50 Counter Direction RO 04 HSC lt S CTRx DIR UP This series of three screens is used to set the count direction Screens 6 21 36 51 Counter Mode R0 04 HSC lt S CTRx MODE CONT These screens specify the Counter Mode continuous or one shot Screens 7 22 37 52 Counter Strobe Preload Selection R0 04 HSC lt S CTRx PRELOAD This series of screens is used to select PRELOAD or STROBE type counting for Counters 1 4 Screens 8 23 38 53 Strobe Edge R0 04 HSC lt S STB EDGEx POS These screens configure the strobe input edge to trigger on a positive or negative going signal Screens 9 24 39 54 Counter Edge RO 04 HSC lt S CTRx EDGE POS These screens configure the counter input edge to trigger on a positive or negative going signal Screens 10 25 40 55 Time Base Value RO 04 HSC lt S TIME BS x 1000 These screens allow you to enter the time base that is used in the Counts Per Time Base calculation The default is 1000 milliseconds 1 second To change the time base select the value using the numeric keys on the Hand Held Programmer then press the ENT key to record the v
410. on for this parameter is to power up in the SAME mode that the system was powered down in Use the Right cursor key to scroll through the PLC parameters until the power up mode PU MODE parameter is displayed Then use the key to toggle the selection between STOP RUN and SAME PD By default the PLC will power up in the SAME PD mode powered down in Active Constant Sweep Mode Parameter The PLC can be configured during RUN mode to use a constant amount of time per sweep The active constant sweep mode parameter gives you the ability to enable or disable the constant sweep mode while the program is running and have the effects noticed immediately This parameter can be used to toggle the sweep mode of the PLC without changing the configured constant sweep mode parameter The active constant sweep mode parameter once changed is only valid during the current RUN mode 3 6 Hand Held Programmerfor Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G When going from STOP to RUN mode the configured sweep mode parameter value is copied to the active sweep mode parameter Use the Right cursor key to scroll through the PLC parameters until the active constant sweep mode ACT CNSW parameter is displayed Then use the key to toggle the selection between DISABLE and ENABLE By default the PLC will execute every sweep as fast as possible Active Constant Sweep Setting Parameter If the Constant
411. on or constant P01 Ql P02 Location of Results value to be changed WORD P1 RESULT P2 Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element 2 Type of function Function 29 NOT 3 Parameter P1 input 1 the values to be NOTed This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored 4 Parameter P2 Q the memory location where the result of the NOT operation is to be stored The following table specifies which memory types are valid for each of the NOT function parameters Allowable Memory Types for NOT Function 29 FS EAE E De E Ca a e ee o t Only SA SB and SC are used S cannot be used Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G 9 Programming Example for NOT Function For example if in this example when input 10001 is closed passing power flow to the enable input The 16 bits of register 250 specified by parameter P1 are altered 1 s becomes 0 s and 0 s becomes 1 s and are stored in register 251 R1 contains decimal number 8136 then R2 will contain the decimal number 8137 or the result NOT WORD l l RO250 P1 I1 Q P2 Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 FUNC 29 NOT P1 R0250 P2 R0251 0003 OUT Q0003 After pre
412. one Register AI or AQ word at a time therefore a double precision number outside of the range 32768 to 32767 can not be monitored using the Hand Held Programmer The hexadecimal or binary number for each register AI or AQ word may be programmed or monitored provided that they are placed together outside of the CPU to form the 32 Bit double precision signed number 9 82 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 If the division results in overflow a value outside of the range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 the result of the division will be set to the largest possible value 2 147 483 648 or 2 147 483 647 The sign is set to show the direction of the overflow This function will pass power flow when there is power flow to the enable input and the results of the division are within the range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 no overflow P1 Input 1 B P2 Input 2 P3 Q Remainder Logic for controlling enab1e SEEM ove flow output to power flow DINT a coil or another function value to be divided P1 Il Q P3 The result is stored here remainder value to be divided by P2 divisor I2 dividend PI divided by P2 remainder of division is stored in P3 Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left b
413. onstant 1 P4 constant 1 P5 constant k P6 constant p P7 Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element 2 Type of function Function 38 BMOVI or Function 43 BMOVW 3 Parameter P1 P7 IN1 IN7 value to be copied The value specified by each of these seven parameters is a constant value representing a 16 bit word 4 Parameter P8 Q the memory address location where the bit or bit string will be moved to 9 192 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 The following table specifies which memory types are valid for each of the BMOVE function parameters Allowable Memory Types for BMOVI Function 38 and BMOVW Function 43 _Peramcter ow RO RM WT MS SG UR KAT KAO const none ee i ee SS I I I I SS o EA ee ee Fn E ea T CR G EA e Valid reference for WORD or INT or place where power may flow through the function o Valid reference for WORD data only F SA SB SC only S cannot be used Programming Example for BMOVI Function In the following example a contact from a one shot OUT is used as the controlling element for power flow to the enable function When input I0001 closes passes power flow M0001 will pass power flow to the enable input of the BMOVI function for one swee
414. operation of the program The choices are PROGRAM DATA PROTECTand CONFIG Configuration You can see the other choices by pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys Each choice has a number in front of it which is used to select the desired mode Chapter 4 Series 90 Micro PLC Configuration 4 3 Enter the configuration mode by pressing the 4 key then the ENT key from the Main Menu screen The up and down cursor keys allow you to move between power supply configuration CPU configuration Input configuration Output configuration and HSC configuration The left and right arrows allow selection of parameters within each of the configurations RO 01 PLC lt S KEY CLK OFF This screen indicates that the CPU function is located in rack 0 and slot 01 R01 01 For compatibility with Series 90 30 PLCs the different functions mimic the rack and slot locations The Series 90 Micro PLC system is always in rack 0 The following table shows the fixed slot assignments for the different functions of the 14 point Micro PLC Slot Function Fixed Configurable 0 Power Supply Fixed 1 CPU Parameters Configurable 2 InputLocations Fixed I1 to I8 3 OutputLocations Fixed Q1 to Q6 4 High Speed Counter Fixed 100497 100512 Q00497 Q00512 AI00001 AI000015 If you want to transfer a program developed for a Series 90 Micro PLC to a Series 90 30 PLC the I O modules in the Series 90 30 PLC must be in the above listed rack and slot lo
415. or Series90 30 20 MicroProgrammableControllersUser s Manual February1996 GFK 0402G 2 Specify the module type I AI Q AQ or GCM by using the I AI Q AQ or G S key and the ENT key For this example press the I AI key and then the ENT key to specify an input module in slot 5 of the main rack RO 05 I lt S I 3 Use the numeral keys and the ENT key on the Hand Held Programmer to specify the point size For example press the 1 6 and ENT key to identify the input module as a 16 point input module 4 Next enter the reference range For example to enter the reference range 10065 10080 press the key sequence 6 5 then press the ENT key RO5 05 I lt S I16 10065 10080 The second line of this final display screen shows that a 16 point input module in slot 5 of the main rack is mapped into the reference range I0065 10080 If an error is made before the complete data is entered press the CLR key until the data entered is deleted or empty initial state is reached Reading a Configuration GFK 0402G If a non intelligent module is already installed in a backplane slot you may indicate that the actual installed hardware be used as the basis for the configuration Once this is done the only additional input needed is to map the module into the reference address space In the following example an 8 point discrete output module is already installed in slot 4 of the main rack To map this module into the ref
416. or a group of consecutive 16 bit words located at a starting memory location specified by parameter P1 are changed to zeros If this starting location is for a discrete memory type I Q M or T the transition information associated with the reference is also cleared The location of the word or group of words which will have all of their bits changed to zero is specified by parameter P1 which is the memory address location for the first word of the group of consecutive words to be zeroed The number of 16 bit words in the consecutive group of words to be cleared is specified by parameter P2 LEN The limits of LEN depend on the memory type being used and the starting address of the first word of the group of words to be copied and the starting address of the final memory location where the words have been cleared If the length plus the memory address exceed the total number of words for that memory type DATA ERR will be displayed on the screen of the Hand Held Programmer Parameter P1 specifies memory locations representing 16 bit words If discrete memory types are used for parameters P1 and P2 the beginning address must be on a 16 point boundary Power flow through this function occurs only when the functions enable input is receiving power flow To prevent multiple moves from taking place it is advisable to have the power flow to the enable input be controlled by a contact of a one shot element OUT or OUT Logic controlling
417. or by pressing the lt key until the initial screen is displayed Saved Configurations Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 Configurations that contain a 16 Channel Analog Current Input module can be saved to an EEPROM or MEM card and read into the CPU at a later time MEM cards and EEPROMs containing these configurations can be read into any Release 4 or later CPU Refer to Chapter 2 of this manual for detailed information on the Save and Restore operations GFK 0402G Configuring the 8 Channel Current Voltage Input Module The 8 Channel Analog Current Voltage Output module catalog number IC693ALG392 provides up to eight single ended output channels with current loop outputs or voltage outputs Each analog output channel is capable of providing two current output ranges or two voltage output ranges Each channel can be individually configured for the output range required for your application The module has no jumpers or switches for configuration All ranges can be configured using either the Logicmaster 90 30 programming software configurator function or the Series 90 30 Hand Held Programmer The default range is 0 to 10 volts Configurable current and voltage output ranges are e Oto 10 volts unipolar e 410to 10 volts bipolar e Oto 20 milliamps e 4to20 milliamps Each channel is capable of converting 15 to 16 bits depending on the range selecte
418. or user input SelectanI Oslot for viewing Display a different PLC parameter or position different binary bit for change Indicateanewrack slotnumber GOTO Complete an operation or user input Start or stop the PLC Select an HHP operating mode Chapter 3 Series 90 30 20 PLC Configuration 3 3 Display Format The following screen format is used for configuring the PLC parameters Table 3 3 Configuration Screen Format Rack Slot PLC R Module Type or Message State Parameter Label amp Parameter Value Rack Slot The rack slot field indicates the currently displayed rack and slot For configuration purposes the model 311 and 313 CPU module is em bedded in the backplane The Model 331 340 341 351 and Model 211 CPU module is always located in slot 1 of rack 0 Module Type or Message The module type or message field normally displays the designation PLC indicating that PLC parameters are being configured This field also functions as an error message window PLC State The PLC state field indicates whether the PLC is currently stopped or is running executing a program A leading lt character followed by S if the PLC is stopped or R if it is running indicates the state of the PLC Parameter Label The parameter label field contains a text string which is used as a prompt to the user for a particular parameter Parameter Value The parameter value field contains a value input by the user L
419. ore specifying the type of search to be performed Then follow the search procedure described above beginning with step 2 Search for Coil Instruction and Reference Address Using the sample program used in the previous search examples Press the key 0005 SRCH lt S Press the SRCH key 0005 COIL SR lt S 0005 COIL SR lt S Q 1_ B Q Press the key sequence 59 gt Press the key Search for Coil Instruction Press the SRCH key 0005 SRCH lt S Press the sacy _ key 0005 COIL SR lt S 6 16 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Press the key 0004 lt S OUT Q0001 O Monitoring Program Execution The value associated with an instruction parameter reference address may be monitored while viewing the program logic Three display formats are supported 1 Boolean for discrete instructions 2 Signed decimal for function parameters 3 Hexadecimal for function parameters Note A double precision signed decimal format is not supported for parameters of Double Precision Arithmetic functions Only the low word of the double precision value is monitored in signed decimal format Data values are monitored both when the PLC is running and when it is stopped Data values monitored in program mode cannot be changed changes must be made in data mode Please refer to chapter 6 Reference Tables for more informatio
420. ory Complete an operation or user input Monitor the execution of a program Write read or verify Memory Card or system EEPROM Start or stop the PLC Select an HHP operating mode The initial instruction step displayed in program mode is the last one viewed the previous time program mode was selected since the PLC was powered up If this is the first time program mode was entered by default the first instruction step is the initial instruction step displayed 6 This chapter describes how to enter program mode and use these features listed above to edit a user logic program Entering Program Mode In order to program the attached programmable logic controller you must first select the program mode of operation To select program mode press the MODE key to display the operating mode selections _ 1 PROGRAM lt S 2 DATA Press the 1 key to select program mode or the ENT key since the desired mode Program is at the top of the screen 1_ 1 PROGRAM lt S 2 DATA Press the ENT key to invoke the new mode The first screen displayed in program mode is 0001 lt S lt END OF PROGRAM gt Note If the OEM key has been activated you cannot enter program mode Please refer to chapter 7 PLC Control and Status for additional information on OEM protection Keypad Functionality The following table gives an overview of how the keypad on the Hand Held Programmer is used in program mode Table 6 1
421. ory card or EEPROM Table 2 8 Read Write V erify Series 90 Memory Card or EEPROM Operation Device lt S Device Address GFK 0402G Chapter 2 Operation 2 13 2 14 Operation The operation field indicates the particular operation which is to be performed on the destination device MEM CARD or EEPROM Its modes of operation are listed below along with a description of each MODE OF OPERATION DESCRIPTION READ Read the contents of the memory card or EEPROM into RAM WRITE Write the contents of RAM to the memory card or EEPROM VERIFY Verify contents of the memory card or EEPROM with RAM Device This field identifies the destination device which in this case is the Series 90 Memory Card or EEPROM This field may also function as an error message window if you attempt a read write or verify operation without a memory card or EEPROM properly inserted lt S lt S indicates that the PLC is currently stopped The PLC must be in STOP NO I O before you can perform a read write or verify operation lt R displayed in this field would indicate that the PLC is currently running executing a program If you attempt an operation with the PLC running or in STOP DOI O an error message is displayed on the screen and the operation will not be performed Device Address This number is continuously updated while the device is being read written to indicate that the operation is in progress Loading RAM from the Memory Card or
422. otApplicable OFF 9 116 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 FUNC 140 RANGI P1 1000 P2 0 P3 AI0001 0003 OUT Q0001 After pressing key Key Strokes HHP Display Initial display 0001 INS lt S Press the key sequence Ra EL ENT o Press the key Press the key sequence 0002 INS lt S rund 1 a FUNC 140_RANGI Press the R key 0002 RANGI lt S POI _ Press the key sequence 0002 GI lt S JJJ a Press the S key 0002 RANGI lt S P02 _ GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 117 9 118 Press the 9 key Press the ENT key Press the key sequence A Al Press the ae key Press the key sequence OUT OUTM AQ ENT Press the key LJ a 0002 RANGI lt S P02 0 0002 RANGI lt S P03 _ 0002 RANGI lt S P03 SAI1 0003 INS lt S 0003 INS lt S OUT Q 1_ 0004 INS lt S Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Example 2 In this example the value of AI001 is checked to be within a range specified by two register values For this example assume that the value in R
423. ots ina Rack 1 0 6 6 a i eens 5 4 TA OSLOESS eee ect vba tahe badd GE cece e R ASE aoe eae Ye teadet eet ae aha 5 5 Remote I O Rack Configuration 0 00000 c cece cece ee eee 5 5 Manual Rack Configuration 666666 5 5 Automatic Rack Configuration 0 6666s 5 7 Reading a Saved Configuration 666 c cece 5 7 Keypad Functionality 2 0 0 5 8 Section 1 Non Intelligent I O Modules 6 5 9 Assigning Reference Addresses to1 O Modules 00055 5 10 Locating a Slot or Rack arseenista o o aAa eens 5 10 Configuring a Discrete Module 0 60 cece cece cee 5 10 Reading a Configuration 0 6 66 c cece eee 5 11 Deleting an Existing Configuration 00 c cece 5 12 Replacing a Configuration 0 6666 5 12 Canceling a Configuration Operation cc cece eee eee 5 13 Recon fis uration pison eater eh a eee A ae I eA 5 13 I OLink Interface Module Configuration 0 000 e eee eee 5 15 GFK 0402G Table of Contents vii Contents Section 2 Intelligent I O Modules eeeeeeees 5 17 Reading a Configuration 0 6 66 ccs 5 17 Section 3 Genius Communications Module 5 18 Reading a Configuration 0 60 6 c ccc eee 5 18 Creating a Generic Module Configuration 000005 5 20 Section 4 High Speed Counter eeeeeeeeeeees 5 21 Section 5 Programmable Co
424. outine 1 are as follows 0001 LD NOT 10001 0002 FUNC 90 CALL SUB P1 1 Enter the statement list program with the following key sequence After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display 0001 INS lt S Initial display Press the key sequence 0001 INS lt S F A LD NOT I Le Fol LJ Press the S key 0002 INS lt S Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Press the key sequence Le Press the ay key 0002 CALLSUB lt S PO1l _ Press the key sequence 0002 CALLSUB lt S P01 1 SS ENT 0002 INS lt S 0002 INS lt S FUNC 90_ CALLSUB FUNC o GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 267 9 Section 8 Table Functions Table functions are used to perform Array Search functions and Array Move functions There are seven different functions in this group with each function able to operate on multiple data types as shown in the Data Type table below thereby providing a total of 29 Table functions Each of these functions are described in the following table Abbreviation Function Description SRCH_EQ Search for all array values equal toa specified value SRCH_NE Search for all array values not equal to a specified value SRCH_LT Search for all array values less than a specified value SRCH_LE Search for all array values less than
425. outputs The following figure is an example of a Series 90 20 PLC lt Ws a44540 oe Hobe elec i 7 l J o OR S WI O LA SS POWER GE Fanuc Ss ae o123 4567 8 SERIES 90 20 aes PROGRAMMABLE SS L 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 CONTROLLER Ss 12345678 L O 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 OK RN CT PL SS _ SNY LOW PROGRAM SYSTEM PROGRAMMING AND BATTERY STATUS PROM PROM COMMUNICATIONS PORT B WARNING BATTERY FOR PERSONAL SAFETY DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE REMOVING CPU FROM I O BASE 21 40 Las T x aao Figure 5 3 Series 90 20 Programmable Logic Controller I Oconfiguration for each slot for the Series 90 20 PLC is Rack Slot Configuration RackO Slot 0 Power Supply RackO Slot 1 CPU Rack0O Slot 2 Inputs I RackO Slot 3 Outputs Q RackO Slot 4 High Speed Counter Selecting Rack Size The size of each rack can be edited with the HHP by selecting slot 0 for that rack To select slot 0 first select the CPU slot then press the cursor up key to view the rack size For example assume that a 10 slot rack has been powered up by pressing the CLR and M keys which forces the PLC to automatically generate the default configuration The rack size is displayed and edited as described below The initial mode screen is displayed first _ 1 PROGRAM lt S 2 DATA GFK 0402G Chapter
426. owered up a default I O configuration is available with no intervention by the user it happens automatically The following table shows how I O references are assigned to each slot in the PLC The 5 slot Models 311 and 313 PLC will have I O addresses assigned to every slot The 10 slot Model 313 PLC will have discrete I O addresses assigned to each slot but slots 9 and 10 will not be assigned analog I O addresses The Model 331 340 341 351 PLCs will have analog and discrete addresses assigned to 15 of its slots Rack 0 Slot 2 to Rack 1 Slot 6 Table 5 3 Default I O Configuration Discrete Discrete Analog Analog Rack Slot Input Output Notes 0 1 I1001 032 Q001 032 AI001 008 AQ001 004 This slot not configured in Models 331 340 341 or 351 0 2 1033 064 Q033 064 AI009 016 AQ005 008 0 3 1065 096 Q065 096 AI017 024 AQ009 012 0 4 1097 128 Q097 128 A1025 032 AQ013 016 0 5 1129 160 Q129 160 A1033 040 AQ017 020 Lastslotin 5 slot Models 311 313 331 340 341 351 0 1161 192 Q161 192 A1041 048 AQ021 024 0 7 1193 224 Q193 224 A1049 056 AQ025 028 0 8 1225 256 Q225 256 A1057 064 AQ029 032 This is the last slot in a 10 slot Model 313 to receive analog configuration 0 9 1257 288 Q257 288 A1065 072 AQ033 036 0 10 1289 320 Q289 320 AI073 0080 AQ037 040 Last slot in 10 slot Model 313 1 1 1321 352 Q321 352 A1081 088 AQ041 044 1 2 1353 384 Q353 384 AI1089 096 AQ045 048 1 3 1385 41
427. p bits used in transmission Most serial 1 1 devices use one stop bit slower devices use two 2 Modem TT Selects modem turnaround time time required for the 0 255 0 modem to start data transmission after receiving the transmitrequest Idle Time Time in seconds the CPU waits for the next message to 1 60 10 be received from the programming device before it as sumes that the programming device has failed and pro ceeds to its base state Sweep Mode Normal the sweep runs until it is complete NORMAL NORMAL CNST Constant the sweep runs for the time specified in Sweep Tmr Sweep Tmr Constant sweep time in milliseconds Editable when NORMALmode N A_ N A Sweep Mode is CNST non editable otherwise CNST mode 5 200 100 4 2 Hand Held Programmerfor Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Table 4 1 Micro PLC Parameters continued Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value InRefAddr Discrete input reference 100001 noteditable I00001 Input Size Discrete input size 8 noteditable 8 OutRefAddr Discrete outputreference Q00001 Q00001 Output Size Discrete output size 6 6 The HHP is used to develop debug and monitor ladder logic programs and to monitor data tables You can use the HHP to perform the following tasks Statement List logic program development including insert edit and delete functions The Statement List programmi
428. p of the CPU scan The Block Move function BMOVI copies the seven input constants represented by P1 through P7 into memory locations R00010 through RO0016 Ladder Diagram Representation SRO0010 GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 193 9 194 Statement List Representation 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 LD OUT LD FUNC OUT After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes Initial display Press the key sequence Press the a key Press the key sequence OUT OUTM T C 7 M a Se Press the S key 10001 M0001 M0001 38 BMOVI P1 32767 P2 32768 P3 1 P4 2 P5 2 P6 1 P7 1 P8 RO10 Q0001 HHP Display 0001 INS lt S 0003 lt s Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Press the key sequence LJ Press the ay key 0004 INS lt S Press the key sequence u T 0004 INS lt S FUNC 38_ BMOVI FUNC 3 8 Press the A key 0004 BMOVI lt S POI _ Press the key sequence 0004 BMOVI lt S F 5 p 7 5 P01 32767_ Press the py key 0004 BMOVI lt S P02 _ Press the key sequence 0004 BMOVI lt S WALIU L Es Press the S
429. parameters will revert to the values they had before the configuration was frozen If you attempt to leave the current slot either by pressing the or key while the module s configuration is frozen you will be prompted to indicate whether to use the new combination of values discard the new values and return to the old configuration or to continue editing the changes If you attempt to change the HHP mode or go to RUN mode the FROZENerror message will be displayed Once changes have been made which are not being used by the module you cannot leave the slot until the changes are saved or discarded Example of Editing a PCM For this example assume that a 192K PCM IC693PCM301 module resides in slot 2 of the CPU rack and that the PLC was powered up with the CLR and M T keys depressed that is the PLC was cleared In this example we want to change the mode from CCM only the default to PROGRAMMER PORT and to change the data rate for both ports to 9600 baud Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable ControllersUser s Manual February1996 GFK 0402G RO 02 PCM301 lt S Initial display VERSION 3 01 To view the mode parameter RO 02 PCM301 lt S Press the key MODE CCM ONLY To view other possible modes Press the kev RO 02 PCM301 lt S eee y MODE PROGRAM PRT Each time that you press the key other modes will be displayed When the desired mode is displayed it will be blinkin
430. pdate these real world outputs Q or WAQ Q or WAQ 1 or WAI Q or WAQ The data located in the CPU memory locations specified by P1 and P2 is used to update the real world outputs whose address is given by P1 and P2 Q or WAQ 1 Power flow through this function will take place when the input or output update is complete and this functions enable input has power flow unless e Notall references of the type specified are present within the selected range e The CPU is not able to properly handle the temporary list of I O created by the function e The range specified includes I O modules that are associated with a Loss of I O fault As many DoI O Functions may be programmed into the CPU as necessary Note that each Do I O function will increase the scan time and the watch dog timer may time out To prevent multiple Do I O functions from taking place it is advisable to have the power flow to the enable input be controlled by a contact off of a one shot element OUT or OUT Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 235 USER PROGRAM 1 2 DO I O I O gt I O SERVICE MODULES go lt NEXT FUNCTION 5 zJ 4 I O MEMORY Logic controlling power flow to the enable input enable HERSEIRE ower flow through this function to control another Starting address of input P01 ST function or coil or outputs to be serviced Ending address of inpu
431. peration RO 04 Q lt S Q08 90033 90040 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February1996 GFK 0402G Canceling a Configuration Operation The CLR key may be used to cancel the current configuration operation and leave the slot in its initial state With the current configuration displayed on the screen press the CLR key once to cancel the reference address Press the CLR key a second time to delete the reference type and return the slot to its initial state This must be done before the configuration is complete that is the high reference has been entered If configuration is complete it must be deleted and data entered from the beginning Reconfiguration You can request that the PLC reconfigure the I O based on the default configuration algorithm To do this type a special key sequence shown below on the Hand Held Programmer when the Hand Held Programmer is in the Configuration Mode The Hand Held Programmer does not have to be on any particular screen but the PLC must be in the STOP mode and not scanning I O The following example shows how to request a new configuration Initial display RO 01 PLC lt S KEY CLK OFF Press the key RO 01 PLC lt S R Press the key sequence R0 01 PLC R 9_ Press the key i R0 01 PLC lt S KEY CLK OFF GFK 0402G Chapter 5 I O Configuration 5 13 System Configuration Default When a Series 90 30 PLC is p
432. played while the transfer is taking place This time is approximately 1 35 one minute 35 seconds for an OK program in a Model 311 WRITE OK lt S In order to write data the memory card must not be write protected through the tab on the card If it is write protected when a write operation is requested the write protect will be detected and the request refused A PROTECT error message will be displayed on the screen Remove the write protect condition from the Series 90 Memory Card before attempting another programming operation ACTUAL SIZE END VIEW ACTUAL SIZE TOP VIEW 246055 a N C re a WRITE PROTECT SCREW PROTECTED T 19 5 E Fan WRITE PROTECT SCREW GE Fanuc UNPROTECTED C J 2 INSERT TO LINE f Figure 2 5 EEPROM Memory Card Catalog Number IC693ACC303 GFK 0402G Chapter 2 Operation 2 15 2 16 Verifying RAM with the Memory Card or EEPROM To manually verify the contents of a previously programmed Series 90 Memory Card or EEPROM with the PLC s RAM memory follow this procedure 1 Inprogram mode press the READ VERIFY key twice VERIFY MEM CARD lt S If EEPROM is desired press the key to toggle the selection to MEM CARD or EEPROM 2 Then press the ENT key twice to complete the verify operation see Reading Program Logic Only for selective read VERIFY OK lt S Error Messages During EEPROM MEM Card Operation The following error me
433. processor Module 5 22 Editing PCM Parameters 0 cece eens 5 22 Section 6 Analog I O Modules eeeeeeeeeeeees 5 27 Configuring the 16 Channel Voltage Input Module 5 27 Voltage Ranges and Input Modes 0 000 e cece ee 5 27 Mod le Present sss draus wide tere ee eed eda Ei nee Chee ees 5 28 Selecting WAIL Reference orrie orias terenie aE e aa eE a 5 29 Removing Module From Configuration 0 000 e eee 5 29 Selecting Module Mode 6 6 5 30 Saved Configurations 6 c cece eee eens 5 31 Configuring the 16 Channel Current Input Module 5 32 Current Ranges isu niese oeiras fy atic a r a eta ed E EEE a a 5 32 Module Present rd e e e ta eae Soh a Sahin dea Sd uate totale a 5 32 Selecting WAI Reference turs Tumitindi kaiaa eee 5 34 Removing Module From Configuration 0 00 e cece eens 5 34 Saved Configurations 1 0 0 cece 5 36 Configuring the 8 Channel Current Wltage Input Module 5 37 Module Present irnn reren oe pian te eee et E ES 5 37 Selecting Vol Reference Taasi vei deck atts nee ine sien Bam el ie 5 38 Selecting AQ Reference 6 eee eens 5 39 Removing Module From Configuration 0 000 c cece eee ee 5 39 Selecting Module Default Mode 000 e cece eee eee 5 40 Saved Configurations iser ie he ees eke i arn eRe dee ee lod 5 41 Configuring the Current Wltage Combin
434. put I2 signeddecimal P3 Output Q signeddecimal Double Precision Addition DPADD Il signed decimal Function 61 I2 signeddecimal Q signeddecimal Subtraction SUB Il signed decimal Function 62 I2 signeddecimal Q signeddecimal Double Precision Subtraction DPSUB Il signed decimal Function 63 I2 signeddecimal Q signeddecimal Multiplication MUL Il signeddecimal Function 64 I2 signeddecimal Q signeddecimal Double PrecisionMultiplication DPMUL I signeddecimal Function 65 I2 signed decimal Q signeddecimal Division DIV Il signed decimal Function 66 I2 signeddecimal Q signeddecimal Double Precision Division DPDIV P1 Input n signed decimal Function 67 P2 Input I2 signeddecimal P3 Output Q signeddecimal GFK 0402G Appendix D Function Parameters D 3 gt Table D 1 Function Parameters continued Logicmaster Default Function Parameter Abbreviation Display Format Modulo MOD P1 Input I1 signeddecimal Function 68 P2 Input I2 signeddecimal P3 Output Q signeddecimal Double Precision Modulo DPMOD P1 Input Il signed decimal Function 69 P2 Input I2 signeddecimal P3 Output Q signeddecimal Square Root SQRT P1 Input Value IN signed decimal Function 70 P2 Output Value Q signeddecimal Double Precision Square Root DPSQRT P1 Input Value IN signed decimal Function 71 P2 Output Value Q signeddecimal Double Precision Equal DPEQ P1 Input Il signed decimal Function 72
435. quence C C j E3 M 2 T T ENT Press the 9g key Press the key sequence LJL FUNC Press the A key Press the key sequence Press the S key 0004 INS lt S 0004 INS LD 0005 INS lt S 0005 INS lt S FUNC 45 SHFRW 0005 SHFRW lt S P0O1 _ 0005 SHFRW lt S P01 R 1_ 0005 SHFRW lt S P02 _ Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Press the key sequence 0005 SHFRW lt S P02 R 11_ LIL Press the ay key 0005 SHFRW lt S P03 _ Press the key sequence 0005 SHFRW lt S P03 4 Press the key 0005 SHFRW lt S P04 _ Press the key sequence 0005 SHFRW lt S i S 7 P04 R 60_ Press the A key 0006 INS lt S Press the key sequence J key 0007 INS lt S Ba AQ OUT OUTM Press the ENT GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 207 9 Shift Register Bit SHFRB Function 46 The Shift Register Bit function SHFRB is a conditionally executed function which is used to implement a shift register that will shift a specified bit When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable EN input the function is executed by the CPU and a new shift register bit f
436. quence 0021 INS lt S FUNC 08 _ ENDMC Press the ay key 0021 ENDMC lt S POI _ 0021 ENDMC lt S P01 14_ Press the A key 0022 INS lt S Press the key sequence 1 gt GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 249 9 LABELFunction 7 The LABEL function is an unconditionally executed function which provides the destination of a JUMP TO nested JUMP function with a matching LABEL number A maximum of 256 LABELS END MCRs and CEND CEND available with release 1 only instructions are allowed in a program The following table lists valid memory types for the P1 parameter of the END MCR function Allowable Memory Types for LABEL Function 7 Se a iia ae Fim ee AP Fa sf oe 9 250 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 System Service Request SVCRQ Function 89 GFK 0402G The system service request function SVCRQ is a conditionally executed function which is used to request one of the PLC s special services These special services are listed in the following table Table 9 7 Service Request Functions Function Description 6 Change ReadChecksumTask State and Number of Words to Checksum 7 Change ReadIime of Day Clock only formats 1 and 3 are supported 13 Shut Down stop the PLC 14 Clear PLC Fault Tables 15 Read Last Fault Table Entry 16 Read Elapsed Time Clock 18 ReadI OOverri
437. quence LIL Press the key 0002 OR lt S P01 0002 INS lt S FUNC 25 OR FUNC 4 Press the key sequence ue eae 002 OR lt S Press the at key 0002 OR lt S P02 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G Press the key sequence Press the ay key Press the key sequence i Press the A key Press the key sequence o Press the J key BQ OUTM AQ OUT Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 0002 OR lt s P02 R 2_ 0002 OR lt S P03 _ 0002 OR lt S P03 R 3_ 9 129 9 Bitwise Exclusive or XOR Function 27 The bitwise exclusive or function XOR is a conditionally executed function which To bitwise exclusive or s one 16 bit word to another When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable EN input the function is executed by the CPU and a new Bitwise XOR Function will take place Each scan that power is received the XOR function examines each bit in P1 input 1 and the corresponding bit in P2 input 2 beginning at the first lowest addressed bit in each For each two bits examined if only one is 1 then a 1 is placed in the corresponding location in the string of bits starting at the location specified by parameter 3 Q The three parameters input
438. r 2 Operation for cable connection information Memor y Card Interface An interface to a removable memory card is provided This removable memory card is a Series 90 Memory Card catalog number IC693ACC303 The interface is used for storage and or retrieval of program logic and configuration data Detailed information on using the memory card to read write and verify data can be found in chapter 2 Operating Modes The Hand Held Programmer supports four major operating modes Mode 1 Program Mode Program mode is used to create alter monitor and debug Statement List SL logic programs Interaction Read Write and Verify with a Series 90 Memory Card or EEPROM is also possible in program mode Please refer to chapter 5 Program Edit for additional information on using program mode Mode 2 Data Mode Data mode enables you to view and alter values in various reference tables Numerous display formats are also supported Please refer to chapter 6 Reference Tables for additional information on using data mode Mode 3 Protection Mode Protection mode enables you to control access to protect a programmable logic controller including program logic reference data and configuration information The use of this mode is optional Additional information on protection mode can be found in chapter 7 PLC Control and Status Mode 4 Configuration Mode In configuration mode you can define the makeup of I O modules in the PLC
439. r to overflow at the maximum count frequency If it does the sign of the Counts Tmebase will change from to or to Count Limits Each counter can be assigned upper and lower count limits All Accumulator preload values and output on off preset values must lie within these limits The upper high limit is the most positive and the lower limit is the most negative Both can be positive or both can be negative but the high limit is always greater than the low limit If the Accumulator value is outside the new limits when the limits are changed it is automatically adjusted to the low limit value If the new limits are incompatible that is high lt low or low gt high then they will be rejected and the old limits retained In this case a counter limit error code will be returned To avoid this situation when the limits are changed one at a time a good rule to follow is always move the high limit first when shifting the limits up and always move the low limit first when shifting them down The limit range for both Type A and Type B counters is 32 768 to 32 767 GFK 0402G Output Preset Positions Each counter output has a preset ON and OFF position The output state indicates when the counter accumulator value is between the ON and OFF points If the output is enabled for the HSC channel being used the output will turn on in accordance with the following table Preset closest to low limit Output ON Output
440. ray Move Bit MOVABI Function 130 Array Move Byte MOVABY Function 131 Array Move Word MOVAW Function 132 Array Move INT MOVAI Function 133 Array Move DINT MOVADI Function 134 0 0 e ee eee 9 290 Chapter 10 Error Wiessapes 3 4 00 2 sats galv neacn set nae aaa Ena S sonar 10 1 AppendixA gt Glossary c sa78 cis Peewee pea ie a MTN ase Paes A 1 Glossary of Terms for theSeries90 30 20 MicroPLCs 0 A 1 Glossary of Basic Instructions and Reference Types for Logicmaster90 30 20 MicroSoftware Developed Programs A 11 AppendixB Special Contact References 0 cc cece ee eee erences B 1 AppendixG List of Functions i006 4 15 os eae eoalt nne sSuiaee beeeae stn esw near C 1 AppendixD Function Parameters cece cece ee cee eee eee eeeee D 1 xii Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable ControllersUser s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Figure 1 1 Series 90 30 20 Micro Hand Held Programmer 000000 ee eeee Figure 2 1 Hand Held Programmer Connection to a Series 90 30 PLC Figure 2 2 Hand Held Programmer Connection to a Series 90 20 PLC Figure 2 3 Hand Held Programmer Cable Connection to a Series 90 Micro PLC Figure 2 4 Hand Held Programmer Keypad 0 6 66 Figure 2 5 EEPROM Memory Card Catalog Number IC693ACC303 0004 Figure 4 1 Series 90 Micro Programmable Logic Controller
441. rd of the group of words that have been copied is stored 9 184 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G The following table specifies which memory types are valid for each of the MOVEN function parameters Allowable Memory Types for MOVIN Function 37 and MOVWN Function 42 9 ES a EE ee ee ee E pO E eal ee ee ee Pee Sa BESS e A e EA ae ea ae Fe a t Only SA SB and SC are used S cannot be used LEN cannot be greater than 256 Programming Example for MOVIN Function In the following example the contact of a one shot OUT is used as the controlling element for power flow to enable the MOVIN function When input one closes power flow from the left bus to Q0001 is removed and Q0001 will turn on for one sweep of the CPU scan This ensures that the move of data will take place only once When the function is executed the 16 bit word or words in memory locations R0001 and R0002 specified by starting location parameter P1 are copied to memory locations R0030 and R0031 specified by parameter P3 The number of words to be copied is specified by the constant 2 specified by parameter P2 Ladder Diagram Representation P03 P02 RO0030 CONST 0002 Statement List Representation 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 OUT GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language NOT
442. re the I O Link Interface module when it is set for 32 I O points Initial display RO 02 EMPTY lt S Press the key R0 02 I _ lt S B P the Q key Tess the AO ey RO 02 OI _ lt S Press the key RO 02 OI _ lt S QI _ Note that theI Aland Q AQ keys could have been pressed in the reverse order with the same result a module type of QI LJ At this point the desired reference address can be entered The same restrictions apply to the I O Link Interface modules as to any other I O Modules In addition since the I ENT J Press the key sequence RO 02 QOL QI32 I _ Chapter 5 I O Configuration 5 15 5 16 references and Q references must be the same the HHP will automatically program the Q reference when you program the I reference This restriction also currently exists for the Series 90 30 High Speed Counter HSC If you change either the I or Q reference the HHP will again automatically program both references to the new value and a REF ADJ message will appear on the HHP screen In the following example an I O Link Interface module is assigned the references I0001 I0032 and Q001 Q0032 Initial display RO 02 QI Q132 I _ Press the key sequence R0 02 QI lt S QI32 I0001 I0032 Press the key R0 02 QI lt S Q132 90001 90032 The following method for configuring the I O Link Interface module can only be used when the module is physically present in the slot
443. ress the ENT key Follow this same procedure for parameters D2 and ID3 This parameter has three inputs ID1 ID2 ID3 which combine together to form a 6 character ASCII word which gives this CPU a unique identification value This value is used to identify this CPU when it is connected to a communications bus network which has more then one CPU connected on the network Assume that the network name ABCDE is to be assigned to the PLC This name corresponds to the ASCII HEX sequence 41 42 43 44 45 00 ID1 4142 which equals AB ID2 4344 which equals CD ID3 45 00 which equals E Also assume that the previous parameter MODEM TURNAROUND TIME is currently being viewed Press the key two times to select the ID1 parameter RO 01 PLC MDM TAT 0 Press the gt key two times R0 01 PLC ID1 0000H Press the key sequence Initial display RO 01 PLC lt S 7 T i 2 ID1 4142 H 3 10 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Default I O GFK 0402G Press the T key Press the key Press the key sequence J G J Press the a key Press the key Press the key sequence LJ td td Press the ai key RO 01 PLC lt S ID1 4142 H RO 01 PLC ID2 0000H RO 01 PLC lt S ID1 4344 H RO 01 PLC lt S ID2 4344 H RO 01 PLC ID3 0000H RO 01 PLC lt S ID3 4500 H RO
444. ressthe HEX DEC key to return to 16 bit binary display again gt ROOO1 lt S 0000000000000000 Selecting a Different Top Reference There are several ways to select a different top reference on the display screen The Up and Down cursor keys can be used to scroll the top reference within the current table For example if the I reference table is currently being displayed in single bit binary form and 10022 is the top reference displayed pressing the Down cursor key will select 10023 as the top reference Moving the cursor beyond the upper or lower boundary of a table causes the display to wrap Both the highest and lowest references in the table will be simultaneously displayed Another way of selecting a different top reference is by typing in a new reference address for any table and then pressing the ENT key If the reference address specified exceeds the limits of the table the last reference in that table will be selected as the top reference The TMR ONDTRand UPCTR DNCTRkeys can be used to select the R table in timer counterformat from any reference table The CLR key can be used to abort a request to change the top reference on the display screen and remain on the current display Changing Table Data GFK 0402G The value of the top reference selected can be changed to another value This change can occur regardless of whether the PLC is stopped or is running provided that you have the proper access privilege for w
445. restricted to nine 9 6 Functions cannot have contacts or other functions placed in parallel with them 7 All functions except CEND LABEL ENDMCR NOOP and ENDSW must have control logic programmed before it ina rung Thus functions cannot be programmed to the power rail or be the first element in a rung Entering Subroutines GFK 0402G Subroutines can be included in a statement list program to enhance the overall operation of your Series 90 30 PLC system subroutines cannot be included in a Series 90 20 PLC program In order to enter a subroutine you must define the subroutine To do this first enter Program Mode Once you are in Program Mode you then enter a sub mode which is where you do the actual subroutine definition To access the Subroutine Declaration mode use the following procedure Initial display after pressing the MODE key _ 1 PROGRAM lt S 2 DATA Press the ot key At this point press the ENT key again to enter Program Mode to access the Main program or cursor down to SUBR and press the ENT key to enter the Subroutine Declaration mode Press the key _ 2 SUBR lt S Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 7 Press the T key 0001 NO SUBR lt S 0002 NO SUBR You are now in the Subroutine Declaration mode where declarations of all 64 possible subroutines can be viewed You can view these declarations by using the or keys or the key with a subroutine number key sequence following i
446. result of of group of words LEN shifted operation P03 Number of 16 bit words to be rotated Number of bits to be P02 rotated with each execution Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element 2 Type of function Function 32 ROL 3 Parameter P1 IN the memory address location for the first word of the group of words containing the bits to be rotated 4 Parameter P2 N number of bits to be rotated each time a shift takes place This can be a constant value or a memory location where the value is stored 5 Parameter P3 a constant specifying the number of words each word is 16 bits long that will be connected together to form the total number of bits in the group 6 parameter P4 Q the memory address location where the first word of the group of words containing the results of the bits that have been rotated is to be stored The following table specifies which memory types are valid for each of the ROL function parameters Allowable Memory Types for ROL Function 32 E a N B A a Benene e EES E R D E E E E E E COA A A Only SA SB and SC are used S cannot be used 9 150 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G 9 Programming Example for ROL Function In the following example a
447. reviation Function Dol O DOI O Nested Jump JUMP Nested MasterControl Relay MCR End MCR END MCR Label LABEL No Operation NOOP End Sweep ENDSW System Service Request SVCROQ PIDISA PIDISA PIDIND PIDIND Subroutinecall CALL Description Services for one sweep a specified range of inputs or outputs immediately Causes program execution to jump to a specified location in the logic Programs a master controlrelay An MCR causes all rungs be tween the MCR and the next END MCR function to be executed with negative power flow Terminates a control range extending totheclosestpreceding succeeding JUMP or preceding MCR function Provides a target destination for a jump Supports rung commentfunctionality by performing no opera tion Acts as a temporary end to executing program logic Requests a special PLC service ImplementstandardISAPID proportional integral derivative ISA and independent term PID IND algorithms Causes program execution to go to a specified subroutine decla ration Descriptions of each of these functions are included in this section GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 233 9 Do I O Snapshot DOI O Function 85 9 234 The do I O snapshot function DOI O is a conditionally executed function which performs an immediate I O snapshot of a designated range of discrete or analog inputs or outputs When the logic controlling the enable input to this
448. ribed in the previous example Once displayed press the DEL and ENT keys to remove the key Canceling an OEM Key Change The CLR key can be used to cancel an OEM key change prior to activating it If an OEM key is currently specified pressing the CLR key will only erase the current user input Pressing the CLR key a second time cancels the operation If no user input has been specified when the CLR key is pressed the first time only a single press of CLR key is required to cancel the operation Reading EEPROM Memory Card or Flash Memory With an OEM Key GFK 0402G When an EEPROM Memory Card or flash memory is read into the PLC and the saved configuration contains an OEM key the OEM protection will be AUTOMATICALLY locked after a successful read Chapter 8 PLC Control and Status 8 11 Subroutine Protection Levels 8 12 Series 90 30 Release 3 0 provides an additional level of program logic protection to control view and edit access to individual subroutines subroutines are not supported in the Series 90 20 PLC Two types of subroutine locks are available VIEW in which zooms are disabled for a locked subroutine and EDIT in which the information in a locked subroutine can not be altered The Hand Held Programmer allows you to display the subroutine protection status Note Setting and modifying of subroutine lock passwords and locking and releasing of subroutines can only be done with Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micreoftware U
449. ring the execution of an integer to BCD conversion the decimal equivalent of the 16 bits stored in the memory location specified by parameter P1 that are in the decimal range of 0000 through 9999 are split into four single digit decimal numbers Each of these single digit decimal numbers is converted into its equivalent four bit BCD binary coded decimal number The four bits of each of the BCD numbers equal to each of the single decimal digits is stored in the memory location specified by parameter P2 The BCD digit representing the LSD Least Significant Digit of the decimal digits is stored in the lowest four memory locations specified by parameter P2 When the decimal numbers to be converted are in the range of positive decimal numbers from 0000 to 9999 and the enable input to this function is receiving power flow power flow will pass through this function to another function or a coil If the decimal numbers to be converted are not in the range of decimal numbers 0000 to 9999 and the number is positive the decimal representation of the bits that will be stored in the memory location specified by parameter P2 will be 26215 which is also 9999 Hexadecimal The value stored in the memory location specified by parameter P2 will be Zero if the decimal number to be converted is negative Logic controlling enable EENE Power flow output to power flow to the another function or coil enable input Memory address location where decimal integer P02
450. riple size words Therefore the data occupies the register specified plus the two following registers For the DOI O function if I or Q is being snapshot the start and end parameters must bracket a multiple of eight discrete points To do this the start parameter is GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 35 restricted to the beginning of a byte boundary I I9 I17 and the end parameter is restricted to the end of a byte boundary 18 116 124 To program an instruction sequence which contains one or more functions or function blocks follow these guidelines 1 A function or function block which has one or more Boolean inputs cannot be the first instruction of an instruction sequence 2 The Boolean output of a function or function block does not have to be connected to any other logic For example a function or function block may terminate an instruction sequence 3 Ifa Boolean output of a function block is used to control other logic it may only control the enable input of another function or function block or control an output coil 4 No contact instruction may follow a function or function block instruction in an instruction sequence 5 Functions and function blocks with multiple Boolean inputs cannot appear after another function in an instruction sequence As function numbers are entered the function mnemonic corresponding to the currently entered number is displayed immediately to the r
451. riting to data memory Without the correct privilege your request to initiate a data table change will be denied The PROTECT message will be displayed when the ENT key is depressed and the data table change is attempted Refer to chapter 7 PLC Control and Status for additional information on obtaining the proper access privilege through protection mode Any value entered as a change is restricted to the current data format For example if the display format is signed decimal you can enter a change only as a signed decimal value A hexadecimal value could not be entered In register reference tables R AI and AQ with a current display format of 16 bit binary a data value change must be entered in hexadecimal When attempting to modify a boolean value only the digits 0 and 1 are valid If you try to enter any other digit the key will be ignored no message will be displayed To correct this unsuccessful attempt either specify a valid boolean value or press the CLR key to abort the change Chapter 7 Reference Tables 7 7 When attempting to modify a signed decimal value the valid range is between 32 768 and 32 767 inclusive If you try to enter a value which is not in this range the request will be rejected Again to correct this unsuccessful attempt either specify a valid value or press the CLR key to abort the change In the R reference table with timer counter as the display format data value changes are restricted to th
452. rogrammer was attached to the PLC or since the PLC was last powered up the initial screen will show the lowest level not password protected Remember that the level viewed on the screen last or the default level is the one that is enabled at a given time If the programmable controller is password protected but the access level has been changed the initial screen will show the last level you specified access for To move to another level of access from the one presently displayed the up down cursor keys are used To display a higher level of privileges the password for that level must be known No password is needed to move the display to a lower level of access from the one presently displayed See the section on changing the users access level Password Enable and Disable Configuration GFK 0402G One of the parameters associated with the configuration of the CPU while in the CPU configuration mode of operation is whether to enable or disable the password protection capabilities of the CPU When set for disable no passwords can be set The default state for password protection is enable Note If one or more access levels is currently password protected you cannot disable the password protection feature All levels of protection level 2 3 4 must have the Null password in it To disable passwords follow this procedure 1 Starting in the configuration mode on the HHP and looking at Rack 0 slot 0 for the Model 311 and Model 313
453. rollers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Table 4 3 Abbreviations for All Type A Counter Configuration continued HHP Screen HHP Parameter Number Abbreviation Value 1 Value 2 Default Counter3 Enable Disable DISABLE Counter 3 Output Enable Disable DISABLE Counter 3 Preload Strobeelection PRELOAD Cc Counter 3 PWM Output Enable Disable DISABLE Counter 3 PulseOutputEnable Disable DISABLE Counter4 Enable Disable DISABLE Counter 4 Output Enable Disable DISABLE Counter 4 Preload Strobeselection PRELOAD ojo G Counter 4 PWM Output Enable Disable 61 PWMOUT4 ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE These parameters apply only to DC IN DC OUT type Series 90 Micro PLCs ojo GFK 0402G Chapter 4 Series 90 Micro PLC Configuration 4 9 Table 4 4 Abbreviations for Type B1 3 A4 Counter Configuration Parameter HHP Screen HHP Number Abbreviation Value 1 Value 2 Default Counter 1 Enable Disable DISABLE Counter 1 Output Enable Disable DISABLE Counter 1 Preload Strobeelection PRELOAD Cc Counter4 Enable Disable DISABLE Counter 4 Output Enable Disable DISABLE Counter 4 Preload Strobeelection PRELOAD Cc Counter 4 PWM Output Enable Disable 29 PWMOUT4 ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE These parameters apply only to DC IN DC OUT type Series 90 Micro PLCs ojo Note Counter 1 is an A QUAD B type counter and counter 4 is an A type counter 4 10 Hand Held Programmerfor
454. rough this function occurs only when the functions enable input is receiving power flow and the last bit shifted out is a one flow condition of this function Note The B2 output is used with Logicmaster 90 programming software as a connection point for connecting another function or coil to the power Logic controlling the enable MMN a ower flow through this function enable input Memory location for first P01 word Constant value specifying number of bits to be shifted Logic controlling state of bits into vacant locations WORD IN B2 LEN 001 N Q Bl as determined by state of last bit shifted out P03 Number of words to be shifted P04 Location where first shifted word is to be stored Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element 2 Logic from the left bus controlling the state of input B1 This logic must start with an LD element Type of function Function 30 SHL Parameter P1 IN the memory address location for the first word of the group of words containing the bits to be shifted 5 Parameter P2 N a constant specifying the number of bits to be shifted each time a shift takes place 6 Parameter P3 a constant specifying the number of words each word is 16 bits long that will be connected together to form the total number of bits in the group 7
455. rovides outputs for control of processes or user supplied devices such as relays or motor starters It is usually programmed in relay ladder logic and is designed to operate in an industrial environment Programmer The hardware device required to run Logicmaster 90 software A Workstation Interface board must be installed in the programmer to communicate with the Series 90 30 PLC Programmer Port The serial port on the power supply module accessible through a 15 pin connector to which the programmer must be connected in order to communicate with the PLC Both the Logicmaster 90 programmer and the Hand Held Programmer connect to this port PROM An acronym for Programmable Read Only Memory which is a retentive digital device programmed at the factory and not easily changed by the user Usually contains programs for internal system use Rack A Series 90 30 baseplate when it has modules installed in it Rack Number A unique number from 0 to 4 assigned to a Series 90 30 Model 331 Model 340 Model 341 or Model 351 baseplate for rack identification purposes The main baseplate is always rack 0 Rack Number DIP Switch ADIP three position DIP switch located on the backplane directly behind the power supply which must be configured to select a unique rack number from 1 to 4 for Series Appendix A Glossary A 7 A 8 90 30 PLC Model 331 Model 340 Model 341 or Model 351 expansion racks Rack numbers cannot be duplicated in a syst
456. rray values less than or equal toa specified integer value Search for all array values less than or equal toa specified double precision integer value Search for all array values greater than a specified byte value Search for all array values greater than a specified word value Search for all array values greater than a specified integer value Search for all array values greater than a specified double precision integer value Search for all array values greater than or equal to a specified byte value Search for all array values greater than or equal to aspecified word value Search for all array values greater than or equal to a specified integer value Search for all array values greater than or equal to a specified double precision integer value Copy specified number of bits from a source array to a destination array Copy specified number of bytes from a source array to a destination array Copy specified number of words from a source array to a destination array Copy specified number of integer values from a source array to a destination array Copy specified number of double precision integer values froma source array toa destination array Page 9 xx 274 274 274 274 276 276 276 276 278 278 278 278 280 280 280 280 290 290 290 290 290 9 34 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual
457. rst bit of the array The value displayed contains 16 bits regardless of the length of the array The ok output will receive power flow unless one of the following conditions occurs e Enable is false e N SNX is greater than SR LEN e N DNX is greater than DS LEN The function parameters for the Array Move functions are shown in the following illustration The form of the function is the same for all Array Move functions the only difference being the data type Logic for controlling enable RRapNew4 power flow _MOVE Starting Address of source SR DS P6 Starting address of array destination array P5 Number of elements starting at SR and DS in the array Index into source array Index into destination array Number of elements to be moved Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G Parameters for Array Move Functions Parameter enable SR P01 SNX P02 DNX P03 N P04 LEN P05 DS P06 ok Description When the function is enabled the operation is performed SR contains the starting address of the source array For Bit Array Move any dis crete reference may be used it does not need to be byte aligned However 16 bits beginning with the reference address specified are displayed online SNX contains the index of the source array DNX contains the index of
458. ry 16 0 1 In addition the R table supports an additional display format timer counter The timer counterdisplayformat is useful as a timer counter access function This screen format is shown below Table 7 6 Screen Format for Viewing a R Table in Timer Counter Format EN Q PLC Timer Counter Top Reference 0 1 0 1 State Preset Value 32768 32767 Current Value 32768 32767 EN The EN field indicates the current state of the enable bit within the timer counter control word It will be either a 1 enabled or a 0 not enabled Q The Q field indicates the current state of the output bit within the timer counter control word It will be either a 1 indicating timing or counting completion has occurred or a 0 indicating timing or counting completion has not occurred Preset Value The preset value field indicates the preset value currently applied to the timer or counter It will be a signed decimal number Current Value The current value field indicates the current or elapsed value currently extracted from the timer or counter It will be a signed decimal number Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Error Messages Error messages are displayed in a window on the screen which overlays the currently displayed information The original information is redisplayed when the next key is pressed Table 7 7 Screen Format for Displaying
459. ry addresses I1 to 140 When I99 closes passes power flow to the enable input the portion of the array between I17 and 140 will be searched for an element whose value is equal to IN If I1 to I8 1 I9 to 116 9 I17 to 124 11 125 to I32 19 133 to I40 21 and M5 19 then the search will begin at I17 to I24 and conclude at I25 to 132 when FD will be set to true and a 4 the array index will be written to Q41 to Q48 Ladder Diagram Representation I0099 ISSE I0001 P01 P04 CONST P02 P05 Q0041 0002 M0005 P03 Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10099 0002 FUNC 101 SREQB P01 10001 P02 2 P03 M0005 P04 5 POS Q0041 0003 OUT Q0001 9 282 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display Initial display 0001 INS lt s Press the key sequence 0001 INS lt S A Le Ge EJ LJ m zo Press the S key 0002 INS lt S Press the key sequence 0002 INS lt S Func i 0 i FUNC 101 SREQB Press the S key 0002 SREQB lt S POI _ Ri 0002 SREQB lt S Press the key 77 1 sequence Pot I 1_ Press the key 0002 SREQB lt S P02 _ GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 283 Press the key Press th
460. s Do not write to this location Used internally for storage of intermediate values Do not write to this location Internal elapsed time storage time last executed Do not write to these locations Lower range for SP PV for faceplate display Upper range for SP PV for faceplate display Reserved for GE Fanuc use Cannot be used for other purposes 9 258 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Initialization Values The following table lists typical initialization values for the PID function block Register Ref 0 Ref 2 Ref 3 Ref 4 Ref 5 Ref 6 Ref 7 Ref 8 Ref 9 Ref 10 Ref 11 Purpose FB Units Suggested Default Range oon a 320 0 to 100 of error 320 0 to 100 of error Minimum Slew Time Seconds per full travel 0 0 to 32767 GFK 0402G Description Of Operation When the PID function block is enabled the configured execution interval Ref 2 is compared to the time since the last execution of the function block If enough time has elapsed the function block is executed The PID loop equation is solved based upon the actual elapsed time since the last complete execution rather then the programmed execution interval If the calculated control variable is beyond a configured clamp limit YRef 9 or YRef 10 or has changed at a rate greater then the slew rate limit YoRef 11 the control variable is held
461. s power removed or turned off OR Logical A logical operation between bits whereby if any bit is a 1 the result will be a 1 Appendix A Glossary A 5 A 6 Output Data transferred from the CPU through a module for level conversion to be used for controlling an external device or process Output Devices Physical devices such as motor starters solenoids etc that are switched by the PLC Output Module AnI O module that converts logic level signals within the CPU to usable output signals for controlling a machine or process Output Scan Time The time required for the CPU to update all I O controllers with new output values When Model 30 I O is present this includes the time to actually write to each module Panel Mounting Flange Flanges with mounting holes on the sides of a baseplate used to mount the baseplate on an electrical panel or wall Parallel Communication A method of data transfer whereby data is transferred on several wires simultaneously Parity The anticipated state either odd or even of a set of binary digits Parity Bit Abit added to a memory word to make the sum of the bits in a word always even even parity or always odd odd parity Parity Error A condition that occurs when a computed parity check checksum does not agree with the parity bit Peripheral Equipment External devices that can communicate with a PLC for example programmers printers etc PLC Fault Table A
462. s Do I Ofunction If the specified references include a smart I O module such as a High Speed Counter or Axis Positioning Module the ALT parameter P1 will be ignored for the references assigned to that module That is the real world input will be put into or outputs taken from the references configured for that module as if no ALT parameter had been programmed All of the inputs or outputs of a smart I O module are scanned That is if either I or AI are specified by P1 and P2 then BOTH lI and AI if present will be scanned from the smart module If EITHER Q or AQ are specified by P1 and P2 both Q and AQ will be scanned to the smart module Note that the Do I O function is not allowed with the Enhanced GCM GCM and GCM modules Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G P1 P2 P3 Pi P2 P3 P1 P2 P3 P1 P2 P3 GFK 0402G 9 If parameter P3 is programmed as a 1 minus 1 then the function will be executed as if P3 were not programmed I or AI Condition of these inputs will be stored in the table memory locations spe cified by parameter P3 I or AI I or AI Q or PAQ I or AI Condition of these real world inputs are stored in the memory table in the CPU with the same memory address as P1 and P2 I or AI 1 Q or WAQ The data located in the memory location specified by P3 is used as the source to u
463. s can be done using either an EEPROM a MEM card or a UVEPROM if copied from an EEPROM In this discussion these devices will be referred to as the device since all of the rules apply equally to all three The model of the CPU from which the device was written is referred to as the source CPU The model of the CPU into which the contents of the device will be read is referred to as the target CPU There are certain restrictions on this portability as listed below 1 Programs must be compatible with the target CPU That is they must not have references to addresses which do not exist in the target CPU and they must fit into the size restrictions of the target CPU If non valid references are attempted and this error is detected by the PLC a PRG ERR message will be reported to the user by the HHP 2 Configurations must be compatible with the target CPU That is they must not contain modules not supported by the target CPU nor have modules in racks not supported by the target CPU If this error is detected by the PLC then a CFG ERR message will be reported to the user by the HHP 3 When reading configurations from a model which supports more slots into a CPU which supports fewer slots the slots higher then those supported by the target CPU must be EMPTY 4 When reading configurations from a model which supports fewer slots into a CPU which supports more slots the slots in the target CPU beyond those supported by the source CPU will be
464. s memory cartridge provides the Hand Held Programmer with a means for off line storage and retrieval of the application program and system configuration data Microsecond ns One millionth of a second 1 x 10 or 0 000001 second Millisecond One thousandth of a second 1 x 10 3 or 0 001 second May be abbreviated as ms Mnemonic An abbreviation given to an instruction usually an acronym formed by combining initial letters or parts of words Model 30 I O The Series 90 30 I O subsystem consisting of discrete analog and intelligent input and output modules Module A replaceable electronic subassembly usually plugged into connectors on a backplane and secured in place but easily removed in case of a failure or system redesign In the Series 90 30 PLC a combination of a printed circuit board and its associated faceplate and removable terminal connector on I O modules which when combined form a complete assembly Molded Hinge Ahinge at the top rear of each Model 30 I O module type which when the module is installed latches onto the top of the baseplate This hinge helps to keep the module securely in place Noise Undesirable electrical disturbances to normal signals generally of high frequency content Non Retentive Coil A coil that will turn off upon removal of applied power to the CPU Non Volatile Memory A memory for example PROM capable of retaining its stored information under no power condition
465. seplate A frame containing the backplane for the system bus and connectors into which modules are inserted In the Series 90 30 PLC Model 311 and Model 313 the baseplate also contains the CPU Battery Connector A connector wired to a Lithium battery which connects the battery to the CMOS RAM memory devices by being plugged into a receptacle accessed via a door on the power supply faceplate Baud A unit of data transmission Baud rate is the number of bits per second transmitted Bit The smallest unit of memory Can be used to store only one piece of information that has two states for exampleOne Zero On Off Good Bad Yes No Data that requires more then two states for example numerical values 000 to 999 requires multiple bits see Word Bus An electrical path for transmitting and receiving data Byte A group of binary digits operated on as a single unit In the Series 90 30 and Series 90 20 PLCs a byte is eight bits Circuit Wiring Diagram Field wiring information that provides a guide to users for connecting field devices to input and output modules Each I O module has a circuit wiring diagram printed on the inside surface of an insert in the module s hinged door CONFIG SYS File A file that describes the system requirements for the software The CONFIG SYS file must be custom tailored to fit the specific hardware configuration of your system and Logicmaster 90 requirements Constant A fixed value or an item o
466. ser specified protection of the PLC program applies to all subroutines within the program Subroutine Protection however provides you with a means to limit access at the subroutine level without locking the entire program For example if the PLC is not password protected and OEM protection is disabled any subroutine in the program could be view locked or edit locked throughLogicmaster90 30 20 Microwithout affecting view or edit access to the remainder of the program logic Display of Subroutine Protection Status The protection status of each subroutine is displayed in the Subroutine Declaration List which exists in the Subroutine Declaration submode View locked and edit locked subroutines appear in the list with a lower case v or e respectively following the subroutine number for example 0002vSUBR 02 0003eSUBR 03 Subroutines for which protection has been released appear in the list with a blank following the subroutine number Attempt to Zoom Into a View Locked Subroutine There are two ways that you can to zoom into a subroutine The first is from the Subroutine Declaration List and the second is from a Subroutine Call Function If the desired subroutine is view locked the zoom will not be permitted and an error message will be displayed Zoom From the Subroutine Declaration List The following example shows how to enter the Subroutine Declaration mode Press the key _ 1 PROGRAM lt S 2 DATA Hand Held Programmer for S
467. shown below then Registers 10 and 11 be as shown below The last bit shifted out of Register 2 was a one therefore this function will pass powerflow Ladder Diagram Representation 00001 R0001 P1 CONST 0002 CONST 0001 P2 R0010 Ro001 o Jolol lololililolololilililolh INITIAL STATUS OF B2 sas AFTER SHIFT J PATTERN Rooo2 1 Jo 1 1 lolilololo loli l i loli o VALUE INPUT m FRM TATUS OF B1 Ro010 o o 1 olo l l lo olol l l lolili Po kai THE SHIFT Roo o 1l lol lolo o lo l l l lol o o J FUNCTION Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 OUT MO0001 0003 LD MO0001 0004 LD 10002 0005 FUNC 30 SHL P1 R0001 P2 0001 P3 0002 P4 R0010 0006 OUT Q0001 Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 139 9 140 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes Initial display Press the key sequence Ay i Al Press the key o Press the key sequence OUT OUTM 7 Y Press the ay key Press the key sequence C Le E T Press the key Press the key sequence o LJ Jej Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 HHP Display 0001 INS
468. sing the CLR key a second time with no data value currently typed in will abort the data change operation This is the same as using the Left cursor key described above to abort the data value change operation Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable ControllersUser s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Overriding a Discrete Reference In the Model 331 340 341 and 351 CPUs a discrete reference within the I Q M or G table top reference only can be overridden regardless of whether the PLC is stopped or is running This function is not available in the Series 90 30 Model 311 or Model 313 CPU or the Series 90 20 Model 211 CPU An override may be invoked only if the current data format is binary and if the proper privilege level is accessed Once it is overridden you can still change the reference s contents as previously described With the reference you wish to override displayed as the top reference press the key to invoke the override The data value of the reference blinks to indicate that the reference is now overridden This override condition is maintained whether or not the reference is displayed on the screen To cancel the override press the key again with the overridden reference displayed as the top reference Clearing a Data Table The Reference Tables function enables you to clear an entire data table initializing the contents of that table to all zeros 0 In order to clear a table
469. sion system or 700 feet 213 meters in a remote expansion system Firmware A series of instructions contained in ROM Read Only Memory which are used for internal processing functions These instructions are transparent to the user Grounding Terminal A terminal on each power supply which must be connected to earth ground through the AC power source to ensure that the rack is properly and safely grounded Hardware All of the mechanical electrical and electronic devices that comprise the Series 90 30 PLC and its applications Hexadecimal A numbering system having 16 as a base represented by the digits 0 through 9 then A through E Hinged Door A plastic door on the front of a module which when open allows access to certain module hardware features Input Module AnI O module that converts signals from user devices to logic levels that can be used by the CPU Appendix A Glossary A 3 A 4 Input Scan Time The time required for the CPU to scan all I O controllers for new input values When model 30 I O is present this includes the time to actually read each module I O Input Output That portion of the PLC to which field devices are connected and which isolates the CPU from electrical noise O Electrical Isolation Amethod of separating field wiring from logic level circuitry Typically this is accomplished through use of solid state optical isolation devices 1 0 Fault Table A fault table listing I O faults
470. specified bit COMRQ CommunicationsRequest Allows the program to communicate with an intelligent module such asa PCM or Genius Communications Module Descriptions of each of these functions are included in this section GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 183 2 Multiple Word Move MOVEN MOVIN and MOVWN Functions 37 and 42 The multiple array word move function MOVIN or MOVWN is a conditionally executed function which moves a copy of an array of multiple 16 bit words from one location to another The MOVEN function has two forms MOVIN Function 37 and MOVWN Function 42 The two functions differ only in the default display format applied to their parameters signed integer will be displayed for the MOVIN function and hexadecimal will be displayed for the MOVWN function The location of the word or group of words to be copied is specified by parameter P1 which is the memory address location for the first word of the group of consecutive words to be copied The number of 16 bit words in the consecutive group of words to be copied is specified by parameter P2 LEN The limits of LEN depend on the memory type being used and the starting address of the first word of the group of words to be copied and the starting address of the final memory location where the words have been copied to If the length plus the memory address exceed the total number of words for that memory type DATA ERR will be displa
471. ss the key o Press the key sequence A OR rn Bi F NOT Press the key Press the key sequence fifo o TMR FUNC aa ONDTR Press the at key Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language HHP Display 0001 INS lt S 0001 INS 0002 INS lt S OR NOT I 2_ 0003 INS lt S 0003 INS FUNC 10 0003 TMR lt S P01 9 41 9 42 Press the key sequence Press the ay key Press the key sequence Press the ai key Press the key sequence Press the A key Press the key sequence BE Ba AQ OUT OUTM 0003 TMR lt S P 10 0003 TMR lt S P02 0003 TMR lt S P02 25_ 0003 TMR lt S P03 0003 TMR lt S P03 R1_ 0004 INS lt S Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 On Delay ONDTR Function 13 GFK 0402G The on delay timer ONDTR is a conditionally executed function which provides on delay timing When the logic controlling the enable EN input passes power flow to this function the current value starts at a value of zero and increments as long as the function receives power flow at its enable EN input even if the current value is greater then the preset value up to a decimal value of 32767 The timing increments may be in tenths of
472. ss the key sequence 0003 SHFRB lt S P03 4 Press the at key 0003 SHFRB lt S PO4 _ Press the key sequence 0003 SHFEB lt S ZOE lee AQ Press the T key 0004 INS lt S Press the key sequence 0004 INS zS ma B Bi OUT Q 1 OUTM AQ Press the S key 0005 INS lt S GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 211 9 Stage Bit Sequencer SEQB Function 47 9 212 The N stage bit sequencer function SEQB is a conditionally executed function which performs a bit sequence shift through an array of bits The stage bit sequencer is a group of sequentially numbered memory locations with each location one bit long The number of bits in the group is its length which is specified by parameter P3 LEN The memory address location of the first bit of this group which is the starting address of the group of bits is specified by parameter P2 Beginning at the starting address each bit is assigned a number by the CPU The numbers start at one for the first bit located at the starting address and increment sequentially to the maximum number of bits in the group which is the length number specified by parameter P3 Each of these locations is called a step and the number given by the CPU to each of the single bit memory locations is called the step number This stage bit sequencer also has a pointer which is an indicating device that points to
473. ss the key sequence B o E Press the S key Press the key sequence Ay Al Press the key Press the key sequence BE ENT Press the 49 Key A Al OUT BQ OUTM AQ Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 0002 INS lt S 0002 INS lt S FUNC 70 _SQRT 0002 SQRT lt S P01 0002 SQRT lt S P01 180_ 0002 SQRT lt S P02 0002 SQRT lt S P02 AI 1 0004 INS lt S 9 89 2 Section 3 Relational Functions Relational functions are used to compare two numbers of the same data type which can be either single or double precision integers When the function receives power flow to the enable input the function is executed and it compares the value I1 to the value 12 These values must be the same data type The following relational functions are described in this section Abbreviation Function Description EQ Equal Test two signed word numbers for equality DPEQ Double Precision Equal Test two signed double word numbers for equality NE Not Equal Test two signed word numbers for non equality DPNE Double Precision Not Equal Test two signed double word numbers for non equality GT Greater Than Test for one signed word number greater than another DPGT Double Precision Greater Than Test for one signed double word number greater than another GE Greater Than or Equ
474. ss through this function GFK 0402G The up counter is retentive on power failure to the CPU and when the mode is changed from run to stop and back to run again There is no automatic initialization during power up the current value does not go to zero unless this up counter is reset Logic for controlling count ERENT oo flow output to counting a coil or another function Logic for controlling reset R the Reset Preset Value P1 PV location Address P2 Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 53 Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the count input from the left bus Must start with an LD element 2 Logic controlling the reset input from the left bus This logic must start with an LD element 3 Type of function Function 15 4 Parameter P1 preset value This can be a constant number or the number of a register that will contain the preset value 5 Parameter P2 counter location number of the first register of the three sequential registers containing the operating values The following table specifies which memory types are valid for each of the UPCTR function block s parameters Allowable Memory Types for UPCTR Function 15 Pe a a Oa a ee e o Ge FA a E A E Only positive constants are allowed except 1 which indicates no preset parameter Preset Value P01 The preset value parameter indicates th
475. ssages may occur during EEPROM MEM card operations NO PRIV Current privilege level of the PLC is too low for the intended operation see Chapter 7 NO CARD No memory card is inserted in the Hand Held Programmer or the inserted card has insufficient capacity for the operation CFG ERR The I O configuration saved in the memory card is incompatible with the target PLC for example EEPROM has a PCM configured and the target PLCis311 211 ROM ERR No EEPROM installed or EEPROM data has been corrupted or never been written COMM ERR The PLC model number saved on the device cannot be read into the PLC or a data error occurred while reading a memory card PROTECT The memory card is write protected VRFY ERR The data in the device does not exactly match the data in PLC RAM PSW ERR An attempt was made to read a configuration enabling passwords into a PLC with passwords disabled or with an active password PRG ERR The program saved in the device cannot be read into this PLC for example the saved program reference is R2000 and target PLC is a model 311 or 211 DO I O CPU is configured for STOP MD DOI O reconfigure the CPU for STOP MD NOI O Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Program Configuration Portability Programs configuration and registers can be transported from one model to a different model of a Series 90 30 or Series 90 20 CPU Thi
476. ssing key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display Initial display 0001 INS lt S Press the key sequence Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 135 NS e LD 9 136 Press the S key Press the key sequence LIL FUNG Press the S key Press the key sequence SAIE Press the A key Press the key sequence SAG Press the A key Press the key sequence Ba AQ OUT OUTM 0002 INS 0002 INS FUNC 29 NOT 0002 NOT PO1 0002 NOT lt S lt S lt S lt S P01 R 250_ 0002 NOT P02 0002 NOT lt S lt S P02 R 251_ 0002 XOR lt S Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Bit Shift Left SHL Function 30 GFK 0402G The bit shift left function SHL is a conditionally executed function which shifts all bits in a word array left a given number of bit positions LSB B2 f When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable EN input the function is executed by the CPU During the execution of a shift left function all of the bits in a word or a group of consecutive 16 bit words connected together to form a continuous string of bits are shifted left a specified number of bit locations The location of the word or group o
477. step is treated as the initial instruction step to be displayed In the following example assume that you are viewing a reference table and wish to select the program mode of operation Further assume that you have not entered the program mode since the PLC was last powered up that there is no program in the CPU and there is no OEM protection and that you have at least level 3 access of availability If the following screen is displayed while attempting to enter your logic it means that your system is password protected and you should refer to Chapter 8 for more details 0001 PROTECT lt S LD I0001 O Initial display gt ROOO1 OOOOH lt S vie R0002 0000H Press the key 1_1 PROGRAM lt S 2 DATA _1 is blinking Press the key 1 1 PROGRAM lt S 2 DATA _1 is blinking The following screen is not valid with a Series 90 20 PLC system Press the key _1 is blinking GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 11 9 12 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 Press the key 0001 lt S lt END OF PROGRAM gt _1 is blinking If lt R is displayed instead of lt S it means that the CPU is in the Run Mode If this is the case use the following procedure to put the CPU into the STOP mode Otherwise skip to Enter the Insert Mode of Operation Press the RUN key PRESS lt gt KEY lt
478. sult CV When there is power flow at the enable input and no power flow at MAN the PID algorithm is applied to SP and PV with the result placed in CV OK is set to a one true if the PID function executes successfully or if the elapsed time was less then10 ms and the algorithm was set to run every sweep otherwise it is set to a 0 false When there is power flow at the enable input and MAN the PID block is placed into manual mode Output CV maintains its current value and can be adjusted with the UP and DN inputs While the PID block is in manual mode the PID algorithm is executed so that the calculated result tracks with the manually controlled CV value This prevents the PID function from building up an integral component while in manual mode and provides bumpless transfer when the block is placed back into automatic mode Logic controlling power enable SP A onr N PID_IND flow to enable input OK Logic 1 when input data valid Logic 0 CV is not changed CV P04 Location of control variable Location of set point P01 Location of process variable P02 Manual auto mode toggle Manual mode up adjustment Manual mode down adjustment P03 Location of parameter block containing data structure for this PID algorithm GFK 0402G Parameters for PID Function Parameter Description enable When enabled the PID function is performed SP P01 SP is the control loop set point PV P02
479. t Once the subroutines have been viewed you can then enter the and keys to zoom into the desired subroutine and declare it Once the subroutine is declared you can zoom out of the subroutine by entering the and Z keys to return to the Subroutine Declaration level Use the following key sequence to declare the subroutine oaia 0001 NO SUBR lt S Initial display 0002 NO SUBR Press the key sequence l 0001 S01 lt S lt END OF SUBR gt You can now enter instructions for the selected subroutine For example to define a subroutine with the following statement list program 0001 LD NOT 10001 0002 OUT Q0001 Enter the following key sequences 0001 s01 lt S lt END OF SUBR gt Press the key sequence INS 0001 INS S01 lt S Press the key TE Lo 5 f 0001 s01 lt S LD NOT I 1_ Initial display i NOT Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G Press the S 0002 INS S01 lt S Press the key sequence Bg i 0002 INS S01 lt S 7 1 i OUT Q1_ Press the T key 0003 INS S01 lt S Press the key 0003 S01 lt S lt END OF SUBR gt You can now zoom out of the subroutine to define other subroutines or to return to the main program definition To zoom out of a subroutine and return to the subroutine declaration list enter the following key sequence 0001 SUBR 01 lt
480. t 0 Error Term When this bit is set to 0 the error term is SP PV When this bit is set to 1 the error term is PV SP 1 Output Polarity When this bit is set to 0 the CV output represents the output of the PID calculation When it is set to 1 the CV output represents the negative of the output of the PID calculation 2 Derivative action on PV When this bit is set to 0 the derivative action is applied to the error term When it is set to 1 the derivative action is applied to PV All remaining bits should be zero A signed word value that defines the output when in Manual mode GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 257 2 Table 8 8 PID Function Block Data continued Data Item Control Word SP CV PV Output Diff Term Storage Int Term Storage Slew Term Storage Clock Lower Range Upper Range Reserved Description A discrete data structure with the following format 0 Override 1 Auto Manual 2 Enable 3 Raise 4 Lower Override When the override bit is set to 1 the function block is executed based upon the current values of up down and manual these values will not be written with the discrete inputs into the function block When the override bit is set to 0 the up down and manual values are set to the values as defined by the function block discrete inputs Override also affects the values used for SP If override is set the function b
481. t S P03_ Press the key sequence 0004 DPSUB lt S R 7 o 2 P03 R 203_ Press the J key 0005 INS lt S Press the key sequence OUT ma 1 Press the A key 0006 INS lt S GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 71 Ba AQ 2 Multiplication MUL Function 64 Double Precision Multiplication DPMUL Function 65 Two multiplication functions are available The signed multiplication function MUL is a conditionally executed function which multiplies one signed integer word value by another The double precision signed multiplication function DPMUL is a conditionally executed function which multiplies one signed double word value by another When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable input the function is executed by the CPU and a new signed multiplication for MUL or double precision signed multiplication for DPMUL will take place During a signed or double precision signed multiplication execution the value in P1 input 1 is multiplied by the value in P2 input 2 The results of this multiplication is stored in the memory location specified by P3 Q The MUL and DPMUL functions operate on INT signed integer and DINT double precision integer data respectively The INT MUL function is Function 64 and the DINT MUL function is Function 65
482. t back off the limit The Accumulator can also be changed by loading a new value from the CPU or by applying a Preset Input Note In either the single shot or continuous mode the counter stops at 1 past the limit that is at n 1 if n is the high limit and n 1 if n if the low limit Therefore where N is the desired number of pulses to be counted you must configure the counter so that high limit N 1 or low limit N 1 GFK 0402G Chapter 4 Series 90 Micro PLC Configuration 4 11 4 12 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 Strobe Edge Strobe inputs are edge sensitive Each Strobe input on the module can be individually configured to have either the positive or the negative edge active By default they are positive edge sensitive Counter Timebase For each counter the timebase represents a span of time which can be used to measure the rate of counting For example the program may be required to monitor the number of count pulses which are occurring every 30 seconds A timebase from 1 msec to 65535 msec can be selected for each counter The counter timebase is set to 1 second 1000 msec by default The module stores the number of counts that occurred during the last completed timebase interval in the Counts Tmebase register The range of the Counts Timebase register is 32768 and 32767 counts The timebase value selected should not allow the Counts Timebase registe
483. t be the same data type 32 bit two s complement signed integers and must be within the range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 When using the Hand Held Programmer to program a constant into parameters P1 or P2 the constant must be in the range of a single precision number 32768 to 32767 The memory locations for P1 and P2 are each 32 bits long The storage area for each Register Al and AQ is 16 bits long therefore two consecutive registers AI words or AQ words must be used for each double precision signed number which is to be stored The address of the lower of the two registers AI words or AQ words is used as the reference to store and retrieve the double precision number The Hand Held Programmer can only display a maximum of 16 bits one Register AI or AQ word at a time therefore a double precision number outside of the range 32768 to 32767 cannot be programmed into the CPU or monitored using the Hand Held Programmer The hexadecimal or binary number for each register AI or AQ word can be programmed into or monitored provided that they are placed together outside of the CPU to form the 32 bit double precision signed number This function will pass power flow when there is power flow to the enable input and the value specified by parameter P1 is less than or equal to the value specified by parameter P2 Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 111 P1 Input 1 v P2 Input 2 Logic for controlling power enabl
484. t found 0 if not found P4 Length of array Index into array P2 P5 Set to position in array of element Object of search P3 9 274 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Description of Parameters for Search Less Than Functions Parameter enable AR P01 Input NX P02 IN P03 LEN P04 FD Output NX P05 Output NX holds the position within the array of the search target Description When the function is enabled the operation is performed AR contains the starting address of the array to be searched Input NX contains the index into the array IN contains the object of the search LEN specifies the number of elements starting at AR that make up the array to be searched FD indicates that an element whose value is less than IN has been found and the function was successful Allowable Memory Types for Search Less Than Functions Parameter ow A e OM oT 8 5G VR WAT AQ const none i a e eee eee eet SE CB ACR SCT BC ae eae eee ee ee ee ee ee ee le eee ee ee ee ee eee 5 OO o ou ol GFK 0402G Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function Valid reference for INT BYTE or WORD data only not valid for DINT Valid reference for BYTE or WORD data only not valid for INT or DINT SA SB SC only S cannot be used Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language
485. t is to be stored 9 130 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G 9 The following table specifies which memory types are valid for each of the XOR function parameters Allowable Memory Types for XOR Function 27 Pec E Ee ee Ee eee Re ee i ee Ec a EF a ee Sro aman FG e e t Only SA SB and SC are used S cannot be used Programming Example for XOR Function In this example when input 10001 is closed passing power flow to the enable input The 16 bits of register RO140 specified by parameter P1 are bitwise XORed to the 16 bits of register R0141 specified by parameter P2 The result is stored in Register RO281 specified by parameter P3 For example if register R0140 has the decimal number 8136 in it and register R0141 has the decimal number 8137 in it The result in Register R0281 is the decimal number 1 R141 R281 RESULT XOR WORD l l R0140 P1 I1 Q P3 l l R0141 P2 12 Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 FUNC 27 XOR P1 R0140 P2 R0141 P3 R0281 0003 OUT Q0001 Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 131 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display Initial display 0001 INS lt S Press the key sequence A 1 f Al Press the key 0002 INS lt S 0001 INS o Press th
486. t level will be level 4 If the PLC is password protected at least one level has a password other then NULL this default level will be one level less then the lowest numbered level which is password protected For example if levels 4 and 3 are password protected level 2 would be the default access level When displaying a level of access that level can be toggled between the users mode and the OEM mode only if the OEM password is known When the level of access is in the OEM protection mode the letters OEM will be displayed on the screen See the section on screen displays and locking amp releasing OEM protection for more information Entering Protection Mode When protection mode is selected the initial screen is dependent on the current level of access privilege 1 To select the protection mode press the MODE key to display the operating mode selections The _ and 1 will be blinking _ 1 PROGRAM lt S 2 DATA 2 Press the 3 key to select protection mode 3_ 1 PROGRAM lt S 2 DATA 3 Press the ENT key to enter the new mode LEVEL4 lt S Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G If the programmable controller is not password protected the initial screen will show level 4 the default level if no passwords have been set If the programmable controller is password protected and the access level has not been changed since the Hand Held P
487. t of the password The Left cursor key enables you to lock or release OEM protection from any password access level When the Left cursor key is pressed the system prompts you for the OEM key If correctly entered the current status of OEM protection locked or released will be toggled If currently locked it will be released if currently released it will be locked If the wrong OEM key is entered or no key is entered at all the lock or release request will be refused and a PSW ERR message will be displayed If the correct key is known enter it correctly and attempt the lock or release request again Otherwise press the CLR key to abort the request Assume that the OEM key is 1234 and OEM level is locked and it is to be unlocked in Mode 3 protect mode and access Level 3 Initial display LEVEL3 OEM lt S Press the key LEVEL3 OEM lt S OEM KEY _ Press the key sequence LEVEL3 OEM zS i 2 3 i OEM KEY 1234_ Press the key LEVEL3 lt S Note that OEM protection which had been locked is now released IF it is desired to lock OEM protection again the exact same sequence shown above would be followed Canceling an OEM Protection Operation The CLR key can be used to cancel the OEM protection lock release operation prior to activating it If an OEM key is currently specified pressing the CLR key will only erase the current user input Pressing the CLR key a second time cancels the operation If n
488. t string starting with 10012 specified by parameter P1 is shifted into the shift register G0021 to G0024 specified by parameter P2 The most significant bit G0024 is shifted out of the shift register to the reference Q0123 specified by parameter P4 Ladder Diagram Representation G0007 P4 G0123 P3 const 4 Statement List Representation 0001 LD G0007 0002 LD T0121 0003 FUNC 46 SHFRB P1 10012 P2 G0021 P3 4 P4 Q0123 0004 OUT Q0001 GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 209 9 210 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes Initial display Press the key sequence G eS EJ Press the key Press the key sequence JO LD Press the ae key Press the key sequence LJL Press the key fand Press the key sequence Roj sr 1 2 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 HHP Display 0001 INS 0001 INS LD G 7_ 0002 INS 0002 INS lt S lt S lt S lt S LD T 121_ 0003 INS 0003 INS FUNC 46 SHFRB 0003 SHFRB P0O1 _ 0003 SHFRB P01 I12_ lt S lt S lt S lt S GFK 0402G Press the key sequence 0003 SHFRB lt S G 2 aN P02 G21_ S Press the J key 0003 SHFRB lt S P03 _ Pre
489. t the AI address is as previously selected RO 03 HI DEN V gt S HI DEN V SINGLE To display the channel ranges press the key The display will show Channel 1 or the currently selected channel and the first available range RO 03 HI DEN V gt S CHAN 1 O 10 You can toggle through the range for each channel by pressing the key Each range will be displayed as shown The range selected is the one currently displayed RO 03 HI DEN V gt S CHAN 1 10 10 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable ControllersUser s Manual February1996 GFK 0402G Alarm Limits Display To view the alarm limits for the channel currently displayed press the gt key again the first time caused the channel ranges to be available for editing The following screen is displayed RO 03 HI DEN V gt S CH 1 LO 0 The display is the entry field for the low alarm limit for the displayed channel in this case Channel 1 You can enter the desired low alarm limit value using the numeric keys and the key for specifying negative values Enter the low alarm limit using a value within the valid limits as listed in Table 3 7 After you have entered the low alarm limit value press the gt key again to advance to the high alarm limit display for this channel The following screen is displayed at this time RO 03 HI DEN V gt S CH 1 HI 32000 The display shows the entry field for the high alarm limit for th
490. tation 1 I0001 I i M0001 ESE R0001 P02 R0002 Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 OUT MO0001 0003 LD MO0001 0004 FUNC 81 INT P1 R0001 P2 R0002 0005 OUT Q0001 9 230 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display Initial display 0001 INS lt S Press the key sequence Ay Al i Press the key 0002 INS lt S 0001 INS o Press the key sequence OUT C OUTM 7 m Press the key 0003 INS lt S Press the key sequence Press the T key 0004 INS lt S GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 231 9 232 Press the key sequence FUNC 8 1 Press the ay key Press the key sequence Press the ai key Press the key sequence Press the A key Press the key sequence BQ AQ OUT OUTM E Press the S 0004 INS lt S FUNC 81_ INT 0006 INS lt S Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Section 7 Control Functions Control functions may be used to limit program execution and alter the way the CPU executes the application program Abb
491. ter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 9 Subroutine Zoom The subroutine statement list program can be viewed with the HHP in Program Mode To view the subroutine statement list instructions cursor to the Subroutine Call Function and zoom into the subroutine logic by pressing the keys To zoom out of the current subroutine program press the Z keys If subroutine calls are nested within each other these keys will let you access the calls one level at a time If at any time you want to return to the top level of the subroutine call in the main program enter the key sequence Z Error Display The following error conditions will be detected and result in messages displayed on the HHP screen There are a maximum of 64 subroutine declarations The message DATA ERR will be displayed on the HHP if an attempt is made to call a subroutine number exceeding 64 There is a total of 16K bytes of user program memory available for each subroutine logic block The message MEM OVR will be displayed if the remaining user program memory is exceeded Nested subroutine calls are allowed with 8 nesting levels This will be checked at run time and a fault will be logged if the nesting level of 8 is exceeded The fault to be logged will be in fault group APPLICATION FAULT and the error code is app_stack_overflow This fault is non fatal and the PLC will go to STOP Mode when the fault is logged If you have exceeded the subroutine nesting limit an
492. ter P1 It continues incrementing as long as the function receives power flow at its enable EN inputs even if the current value is greater then the preset value up to a decimal value of 32767 When power flow is removed from the enable input the current value stops incrementing and is reset to zero Power flow will pass through this function when the current value is equal to or greater then the preset value timer parameter P2 If power flow to the enable input is removed power flow through this function is also removed This Timer is retentive upon power failure When the CPU mode is changed to the Stop Mode and power flow is maintained at the Enable input the current value will stop incrementing and maintain its value when returning to the Run Mode The current value will continue to increment starting from this maintained value Timing is done is increments of tenth 1 of a second or hundredths 01 of a second the preset value programmed as parameter P2 is a value that represents a number of these timing increments For example assume that tenths of a second is programmed as the timer accuracy for parameter P1 and the number 50 is a constant value programmed as the preset parameter P2 Power flow through this function will take place after 50 tenths of a second increments were recorded into the current value which is 5 seconds after the enable input receives and maintains power flow If the timer accuracy was programmed as hundredths of
493. the step number Each location in this group of bits can have a 1 one to represent an ON condition power flow or a 0 zero to represent an off condition no power flow stored init The location or step indicated by the pointer is the only location or step in the group that has a one indicates an on condition stored in it All other locations or steps have a zero indicates an off condition stored in it Memory locations in this group of memory locations that have had their bit set to a one by other logic since this stage bit sequencer has been reset will not be affected and will also be set to a one If the group of bits making up the bit shift sequencer are stored in discrete memory locations such as Q M T and G contacts may be taken off of these points and used in the relay logic to control coils or functions When the logic controlling the enable input to this function changes from a condition of passing no power flow to a condition of passing power flow to this functions enable EN input and when the logic step where this function is stored in programmed memory is executed by the CPU one execution of this stage bit sequencer function will take place During the execution of a stage bit sequencer function the pointer will move from the step it is presently pointing to the next higher numbered step or next lower numbered step The direction that the pointer will move is determined by the condition of the logic controlling the DIR i
494. the CLR key is pressed the first time only a single press of the CLR key is required to cancel the operation Displaying and Modifying Passwords Passwords can be displayed and modified only if level 4 access has been gained by displaying level 4 on the screen and is being displayed on the screen If you attempt to view passwords without level 4 access your request will be refused and a PROTECT message will be displayed When the Level 4 access is displayed on the screen the right cursor key is used to display the password for level 4 Repeated presses of the right cursor key will display the password for levels 3 and 2 When reviewing levels 2 or 3 while in Level 4 mode of protection and it is desired to display a password belonging to a higher Level use the left cursor key When displaying a password the actual password will be shown if one exists Ifa password does exist it can be changed or deleted If the indicated level is not password protected the designation NULL will be shown instead In such a case a password can then be set if desired Whenever you attempt to assign a password to a particular level the password must be specified first Otherwise the assignment is refused and a DAT ERR message will be displayed You must specify the desired password before pressing the ENT key to activate The following screen format is used to view and modify passwords Table 8 6 Specify Change Password for Specified Level Level OEM PL
495. the CPU and a new comparison will take place During the execution of an equal comparison the signed value for EQ or double precision signed value for DPEQ in P1 input 1 is compared to see if it is equal to the signed for EQ or double precision signed for DPEQ value in P2 input 2 If the comparison is equal power flow will pass to a coil or another function The difference in the two functions is that the EQ function operates on INT signed integer values and the DPEQ function operates on DINT double precision signed values The INT EQ function is Function 52 and the DINT EQ function is Function 72 EQ Function Description The two values specified by parameters P1 and P2 must be the same data type 16 bit two s complement signed integers and must be within the range 32768 to 32767 This function will pass power flow when there is power flow to the enable input and the value specified by parameter P1 is equal to the value specified by parameter P2 If discrete memory types are used for parameters P1 and P2 the beginning address must be on a byte boundary DPEQFunction Description The two values specified by parameters P1 and P2 must be the same data type 32 bit two s complement signed integers and must be within the range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 When using the Hand Held Programmer to program a constant into parameters P1 or P2 the constant must be in the range of a single precision number 32768 to 32767
496. the PCM used to reinitialize the PCM or to initiate a hard or soft reset Retentive Coil A coil that will remain in its last state even though power has been removed RUN Mode A condition or state of the PLC where the CPU executes the application program RUN mode executes in the RUN OUTPUTS ENABLED mode only In RUN OUTPUTS ENABLED all portions of the program sweep are executed Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G Rung A unit of ladder logic One rung may have up to eight parallel lines of logic connected to the left rail but these must be combined so that there is just one connection to the right rail Serial Communication A method of data transfer whereby the bits are handled sequentially rather then simultaneously as in parallel data transmission Serial Port The port on the power supply module accessible through a 15 pin connector to which the programmer must be connected in order to communicate with the PLC Both the Logicmaster 90 programmer and the Hand Held Programmer connect to this port Significant Bit A bit that contributes to the precision of a number The number of significant bits is counted beginning with the bit contributing the most value referred to as the Most Significant Bit MSB and ending with the bit contributing the least value referred to as the Least Significant Bit LSB STOP Mode A condition or
497. the PLC must be in stop and data mode 1 Press the key which corresponds to the type of data table you wish to clear To Clear This Table Press the Following Key s ml l data table press Fa Q data table r a o ata press Ta M data table press G data table press T data table press a a AI data table press z AI data table press Ai i BQ B AQ data table press a ar R data table press R GFK 0402G Chapter7 Reference Tables 7 9 7 10 2 Press the following key sequence Coyle tJ 3 Press the key Note When clearing one of the data tables I Q M or G the overrides associated with the table being cleared are automatically removed 7 The following example illustrates how to clear a register R table when in the Data Mode and initialize its contents to all zeros The initial display appears as gt R0001 lt S 0001100001100010 Press the key gt R_ lt S Press the key sequence gt R 999_ lt S HCI Id Press the key gt R0001 lt S 0000000000000000 The CLR key can be used to cancel the clear request anytime before the DEL key is pressed Hand Held Programmer for Series90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Clearing all Overrides An input lI or output Q status table a discr
498. the counter range the output always switches at the Preset points If only one of the Preset points is programmed within the counter range then the counter limits will function as the other Preset point In the continuous mode the output will switch when wraparound occurs If neither of the Preset points is in the counter range then the output state will not change it will always be the state of the most positive Preset If both Preset points are equal and out of range the output will always be OFF If both Preset points are equal and within the counter range then the output will only be on for one count value as defined by the Preset points Preload Value For each counter a starting count value can be specified which will be used when the Preload input is activated If the counter should be reset to 0 enter 0 as the Preload value The default value is 0 GFK 0402G Configuration Screens Common to both Counter Types ALL A and B1 3 A4 Note Screen numbers correspond to parameter numbers listed in Tables 4 2 through 4 4 Screen 1 Counter Type RO 04 HSC lt S CNTR TYPE ALL A This screen allows you to select the counter type Press the key to select the type of counter you desire then press the ENT key The CLR key before enter is pressed will cancel the operation Screen 2 Output Default Module Failure Mode RO 04 HSC lt S FAIL MODE NORMAL This screen selects the state that the outputs assume
499. the left of PCM301 is gone indicating that the configuration is no longer frozen and that the module is using the new values Press the E To continue the example suppose that you start changing parameters then realize that you have made a mistake The changes made so far that is since the configuration was frozen can be discarded reverting to the previous configuration Chapter 5 I O Configuration 5 25 Change the baud rate parameter for port 2 to 4800 Press the key sequence RO 02 PCM301 lt S DATA RT 2 4800 Notice that the configuration is frozen and that the actual baud rate being used by the PCM is 9600 the previously configured baud rate To discard the changes Press the key DISCARD CHGS lt S lt ENT gt Y lt CLR gt N If you press CLR again at this time the discard operation would be aborted Press the S key RO 02 PCM301 lt S DATA RT 2 9600 The module s configuration is no longer frozen The parameters have the same value they had before we changed the baud rate to 4800 Since the specific application will vary from module to module the PCM User s Manual GFK 0255 should be consulted for information on editing specific parameters Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Section 6 Analog I O Modules This section describes configuration of Series 90 30 Analog I O modules with the Hand Held
500. the new release 2 and later MCR instructions Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 The following table specifies valid memory types for the P1 parameter of the nested JUMP function Allowable Memory Types for nested JUMP Function 3 SSE EE a a a el Da a ee GFK 0402G Programming Example for JUMP Function The following example logic is a nested JUMP function having a single input to enable the function The logic when enabled will cause a jump to LABEL number 12 Ladder Diagram Representation gt gt LA012 Statement List Representation 0001 LD NOT 10001 0002 FUNC 03 JMP P1 12 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display 0001 INS lt S Initial display Press the key sequence 0001 INS lt S z A LD NOT I 1_ Le Faof SE LJ Press the key 0002 INS lt S Press the key sequence 0002 INS lt S FUNC 03_ JMP Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 243 9 244 Press the S key 0002 JMP lt S P01 0002 JMP lt S P01 12_ Press the key sequence 1 Le Press the S key 0003 JMP lt S Programming Example for LABEL Function The following example shows how a LABEL function is provided for the previous JUMP function Ladder Diagram Representation l LA012 l Statement List Representation 0021 FUNC 07 LABEL P1 12
501. the screen RO 01 PLC lt S KEY CLK OFF If a rack number greater then the maximum supported by the system is indicated the highest numbered rack will be displayed by default If a slot number greater then the maximum supported by the rack is entered as part of the GOTO operation the greatest numbered slot within the rack will be displayed by default For example if the rack only contains five slots and you attempt to go to slot 9 slot 5 will be displayed on the screen of the Hand Held Programmer In either case no error message will be displayed Key Click Parameter When viewing the PLC configuration the first parameter field encountered is the key click KEY CLK parameter By default no audible click is heard when a key is pressed You can choose an audible feedback from the keys by enabling this parameter Use the key to toggle the selection between enabled ON and disabled OFF Clock Parameter GFK 0402G The models 331 340 341 and 351 CPUs support a time of day clock The month day year hour minutes and seconds can be set by the user Use the Right cursor key to scroll through the PLC parameters until the clock parameter is displayed Then continue to press the Right cursor key to select each of the clock parameters in turn To change a parameter enter the new value and press the ENT key Chapter 3 Series 90 30 20 PLC Configuration 3 5 Program Source Parameter At power up you can specify that
502. time firmware revision code and current logic memory usage e Loading storing and verifying program logic and configuration from to with the Series 90 Memory Card or EEPROM Starting or stopping the PLC from any mode of operation Keypad The keypad on the Hand Held Programmer consists of 42 keys arranged as a matrix of six keys across by seven keys down The keypad is color coded for easier identification of the different keys Becoming familiar with the programmer keys and their functions will increase your programming efficiency Some of the keys have multiple uses depending on the current operating mode and function A description of the valid keys and their usage is included in chapter 2 Operation and also in the beginning of each chapter of this manual GFK 0402G 1 1 LCD Screen Information is displayed on an LCD screen which is two lines by sixteen characters in size The contents of the screen depends on the current operating mode and function The intensity of the screen can be increased or decreased by inserting a Phillips head screwdriver into the small square opening on the right side of the programmer and turning it to the right or left accordingly PLC Communications The Hand Held Programmer communicates with an attached PLC through an RS 422 compatible port The cable connection supplies power to the Hand Held Programmer and indicates to the PLC that a Hand Held Programmer is attached Please refer to chapte
503. ting 16 bit words and parameter P3 is a constant If discrete memory types are used for parameters P1 P2 and P4 the beginning address must be on an 8 point boundary Power flow through this function occurs only when the functions enable input is receiving power flow and no faults occur If a fault occurs power flow output will be off To prevent multiple rotations from taking place it is advisable to have the power flow to the enable input be controlled by a contact of a one shot element OUT or OUT Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 155 9 156 Logic controlling enable input Location of first word or group of words to be rotated Constant specifying number of bits to be rotated each execution P01 P02 WORD IN Q LEN P04 P03 enable SMO Oer flow to a coil or another function Memory location containing results of bits that have been rotated Number of 16 bit words to be rotated Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element Type of function Function 33 ROR Parameter P1 IN the memory address location for the first word of the group of words containing the bits to be rotated Parameter P2 N the number of bits to be rotated each time a shift takes place This can be a constant or a memory location where the value is stored Parameter P3
504. ting address of the array to be searched Input NX P02 Input NX contains the index into the array IN P03 IN contains the object of the search LEN P04 LEN specifies the number of elements starting at AR that make up the array to be searched Output NX P05 Output NX holds the position within the array of the search target FD FD indicates that an element whose value is equal to IN has been found and the function was successful Allowable Memory Types for Search Equal To Functions Parmeter How WI ea oM MT NS G WR WAT WA const none Se a a Te PPP eae rT TT _ ENS eea a eee ele a Fea ea a a E es SIE IC a Sats PS ea E SS a ee se SE 8 Te alee WE Ss ae sie ad Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function Valid reference for INT BYTE or WORD data only not valid for DINT Valid reference for BYTE or WORD data only not valid for INT or DINT SA SB SC only S cannot be used 5 O o GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 271 9 Search Not Equal To Byte SRNEB Function 105 Search Not Equal To Word SRNEW Function 106 Search Not Equal To INT SRNEI Function 107 Search Not Equal To DINT SRNEDI Function 108 The Search Not Equal To functions are conditionally executed functions which are used to search for all array values not equal to a specified value Each function has four input parameters and two output parameters When the function rece
505. tion Explains what you will need to know to install and start up the programmer It also explains the use of the keyboard operating modes and Read Wite rify functions Chapter 3 PLC Configuration Many PLC parameters are user configurable This chapter describes each parameter its default value and how it is configured Chapter 4 Series 90 Micro PLC Configuration This chapter describes each parameter for the Micro PLC and describes how it is configured Chapter 5 I O Configuration Contains information on the configuration of intelligent and non intelligent I O modules Chapter 6 Program Edit Describes how to use program mode to create alter monitor and debug Statement List logic programs entered by the user Chapter 7 Reference Tables This chapter describes the Reference Tables function data mode which enables you to view and change the contents of data tables within the programmable controller Chapter 8 PLC Control and Status This chapter describes how to use protection mode to control access to various functions of the programmable controller An additional feature OEM protection is also supported OEM protection supercedes user specified protection Information on starting and stopping the PLC is also included in this chapter Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language This chapter describes the basic elements functions and function blocks contained in the Statement List SL programming language Chapt
506. to comparison functions The less than or equal to test LE is a conditionally executed function which tests for one signed word value less than or equal to another The double precision less than or equal to test DPLE is a conditionally executed function which tests for one signed double word value less than or equal to another When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable input the function is executed by the CPU and a new signed comparison for LE or double precision signed comparison for DPLE will take place During the execution the signed value in P1 input 1 is compared to see if it is less than or equal to the signed value in P2 input 2 The LE and DPLE functions operate on INT signed integer and DINT double precision signed integer data respectively The INT LE function is Function 54 and the DINT LE function is Function 74 LE Function Description The two values specified by parameters P1 and P2 must be the same data type 16 bit two s complement signed integers and must be within the range 32768 to 32767 This function will pass power flow when there is power flow to the enable input and the value specified by parameter P1 is less than or equal to the value specified by parameter P2 If discrete memory types are used for parameters P1 and P2 the beginning address must be on a byte boundary DPLE Function Description The two values specified by parameters P1 and P2 mus
507. tput or internal output OFF if it re ceives power flow The out put remains OFF until set by aretentive set coil The state of this coil is retained across power failure or when the PLC transitions from stop mode to run mode Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Table 9 1 Statement List Language Basic Elements Continued Graphic Symbol Description Key Sequence Operation OUT h OFF ON OUT If the output associated with transitionalcoil a positive transition coil is one shot on OFE when the coil receives power flow power flow it will be set to ON for one sweep This coil can be used as a one shot OUT ON OFF OUT If the output associated with transitionalcoil Sum S this coil is OF when the coil one shot on no stops receiving power flow power flow the reference will be set to ON for one sweep OUT Return to previous OUT Return the logic to a point BLK LD BLK marker Sul BLK within the rung marked by SS the LD BLK instruction Entering a Program When entering a program each of the basic symbols contacts coils and function blocks are entered into program memory locations called steps Each step has a number starting with one at the beginning of the program and incrementing in sequential order until the last eleme
508. tring Bits in the bit string are numbered beginning with 1 starting with the least significant bit to the most significant bit The LEN parameter specifies the length of the bit string in words The state of the power flow output is determined by the ability of the function block to operate properly based upon the value of the parameters at the time of execution Since the BIT parameter can be specified from a word in a reference table it is possible that a bit number greater than the length of the bit string could be encountered by the function block In this case the function block cannot execute the power flow output is 0 and the contents of the bit string are not affected If the function block can execute properly the power flow output is a 1 and the bit specified by parameters P1 IN and P2 BIT is set to 1 Logic for enable enable SMT Power flow output to a coil input or another function Beginning of bit string P01 Number of bit in bit P02 string to be set P03 Length of bit string in words Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element 2 Type of function Function 22 BITSET 3 Parameter P1 IN the memory address location for the first word in the bit string containing the bit to be set 4 Parameter P2 BIT the number of the bit in the bit string to be set This can be a consta
509. trollers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G 9 Programming Example for BITPOS Function In this example the bit string G0017 G0080 is searched starting at G0017 for a bit that is set to 1 Assume that the value of word G0017 0 word G0033 4H word G0049 80H and word G0065 0A40H at the time the function block is executed The word Q0233 will be set to 19 decimal The function block output OK will be a 1 Ladder Diagram Representation BIT_POS l l l l G0017 P1 IN l l const P2 BIT 4 POS P03 0Q0233 Statement List Representation 0001 LD MO0015 0002 FUNC 28 BITPOS P1 G0017 P2 4 P3 Q0233 0003 OUT Q0001 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display 0001 INS lt S Initial display Press the key sequence LD u ming LD M 15_ T Press the ay key 0002 INS lt S 0001 INS lt S GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 173 9 174 Press the key sequence LJL Press the T key fand Press the key sequence G LILI ENT Press the 9g key Press the key sequence Press the pl key Press the key sequence B z L AQ LJE Press the F key 0002 INS lt S FUNC 28 BITPOS 0002 BITPOS lt S P0O1 _ 0002 BITPOS lt S P01 G17_ 0002 BITPOS lt S P02 _ 0002 BITPOS lt S P02 4
510. ts P02 or outputs to be serviced Alternate CPU location P03 for storage or source data for inputs or outputs Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This logic must start with an LD element 2 Function type Function 85 3 Parameter P1 ST starting address of real world inputs I or AI or outputs Q or AQ to be serviced 4 Parameter P2 END ending address of real world inputs I or AI or outputs Q or AQ to be serviced 5 Parameter P3 ALT alternate CPU memory location for storage or source data for inputs or outputs Allowable Memory Types for DOI O Function 85 Fe ae a a ee ee ae ee ee ee ie ee eee T Sa ES a e a e 9 236 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G 9 Programming Example for DOI O Function In this example a contact from a one shot OUT is used as the controlling element for the power flow to the enable input of the Do I O function When input I0001 closes passes power flow M0067 will pass power flow to the enable input of the Do I O function for only one sweep of the CPU scan Therefore the Do I O will only occur once each time input 1 is closed When the enabling input M0067 is true references 10001 through 10064 are scanned and Q0001 is turned on A copy of the scanned inputs is place
511. ts of the addition are within the range 32768 to 32767 no overflow If discrete memory types are used for parameters P1 P2 and P3 the beginning address must be on a byte boundary DPADD Function Description The three values specified by parameters P1 P2 and P3 must be the same data type 32 bit two s complement signed integers and must be within the range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 When using the HHP to program a constant into parameters P1 or P2 the constant must be in the range of a single precision number 32768 to 32767 The memory locations for P1 P2 and P3 are each 32 Bits long The storage area for each Register Al and AQ is 16 Bits long therefore two consecutive registers AI words or AQ words must be used for each double precision signed number which is to be stored The address of the lower of the two registers AI words or AQ words is used as the reference to store and retrieve the double precision number The HHP can only display a maximum of 16 bits one register AI or AQ word at a time therefore a double precision number outside of the range 32768 to 32767 cannot be monitored using the HHP The hexadecimal or binary number for each register AI or AQ word can be programmed or monitored provided that they are placed together outside of the CPU to form the 32 Bit double precision signed number If the double precision addition results in overflow a value outside of the range 2 147 483 648 to
512. ual to 1 is found or the length of the string is searched If a bit equal to 1 is found the bit number within the bit string is written to the POS parameter Bits are numbered in the bit string beginning with 1 and starting with the least significant bit to the most significant bit If a bit equal to 1 is not found in the bit string a 0 is written to the POS parameter In either case the function block power flow output is a 1 whenever the function block is executed Logic for enable cnan EMER oo flow output to a coil input or another function Beginning of bit string P01 IN Length of bit string P02 LEN in words P03 Result of bit position Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element Type of function Function 28 BITPOS Parameter P1 IN the memory address location for the first word in the bit string containing the bit to be set Parameter P2 LEN specifies the length of the bit string in words to be searched Parameter P3 POS contains the result of the bit position search This is a memory location where the result is stored The following table specifies which memory types are valid for each of the BITPOS function parameters Allowable Memory Types for BITPOS Function 28 a e a nero PE A E DR E TEE eee E 9 172 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Con
513. uary 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G Press the J key Press the key sequence JE 1 Func Press the ENT key ez Press the key sequence Hz Al B Press the ENT key ez Press the key Press the ENT key g te Press the 1 key Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 0002 INS lt S 0002 INS lt S FUNC 131_MOVABY 0002 MOVABY lt S P0O1 _ 0002 MOVABY lt S P01 I 1_ 0002 MOVABY lt S P02 _ 0002 MOVABY lt S P02 3 0002 MOVABY lt S P03 _ 0002 MOVABY lt S P03 1_ 9 297 Press the ENT key ez Press the key Press the ENT key ez Press the 5 key Press the ENTI key J y Press the key sequence B Q a f Press the F key Press the key sequence OUT OUTM Ba AQ aj Press the S key 0002 MOVABY lt S P04 _ 0002 MOVABY lt S P04 2_ 0002 MOVABY lt S POS _ 0002 MOVABY lt S P05 5 0002 MOVABY lt S P06 _ 0003 INS lt S OUT Q 1_ 0004 INS lt S 9 298 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 9 Example 3 Word Array Move In this example when input 10001 is closed passes power flow to the enable input the function is executed Word memory is used for the SR and DS inputs R0003 through R0007 of the array
514. ule s configuration is still frozen and the edited changes are not yet being used by the module To display the baud rate parameter for port 1 Press the key sequence i RO 02 PCM301 lt S oe DATA RT 1 19200 Notice that the asterisk remains to the left of the module s name This indicates that the module s configuration is still frozen It is possible to edit this and other parameters at this time however none of the changes will be used by the module until they are saved as indicated below Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable ControllersUser s Manual February1996 GFK 0402G GFK 0402G To change the port 1 baud rate to 9600 Press the key RO 02 PCM301 lt S sai lai DATA RT 1 9600 To display the baud rate parameter for port 2 key six times RO 02 PCM301 lt S DATA RT 2 19200 To change the port 2 baud rate to 9600 Press the key ee ts e m lt S To save the edited changes that we have made Press the WRITE key SAVE CHANGES lt S lt ENT gt Y lt CLR gt N If the CLR key is pressed at this time the SAVE operation will be aborted Since we do want to save the changes Press the y key PROCESSING lt S CHANGES The word PROCESSING will continue to blink until the module has completed processing of the new values The HHP will then redisplay the last parameter that had been displayed R0 02 PCM301 lt S DATA RT 2 9600 Notice that the asterisk to
515. ult placed in CV is adjusted by the states of inputs I3 and I4 Ladder Diagram Representation R0001 P01 R0002 P02 PID_ISA OK CV P04 RO003 P03 ROQ100 Statement List Representation 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 LD LD LD LD FUNC OUT 86 P1 P2 P3 P4 10001 10002 10003 10004 PIDISA or FUNC 87 PIDIND R0001 R0002 R0100 R0003 Q0001 After pressing key Programming sequence Key Strokes Initial display HHP Display 0001 INS lt S 9 262 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Press the key sequence 0001 INS o Co 1 h LD I 1_ 7 Press the ay key 0002 Press the key sequence 0002 INS Le GI LS Press the key 0003 Press the key sequence 0003 INS fe El lle Press the key 0004 Press the key sequence 0004 INS e a fa LD I 4_ Al Press the S key 0005 GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 263 Press the key sequence CJL Press the key 0005 PIDISA lt S P01 _ Press the key sequence r 0002 PIDISA lt S P01 R1_ Press the ai key 0005 PIDISA lt S PO2 _ 0005 PIDISA lt S P02 R2_ Press the A key 0005 PIDISA lt S Press the key sequence 0005 PIDISA lt
516. unction en countered ENDMCR Master control sequence end Anunconditionally executed function which 246 terminates a control range END MCR de fines the end of a control range for a prior MCR with matching label number LABEL Target number for jump function Provides a destination for a nested JUMP 250 function with a matching label number Table Functions SREQB Search equal to Byte Search for all array values equal to a specified 270 byte value SREQW Search equal to Word Search for all array values equal to a specified 270 word value SREQI Search equal to INT Search for all array values equal to a specified 270 integer value SREQDI Search equal to DINT Search for all array values equal to a specified 270 double precision integer value SRNEB 105 Search not equal to Byte Search for all array values not equal to a spe 272 cified byte value SRNEW 106 Search not equal to Word Search for all array values not equal to a spe 272 cified word value SRNEI 107 Search not equal to INT Search for all array values not equal to a spe 272 cified integer value SRNEDI 108 Search not equal to DINT Search for all array values not equal to a spe 272 cified double precision integer value INT Integer DINT Double precision integer Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 33 GFK 0402G 9 Table 9 4 Statement List Language Standard Functions and Function Blocks Continued Abbreviation F
517. unction will take place When the reset R input is a 1 all bits in the shift register are set to 0 The bits specified by IN and Q are not changed during the reset The power flow output is a 1 whenever the function executes The Shift Register Bit function implements a shift register on the bit level The IN parameter specifies the bit to be shifted into the shift register The ST parameter specifies the starting address of the shift register The LEN parameter specifies the length of the shift register in bits The Q parameter specifies the destination of the bit that is shifted out of the shift register Any discrete or word reference can be specified for IN ST and Q within the parameter restrictions stated below Since ST is not restricted to a word or byte boundary and LEN is in bits it is possible to define a shift register that does not occupy an entire byte or word The unused bits in the byte or word are not affected by the execution of the function If a word reference is specified for IN or Q it is assumed that the least significant bit of the word specified by IN or Q is the bit to be used If a word reference is specified for ST it is assumed that the beginning of the shift register is the least significant bit of the word specified by ST Power flow through this function Logic controlling enable HERH ont rolling another function or power flow to the a coil enable input Logic controlling P04 Address of storage location
518. unctionNo SRLTB SRLTW SRLII SRLTDI SRLEB SRLEW SRLEI SRLEDI SRGTB SRGTW SRGTI SRGTDI SRGEB SRGEW SRGEI SRGEDI MOVABI 130 MOVABY 131 MOVAW 132 MOVAI 133 MOVADI 134 FunctionName Description Table Functions Continued Search less than Byte Search less than Word Search less than INT Search less than DINT Search less than or equal to Byte Search less than or equal to Word Search less than or equal to INT Search less than or equal to DINT Search greater than Byte Search greater than Word Search greater than INT Search greater than DINT Search greater than or equal to Byte Search greater than or equal to Word Search greater than or equal to INT Search greater than or equal to DINT Copy array source to destination bit Copy array source to destination byte Copy array source to destination word Copy array source to destination INT Copy array source to destination DINT Search for all array values less than a specified byte value Search for all array values less than a specified word value Search for all array values less than a specified in teger value Search for all array values less than a specified double precision integer value Search for all array values less than or equal toa specified byte value Search for all array values less than or equal toa specified word value Search for all a
519. urationportability Programmable eo module 5 configuration 5 22 editing parameters freezing configuration Programming Examples addition 9 64 AND logical AND array move bit array move byte array move word Index 7 Index Index 8 array search byte 9 282 array search integer 9 285 BCD to integer conversion 9 230 bit position 9 173 compare value to be within a range of values 9 116 data move 9 183 down counter DNCTR end master control relay 9 248 equal to comparison greater than comparison greater than or equal comparison 9 105 integer to BCD conversion 9 226 label 9 244 less than comparison 9 109 less than or equal to comparison 9 112 master control relay 9 247 modulo division move bits MOVBN 9 189 multiple word move MOVIN multiplication OR logical OR 9 127 Pid 20 pid isa function 86 9 254 rotate left rotate right 9 157 service request Shift left 9 139 shift register bit SHFRB 9 209 shift register word SHFR 9 203 shift right square root stage bit sequencer SEQB subroutine call subtraction 9 69 table functions timer off delay OFDTR 9 50 timer on delay ONDTR 9 4 timer stopwatch TMR 9 40 up counter UPCTR XOR logical exclusive OR 9 131 PROM option jumper PROM option user Protection Mode 8 21 changing levels 8 5 a passwords 8 7 enter
520. us This must start with an LD element 2 Type of function either Function 68 MOD or Function 69 DPMOD 3 Parameter P1 input 1 value to be divided dividend This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored 4 Parameter P2 input 2 the divisor This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored 5 Parameter P3 Q memory location where the result remainder is to be stored The following tables specify which memory types are valid for each of the parameters for the MOD and DPMOD functions Allowable Memory Types for MOD Function 68 mo ee ee ee Pe am DR A a e E ea EE ale ee ee E Allowable Memory Types for DPMOD Function 69 ee oe ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee PO eam a CE ae a a E E Note that double precision constants are constrained to the range 32 768 to 32 767 GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 83 Programming Example for Modulo Division This example of programming uses the DPMOD function In this example a contact from a one shot OUT is used as the controlling element for the power flow to the enable input of the divide function When input 10001 closes passes power flow M0001 will pass power flow to the enable input of the DPMOD function for only one sweep of the CPU scan Therefore the division will only occur once each time input 1 is closed When the division takes place a value located in regist
521. ut the OR function examines each bit in P1 Inputl and the corresponding bit in P2 Input2 Beginning at the first lowest addressed bit in each For each two bits examined if either or both bits are 1 then a 1 is placed in the corresponding location in bit string Q The three parameters input P01 1 input P02 2 and P03 Q are all 16 bit words If discrete memory types are used for parameters P1 P2 and P3 the beginning address must be on a byte boundary Power flow through this function will follow the conditions of this functions enable input Logic controlling enable EESE flow output to a the enable input coil or another function Location of value to P01 P03 Location of Results be ORed or a constant Location of value to P02 be ORed or a constant Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element 2 Type of function Function 25 OR 3 Parameter P1 input 1 one of the values to be ORed This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored 4 Parameter P2 input 2 the other value to be ORed This can be a constant number or a memory location where the value is stored 5 Parameter P3 Q The memory location where the result is to be stored 9 126 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G GFK 04
522. valid values for the input NX are 0 to LEN 1 This value increments by one at the time of execution Therefore the values of the output NX are 1 to LEN If the value of the input NX is out of range lt 0 or w LEN its value is set to the default value of zero The function parameters for the Search Greater Than functions are shown in the following illustration The form of the function is the same for all Search Greater Than functions the only difference being the data type Logic for controlling enable BAES M power flow Starting address of array P1 Set to 1 if element found 0 if not found P4 Length of array Index into array P2 P5 Set to position in array of element Object of search P3 9 278 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Description of Parameters for Search Greater Than Functions Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the operation is performed AR P01 AR contains the starting address of the array to be searched Input NX P02 Input NX contains the index into the array IN P03 IN contains the object of the search LEN P04 LEN specifies the number of elements starting at AR that make up the array to be searched Output NX P05 Output NX holds the position within the array of the search target FD FD indicates that an element whose value is greater than IN has been foun
523. ve Constant Sweep Mode parameter see Active Constant Sweep Mode Parameter The Configured Sweep Mode parameter can only be edited during STOP mode Use the Right cursor key to scroll through the PLC parameters until the Configured Constant Sweep mode CFG CNSW parameter is displayed Then use the key to toggle the selection between DISABLE and ENABLE By default the PLC will execute every sweep as fast as possible Configured Constant Sweep Setting Parameter GFK 0402G If the Configured Constant Sweep mode is enabled in the PLC the sweep time value must also be selected The Configured Constant Sweep Setting parameter can be overridden by the Active Constant Sweep Setting parameter during RUN mode but upon going from STOP to RUN mode the Configured Constant Sweep Setting parameter value is copied to the Active Constant Sweep Setting parameter This allows you to maintain a configured setting while fine tuning the setting during RUN mode with the active Constant Sweep Setting parameter If the Configured Constant Sweep mode is disabled this parameter is ignored The Configured Constant Sweep value can range between 5 and 200 milliseconds Chapter 3 Series 90 30 20 PLC Configuration 3 7 Use the Right cursor key to scroll through the PLC parameters until the Configured Constant Sweep Setting CFG CONS TM parameter is displayed To set the sweep time enter a value between 5 and 200 milliseconds and press the ENT key The default
524. wer Up Options Key Sequence Description Totallyclears all data stored within the PLC including program logic data CM tables configuration passwords and the OEM key Do not use this func CLR T tion if an OEM program is in RAM memory as all configuration data and logic will be lost F Prevents the PLC during power up from downloading a program from EE LD NOT PROM to RAM and puts the CPU in the STOP mode Use RAM memory regardless of the configuration F NOT RUN Ensures that the PLC powers up in the STOP mode GFK 0402G Chapter 2 Operation 2 7 Special Key Sequences Table 2 6 Special Key Sequences Key Sequence Description 7 9 9 Clearall program logic instruction steps from memory without affecting any other memory such as data or configuration only when in program mode will not work in program insert mode 9 DEL SRCH 7 1 Begin the program check function only when in program mode will not work when in program insert mode ENT lt J Selecting an Operating Mode In general most functions are available only in a single mode of operation To interact with a particular function the correct mode of operation must first be selected 1 Press the MODE key to select a new mode of operation After pressing MODE the following initial screen will be displayed _ 1 PROGRAM lt S 2 DA
525. will be changed to 8 the preset value Ladder Diagram Representation SIOQ001 marl Soe SI0002 ieee Ai DNCTR 00008 PV Location R0061 Statement List Representation 0001 LD 10001 0002 LD 10002 0003 FUNC 16 DNCTR Pi 8 P2 RO061 0004 OUT Q0001 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G After pressing Key Programming sequence Key Strokes HHP Display 0001 INS lt S Initial display Press the z sequence Press the key 0002 INS lt S INS o e Press the sequence Press the key 0003 INS lt S ol f Press the key sequence Je Press the key 0003 DNCTR lt S PO1_ 0003 INS lt S UPCTR FUNC 16 DNCTR DNCTR UPCTR FUNC DNCTR GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 59 9 60 Press the key sequence Press the ay key Press the key sequence LJ LILI Press the ai key Press the key sequence BE OUT OUTM BQ AQ Press the ae key 0003 DNCTR POl 8_ 0003 DNCTR P02 0003 DNCTR P02 R 61 0004 INS 0004 INS OUT 0005 INS Q 1_ lt S lt S lt S lt S lt S lt S Hand Held Programmer for Series
526. wing procedure R1 00 PWR SUP lt S RACK TYPE REMOT The REMOT field will be blinking when this screen is displayed indicating a new type of rack which can be but has not yet been configured To configure the rack as this type press R1 00 PWR SUP lt S RACK TYPE REMOT Notice that the REMOT field is no longer blinking indicating that the rack is now configured to be a remote rack If for some reason you want to abort the operation you can do so by pressing CLR instead of ENT To select another rack type press Note Configuring a rack type different from the actual rack type will produce a System configuration mismatch fault in the PLC Fault Table This fault is a fatal fault and will inhibit the PLC from going to the RUN mode Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February1996 GFK 0402G Automatic Rack Configuration When the DEFAULT I O CPU parameter is enabled the PLC will automatically configure the modules that are physically present in the system with some restrictions refer to Reconfiguration later in this chapter for details When this procedure is selected the type of the main rack is automatically configured For other racks if there are modules in the rack which will be configured then the rack type for that rack will also be automatically configured If there are no modules in that rack which are automatically configured then the power supply slot
527. with the default set of parameters for the module These defaults may be edited and then stored to the module the same as for any other module In the following example a Genius Communications module has been installed in slot 6 of the main rack 0 but the slot has not been configured 1 The initial display screen shows that slot 6 in the main rack has not yet been configured RO 06 EMPTY lt S 2 Pressthe READ VERIFY key and then the ENT key to read the configuration from the Genius Communications module residing in this slot The first parameter the BUS ADR parameter assigns a node address in the range 16 to 23 inclusive to the module Any data the module broadcasts will be identified by its bus address 3 For example to assign a bus address of 17 to the module press the key sequence 1 7 ENT RO 06 GCM BUS ADR 17 4 Press the Right cursor key to select the next parameter which is baud rate This parameter indicates the baud rate of the Genius bus Four baud rates are supported 153 6K standard 76 8K 38 4K and 153 6K extended where 153 6K standard is the default You may use the key to scroll through these selections When the correct baud rate is displayed press the ENT key to accept it then press the t right cursor key to select the next parameter 5 18 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable ControllersUser s Manual February1996 GFK 0402G 5 The next parameter is the
528. xecuted by the CPU and a new signed division for DIV or double precision signed division for DPDIV will take place During a signed division or double precision signed division execution the value in P1 input 1 is divided by the value in P2 input 2 The results of this signed division is the quotient only the remainder is lost and is stored in the memory location specified by P3 Q To obtain the remainder use the Modulo Division Function 68 for signed division or Double precision Module Division Function 69 for double precision division Functions 68 and 69 find only the remainder and the quotient is lost DIV Function Description The three values specified by parameters P1 P2 and P3 must be the same data type 16 bit two s complement signed integers and must be within the range 32768 to 32767 If an attempt to divide by zero is made the quotient will be set to either 32768 or 32767 depending on the sign of the number being divided and no power flow will pass through this function This function will pass power flow when there is power flow to the enable input and no attempt has been made to divide by zero If discrete memory types are used for parameters P1 P2 and P3 the beginning address must be on a byte boundary DPDIV Function Description The three values specified by parameters P1 P2 and P3 must be the same data type 32 bit two s complement signed integers and must be within the range 2 147 483 648 to 2
529. xt execution of the function block If you want to start the next comparison at some other location in the string you can enter different references for BIT and BN If the value of BIT is a location that is beyond the end of the string BIT is reset to a 0 before starting the next comparison IF all Bits in 11 and 12 are the Same If all corresponding bits in strings I1 and I2 match the function sets the miscompare output MC to 0 and BN to the highest bit number in the input strings The comparison then stops On the next execution of the Masked Compare it will be reset to 0 If a Miscompare is Found When the two bits currently being compared are not the same the function then checks the corresponding numbered bit in string M the mask If the mask bit is a 1 the comparison continues until another miscompare or the end of the input strings is reached If a miscompare is detected and the corresponding mask bit is a 0 the function 1 Sets the corresponding mask bit in M to a1 Sets the miscompare MC output to 1 Updates the output bit string Q to match the new content of mask string M Sets the bit number output BN to the number of the miscompared bit Foe os Stops the comparison 9 176 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual February 1996 GFK 0402G Logic for controlling enable RRaRWIENS em power flo COMP __ WORD Starting address of first Il MC Logic set b
530. y miscompare bit string to be compared LEN P5 Number of words in bit string Starting address of second T2 bit string to be compared I2 P6 Output copy of mask M Starting address of bit M bit string string mask P7 Reference containing bit number of last compare Address for bit location for start of next comparison Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 8 9 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element Type of function Function 143 MSKCMPW or Function 144 MSKCMPD Parameter P1 I1 the starting memory address of the first bit string to be compared Parameter P2 12 the starting memory address of the second bit string to be compared Parameter P3 M the starting memory address of the bit string mask Parameter P4 BIT specifies the location of the bit number where the next comparison should start Parameter P5 LEN the number of words 16 bit words for MSKCMPW 32 bit words for MSKCMPD in the bit string Parameter P6 Q output copy of the bit string mask M Parameter P7 BN memory location where the last compare occurred The following table specifies which memory types are valid for the Masked Compare function parameters GFK 0402G Chapter 9 Statement List Programming Language 9 177 Allowable Memory Types for Masked Compare Functions ree _ mew e E a Cn GC a a Ge A om
531. yed on the screen of the Hand Held Programmer The group of words are copied to a location in memory that is specified by parameter P3 Q which is the memory address location for the first word of the group of consecutive words that have been copied or is loaded with the same constant value as specified by P1 when P1 is a constant Parameters P1 and P3 are word memory locations representing 16 bit words If discrete memory types are used for parameters P1 and P3 the beginning address must be on an 8 point boundary Power flow through this function occurs only when the functions enable input is receiving power flow Logic controlling enable ES Power flow to a coil power flow to enable or another function input Location of word or Location of copied values words to be moved Constant specifying number of words to be copied Programming Elements and Sequential Order of Programming 1 Logic controlling the enable input from the left bus This must start with an LD element 2 Type of function Function 37 MOVIN or Function 42 MOVWN 3 Parameter P1 IN the data to be moved This can be a constant value or the memory address location for the first word of the group of words containing the bits to be copied 4 Parameter P2 LEN a constant specifying the number of 16 bit words to be copied each time a move takes place LEN cannot be greater than 256 5 Parameter P3 Q the memory address location where the first wo
532. z_ and Right cursor keys The Up and Down cursor keys are used to view the next and previous steps respectively of the program from the current instruction step Function parameters cannot be viewed with these keys The Left and Right cursor keys are used to view the next and previous parameters respectively of a function They are only valid if the current instruction step is a function New instruction steps may not be viewed with these keys Chapter 6 Program Edit 6 3 The following example illustrates the use of the cursor keys A simple ladder logic program is first shown in ladder diagram form followed by the same program shown in Statement List SL form Examples of using the cursor keys to view elements of this program follow Ladder Diagram Representation SI0001 TMR O 1s SI0002 I CONST PV 00025 R0001 Representation of the Ladder Diagram in Statement List Programming Language 0001 LD 10001 0002 OR NOT 10002 0003 FUNC 10 TMR P1 10 P2 25 P3 R0001 0004 OUT Q0001 The initial screen on the Hand Held Programmer displays step 1 0001 lt S LD I0001 O Pressing the Down cursor key displays step 2 0002 lt S OR NOT I0002 O Press the Down cursor key 0003 lt s FUNC 10 TMR Pressing the Down cursor key again will display the next step of the user program in this case step 0004 Pressing the Up cursor key w

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

Actuador Rotativo de Cremalheira e Pinhão El-O  Instructions d`installation - Garantie Installation Instructions    TTS DS2 User Guide 2014.pmd - Telephone Technical Services  Instruction manual  Delta 52660-RB-PK Installation Guide  Descargas - Sistema de Soporte  Mode d`emploi du catalogue  HANDLEIDING VOOR DE ANGEL  NHT 2.9 Speaker User Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file